diff --git a/doc/classes/@GlobalScope.xml b/doc/classes/@GlobalScope.xml index c0e8b769697..33d877af292 100644 --- a/doc/classes/@GlobalScope.xml +++ b/doc/classes/@GlobalScope.xml @@ -11,18 +11,14 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the absolute value of float parameter [code]x[/code] (i.e. positive value). [codeblock] @@ -32,10 +28,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the absolute value of int parameter [code]x[/code] (i.e. positive value). [codeblock] @@ -45,10 +39,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the arc cosine of [code]x[/code] in radians. Use to get the angle of cosine [code]x[/code]. [code]x[/code] must be between [code]-1.0[/code] and [code]1.0[/code] (inclusive), otherwise, [method acos] will return [constant @GDScript.NAN]. [codeblock] @@ -58,10 +50,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the arc sine of [code]x[/code] in radians. Use to get the angle of sine [code]x[/code]. [code]x[/code] must be between [code]-1.0[/code] and [code]1.0[/code] (inclusive), otherwise, [method asin] will return [constant @GDScript.NAN]. [codeblock] @@ -71,10 +61,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the arc tangent of [code]x[/code] in radians. Use it to get the angle from an angle's tangent in trigonometry: [code]atan(tan(angle)) == angle[/code]. The method cannot know in which quadrant the angle should fall. See [method atan2] if you have both [code]y[/code] and [code]x[/code]. @@ -84,12 +72,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the arc tangent of [code]y/x[/code] in radians. Use to get the angle of tangent [code]y/x[/code]. To compute the value, the method takes into account the sign of both arguments in order to determine the quadrant. Important note: The Y coordinate comes first, by convention. @@ -99,41 +84,32 @@ - - - - + + Decodes a byte array back to a [Variant] value, without decoding objects. [b]Note:[/b] If you need object deserialization, see [method bytes2var_with_objects]. - - - - + + Decodes a byte array back to a [Variant] value. Decoding objects is allowed. [b]WARNING:[/b] Deserialized object can contain code which gets executed. Do not use this option if the serialized object comes from untrusted sources to avoid potential security threats (remote code execution). - - - - - - + + + Converts a 2D point expressed in the cartesian coordinate system (X and Y axis) to the polar coordinate system (a distance from the origin and an angle). - - - - + + Rounds [code]x[/code] upward (towards positive infinity), returning the smallest whole number that is not less than [code]x[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -144,26 +120,18 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Clamps the float [code]value[/code] and returns a value not less than [code]min[/code] and not more than [code]max[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -178,14 +146,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Clamps the integer [code]value[/code] and returns a value not less than [code]min[/code] and not more than [code]max[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -200,10 +164,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the cosine of angle [code]angle_rad[/code] in radians. [codeblock] @@ -214,10 +176,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the hyperbolic cosine of [code]x[/code] in radians. [codeblock] @@ -227,23 +187,17 @@ - - - - + + Converts from decibels to linear energy (audio). - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the result of [code]value[/code] decreased by [code]step[/code] * [code]amount[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -253,10 +207,8 @@ - - - - + + Converts an angle expressed in degrees to radians. [codeblock] @@ -266,21 +218,16 @@ - - - - - - + + + Easing function, based on exponent. The curve values are: 0 is constant, 1 is linear, 0 to 1 is ease-in, 1+ is ease out. Negative values are in-out/out in. - - - - + + The natural exponential function. It raises the mathematical constant [b]e[/b] to the power of [code]x[/code] and returns it. [b]e[/b] has an approximate value of 2.71828, and can be obtained with [code]exp(1)[/code]. @@ -291,10 +238,8 @@ - - - - + + Rounds [code]x[/code] downward (towards negative infinity), returning the largest whole number that is not more than [code]x[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -308,12 +253,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the floating-point remainder of [code]x/y[/code], keeping the sign of [code]x[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -324,12 +266,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the floating-point modulus of [code]x/y[/code] that wraps equally in positive and negative. [codeblock] @@ -350,10 +289,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the integer hash of the variable passed. [codeblock] @@ -362,10 +299,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the Object that corresponds to [code]instance_id[/code]. All Objects have a unique instance ID. [codeblock] @@ -378,14 +313,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a normalized value considering the given range. This is the opposite of [method lerp]. [codeblock] @@ -398,12 +329,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]a[/code] and [code]b[/code] are approximately equal to each other. Here, approximately equal means that [code]a[/code] and [code]b[/code] are within a small internal epsilon of each other, which scales with the magnitude of the numbers. @@ -411,59 +339,45 @@ - - - - + + Returns whether [code]x[/code] is an infinity value (either positive infinity or negative infinity). - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns whether [code]instance[/code] is a valid object (e.g. has not been deleted from memory). - - - - + + Returns whether [code]x[/code] is a NaN ("Not a Number" or invalid) value. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]x[/code] is zero or almost zero. This method is faster than using [method is_equal_approx] with one value as zero. - - - - - - - - + + + + Linearly interpolates between two values by a normalized value. This is the opposite of [method inverse_lerp]. [codeblock] @@ -472,14 +386,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Linearly interpolates between two angles (in radians) by a normalized value. Similar to [method lerp], but interpolates correctly when the angles wrap around [constant @GDScript.TAU]. @@ -495,10 +405,8 @@ - - - - + + Converts from linear energy to decibels (audio). This can be used to implement volume sliders that behave as expected (since volume isn't linear). Example: [codeblock] @@ -510,10 +418,8 @@ - - - - + + Natural logarithm. The amount of time needed to reach a certain level of continuous growth. [b]Note:[/b] This is not the same as the "log" function on most calculators, which uses a base 10 logarithm. @@ -524,8 +430,7 @@ - - + Returns the maximum of the given values. This method can take any number of arguments. [codeblock] @@ -534,12 +439,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the maximum of two float values. [codeblock] @@ -549,12 +451,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the maximum of two int values. [codeblock] @@ -564,8 +463,7 @@ - - + Returns the minimum of the given values. This method can take any number of arguments. [codeblock] @@ -574,12 +472,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the minimum of two float values. [codeblock] @@ -589,12 +484,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the minimum of two int values. [codeblock] @@ -604,14 +496,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Moves [code]from[/code] toward [code]to[/code] by the [code]delta[/code] value. Use a negative [code]delta[/code] value to move away. @@ -623,10 +511,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the nearest equal or larger power of 2 for integer [code]value[/code]. In other words, returns the smallest value [code]a[/code] where [code]a = pow(2, n)[/code] such that [code]value <= a[/code] for some non-negative integer [code]n[/code]. @@ -642,23 +528,17 @@ - - - - - - + + + Converts a 2D point expressed in the polar coordinate system (a distance from the origin [code]r[/code] and an angle [code]th[/code]) to the cartesian coordinate system (X and Y axis). - - - - - - + + + Returns the integer modulus of [code]x/y[/code] that wraps equally in positive and negative. [codeblock] @@ -678,12 +558,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of [code]base[/code] raised to the power of [code]exp[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -754,10 +631,8 @@ - - - - + + Converts an angle expressed in radians to degrees. [codeblock] @@ -766,17 +641,14 @@ - - - - + + Random from seed: pass a [code]seed[/code], and an array with both number and new seed is returned. "Seed" here refers to the internal state of the pseudo random number generator. The internal state of the current implementation is 64 bits. - - + Returns a random floating point value between [code]0.0[/code] and [code]1.0[/code] (inclusive). [codeblock] @@ -785,12 +657,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a random floating point value on the interval between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] (inclusive). [codeblock] @@ -799,8 +668,7 @@ - - + Returns a random unsigned 32-bit integer. Use remainder to obtain a random value in the interval [code][0, N - 1][/code] (where N is smaller than 2^32). [codeblock] @@ -812,12 +680,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a random signed 32-bit integer between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] (inclusive). If [code]to[/code] is lesser than [code]from[/code], they are swapped. [codeblock] @@ -833,18 +698,12 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Maps a [code]value[/code] from range [code][istart, istop][/code] to [code][ostart, ostop][/code]. [codeblock] @@ -853,18 +712,14 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + Rounds [code]x[/code] to the nearest whole number, with halfway cases rounded away from zero. [codeblock] @@ -874,8 +729,7 @@ - - + Sets seed for the random number generator. [codeblock] @@ -885,18 +739,14 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the sign of [code]x[/code] as a float: -1.0 or 1.0. Returns 0.0 if [code]x[/code] is 0. [codeblock] @@ -907,10 +757,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the sign of [code]x[/code] as an integer: -1 or 1. Returns 0 if [code]x[/code] is 0. [codeblock] @@ -921,10 +769,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the sine of angle [code]angle_rad[/code] in radians. [codeblock] @@ -933,10 +779,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the hyperbolic sine of [code]x[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -946,14 +790,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the result of smoothly interpolating the value of [code]x[/code] between [code]0[/code] and [code]1[/code], based on the where [code]x[/code] lies with respect to the edges [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code]. The return value is [code]0[/code] if [code]x <= from[/code], and [code]1[/code] if [code]x >= to[/code]. If [code]x[/code] lies between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code], the returned value follows an S-shaped curve that maps [code]x[/code] between [code]0[/code] and [code]1[/code]. @@ -967,12 +807,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Snaps float value [code]x[/code] to a given [code]step[/code]. This can also be used to round a floating point number to an arbitrary number of decimals. [codeblock] @@ -983,10 +820,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the square root of [code]x[/code], where [code]x[/code] is a non-negative number. [codeblock] @@ -996,10 +831,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the position of the first non-zero digit, after the decimal point. Note that the maximum return value is 10, which is a design decision in the implementation. [codeblock] @@ -1013,17 +846,14 @@ - - + Converts one or more arguments of any type to string in the best way possible. - - - - + + Converts a formatted string that was returned by [method var2str] to the original value. [codeblock] @@ -1034,10 +864,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the tangent of angle [code]angle_rad[/code] in radians. [codeblock] @@ -1046,10 +874,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the hyperbolic tangent of [code]x[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -1059,10 +885,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the internal type of the given Variant object, using the [enum Variant.Type] values. [codeblock] @@ -1077,29 +901,23 @@ - - - - + + Encodes a [Variant] value to a byte array, without encoding objects. Deserialization can be done with [method bytes2var]. [b]Note:[/b] If you need object serialization, see [method var2bytes_with_objects]. - - - - + + Encodes a [Variant] value to a byte array. Encoding objects is allowed (and can potentially include code). Deserialization can be done with [method bytes2var_with_objects]. - - - - + + Converts a Variant [code]variable[/code] to a formatted string that can later be parsed using [method str2var]. [codeblock] @@ -1116,24 +934,18 @@ - - - - + + Returns a weak reference to an object, or [code]null[/code] is the argument is invalid. A weak reference to an object is not enough to keep the object alive: when the only remaining references to a referent are weak references, garbage collection is free to destroy the referent and reuse its memory for something else. However, until the object is actually destroyed the weak reference may return the object even if there are no strong references to it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Wraps float [code]value[/code] between [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code]. Usable for creating loop-alike behavior or infinite surfaces. @@ -1154,14 +966,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Wraps integer [code]value[/code] between [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code]. Usable for creating loop-alike behavior or infinite surfaces. diff --git a/doc/classes/AABB.xml b/doc/classes/AABB.xml index 03607661dfe..4bc11e71663 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AABB.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AABB.xml @@ -15,243 +15,193 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [AABB] with default (zero) values of [member position] and [member size]. - - - - + + Constructs an [AABB] as a copy of the given [AABB]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs an [AABB] from a position and size. - - + Returns an AABB with equivalent position and size, modified so that the most-negative corner is the origin and the size is positive. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [AABB] completely encloses another one. - - - - + + Returns this [AABB] expanded to include a given point. - - + Returns the volume of the [AABB]. - - - - + + Gets the position of the 8 endpoints of the [AABB] in space. - - + Returns the normalized longest axis of the [AABB]. - - + Returns the index of the longest axis of the [AABB] (according to [Vector3]'s [code]AXIS_*[/code] constants). - - + Returns the scalar length of the longest axis of the [AABB]. - - + Returns the normalized shortest axis of the [AABB]. - - + Returns the index of the shortest axis of the [AABB] (according to [Vector3]::AXIS* enum). - - + Returns the scalar length of the shortest axis of the [AABB]. - - - - + + Returns the support point in a given direction. This is useful for collision detection algorithms. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the [AABB] grown a given amount of units towards all the sides. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] is flat or empty. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] is empty. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] contains a point. - - - - + + Returns the intersection between two [AABB]. An empty AABB (size 0,0,0) is returned on failure. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] overlaps with another. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] is on both sides of a plane. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AABB] intersects the line segment between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [AABB] and [code]aabb[/code] are approximately equal, by calling [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - - - + + Returns a larger [AABB] that contains both this [AABB] and [code]with[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AESContext.xml b/doc/classes/AESContext.xml index e179c976773..847d1226a26 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AESContext.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AESContext.xml @@ -80,38 +80,30 @@ - - + Close this AES context so it can be started again. See [method start]. - - + Get the current IV state for this context (IV gets updated when calling [method update]). You normally don't need this function. Note: This function only makes sense when the context is started with [constant MODE_CBC_ENCRYPT] or [constant MODE_CBC_DECRYPT]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Start the AES context in the given [code]mode[/code]. A [code]key[/code] of either 16 or 32 bytes must always be provided, while an [code]iv[/code] (initialization vector) of exactly 16 bytes, is only needed when [code]mode[/code] is either [constant MODE_CBC_ENCRYPT] or [constant MODE_CBC_DECRYPT]. - - - - + + Run the desired operation for this AES context. Will return a [PackedByteArray] containing the result of encrypting (or decrypting) the given [code]src[/code]. See [method start] for mode of operation. Note: The size of [code]src[/code] must be a multiple of 16. Apply some padding if needed. diff --git a/doc/classes/AStar.xml b/doc/classes/AStar.xml index 327785a3b62..63dd250dbc3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AStar.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AStar.xml @@ -39,38 +39,28 @@ - - - - - - + + + Called when computing the cost between two connected points. Note that this function is hidden in the default [code]AStar[/code] class. - - - - - - + + + Called when estimating the cost between a point and the path's ending point. Note that this function is hidden in the default [code]AStar[/code] class. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new point at the given position with the given identifier. The [code]id[/code] must be 0 or larger, and the [code]weight_scale[/code] must be 1 or larger. The [code]weight_scale[/code] is multiplied by the result of [method _compute_cost] when determining the overall cost of traveling across a segment from a neighboring point to this point. Thus, all else being equal, the algorithm prefers points with lower [code]weight_scale[/code]s to form a path. @@ -88,34 +78,25 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns whether the two given points are directly connected by a segment. If [code]bidirectional[/code] is [code]false[/code], returns whether movement from [code]id[/code] to [code]to_id[/code] is possible through this segment. - - + Clears all the points and segments. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates a segment between the given points. If [code]bidirectional[/code] is [code]false[/code], only movement from [code]id[/code] to [code]to_id[/code] is allowed, not the reverse direction. [codeblocks] @@ -135,42 +116,32 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Deletes the segment between the given points. If [code]bidirectional[/code] is [code]false[/code], only movement from [code]id[/code] to [code]to_id[/code] is prevented, and a unidirectional segment possibly remains. - - + Returns the next available point ID with no point associated to it. - - - - - - + + + Returns the ID of the closest point to [code]to_position[/code], optionally taking disabled points into account. Returns [code]-1[/code] if there are no points in the points pool. [b]Note:[/b] If several points are the closest to [code]to_position[/code], the one with the smallest ID will be returned, ensuring a deterministic result. - - - - + + Returns the closest position to [code]to_position[/code] that resides inside a segment between two connected points. [codeblocks] @@ -193,12 +164,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with the IDs of the points that form the path found by AStar between the given points. The array is ordered from the starting point to the ending point of the path. [codeblocks] @@ -233,17 +201,14 @@ - - + Returns the capacity of the structure backing the points, useful in conjunction with [code]reserve_space[/code]. - - - - + + Returns an array with the IDs of the points that form the connection with the given point. [codeblocks] @@ -274,114 +239,88 @@ - - + Returns the number of points currently in the points pool. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with the points that are in the path found by AStar between the given points. The array is ordered from the starting point to the ending point of the path. [b]Note:[/b] This method is not thread-safe. If called from a [Thread], it will return an empty [PackedVector3Array] and will print an error message. - - - - + + Returns the position of the point associated with the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the weight scale of the point associated with the given [code]id[/code]. - - + Returns an array of all points. - - - - + + Returns whether a point associated with the given [code]id[/code] exists. - - - - + + Returns whether a point is disabled or not for pathfinding. By default, all points are enabled. - - - - + + Removes the point associated with the given [code]id[/code] from the points pool. - - - - + + Reserves space internally for [code]num_nodes[/code] points, useful if you're adding a known large number of points at once, for a grid for instance. New capacity must be greater or equals to old capacity. - - - - - - + + + Disables or enables the specified point for pathfinding. Useful for making a temporary obstacle. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]position[/code] for the point with the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]weight_scale[/code] for the point with the given [code]id[/code]. The [code]weight_scale[/code] is multiplied by the result of [method _compute_cost] when determining the overall cost of traveling across a segment from a neighboring point to this point. diff --git a/doc/classes/AStar2D.xml b/doc/classes/AStar2D.xml index 9edc3001698..31d695b0513 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AStar2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AStar2D.xml @@ -10,38 +10,28 @@ - - - - - - + + + Called when computing the cost between two connected points. Note that this function is hidden in the default [code]AStar2D[/code] class. - - - - - - + + + Called when estimating the cost between a point and the path's ending point. Note that this function is hidden in the default [code]AStar2D[/code] class. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new point at the given position with the given identifier. The [code]id[/code] must be 0 or larger, and the [code]weight_scale[/code] must be 1 or larger. The [code]weight_scale[/code] is multiplied by the result of [method _compute_cost] when determining the overall cost of traveling across a segment from a neighboring point to this point. Thus, all else being equal, the algorithm prefers points with lower [code]weight_scale[/code]s to form a path. @@ -59,32 +49,24 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns whether there is a connection/segment between the given points. - - + Clears all the points and segments. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates a segment between the given points. If [code]bidirectional[/code] is [code]false[/code], only movement from [code]id[/code] to [code]to_id[/code] is allowed, not the reverse direction. [codeblocks] @@ -104,40 +86,31 @@ - - - - - - + + + Deletes the segment between the given points. - - + Returns the next available point ID with no point associated to it. - - - - - - + + + Returns the ID of the closest point to [code]to_position[/code], optionally taking disabled points into account. Returns [code]-1[/code] if there are no points in the points pool. [b]Note:[/b] If several points are the closest to [code]to_position[/code], the one with the smallest ID will be returned, ensuring a deterministic result. - - - - + + Returns the closest position to [code]to_position[/code] that resides inside a segment between two connected points. [codeblocks] @@ -160,12 +133,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with the IDs of the points that form the path found by AStar2D between the given points. The array is ordered from the starting point to the ending point of the path. [codeblocks] @@ -201,17 +171,14 @@ - - + Returns the capacity of the structure backing the points, useful in conjunction with [code]reserve_space[/code]. - - - - + + Returns an array with the IDs of the points that form the connection with the given point. [codeblocks] @@ -243,114 +210,88 @@ - - + Returns the number of points currently in the points pool. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with the points that are in the path found by AStar2D between the given points. The array is ordered from the starting point to the ending point of the path. [b]Note:[/b] This method is not thread-safe. If called from a [Thread], it will return an empty [PackedVector2Array] and will print an error message. - - - - + + Returns the position of the point associated with the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the weight scale of the point associated with the given [code]id[/code]. - - + Returns an array of all points. - - - - + + Returns whether a point associated with the given [code]id[/code] exists. - - - - + + Returns whether a point is disabled or not for pathfinding. By default, all points are enabled. - - - - + + Removes the point associated with the given [code]id[/code] from the points pool. - - - - + + Reserves space internally for [code]num_nodes[/code] points, useful if you're adding a known large number of points at once, for a grid for instance. New capacity must be greater or equals to old capacity. - - - - - - + + + Disables or enables the specified point for pathfinding. Useful for making a temporary obstacle. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]position[/code] for the point with the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]weight_scale[/code] for the point with the given [code]id[/code]. The [code]weight_scale[/code] is multiplied by the result of [method _compute_cost] when determining the overall cost of traveling across a segment from a neighboring point to this point. diff --git a/doc/classes/AcceptDialog.xml b/doc/classes/AcceptDialog.xml index ec276ed2275..868ec5a774f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AcceptDialog.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AcceptDialog.xml @@ -10,14 +10,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a button with label [code]text[/code] and a custom [code]action[/code] to the dialog and returns the created button. [code]action[/code] will be passed to the [signal custom_action] signal when pressed. If [code]true[/code], [code]right[/code] will place the button to the right of any sibling buttons. @@ -25,43 +21,35 @@ - - - - + + Adds a button with label [code]name[/code] and a cancel action to the dialog and returns the created button. You can use [method remove_button] method to remove a button created with this method from the dialog. - - + Returns the label used for built-in text. - - + Returns the OK [Button] instance. - - - - + + Registers a [LineEdit] in the dialog. When the enter key is pressed, the dialog will be accepted. - - - - + + Removes the [code]button[/code] from the dialog. Does NOT free the [code]button[/code]. The [code]button[/code] must be a [Button] added with [method add_button] or [method add_cancel_button] method. After removal, pressing the [code]button[/code] will no longer emit this dialog's [signal custom_action] or [signal cancelled] signals. @@ -96,8 +84,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a custom button is pressed. See [method add_button]. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite2D.xml b/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite2D.xml index 7662e8368be..14e19b4c9ae 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite2D.xml @@ -13,26 +13,21 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if an animation is currently being played. - - - - - - + + + Plays the animation named [code]anim[/code]. If no [code]anim[/code] is provided, the current animation is played. If [code]backwards[/code] is [code]true[/code], the animation will be played in reverse. - - + Stops the current animation (does not reset the frame counter). diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite3D.xml b/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite3D.xml index 39ab317b79f..6b3d426cefb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimatedSprite3D.xml @@ -11,24 +11,20 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if an animation is currently being played. - - - - + + Plays the animation named [code]anim[/code]. If no [code]anim[/code] is provided, the current animation is played. - - + Stops the current animation (does not reset the frame counter). diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimatedTexture.xml b/doc/classes/AnimatedTexture.xml index 5774842144e..808b8bf053b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimatedTexture.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimatedTexture.xml @@ -13,30 +13,23 @@ - - - - + + Returns the given frame's delay value. - - - - + + Returns the given frame's [Texture2D]. - - - - - - + + + Sets an additional delay (in seconds) between this frame and the next one, that will be added to the time interval defined by [member fps]. By default, frames have no delay defined. If a delay value is defined, the final time interval between this frame and the next will be [code]1.0 / fps + delay[/code]. For example, for an animation with 3 frames, 2 FPS and a frame delay on the second frame of 1.2, the resulting playback will be: @@ -49,12 +42,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Assigns a [Texture2D] to the given frame. Frame IDs start at 0, so the first frame has ID 0, and the last frame of the animation has ID [member frames] - 1. You can define any number of textures up to [constant MAX_FRAMES], but keep in mind that only frames from 0 to [member frames] - 1 will be part of the animation. diff --git a/doc/classes/Animation.xml b/doc/classes/Animation.xml index 4d192f8e976..38e02745d44 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Animation.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Animation.xml @@ -32,673 +32,487 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a track to the Animation. - - - - - - + + + Returns the animation name at the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Animation Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Inserts a key with value [code]animation[/code] at the given [code]time[/code] (in seconds). The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Animation Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]animation[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Animation Track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the end offset of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. End offset is the number of seconds cut off at the ending of the audio stream. - - - - - - + + + Returns the start offset of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. Start offset is the number of seconds cut off at the beginning of the audio stream. - - - - - - + + + Returns the audio stream of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Inserts an Audio Track key at the given [code]time[/code] in seconds. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. [code]stream[/code] is the [AudioStream] resource to play. [code]start_offset[/code] is the number of seconds cut off at the beginning of the audio stream, while [code]end_offset[/code] is at the ending. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the end offset of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]offset[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the start offset of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]offset[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the stream of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]stream[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of an Audio Track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the in handle of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the out handle of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Inserts a Bezier Track key at the given [code]time[/code] in seconds. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. [code]in_handle[/code] is the left-side weight of the added Bezier curve point, [code]out_handle[/code] is the right-side one, while [code]value[/code] is the actual value at this point. - - - - - - + + + Returns the interpolated value at the given [code]time[/code] (in seconds). The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the in handle of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]in_handle[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the out handle of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to value [code]out_handle[/code]. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value of the key identified by [code]key_idx[/code] to the given value. The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a Bezier Track. - - + Clear the animation (clear all tracks and reset all). - - - - - - + + + Adds a new track that is a copy of the given track from [code]to_animation[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the index of the specified track. If the track is not found, return -1. - - + Returns the amount of tracks in the animation. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns all the key indices of a method track, given a position and delta time. - - - - - - + + + Returns the method name of a method track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the arguments values to be called on a method track for a given key in a given track. - - - - + + Removes a track by specifying the track index. - - - - - - - - + + + + Finds the key index by time in a given track. Optionally, only find it if the exact time is given. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the track at [code]idx[/code] wraps the interpolation loop. New tracks wrap the interpolation loop by default. - - - - + + Returns the interpolation type of a given track. - - - - + + Returns the amount of keys in a given track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the time at which the key is located. - - - - - - + + + Returns the transition curve (easing) for a specific key (see the built-in math function [method @GlobalScope.ease]). - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a given key in a given track. - - - - + + Gets the path of a track. For more information on the path format, see [method track_set_path]. - - - - + + Gets the type of a track. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Insert a generic key in a given track. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the track at index [code]idx[/code] is enabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given track is imported. Else, return [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Moves a track down. - - - - - - + + + Changes the index position of track [code]idx[/code] to the one defined in [code]to_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Moves a track up. - - - - - - + + + Removes a key by index in a given track. - - - - - - + + + Removes a key at [code]time[/code] in a given track. - - - - - - + + + Enables/disables the given track. Tracks are enabled by default. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given track as imported or not. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the track at [code]idx[/code] wraps the interpolation loop. - - - - - - + + + Sets the interpolation type of a given track. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the time of an existing key. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transition curve (easing) for a specific key (see the built-in math function [method @GlobalScope.ease]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value of an existing key. - - - - - - + + + Sets the path of a track. Paths must be valid scene-tree paths to a node and must be specified starting from the parent node of the node that will reproduce the animation. Tracks that control properties or bones must append their name after the path, separated by [code]":"[/code]. For example, [code]"character/skeleton:ankle"[/code] or [code]"character/mesh:transform/local"[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Swaps the track [code]idx[/code]'s index position with the track [code]with_idx[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Insert a transform key for a transform track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the interpolated value of a transform track at a given time (in seconds). An array consisting of 3 elements: position ([Vector3]), rotation ([Quaternion]) and scale ([Vector3]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns all the key indices of a value track, given a position and delta time. - - - - + + Returns the update mode of a value track. - - - - - - + + + Returns the interpolated value at the given time (in seconds). The [code]track_idx[/code] must be the index of a value track. - - - - - - + + + Sets the update mode (see [enum UpdateMode]) of a value track. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNode.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNode.xml index fddd8989abc..a9a08efcf14 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNode.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNode.xml @@ -12,58 +12,47 @@ - - + Gets the text caption for this node (used by some editors). - - - - + + Gets a child node by index (used by editors inheriting from [AnimationRootNode]). - - + Gets all children nodes in order as a [code]name: node[/code] dictionary. Only useful when inheriting [AnimationRootNode]. - - - - + + Gets the default value of a parameter. Parameters are custom local memory used for your nodes, given a resource can be reused in multiple trees. - - + Gets the property information for parameter. Parameters are custom local memory used for your nodes, given a resource can be reused in multiple trees. Format is similar to [method Object.get_property_list]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] whether you want the blend tree editor to display filter editing on this node. - - - - - - + + + User-defined callback called when a custom node is processed. The [code]time[/code] parameter is a relative delta, unless [code]seek[/code] is [code]true[/code], in which case it is absolute. Here, call the [method blend_input], [method blend_node] or [method blend_animation] functions. You can also use [method get_parameter] and [method set_parameter] to modify local memory. @@ -71,132 +60,94 @@ - - - - + + Adds an input to the node. This is only useful for nodes created for use in an [AnimationNodeBlendTree]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Blend an animation by [code]blend[/code] amount (name must be valid in the linked [AnimationPlayer]). A [code]time[/code] and [code]delta[/code] may be passed, as well as whether [code]seek[/code] happened. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Blend an input. This is only useful for nodes created for an [AnimationNodeBlendTree]. The [code]time[/code] parameter is a relative delta, unless [code]seek[/code] is [code]true[/code], in which case it is absolute. A filter mode may be optionally passed (see [enum FilterAction] for options). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Blend another animation node (in case this node contains children animation nodes). This function is only useful if you inherit from [AnimationRootNode] instead, else editors will not display your node for addition. - - + Amount of inputs in this node, only useful for nodes that go into [AnimationNodeBlendTree]. - - - - + + Gets the name of an input by index. - - - - + + Gets the value of a parameter. Parameters are custom local memory used for your nodes, given a resource can be reused in multiple trees. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] whether a given path is filtered. - - - - + + Removes an input, call this only when inactive. - - - - - - + + + Adds or removes a path for the filter. - - - - - - + + + Sets a custom parameter. These are used as local storage, because resources can be reused across the tree or scenes. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace1D.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace1D.xml index 263b59910b6..c47d84fe379 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace1D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace1D.xml @@ -14,70 +14,53 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new point that represents a [code]node[/code] on the virtual axis at a given position set by [code]pos[/code]. You can insert it at a specific index using the [code]at_index[/code] argument. If you use the default value for [code]at_index[/code], the point is inserted at the end of the blend points array. - - + Returns the number of points on the blend axis. - - - - + + Returns the [AnimationNode] referenced by the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the point at index [code]point[/code] from the blend axis. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [AnimationNode] referenced by the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Updates the position of the point at index [code]point[/code] on the blend axis. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace2D.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace2D.xml index 1a6d2bd7552..8d51f9aecc7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendSpace2D.xml @@ -14,112 +14,84 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new point that represents a [code]node[/code] at the position set by [code]pos[/code]. You can insert it at a specific index using the [code]at_index[/code] argument. If you use the default value for [code]at_index[/code], the point is inserted at the end of the blend points array. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates a new triangle using three points [code]x[/code], [code]y[/code], and [code]z[/code]. Triangles can overlap. You can insert the triangle at a specific index using the [code]at_index[/code] argument. If you use the default value for [code]at_index[/code], the point is inserted at the end of the blend points array. - - + Returns the number of points in the blend space. - - - - + + Returns the [AnimationRootNode] referenced by the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - + Returns the number of triangles in the blend space. - - - - - - + + + Returns the position of the point at index [code]point[/code] in the triangle of index [code]triangle[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the point at index [code]point[/code] from the blend space. - - - - + + Removes the triangle at index [code]triangle[/code] from the blend space. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [AnimationNode] referenced by the point at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Updates the position of the point at index [code]point[/code] on the blend axis. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendTree.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendTree.xml index a90e8647bb9..da532dc0592 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendTree.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeBlendTree.xml @@ -11,96 +11,71 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an [AnimationNode] at the given [code]position[/code]. The [code]name[/code] is used to identify the created sub-node later. - - - - - - - - + + + + Connects the output of an [AnimationNode] as input for another [AnimationNode], at the input port specified by [code]input_index[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Disconnects the node connected to the specified input. - - - - + + Returns the sub-node with the specified [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the sub-node with the specified [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a sub-node with specified [code]name[/code] exists. - - - - + + Removes a sub-node. - - - - - - + + + Changes the name of a sub-node. - - - - - - + + + Modifies the position of a sub-node. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeOneShot.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeOneShot.xml index 65ab363e1f8..2ecc0ae07bd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeOneShot.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeOneShot.xml @@ -12,16 +12,13 @@ - - + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachine.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachine.xml index 8e070142c4c..9921e157f23 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachine.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachine.xml @@ -22,217 +22,166 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new node to the graph. The [code]position[/code] is used for display in the editor. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a transition between the given nodes. - - + Returns the graph's end node. - - + Returns the draw offset of the graph. Used for display in the editor. - - - - + + Returns the animation node with the given name. - - - - + + Returns the given animation node's name. - - - - + + Returns the given node's coordinates. Used for display in the editor. - - + Returns the graph's end node. - - - - + + Returns the given transition. - - + Returns the number of connections in the graph. - - - - + + Returns the given transition's start node. - - - - + + Returns the given transition's end node. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the graph contains the given node. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a transition between the given nodes. - - - - + + Deletes the given node from the graph. - - - - - - + + + Deletes the transition between the two specified nodes. - - - - + + Deletes the given transition by index. - - - - - - + + + Renames the given node. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Sets the given node as the graph end point. - - - - + + Sets the draw offset of the graph. Used for display in the editor. - - - - - - + + + Sets the node's coordinates. Used for display in the editor. - - - - + + Sets the given node as the graph start point. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachinePlayback.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachinePlayback.xml index c8468f9c8f5..5c11adfaf0b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachinePlayback.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeStateMachinePlayback.xml @@ -22,60 +22,50 @@ - - + - - + Returns the currently playing animation state. - - + Returns the playback position within the current animation state. - - + Returns the current travel path as computed internally by the A* algorithm. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if an animation is playing. - - - - + + Starts playing the given animation. - - + Stops the currently playing animation. - - - - + + Transitions from the current state to another one, following the shortest path. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeTransition.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeTransition.xml index 73c7006768d..8c859e43be2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationNodeTransition.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationNodeTransition.xml @@ -13,38 +13,28 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationPlayer.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationPlayer.xml index 8a94eee54c5..1ef9d81d028 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationPlayer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationPlayer.xml @@ -15,136 +15,106 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds [code]animation[/code] to the player accessible with the key [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Shifts position in the animation timeline and immediately updates the animation. [code]delta[/code] is the time in seconds to shift. Events between the current frame and [code]delta[/code] are handled. - - - - + + Returns the name of the next animation in the queue. - - - - - - + + + Triggers the [code]anim_to[/code] animation when the [code]anim_from[/code] animation completes. - - + [AnimationPlayer] caches animated nodes. It may not notice if a node disappears; [method clear_caches] forces it to update the cache again. - - + Clears all queued, unplayed animations. - - - - + + Returns the name of [code]animation[/code] or an empty string if not found. - - - - + + Returns the [Animation] with key [code]name[/code] or [code]null[/code] if not found. - - + Returns the list of stored animation names. - - - - - - + + + Gets the blend time (in seconds) between two animations, referenced by their names. - - + Gets the actual playing speed of current animation or 0 if not playing. This speed is the [member playback_speed] property multiplied by [code]custom_speed[/code] argument specified when calling the [method play] method. - - + Returns a list of the animation names that are currently queued to play. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [AnimationPlayer] stores an [Animation] with key [code]name[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if playing an animation. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Plays the animation with key [code]name[/code]. Custom blend times and speed can be set. If [code]custom_speed[/code] is negative and [code]from_end[/code] is [code]true[/code], the animation will play backwards (which is equivalent to calling [method play_backwards]). The [AnimationPlayer] keeps track of its current or last played animation with [member assigned_animation]. If this method is called with that same animation [code]name[/code], or with no [code]name[/code] parameter, the assigned animation will resume playing if it was paused, or restart if it was stopped (see [method stop] for both pause and stop). If the animation was already playing, it will keep playing. @@ -152,76 +122,57 @@ - - - - - - + + + Plays the animation with key [code]name[/code] in reverse. This method is a shorthand for [method play] with [code]custom_speed = -1.0[/code] and [code]from_end = true[/code], so see its description for more information. - - - - + + Queues an animation for playback once the current one is done. [b]Note:[/b] If a looped animation is currently playing, the queued animation will never play unless the looped animation is stopped somehow. - - - - + + Removes the animation with key [code]name[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Renames an existing animation with key [code]name[/code] to [code]newname[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Seeks the animation to the [code]seconds[/code] point in time (in seconds). If [code]update[/code] is [code]true[/code], the animation updates too, otherwise it updates at process time. Events between the current frame and [code]seconds[/code] are skipped. - - - - - - - - + + + + Specifies a blend time (in seconds) between two animations, referenced by their names. - - - - + + Stops or pauses the currently playing animation. If [code]reset[/code] is [code]true[/code], the animation position is reset to [code]0[/code] and the playback speed is reset to [code]1.0[/code]. If [code]reset[/code] is [code]false[/code], the [member current_animation_position] will be kept and calling [method play] or [method play_backwards] without arguments or with the same animation name as [member assigned_animation] will resume the animation. @@ -270,25 +221,21 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when a queued animation plays after the previous animation was finished. See [method queue]. [b]Note:[/b] The signal is not emitted when the animation is changed via [method play] or from [AnimationTree]. - - + Notifies when an animation finished playing. - - + Notifies when an animation starts playing. diff --git a/doc/classes/AnimationTree.xml b/doc/classes/AnimationTree.xml index 63460b70c58..843dd5a6d1f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AnimationTree.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AnimationTree.xml @@ -12,28 +12,22 @@ - - - - + + Manually advance the animations by the specified time (in seconds). - - + Retrieve the motion of the [member root_motion_track] as a [Transform3D] that can be used elsewhere. If [member root_motion_track] is not a path to a track of type [constant Animation.TYPE_TRANSFORM3D], returns an identity transformation. See also [member root_motion_track] and [RootMotionView]. - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Area2D.xml b/doc/classes/Area2D.xml index cf2e7044af8..25f67f0571d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Area2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Area2D.xml @@ -14,34 +14,28 @@ - - + Returns a list of intersecting [Area2D]s. For performance reasons (collisions are all processed at the same time) this list is modified once during the physics step, not immediately after objects are moved. Consider using signals instead. - - + Returns a list of intersecting [PhysicsBody2D]s. For performance reasons (collisions are all processed at the same time) this list is modified once during the physics step, not immediately after objects are moved. Consider using signals instead. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the given area overlaps the Area2D. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, the list of overlaps is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the given physics body overlaps the Area2D. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, list of overlaps is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. @@ -91,30 +85,24 @@ - - + Emitted when another Area2D enters this Area2D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area[/code] the other Area2D. - - + Emitted when another Area2D exits this Area2D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area[/code] the other Area2D. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of another Area2D's [Shape2D]s enters one of this Area2D's [Shape2D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area_id[/code] the [RID] of the other Area2D's [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. @@ -124,14 +112,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of another Area2D's [Shape2D]s exits one of this Area2D's [Shape2D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area_id[/code] the [RID] of the other Area2D's [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. @@ -141,30 +125,24 @@ - - + Emitted when a [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap] enters this Area2D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]. - - + Emitted when a [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap] exits this Area2D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of a [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]'s [Shape2D]s enters one of this Area2D's [Shape2D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileSet]'s [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. @@ -174,14 +152,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of a [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]'s [Shape2D]s exits one of this Area2D's [Shape2D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileSet]'s [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Area3D.xml b/doc/classes/Area3D.xml index cc31b6c203e..2180196bb54 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Area3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Area3D.xml @@ -12,34 +12,28 @@ - - + Returns a list of intersecting [Area3D]s. For performance reasons (collisions are all processed at the same time) this list is modified once during the physics step, not immediately after objects are moved. Consider using signals instead. - - + Returns a list of intersecting [PhysicsBody3D]s. For performance reasons (collisions are all processed at the same time) this list is modified once during the physics step, not immediately after objects are moved. Consider using signals instead. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the given area overlaps the Area3D. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, list of overlaps is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the given physics body overlaps the Area3D. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, list of overlaps is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. @@ -101,30 +95,24 @@ - - + Emitted when another Area3D enters this Area3D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area[/code] the other Area3D. - - + Emitted when another Area3D exits this Area3D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area[/code] the other Area3D. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of another Area3D's [Shape3D]s enters one of this Area3D's [Shape3D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area_id[/code] the [RID] of the other Area3D's [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. @@ -134,14 +122,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of another Area3D's [Shape3D]s enters one of this Area3D's [Shape3D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [code]area_id[/code] the [RID] of the other Area3D's [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. @@ -151,30 +135,24 @@ - - + Emitted when a [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap] enters this Area3D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]. - - + Emitted when a [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap] exits this Area3D. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of a [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]'s [Shape3D]s enters one of this Area3D's [Shape3D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the [PhysicsBody3D] or [MeshLibrary]'s [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. @@ -184,14 +162,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of a [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]'s [Shape3D]s enters one of this Area3D's [Shape3D]s. Requires [member monitoring] to be set to [code]true[/code]. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the [PhysicsBody3D] or [MeshLibrary]'s [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Array.xml b/doc/classes/Array.xml index 1ed7250adcd..7767a1028de 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Array.xml @@ -46,116 +46,91 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an [Array] as a copy of the given [Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedByteArray]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedColorArray]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedFloat32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedFloat64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedInt32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedInt64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedStringArray]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedVector2Array]. - - - - + + Constructs an array from a [PackedVector3Array]. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends another array at the end of this array. [codeblock] @@ -167,70 +142,55 @@ - - + Returns the last element of the array. Prints an error and returns [code]null[/code] if the array is empty. [b]Note:[/b] Calling this function is not the same as writing [code]array[-1][/code]. If the array is empty, accessing by index will pause project execution when running from the editor. - - - - - - + + + Finds the index of an existing value (or the insertion index that maintains sorting order, if the value is not yet present in the array) using binary search. Optionally, a [code]before[/code] specifier can be passed. If [code]false[/code], the returned index comes after all existing entries of the value in the array. [b]Note:[/b] Calling [method bsearch] on an unsorted array results in unexpected behavior. - - - - - - - - + + + + Finds the index of an existing value (or the insertion index that maintains sorting order, if the value is not yet present in the array) using binary search and a custom comparison method. Optionally, a [code]before[/code] specifier can be passed. If [code]false[/code], the returned index comes after all existing entries of the value in the array. The custom method receives two arguments (an element from the array and the value searched for) and must return [code]true[/code] if the first argument is less than the second, and return [code]false[/code] otherwise. [b]Note:[/b] Calling [method bsearch_custom] on an unsorted array results in unexpected behavior. - - + Clears the array. This is equivalent to using [method resize] with a size of [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the number of times an element is in the array. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the array. If [code]deep[/code] is [code]true[/code], a deep copy is performed: all nested arrays and dictionaries are duplicated and will not be shared with the original array. If [code]false[/code], a shallow copy is made and references to the original nested arrays and dictionaries are kept, so that modifying a sub-array or dictionary in the copy will also impact those referenced in the source array. - - - - + + Removes the first occurrence of a value from the array. To remove an element by index, use [method remove] instead. [b]Note:[/b] This method acts in-place and doesn't return a value. @@ -238,10 +198,8 @@ - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements: [codeblocks] @@ -259,10 +217,8 @@ - - - - + + Calls the provided [Callable] on each element in the array and returns a new array with the elements for which the method returned [code]true[/code]. The callable's method should take one [Variant] parameter (the current array element) and return a boolean value. @@ -277,38 +233,30 @@ - - - - - - + + + Searches the array for a value and returns its index or [code]-1[/code] if not found. Optionally, the initial search index can be passed. - - - - + + Searches the array in reverse order for a value and returns its index or [code]-1[/code] if not found. - - + Returns the first element of the array. Prints an error and returns [code]null[/code] if the array is empty. [b]Note:[/b] Calling this function is not the same as writing [code]array[0][/code]. If the array is empty, accessing by index will pause project execution when running from the editor. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains the given value. [codeblocks] @@ -347,20 +295,16 @@ - - + Returns a hashed integer value representing the array and its contents. [b]Note:[/b] Arrays with equal contents can still produce different hashes. Only the exact same arrays will produce the same hashed integer value. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]pos == size()[/code]). [b]Note:[/b] This method acts in-place and doesn't return a value. @@ -368,17 +312,14 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + Calls the provided [Callable] for each element in the array and returns a new array filled with values returned by the method. The callable's method should take one [Variant] parameter (the current array element) and can return any [Variant]. @@ -393,124 +334,97 @@ - - + Returns the maximum value contained in the array if all elements are of comparable types. If the elements can't be compared, [code]null[/code] is returned. - - + Returns the minimum value contained in the array if all elements are of comparable types. If the elements can't be compared, [code]null[/code] is returned. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Removes and returns the last element of the array. Returns [code]null[/code] if the array is empty, without printing an error message. See also [method pop_front]. - - + Removes and returns the first element of the array. Returns [code]null[/code] if the array is empty, without printing an error message. See also [method pop_back]. [b]Note:[/b] On large arrays, this method is much slower than [method pop_back] as it will reindex all the array's elements every time it's called. The larger the array, the slower [method pop_front] will be. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array. See also [method push_front]. - - - - + + Adds an element at the beginning of the array. See also [method push_back]. [b]Note:[/b] On large arrays, this method is much slower than [method push_back] as it will reindex all the array's elements every time it's called. The larger the array, the slower [method push_front] will be. - - - - - - + + + Calls the provided [Callable] for each element in array and accumulates the result in [code]accum[/code]. The callable's method takes two arguments: the current value of [code]accum[/code] and the current array element. If [code]accum[/code] is [code]null[/code] (default value), the iteration will start from the second element, with the first one used as initial value of [code]accum[/code]. @@ -525,10 +439,8 @@ - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. If the index does not exist in the array, nothing happens. To remove an element by searching for its value, use [method erase] instead. [b]Note:[/b] This method acts in-place and doesn't return a value. @@ -536,64 +448,50 @@ - - - - + + Resizes the array to contain a different number of elements. If the array size is smaller, elements are cleared, if bigger, new elements are [code]null[/code]. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Searches the array in reverse order. Optionally, a start search index can be passed. If negative, the start index is considered relative to the end of the array. - - + Shuffles the array such that the items will have a random order. This method uses the global random number generator common to methods such as [method @GlobalScope.randi]. Call [method @GlobalScope.randomize] to ensure that a new seed will be used each time if you want non-reproducible shuffling. - - + Returns the number of elements in the array. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Duplicates the subset described in the function and returns it in an array, deeply copying the array if [code]deep[/code] is [code]true[/code]. Lower and upper index are inclusive, with the [code]step[/code] describing the change between indices while slicing. - - + Sorts the array. [b]Note:[/b] Strings are sorted in alphabetical order (as opposed to natural order). This may lead to unexpected behavior when sorting an array of strings ending with a sequence of numbers. Consider the following example: @@ -610,10 +508,8 @@ - - - - + + Sorts the array using a custom method. The custom method receives two arguments (a pair of elements from the array) and must return either [code]true[/code] or [code]false[/code]. For two elements [code]a[/code] and [code]b[/code], if the given method returns [code]true[/code], element [code]b[/code] will be after element [code]a[/code] in the array. [b]Note:[/b] you cannot randomize the return value as the heapsort algorithm expects a deterministic result. Doing so will result in unexpected behavior. diff --git a/doc/classes/ArrayMesh.xml b/doc/classes/ArrayMesh.xml index e3d2eb74ffa..637b9a9f160 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ArrayMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ArrayMesh.xml @@ -51,28 +51,20 @@ - - - - + + Adds name for a blend shape that will be added with [method add_surface_from_arrays]. Must be called before surface is added. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - +}" /> + Creates a new surface. Surfaces are created to be rendered using a [code]primitive[/code], which may be any of the types defined in [enum Mesh.PrimitiveType]. (As a note, when using indices, it is recommended to only use points, lines, or triangles.) [method Mesh.get_surface_count] will become the [code]surf_idx[/code] for this new surface. @@ -80,161 +72,122 @@ - - + Removes all blend shapes from this [ArrayMesh]. - - + Removes all surfaces from this [ArrayMesh]. - - + Returns the number of blend shapes that the [ArrayMesh] holds. - - - - + + Returns the name of the blend shape at this index. - - - - - - + + + Will perform a UV unwrap on the [ArrayMesh] to prepare the mesh for lightmapping. - - + Will regenerate normal maps for the [ArrayMesh]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns the index of the first surface with this name held within this [ArrayMesh]. If none are found, -1 is returned. - - - - + + Returns the length in indices of the index array in the requested surface (see [method add_surface_from_arrays]). - - - - + + Returns the length in vertices of the vertex array in the requested surface (see [method add_surface_from_arrays]). - - - - + + Returns the format mask of the requested surface (see [method add_surface_from_arrays]). - - - - + + Gets the name assigned to this surface. - - - - + + Returns the primitive type of the requested surface (see [method add_surface_from_arrays]). - - - - - - + + + Sets a name for a given surface. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioEffectCapture.xml b/doc/classes/AudioEffectCapture.xml index c7ee621ca64..8e46acbd079 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioEffectCapture.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioEffectCapture.xml @@ -11,55 +11,46 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if at least [code]frames[/code] audio frames are available to read in the internal ring buffer. - - + Clears the internal ring buffer. - - - - + + Gets the next [code]frames[/code] audio samples from the internal ring buffer. Returns a [PackedVector2Array] containing exactly [code]frames[/code] audio samples if available, or an empty [PackedVector2Array] if insufficient data was available. - - + Returns the total size of the internal ring buffer in frames. - - + Returns the number of audio frames discarded from the audio bus due to full buffer. - - + Returns the number of frames available to read using [method get_buffer]. - - + Returns the number of audio frames inserted from the audio bus. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioEffectChorus.xml b/doc/classes/AudioEffectChorus.xml index 30913a15299..cc93a8fc032 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioEffectChorus.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioEffectChorus.xml @@ -10,110 +10,80 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioEffectEQ.xml b/doc/classes/AudioEffectEQ.xml index c27c2f221c6..ddc1af06181 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioEffectEQ.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioEffectEQ.xml @@ -11,28 +11,22 @@ - - + Returns the number of bands of the equalizer. - - - - + + Returns the band's gain at the specified index, in dB. - - - - - - + + + Sets band's gain at the specified index, in dB. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioEffectRecord.xml b/doc/classes/AudioEffectRecord.xml index 872ddf3b0f5..9656718ee84 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioEffectRecord.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioEffectRecord.xml @@ -12,24 +12,20 @@ - - + Returns the recorded sample. - - + Returns whether the recording is active or not. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the sound will be recorded. Note that restarting the recording will remove the previously recorded sample. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioEffectSpectrumAnalyzerInstance.xml b/doc/classes/AudioEffectSpectrumAnalyzerInstance.xml index 53428cdfb84..0febf2abc18 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioEffectSpectrumAnalyzerInstance.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioEffectSpectrumAnalyzerInstance.xml @@ -8,14 +8,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioServer.xml b/doc/classes/AudioServer.xml index dafc0065f6f..12a13ecfcc6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioServer.xml @@ -14,380 +14,291 @@ - - - - + + Adds a bus at [code]at_position[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an [AudioEffect] effect to the bus [code]bus_idx[/code] at [code]at_position[/code]. - - + Name of the current device for audio input (see [method capture_get_device_list]). - - + Returns the names of all audio input devices detected on the system. - - - - + + Sets which audio input device is used for audio capture. - - + Generates an [AudioBusLayout] using the available buses and effects. - - - - + + Returns the amount of channels of the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [AudioEffect] at position [code]effect_idx[/code] in bus [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the number of effects on the bus at [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the [AudioEffectInstance] assigned to the given bus and effect indices (and optionally channel). - - - - + + Returns the index of the bus with the name [code]bus_name[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the name of the bus with the index [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the peak volume of the left speaker at bus index [code]bus_idx[/code] and channel index [code]channel[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the peak volume of the right speaker at bus index [code]bus_idx[/code] and channel index [code]channel[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the name of the bus that the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] sends to. - - - - + + Returns the volume of the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] in dB. - - + Returns the names of all audio devices detected on the system. - - + Returns the sample rate at the output of the [AudioServer]. - - + Returns the audio driver's output latency. - - + Returns the speaker configuration. - - + Returns the relative time since the last mix occurred. - - + Returns the relative time until the next mix occurs. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is bypassing effects. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the effect at index [code]effect_idx[/code] on the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is enabled. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is muted. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is in solo mode. - - + Locks the audio driver's main loop. [b]Note:[/b] Remember to unlock it afterwards. - - - - - - + + + Moves the bus from index [code]index[/code] to index [code]to_index[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the bus at index [code]index[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Removes the effect at index [code]effect_idx[/code] from the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is bypassing effects. - - - - - - - - + + + + If [code]true[/code], the effect at index [code]effect_idx[/code] on the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is enabled. - - - - + + Overwrites the currently used [AudioBusLayout]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is muted. - - - - - - + + + Sets the name of the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] to [code]name[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Connects the output of the bus at [code]bus_idx[/code] to the bus named [code]send[/code]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] is in solo mode. - - - - - - + + + Sets the volume of the bus at index [code]bus_idx[/code] to [code]volume_db[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Swaps the position of two effects in bus [code]bus_idx[/code]. - - + Unlocks the audio driver's main loop. (After locking it, you should always unlock it.) diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStream.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStream.xml index bbfec579bb3..8a58b178d8e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStream.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStream.xml @@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ - - + Returns the length of the audio stream in seconds. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStreamGeneratorPlayback.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStreamGeneratorPlayback.xml index 503f72a048c..d99d041053f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStreamGeneratorPlayback.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStreamGeneratorPlayback.xml @@ -12,48 +12,39 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a buffer of the size [code]amount[/code] can be pushed to the audio sample data buffer without overflowing it, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Clears the audio sample data buffer. - - + Returns the number of audio data frames left to play. If this returned number reaches [code]0[/code], the audio will stop playing until frames are added again. Therefore, make sure your script can always generate and push new audio frames fast enough to avoid audio cracking. - - + - - - - + + Pushes several audio data frames to the buffer. This is usually more efficient than [method push_frame] in C# and compiled languages via GDNative, but [method push_buffer] may be [i]less[/i] efficient in GDScript. - - - - + + Pushes a single audio data frame to the buffer. This is usually less efficient than [method push_buffer] in C# and compiled languages via GDNative, but [method push_frame] may be [i]more[/i] efficient in GDScript. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer.xml index 7c7f7e0cea3..a6c437f875a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer.xml @@ -17,40 +17,33 @@ - - + Returns the position in the [AudioStream] in seconds. - - + Returns the [AudioStreamPlayback] object associated with this [AudioStreamPlayer]. - - - - + + Plays the audio from the given [code]from_position[/code], in seconds. - - - - + + Sets the position from which audio will be played, in seconds. - - + Stops the audio. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer2D.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer2D.xml index b1e18ab550d..c40c2230916 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer2D.xml @@ -13,40 +13,33 @@ - - + Returns the position in the [AudioStream]. - - + Returns the [AudioStreamPlayback] object associated with this [AudioStreamPlayer2D]. - - - - + + Plays the audio from the given position [code]from_position[/code], in seconds. - - - - + + Sets the position from which audio will be played, in seconds. - - + Stops the audio. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer3D.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer3D.xml index 3bd20b4b9b5..584f03399c2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStreamPlayer3D.xml @@ -14,40 +14,33 @@ - - + Returns the position in the [AudioStream]. - - + Returns the [AudioStreamPlayback] object associated with this [AudioStreamPlayer3D]. - - - - + + Plays the audio from the given position [code]from_position[/code], in seconds. - - - - + + Sets the position from which audio will be played, in seconds. - - + Stops the audio. diff --git a/doc/classes/AudioStreamSample.xml b/doc/classes/AudioStreamSample.xml index 5a0e71a0f84..7e1155d89b8 100644 --- a/doc/classes/AudioStreamSample.xml +++ b/doc/classes/AudioStreamSample.xml @@ -11,10 +11,8 @@ - - - - + + Saves the AudioStreamSample as a WAV file to [code]path[/code]. Samples with IMA ADPCM format can't be saved. [b]Note:[/b] A [code].wav[/code] extension is automatically appended to [code]path[/code] if it is missing. diff --git a/doc/classes/BaseButton.xml b/doc/classes/BaseButton.xml index d842bac54af..889c703b07d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/BaseButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/BaseButton.xml @@ -10,40 +10,33 @@ - - + Called when the button is pressed. If you need to know the button's pressed state (and [member toggle_mode] is active), use [method _toggled] instead. - - - - + + Called when the button is toggled (only if [member toggle_mode] is active). - - + Returns the visual state used to draw the button. This is useful mainly when implementing your own draw code by either overriding _draw() or connecting to "draw" signal. The visual state of the button is defined by the [enum DrawMode] enum. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the mouse has entered the button and has not left it yet. - - - - + + Changes the [member pressed] state of the button, without emitting [signal toggled]. Use when you just want to change the state of the button without sending the pressed event (e.g. when initializing scene). Only works if [member toggle_mode] is [code]true[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] This method doesn't unpress other buttons in [member button_group]. @@ -104,8 +97,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the button was just toggled between pressed and normal states (only if [member toggle_mode] is active). The new state is contained in the [code]button_pressed[/code] argument. diff --git a/doc/classes/BaseMaterial3D.xml b/doc/classes/BaseMaterial3D.xml index 2a378ed03e3..bbf7c5eb6da 100644 --- a/doc/classes/BaseMaterial3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/BaseMaterial3D.xml @@ -11,61 +11,46 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if the specified [enum Feature] is enabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if the specified flag is enabled. See [enum Flags] enumerator for options. - - - - + + Returns the [Texture] associated with the specified [enum TextureParam]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], enables the specified [enum Feature]. Many features that are available in [BaseMaterial3D]s need to be enabled before use. This way the cost for using the feature is only incurred when specified. Features can also be enabled by setting the corresponding member to [code]true[/code]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], enables the specified flag. Flags are optional behavior that can be turned on and off. Only one flag can be enabled at a time with this function, the flag enumerators cannot be bit-masked together to enable or disable multiple flags at once. Flags can also be enabled by setting the corresponding member to [code]true[/code]. See [enum Flags] enumerator for options. - - - - - - + + + Sets the texture for the slot specified by [code]param[/code]. See [enum TextureParam] for available slots. diff --git a/doc/classes/Basis.xml b/doc/classes/Basis.xml index bd1abe914d8..9a4dd15c637 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Basis.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Basis.xml @@ -20,243 +20,191 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Basis] set to [constant IDENTITY]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Basis] as a copy of the given [Basis]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a pure rotation basis matrix, rotated around the given [code]axis[/code] by [code]phi[/code], in radians. The axis must be a normalized vector. - - - - + + Constructs a pure rotation basis matrix from the given Euler angles (in the YXZ convention: when *composing*, first Y, then X, and Z last), given in the vector format as (X angle, Y angle, Z angle). Consider using the [Quaternion] constructor instead, which uses a quaternion instead of Euler angles. - - - - + + Constructs a pure rotation basis matrix from the given quaternion. - - - - - - - - + + + + Constructs a basis matrix from 3 axis vectors (matrix columns). - - + Returns the determinant of the basis matrix. If the basis is uniformly scaled, its determinant is the square of the scale. A negative determinant means the basis has a negative scale. A zero determinant means the basis isn't invertible, and is usually considered invalid. - - + Returns the basis's rotation in the form of Euler angles (in the YXZ convention: when decomposing, first Z, then X, and Y last). The returned vector contains the rotation angles in the format (X angle, Y angle, Z angle). Consider using the [method get_rotation_quaternion] method instead, which returns a [Quaternion] quaternion instead of Euler angles. - - + This function considers a discretization of rotations into 24 points on unit sphere, lying along the vectors (x,y,z) with each component being either -1, 0, or 1, and returns the index of the point best representing the orientation of the object. It is mainly used by the [GridMap] editor. For further details, refer to the Godot source code. - - + Returns the basis's rotation in the form of a quaternion. See [method get_euler] if you need Euler angles, but keep in mind quaternions should generally be preferred to Euler angles. - - + Assuming that the matrix is the combination of a rotation and scaling, return the absolute value of scaling factors along each axis. - - + Returns the inverse of the matrix. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this basis and [code]b[/code] are approximately equal, by calling [code]is_equal_approx[/code] on each component. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Basis], which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Basis], which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Returns the orthonormalized version of the matrix (useful to call from time to time to avoid rounding error for orthogonal matrices). This performs a Gram-Schmidt orthonormalization on the basis of the matrix. - - - - - - + + + Introduce an additional rotation around the given axis by phi (radians). The axis must be a normalized vector. - - - - + + Introduce an additional scaling specified by the given 3D scaling factor. - - - - - - + + + Assuming that the matrix is a proper rotation matrix, slerp performs a spherical-linear interpolation with another rotation matrix. - - - - + + Transposed dot product with the X axis of the matrix. - - - - + + Transposed dot product with the Y axis of the matrix. - - - - + + Transposed dot product with the Z axis of the matrix. - - + Returns the transposed version of the matrix. diff --git a/doc/classes/BitMap.xml b/doc/classes/BitMap.xml index 83e598d2bad..9a349c957f1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/BitMap.xml +++ b/doc/classes/BitMap.xml @@ -10,66 +10,51 @@ - - - - + + Creates a bitmap with the specified size, filled with [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a bitmap that matches the given image dimensions, every element of the bitmap is set to [code]false[/code] if the alpha value of the image at that position is equal to [code]threshold[/code] or less, and [code]true[/code] in other case. - - - - + + Returns bitmap's value at the specified position. - - + Returns bitmap's dimensions. - - + Returns the amount of bitmap elements that are set to [code]true[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Applies morphological dilation to the bitmap. The first argument is the dilation amount, Rect2 is the area where the dilation will be applied. - - - - - - + + + Creates an [Array] of polygons covering a rectangular portion of the bitmap. It uses a marching squares algorithm, followed by Ramer-Douglas-Peucker (RDP) reduction of the number of vertices. Each polygon is described as a [PackedVector2Array] of its vertices. To get polygons covering the whole bitmap, pass: @@ -80,23 +65,17 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the bitmap's element at the specified position, to the specified value. - - - - - - + + + Sets a rectangular portion of the bitmap to the specified value. diff --git a/doc/classes/Bone2D.xml b/doc/classes/Bone2D.xml index b8d5544d599..f9f3ea21f17 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Bone2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Bone2D.xml @@ -13,88 +13,73 @@ - - + Stores the node's current transforms in [member rest]. - - + Returns whether this [code]Bone2D[/code] node is going to autocalculate its length and bone angle using its first [code]Bone2D[/code] child node, if one exists. If there are no [code]Bone2D[/code] children, then it cannot autocalculate these values and will print a warning. - - + Returns the angle of the bone in the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. [b]Note:[/b] This is different from the [code]Bone2D[/code]'s rotation. The bone angle is the rotation of the bone shown by the [code]Bone2D[/code] gizmo, and because [code]Bone2D[/code] bones are based on positions, this can vary from the actual rotation of the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. - - + Deprecated. Please use [code]get_length[/code] instead. - - + Returns the node's index as part of the entire skeleton. See [Skeleton2D]. - - + Returns the length of the bone in the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. - - + Returns the node's [member rest] [code]Transform2D[/code] if it doesn't have a parent, or its rest pose relative to its parent. - - - - + + When set to [code]true[/code], the [code]Bone2D[/code] node will attempt to automatically calculate the bone angle and length using the first child [code]Bone2D[/code] node, if one exists. If none exist, the [code]Bone2D[/code] cannot automatically calculate these values and will print a warning. - - - - + + Sets the bone angle for the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. This is typically set to the rotation from the [code]Bone2D[/code] node to a child [code]Bone2D[/code] node. [b]Note:[/b] This is different from the [code]Bone2D[/code]'s rotation. The bone angle is the rotation of the bone shown by the [code]Bone2D[/code] gizmo, and because [code]Bone2D[/code] bones are based on positions, this can vary from the actual rotation of the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. - - - - + + Deprecated. Please use [code]set_length[/code] instead. - - - - + + Sets the length of the bone in the [code]Bone2D[/code] node. diff --git a/doc/classes/BoxContainer.xml b/doc/classes/BoxContainer.xml index ffa7c9066ab..ec81b866f61 100644 --- a/doc/classes/BoxContainer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/BoxContainer.xml @@ -10,10 +10,8 @@ - - - - + + Adds a [Control] node to the box as a spacer. If [code]begin[/code] is [code]true[/code], it will insert the [Control] node in front of all other children. diff --git a/doc/classes/Button.xml b/doc/classes/Button.xml index 239e0bb2d9f..823eda9c330 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Button.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Button.xml @@ -42,28 +42,22 @@ - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. diff --git a/doc/classes/ButtonGroup.xml b/doc/classes/ButtonGroup.xml index 0b31352611e..302a2138367 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ButtonGroup.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ButtonGroup.xml @@ -11,15 +11,13 @@ - - + Returns an [Array] of [Button]s who have this as their [ButtonGroup] (see [member BaseButton.button_group]). - - + Returns the current pressed button. @@ -30,8 +28,7 @@ - - + Emitted when one of the buttons of the group is pressed. diff --git a/doc/classes/CPUParticles2D.xml b/doc/classes/CPUParticles2D.xml index 22f070b73b0..ab6897ca1dd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CPUParticles2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CPUParticles2D.xml @@ -12,97 +12,74 @@ - - - - + + Sets this node's properties to match a given [GPUParticles2D] node with an assigned [ParticlesMaterial]. - - - - + + Returns the base value of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the [Curve] of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the randomness factor of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the enabled state of the given flag (see [enum ParticleFlags] for options). - - + Restarts the particle emitter. - - - - - - + + + Sets the base value of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Curve] of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the randomness factor of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables the given flag (see [enum ParticleFlags] for options). diff --git a/doc/classes/CPUParticles3D.xml b/doc/classes/CPUParticles3D.xml index 29e04dda7e5..8aa3573996e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CPUParticles3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CPUParticles3D.xml @@ -11,97 +11,74 @@ - - - - + + Sets this node's properties to match a given [GPUParticles3D] node with an assigned [ParticlesMaterial]. - - - - + + Returns the base value of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the [Curve] of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the randomness factor of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - + + Returns the enabled state of the given particle flag (see [enum ParticleFlags] for options). - - + Restarts the particle emitter. - - - - - - + + + Sets the base value of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Curve] of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the randomness factor of the parameter specified by [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables the given particle flag (see [enum ParticleFlags] for options). diff --git a/doc/classes/Callable.xml b/doc/classes/Callable.xml index 3c61e8278f1..5228df706be 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Callable.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Callable.xml @@ -37,148 +37,122 @@ - - + Constructs a null [Callable] with no object nor method bound. - - - - + + Constructs a [Callable] as a copy of the given [Callable]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a new [Callable] for the method called [code]method[/code] in the specified [code]object[/code]. - - + Returns a copy of this [Callable] with the arguments bound. Bound arguments are passed after the arguments supplied by [method call]. - - + Calls the method represented by this [Callable]. Arguments can be passed and should match the method's signature. - - + Calls the method represented by this [Callable] in deferred mode, i.e. during the idle frame. Arguments can be passed and should match the method's signature. - - + Returns the name of the method represented by this [Callable]. - - + Returns the object on which this [Callable] is called. - - + Returns the ID of this [Callable]'s object (see [method Object.get_instance_id]). - - + Returns the hash value of this [Callable]'s object. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Callable] is a custom callable whose behavior differs based on implementation details. Custom callables are used in the engine for various reasons. If [code]true[/code], you can't use [method get_method]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Callable] has no target to call the method on. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Callable] is a standard callable, referencing an object and a method using a [StringName]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the object exists and has a valid function assigned, or is a custom callable. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if both [Callable]s invoke different targets. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if both [Callable]s invoke the same custom target. - - + Perform an RPC (Remote Procedure Call). This is used for multiplayer and is normally not available unless the function being called has been marked as [i]RPC[/i]. Calling it on unsupported functions will result in an error. - - - - + + Perform an RPC (Remote Procedure Call) on a specific peer ID (see multiplayer documentation for reference). This is used for multiplayer and is normally not available unless the function being called has been marked as [i]RPC[/i]. Calling it on unsupported functions will result in an error. - - - - + + Returns a copy of this [Callable] with the arguments unbound. Calling the returned [Callable] will call the method without the extra arguments that are supplied in the [Callable] on which you are calling this method. diff --git a/doc/classes/CallbackTweener.xml b/doc/classes/CallbackTweener.xml index 8ac285c3df9..fab5f06ba84 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CallbackTweener.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CallbackTweener.xml @@ -11,10 +11,8 @@ - - - - + + Makes the callback call delayed by given time in seconds. Example: [codeblock] diff --git a/doc/classes/Camera2D.xml b/doc/classes/Camera2D.xml index ac90b6950bd..d0ff66ae067 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Camera2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Camera2D.xml @@ -15,77 +15,62 @@ - - + Aligns the camera to the tracked node. - - + Forces the camera to update scroll immediately. - - + Returns the camera position. - - + Returns the location of the [Camera2D]'s screen-center, relative to the origin. - - - - + + Returns the specified [enum Side]'s margin. See also [member drag_bottom_margin], [member drag_top_margin], [member drag_left_margin], and [member drag_right_margin]. - - - - + + Returns the camera limit for the specified [enum Side]. See also [member limit_bottom], [member limit_top], [member limit_left], and [member limit_right]. - - + Sets the camera's position immediately to its current smoothing destination. This has no effect if smoothing is disabled. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified [enum Side]'s margin. See also [member drag_bottom_margin], [member drag_top_margin], [member drag_left_margin], and [member drag_right_margin]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the camera limit for the specified [enum Side]. See also [member limit_bottom], [member limit_top], [member limit_left], and [member limit_right]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Camera3D.xml b/doc/classes/Camera3D.xml index f74baa00a03..2ada0c556db 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Camera3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Camera3D.xml @@ -11,165 +11,126 @@ - - - - + + If this is the current camera, remove it from being current. If [code]enable_next[/code] is [code]true[/code], request to make the next camera current, if any. - - + Returns the camera's RID from the [RenderingServer]. - - + Gets the camera transform. Subclassed cameras such as [ClippedCamera3D] may provide different transforms than the [Node] transform. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given [code]layer[/code] in the [member cull_mask] is enabled, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Returns the camera's frustum planes in world space units as an array of [Plane]s in the following order: near, far, left, top, right, bottom. Not to be confused with [member frustum_offset]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given position is behind the camera (the blue part of the linked diagram). [url=https://raw.githubusercontent.com/godotengine/godot-docs/master/img/camera3d_position_frustum.png]See this diagram[/url] for an overview of position query methods. [b]Note:[/b] A position which returns [code]false[/code] may still be outside the camera's field of view. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given position is inside the camera's frustum (the green part of the linked diagram). [url=https://raw.githubusercontent.com/godotengine/godot-docs/master/img/camera3d_position_frustum.png]See this diagram[/url] for an overview of position query methods. - - + Makes this camera the current camera for the [Viewport] (see class description). If the camera node is outside the scene tree, it will attempt to become current once it's added. - - - - + + Returns a normal vector from the screen point location directed along the camera. Orthogonal cameras are normalized. Perspective cameras account for perspective, screen width/height, etc. - - - - - - + + + Returns the 3D point in world space that maps to the given 2D coordinate in the [Viewport] rectangle on a plane that is the given [code]z_depth[/code] distance into the scene away from the camera. - - - - + + Returns a normal vector in world space, that is the result of projecting a point on the [Viewport] rectangle by the camera projection. This is useful for casting rays in the form of (origin, normal) for object intersection or picking. - - - - + + Returns a 3D position in world space, that is the result of projecting a point on the [Viewport] rectangle by the camera projection. This is useful for casting rays in the form of (origin, normal) for object intersection or picking. - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables the given [code]layer[/code] in the [member cull_mask]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the camera projection to frustum mode (see [constant PROJECTION_FRUSTUM]), by specifying a [code]size[/code], an [code]offset[/code], and the [code]z_near[/code] and [code]z_far[/code] clip planes in world space units. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the camera projection to orthogonal mode (see [constant PROJECTION_ORTHOGONAL]), by specifying a [code]size[/code], and the [code]z_near[/code] and [code]z_far[/code] clip planes in world space units. (As a hint, 2D games often use this projection, with values specified in pixels.) - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the camera projection to perspective mode (see [constant PROJECTION_PERSPECTIVE]), by specifying a [code]fov[/code] (field of view) angle in degrees, and the [code]z_near[/code] and [code]z_far[/code] clip planes in world space units. - - - - + + Returns the 2D coordinate in the [Viewport] rectangle that maps to the given 3D point in world space. [b]Note:[/b] When using this to position GUI elements over a 3D viewport, use [method is_position_behind] to prevent them from appearing if the 3D point is behind the camera: diff --git a/doc/classes/CameraServer.xml b/doc/classes/CameraServer.xml index e00dc031dcd..404ea08851a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CameraServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CameraServer.xml @@ -12,42 +12,34 @@ - - - - + + Adds the camera [code]feed[/code] to the camera server. - - + Returns an array of [CameraFeed]s. - - - - + + Returns the [CameraFeed] corresponding to the camera with the given [code]index[/code]. - - + Returns the number of [CameraFeed]s registered. - - - - + + Removes the specified camera [code]feed[/code]. @@ -55,15 +47,13 @@ - - + Emitted when a [CameraFeed] is added (e.g. a webcam is plugged in). - - + Emitted when a [CameraFeed] is removed (e.g. a webcam is unplugged). diff --git a/doc/classes/CanvasItem.xml b/doc/classes/CanvasItem.xml index d0950ae7419..2c92ce01852 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CanvasItem.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CanvasItem.xml @@ -18,327 +18,217 @@ - - + Overridable function called by the engine (if defined) to draw the canvas item. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Subsequent drawing commands will be ignored unless they fall within the specified animation slice. This is a faster way to implement animations that loop on background rather than redrawing constantly. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + Draws an arc between the given angles. The larger the value of [code]point_count[/code], the smoother the curve. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + Draws a string character using a custom font. Returns the advance, depending on the character width and kerning with an optional next character. - - - - - - - - + + + + Draws a colored circle. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws a colored polygon of any amount of points, convex or concave. - - + After submitting all animations slices via [method draw_animation_slice], this function can be used to revert drawing to its default state (all subsequent drawing commands will be visible). If you don't care about this particular use case, usage of this function after submitting the slices is not required. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws a line from a 2D point to another, with a given color and width. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws a [Mesh] in 2D, using the provided texture. See [MeshInstance2D] for related documentation. - - - - - - - - + + + + Draws multiple, parallel lines with a uniform [code]color[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Draws multiple, parallel lines with a uniform [code]width[/code] and segment-by-segment coloring. Colors assigned to line segments match by index between [code]points[/code] and [code]colors[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + Breaks [code]text[/code] to the lines and draws it using the specified [code]font[/code] at the [code]position[/code] (top-left corner). The text will have its color multiplied by [code]modulate[/code]. If [code]clip_w[/code] is greater than or equal to 0, the text will be clipped if it exceeds the specified width. - - - - - - + + + Draws a [MultiMesh] in 2D with the provided texture. See [MultiMeshInstance2D] for related documentation. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws a polygon of any amount of points, convex or concave. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws interconnected line segments with a uniform [code]color[/code] and [code]width[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws interconnected line segments with a uniform [code]width[/code] and segment-by-segment coloring. Colors assigned to line segments match by index between [code]points[/code] and [code]colors[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draws a custom primitive. 1 point for a point, 2 points for a line, 3 points for a triangle, and 4 points for a quad. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws a rectangle. If [code]filled[/code] is [code]true[/code], the rectangle will be filled with the [code]color[/code] specified. If [code]filled[/code] is [code]false[/code], the rectangle will be drawn as a stroke with the [code]color[/code] and [code]width[/code] specified. [b]Note:[/b] [code]width[/code] is only effective if [code]filled[/code] is [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a custom transform for drawing via components. Anything drawn afterwards will be transformed by this. - - - - + + Sets a custom transform for drawing via matrix. Anything drawn afterwards will be transformed by this. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + Draws [code]text[/code] using the specified [code]font[/code] at the [code]position[/code] (bottom-left corner using the baseline of the font). The text will have its color multiplied by [code]modulate[/code]. If [code]clip_w[/code] is greater than or equal to 0, the text will be clipped if it exceeds the specified width. [b]Example using the default project font:[/b] @@ -364,223 +254,177 @@ - - - - - - + + + Draws a styled rectangle. - - - - - - - - + + + + Draws a texture at a given position. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draws a textured rectangle at a given position, optionally modulated by a color. If [code]transpose[/code] is [code]true[/code], the texture will have its X and Y coordinates swapped. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Draws a textured rectangle region at a given position, optionally modulated by a color. If [code]transpose[/code] is [code]true[/code], the texture will have its X and Y coordinates swapped. - - + Forces the transform to update. Transform changes in physics are not instant for performance reasons. Transforms are accumulated and then set. Use this if you need an up-to-date transform when doing physics operations. - - + Returns the [RID] of the [World2D] canvas where this item is in. - - + Returns the canvas item RID used by [RenderingServer] for this item. - - + Returns the transform matrix of this item's canvas. - - + Returns the global position of the mouse. - - + Returns the global transform matrix of this item. - - + Returns the global transform matrix of this item in relation to the canvas. - - + Returns the mouse position relative to this item's position. - - + Returns the transform matrix of this item. - - + Returns the viewport's boundaries as a [Rect2]. - - + Returns this item's transform in relation to the viewport. - - + Returns the [World2D] where this item is in. - - + Hide the [CanvasItem] if it's currently visible. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if local transform notifications are communicated to children. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if global transform notifications are communicated to children. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is present in the [SceneTree], its [member visible] property is [code]true[/code] and all its antecedents are also visible. If any antecedent is hidden, this node will not be visible in the scene tree. - - - - + + Assigns [code]screen_point[/code] as this node's new local transform. - - - - + + Transformations issued by [code]event[/code]'s inputs are applied in local space instead of global space. - - - - + + If [code]enable[/code] is [code]true[/code], children will be updated with local transform data. - - - - + + If [code]enable[/code] is [code]true[/code], children will be updated with global transform data. - - + Show the [CanvasItem] if it's currently hidden. For controls that inherit [Popup], the correct way to make them visible is to call one of the multiple [code]popup*()[/code] functions instead. - - + Queue the [CanvasItem] for update. [constant NOTIFICATION_DRAW] will be called on idle time to request redraw. diff --git a/doc/classes/CanvasLayer.xml b/doc/classes/CanvasLayer.xml index eb993680791..616fb24a6f6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CanvasLayer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CanvasLayer.xml @@ -13,8 +13,7 @@ - - + Returns the RID of the canvas used by this layer. diff --git a/doc/classes/CharacterBody2D.xml b/doc/classes/CharacterBody2D.xml index e184e7dc828..1ace7ee6bf9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CharacterBody2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CharacterBody2D.xml @@ -16,24 +16,20 @@ - - + Returns the surface normal of the floor at the last collision point. Only valid after calling [method move_and_slide] and when [method is_on_floor] returns [code]true[/code]. - - + Returns the linear velocity of the floor at the last collision point. Only valid after calling [method move_and_slide] and when [method is_on_floor] returns [code]true[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a [KinematicCollision2D], which contains information about a collision that occurred during the last call to [method move_and_slide]. Since the body can collide several times in a single call to [method move_and_slide], you must specify the index of the collision in the range 0 to ([method get_slide_count] - 1). [b]Example usage:[/b] @@ -54,36 +50,31 @@ - - + Returns the number of times the body collided and changed direction during the last call to [method move_and_slide]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with the ceiling on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with the floor on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with a wall on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Moves the body based on [member linear_velocity]. If the body collides with another, it will slide along the other body rather than stop immediately. If the other body is a [CharacterBody2D] or [RigidBody2D], it will also be affected by the motion of the other body. You can use this to make moving and rotating platforms, or to make nodes push other nodes. This method should be used in [method Node._physics_process] (or in a method called by [method Node._physics_process]), as it uses the physics step's [code]delta[/code] value automatically in calculations. Otherwise, the simulation will run at an incorrect speed. diff --git a/doc/classes/CharacterBody3D.xml b/doc/classes/CharacterBody3D.xml index c76e02fac0f..577ab5e84cb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CharacterBody3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CharacterBody3D.xml @@ -17,59 +17,50 @@ - - + Returns the surface normal of the floor at the last collision point. Only valid after calling [method move_and_slide] and when [method is_on_floor] returns [code]true[/code]. - - + Returns the linear velocity of the floor at the last collision point. Only valid after calling [method move_and_slide] and when [method is_on_floor] returns [code]true[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a [KinematicCollision3D], which contains information about a collision that occurred during the last call to [method move_and_slide]. Since the body can collide several times in a single call to [method move_and_slide], you must specify the index of the collision in the range 0 to ([method get_slide_count] - 1). - - + Returns the number of times the body collided and changed direction during the last call to [method move_and_slide]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with the ceiling on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with the floor on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the body collided with a wall on the last call of [method move_and_slide]. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Moves the body based on [member linear_velocity]. If the body collides with another, it will slide along the other body rather than stop immediately. If the other body is a [CharacterBody3D] or [RigidBody3D], it will also be affected by the motion of the other body. You can use this to make moving and rotating platforms, or to make nodes push other nodes. This method should be used in [method Node._physics_process] (or in a method called by [method Node._physics_process]), as it uses the physics step's [code]delta[/code] value automatically in calculations. Otherwise, the simulation will run at an incorrect speed. diff --git a/doc/classes/ClassDB.xml b/doc/classes/ClassDB.xml index 028781d3132..063233fe50c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ClassDB.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ClassDB.xml @@ -10,208 +10,155 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if you can instance objects from the specified [code]class[/code], [code]false[/code] in other case. - - - - + + Returns whether the specified [code]class[/code] is available or not. - - - - + + Returns a category associated with the class for use in documentation and the Asset Library. Debug mode required. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of the integer constant [code]name[/code] of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry. Always returns 0 when the constant could not be found. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with the names all the integer constants of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with all the methods of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry if [code]no_inheritance[/code] is [code]false[/code]. Every element of the array is a [Dictionary] with the following keys: [code]args[/code], [code]default_args[/code], [code]flags[/code], [code]id[/code], [code]name[/code], [code]return: (class_name, hint, hint_string, name, type, usage)[/code]. [b]Note:[/code] In exported release builds the debug info is not available, so the returned dictionaries will contain only method names. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of [code]property[/code] of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with all the properties of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry if [code]no_inheritance[/code] is [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [code]signal[/code] data of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry. The returned value is a [Dictionary] with the following keys: [code]args[/code], [code]default_args[/code], [code]flags[/code], [code]id[/code], [code]name[/code], [code]return: (class_name, hint, hint_string, name, type, usage)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array with all the signals of [code]class[/code] or its ancestry if [code]no_inheritance[/code] is [code]false[/code]. Every element of the array is a [Dictionary] as described in [method class_get_signal]. - - - - - - + + + Returns whether [code]class[/code] or its ancestry has an integer constant called [code]name[/code] or not. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns whether [code]class[/code] (or its ancestry if [code]no_inheritance[/code] is [code]false[/code]) has a method called [code]method[/code] or not. - - - - - - + + + Returns whether [code]class[/code] or its ancestry has a signal called [code]signal[/code] or not. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets [code]property[/code] value of [code]class[/code] to [code]value[/code]. - - + Returns the names of all the classes available. - - - - + + Returns the names of all the classes that directly or indirectly inherit from [code]class[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the parent class of [code]class[/code]. - - - - + + Creates an instance of [code]class[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether this [code]class[/code] is enabled or not. - - - - - - + + + Returns whether [code]inherits[/code] is an ancestor of [code]class[/code] or not. diff --git a/doc/classes/ClippedCamera3D.xml b/doc/classes/ClippedCamera3D.xml index 9116af19c35..1a764128263 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ClippedCamera3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ClippedCamera3D.xml @@ -10,72 +10,57 @@ - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the camera does not collide with the specified node. - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the camera does not collide with the specified [RID]. - - + Removes all collision exceptions. - - + Returns the distance the camera has been offset due to a collision. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified bit index is on. [b]Note:[/b] Bit indices range from 0-19. - - - - + + Removes a collision exception with the specified node. - - - - + + Removes a collision exception with the specified [RID]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified bit index to the [code]value[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Bit indices range from 0-19. diff --git a/doc/classes/CodeEdit.xml b/doc/classes/CodeEdit.xml index 30fd47cdb69..6a3f38f51ee 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CodeEdit.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CodeEdit.xml @@ -9,62 +9,45 @@ - - - - + + Override this method to define how the selected entry should be inserted. If [code]replace[/code] is true, any existing text should be replaced. - - - - + + Override this method to define what items in [code]candidates[/code] should be displayed. Both [code]candidates[/code] and the return is a [Array] of [Dictionary], see [method get_code_completion_option] for [Dictionary] content. - - - - + + Override this method to define what happens when the user requests code completion. If [code]force[/code] is true, any checks should be bypassed. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Submits an item to the queue of potential candidates for the autocomplete menu. Call [method update_code_completion_options] to update the list. [b]Note[/b]: This list will replace all current candidates. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a comment delimiter. Both the start and end keys must be symbols. Only the start key has to be unique. @@ -72,14 +55,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a string delimiter. Both the start and end keys must be symbols. Only the start key has to be unique. @@ -87,109 +66,90 @@ - - - - + + Returns if the given line is foldable, that is, it has indented lines right below it or a comment / string block. - - + Cancels the autocomplete menu. - - + - - + - - + Removes all comment delimiters. - - + - - + Removes all string delimiters. - - - - + + Inserts the selected entry into the text. If [code]replace[/code] is true, any existing text is replaced rather then merged. - - + Perform an indent as if the user activated the "ui_text_indent" action. - - + Perform an unindent as if the user activated the "ui_text_unindent" action. - - + Folds all lines that are possible to be folded (see [method can_fold_line]). - - - - + + Folds the given line, if possible (see [method can_fold_line]). - - + - - + - - - - + + Gets the completion option at [code]index[/code]. The return [Dictionary] has the following key-values: [code]kind[/code]: [enum CodeCompletionKind] @@ -201,279 +161,216 @@ - - + Gets all completion options, see [method get_code_completion_option] for return content. - - + Gets the index of the current selected completion option. - - - - + + Gets the end key for a string or comment region index. - - - - - - + + + If [code]line[/code] [code]column[/code] is in a string or comment, returns the end position of the region. If not or no end could be found, both [Vector2] values will be [code]-1[/code]. - - - - + + Gets the start key for a string or comment region index. - - - - - - + + + If [code]line[/code] [code]column[/code] is in a string or comment, returns the start position of the region. If not or no start could be found, both [Vector2] values will be [code]-1[/code]. - - + - - + Return all lines that are current folded. - - + Returns the full text with char [code]0xFFFF[/code] at the caret location. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if comment [code]start_key[/code] exists. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if string [code]start_key[/code] exists. - - + Indents selected lines, or in the case of no selection the caret line by one. - - - - - - + + + Return delimiter index if [code]line[/code] [code]column[/code] is in a comment. If [code]column[/code] is not provided, will return delimiter index if the entire [code]line[/code] is a comment. Otherwise [code]-1[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Return the delimiter index if [code]line[/code] [code]column[/code] is in a string. If [code]column[/code] is not provided, will return the delimiter index if the entire [code]line[/code] is a string. Otherwise [code]-1[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns whether the line at the specified index is folded or not. - - - - + + Removes the comment delimiter with [code]start_key[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the string delimiter with [code]start_key[/code]. - - - - + + Emits [signal request_code_completion], if [code]force[/code] is true will bypass all checks. Otherwise will check that the caret is in a word or in front of a prefix. Will ignore the request if all current options are of type file path, node path or signal. - - - - + + Sets the current selected completion option. - - - - + + Sets the code hint text. Pass an empty string to clear. - - - - + + Sets if the code hint should draw below the text. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Toggle the folding of the code block at the given line. - - + - - - - + + Unfolds all lines that were previously folded. - - + Unindents selected lines, or in the case of no selection the caret line by one. - - - - + + Submits all completion options added with [method add_code_completion_option]. Will try to force the autoccomplete menu to popup, if [code]force[/code] is [code]true[/code]. [b]Note[/b]: This will replace all current candidates. @@ -526,8 +423,7 @@ - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/CodeHighlighter.xml b/doc/classes/CodeHighlighter.xml index 0406c25ffd6..2b93188d10a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CodeHighlighter.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CodeHighlighter.xml @@ -10,16 +10,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a color region such as comments or strings. Both the start and end keys must be symbols. Only the start key has to be unique. @@ -27,24 +22,18 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the color for a keyword. The keyword cannot contain any symbols except '_'. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color for a member keyword. The member keyword cannot contain any symbols except '_'. @@ -52,94 +41,75 @@ - - + Removes all color regions. - - + Removes all keywords. - - + Removes all member keywords. - - - - + + Returns the color for a keyword. - - - - + + Returns the color for a member keyword. - - - - + + Return [code]true[/code] if the start key exists, else [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Return [code]true[/code] if the keyword exists, else [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Return [code]true[/code] if the member keyword exists, else [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the color region that uses that start key. - - - - + + Removes the keyword. - - - - + + Removes the member keyword. diff --git a/doc/classes/CollisionObject2D.xml b/doc/classes/CollisionObject2D.xml index 097bbc2de89..b6269520e15 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CollisionObject2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CollisionObject2D.xml @@ -10,248 +10,188 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Accepts unhandled [InputEvent]s. Requires [member input_pickable] to be [code]true[/code]. [code]shape_idx[/code] is the child index of the clicked [Shape2D]. Connect to the [code]input_event[/code] signal to easily pick up these events. - - - - + + Creates a new shape owner for the given object. Returns [code]owner_id[/code] of the new owner for future reference. - - - - + + Returns whether or not the specified [code]bit[/code] of the [member collision_layer] is set. - - - - + + Returns whether or not the specified [code]bit[/code] of the [member collision_mask] is set. - - + Returns the object's [RID]. - - - - + + Returns the [code]one_way_collision_margin[/code] of the shape owner identified by given [code]owner_id[/code]. - - + Returns an [Array] of [code]owner_id[/code] identifiers. You can use these ids in other methods that take [code]owner_id[/code] as an argument. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the shape owner and its shapes are disabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if collisions for the shape owner originating from this [CollisionObject2D] will not be reported to collided with [CollisionObject2D]s. - - - - + + Removes the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + If [code]value[/code] is [code]true[/code], sets the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_layer]. If [code]value[/code] is [code]false[/code], clears the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_layer]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]value[/code] is [code]true[/code], sets the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_mask]. If [code]value[/code] is [code]false[/code], clears the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_mask]. - - - - + + Returns the [code]owner_id[/code] of the given shape. - - - - - - + + + Adds a [Shape2D] to the shape owner. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from the shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the parent object of the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Shape2D] with the given id from the given shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes the given shape owner contains. - - - - - - + + + Returns the child index of the [Shape2D] with the given id from the given shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the shape owner's [Transform2D]. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], disables the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + If [code]enable[/code] is [code]true[/code], collisions for the shape owner originating from this [CollisionObject2D] will not be reported to collided with [CollisionObject2D]s. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]one_way_collision_margin[/code] of the shape owner identified by given [code]owner_id[/code] to [code]margin[/code] pixels. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Transform2D] of the given shape owner. @@ -275,12 +215,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Emitted when an input event occurs. Requires [member input_pickable] to be [code]true[/code] and at least one [code]collision_layer[/code] bit to be set. See [method _input_event] for details. @@ -296,15 +233,13 @@ - - + Emitted when the mouse pointer enters any of this object's shapes or moves from one shape to another. [code]shape_idx[/code] is the child index of the newly entered [Shape2D]. Requires [member input_pickable] to be [code]true[/code] and at least one [member collision_layer] bit to be set. - - + Emitted when the mouse pointer exits any of this object's shapes. [code]shape_idx[/code] is the child index of the exited [Shape2D]. Requires [member input_pickable] to be [code]true[/code] and at least one [member collision_layer] bit to be set. diff --git a/doc/classes/CollisionObject3D.xml b/doc/classes/CollisionObject3D.xml index ac6a84dda68..ecfe7583430 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CollisionObject3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CollisionObject3D.xml @@ -10,212 +10,160 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Receives unhandled [InputEvent]s. [code]position[/code] is the location in world space of the mouse pointer on the surface of the shape with index [code]shape_idx[/code] and [code]normal[/code] is the normal vector of the surface at that point. Connect to the [signal input_event] signal to easily pick up these events. - - - - + + Creates a new shape owner for the given object. Returns [code]owner_id[/code] of the new owner for future reference. - - - - + + Returns whether or not the specified [code]bit[/code] of the [member collision_layer] is set. - - - - + + Returns whether or not the specified [code]bit[/code] of the [member collision_mask] is set. - - + Returns the object's [RID]. - - + Returns an [Array] of [code]owner_id[/code] identifiers. You can use these ids in other methods that take [code]owner_id[/code] as an argument. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the shape owner and its shapes are disabled. - - - - + + Removes the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + If [code]value[/code] is [code]true[/code], sets the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_layer]. If [code]value[/code] is [code]false[/code], clears the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_layer]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]value[/code] is [code]true[/code], sets the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_mask]. If [code]value[/code] is [code]false[/code], clears the specified [code]bit[/code] in the the [member collision_mask]. - - - - + + Returns the [code]owner_id[/code] of the given shape. - - - - - - + + + Adds a [Shape3D] to the shape owner. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from the shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the parent object of the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Shape3D] with the given id from the given shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes the given shape owner contains. - - - - - - + + + Returns the child index of the [Shape3D] with the given id from the given shape owner. - - - - + + Returns the shape owner's [Transform3D]. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], disables the given shape owner. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Transform3D] of the given shape owner. @@ -242,16 +190,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Emitted when the object receives an unhandled [InputEvent]. [code]position[/code] is the location in world space of the mouse pointer on the surface of the shape with index [code]shape_idx[/code] and [code]normal[/code] is the normal vector of the surface at that point. diff --git a/doc/classes/CollisionShape3D.xml b/doc/classes/CollisionShape3D.xml index 5590947a4f7..9184b672fff 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CollisionShape3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CollisionShape3D.xml @@ -14,17 +14,14 @@ - - + Sets the collision shape's shape to the addition of all its convexed [MeshInstance3D] siblings geometry. - - - - + + If this method exists within a script it will be called whenever the shape resource has been modified. diff --git a/doc/classes/Color.xml b/doc/classes/Color.xml index 7b1415e40d9..f00a20e95e1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Color.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Color.xml @@ -17,28 +17,22 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Color] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Color] as a copy of the given [Color]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a [Color] from an existing color, but with a custom alpha value. [codeblocks] @@ -52,36 +46,26 @@ - - - - + + Constructs a [Color] either from an HTML color code or from a standardized color name. Supported color names are the same as the constants. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a [Color] either from an HTML color code or from a standardized color name, with [code]alpha[/code] on the range of 0 to 1. Supported color names are the same as the constants. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Constructs a [Color] from RGBA values, typically between 0 and 1. [codeblocks] @@ -95,14 +79,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Constructs a [Color] from RGB values, typically between 0 and 1. Alpha will be 1. [codeblocks] @@ -116,10 +96,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns a new color resulting from blending this color over another. If the color is opaque, the result is also opaque. The second color may have a range of alpha values. [codeblocks] @@ -137,21 +115,16 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a new color with all components clamped between the components of [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code], by running [method @GlobalScope.clamp] on each component. - - - - + + Returns a new color resulting from making this color darker by the specified percentage (ratio from 0 to 1). [codeblocks] @@ -167,88 +140,67 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Returns the inverted color [code](1 - r, 1 - g, 1 - b, a)[/code]. [codeblocks] @@ -264,21 +216,16 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this color and [code]color[/code] are approximately equal, by running [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - - - - - + + + Returns the linear interpolation with another color. The interpolation factor [code]weight[/code] is between 0 and 1. [codeblocks] @@ -296,10 +243,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns a new color resulting from making this color lighter by the specified percentage (ratio from 0 to 1). [codeblocks] @@ -315,108 +260,83 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + Returns the color converted to a 32-bit integer in ABGR format (each byte represents a color channel). ABGR is the reversed version of the default format. [codeblocks] @@ -432,8 +352,7 @@ - - + Returns the color converted to a 64-bit integer in ABGR format (each word represents a color channel). ABGR is the reversed version of the default format. [codeblocks] @@ -449,8 +368,7 @@ - - + Returns the color converted to a 32-bit integer in ARGB format (each byte represents a color channel). ARGB is more compatible with DirectX. [codeblocks] @@ -466,8 +384,7 @@ - - + Returns the color converted to a 64-bit integer in ARGB format (each word represents a color channel). ARGB is more compatible with DirectX. [codeblocks] @@ -483,10 +400,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the color converted to an HTML hexadecimal color string in RGBA format (ex: [code]ff34f822[/code]). Setting [code]with_alpha[/code] to [code]false[/code] excludes alpha from the hexadecimal string (and uses RGB instead of RGBA format). @@ -505,8 +420,7 @@ - - + Returns the color converted to a 32-bit integer in RGBA format (each byte represents a color channel). RGBA is Godot's default format. [codeblocks] @@ -522,8 +436,7 @@ - - + Returns the color converted to a 64-bit integer in RGBA format (each word represents a color channel). RGBA is Godot's default format. [codeblocks] diff --git a/doc/classes/ColorPicker.xml b/doc/classes/ColorPicker.xml index 2111358ef45..7b357034eb3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ColorPicker.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ColorPicker.xml @@ -11,27 +11,22 @@ - - - - + + Adds the given color to a list of color presets. The presets are displayed in the color picker and the user will be able to select them. [b]Note:[/b] the presets list is only for [i]this[/i] color picker. - - - - + + Removes the given color from the list of color presets of this color picker. - - + Returns the list of colors in the presets of the color picker. @@ -67,22 +62,19 @@ - - + Emitted when the color is changed. - - + Emitted when a preset is added. - - + Emitted when a preset is removed. diff --git a/doc/classes/ColorPickerButton.xml b/doc/classes/ColorPickerButton.xml index 09b828366fe..770daa79c6a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ColorPickerButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ColorPickerButton.xml @@ -13,15 +13,13 @@ - - + Returns the [ColorPicker] that this node toggles. - - + Returns the control's [PopupPanel] which allows you to connect to popup signals. This allows you to handle events when the ColorPicker is shown or hidden. @@ -38,8 +36,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the color changes. diff --git a/doc/classes/ConcavePolygonShape3D.xml b/doc/classes/ConcavePolygonShape3D.xml index b510905d1f6..34fb06a4768 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ConcavePolygonShape3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ConcavePolygonShape3D.xml @@ -12,17 +12,14 @@ - - + Returns the faces (an array of triangles). - - - - + + Sets the faces (an array of triangles). diff --git a/doc/classes/ConeTwistJoint3D.xml b/doc/classes/ConeTwistJoint3D.xml index bd6e24dafdd..dd65b3c688d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ConeTwistJoint3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ConeTwistJoint3D.xml @@ -12,20 +12,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/ConfigFile.xml b/doc/classes/ConfigFile.xml index 76855fc19f1..bcd4266f6c4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ConfigFile.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ConfigFile.xml @@ -50,167 +50,127 @@ - - + - - - - + + Deletes the specified section along with all the key-value pairs inside. Raises an error if the section does not exist. - - - - - - + + + Deletes the specified key in a section. Raises an error if either the section or the key do not exist. - - - - + + Returns an array of all defined key identifiers in the specified section. Raises an error and returns an empty array if the section does not exist. - - + Returns an array of all defined section identifiers. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the current value for the specified section and key. If either the section or the key do not exist, the method returns the fallback [code]default[/code] value. If [code]default[/code] is not specified or set to [code]null[/code], an error is also raised. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified section exists. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified section-key pair exists. - - - - + + Loads the config file specified as a parameter. The file's contents are parsed and loaded in the [ConfigFile] object which the method was called on. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Loads the encrypted config file specified as a parameter, using the provided [code]key[/code] to decrypt it. The file's contents are parsed and loaded in the [ConfigFile] object which the method was called on. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Loads the encrypted config file specified as a parameter, using the provided [code]password[/code] to decrypt it. The file's contents are parsed and loaded in the [ConfigFile] object which the method was called on. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - + + Parses the passed string as the contents of a config file. The string is parsed and loaded in the ConfigFile object which the method was called on. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - + + Saves the contents of the [ConfigFile] object to the file specified as a parameter. The output file uses an INI-style structure. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Saves the contents of the [ConfigFile] object to the AES-256 encrypted file specified as a parameter, using the provided [code]key[/code] to encrypt it. The output file uses an INI-style structure. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Saves the contents of the [ConfigFile] object to the AES-256 encrypted file specified as a parameter, using the provided [code]password[/code] to encrypt it. The output file uses an INI-style structure. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - - - + + + + Assigns a value to the specified key of the specified section. If either the section or the key do not exist, they are created. Passing a [code]null[/code] value deletes the specified key if it exists, and deletes the section if it ends up empty once the key has been removed. diff --git a/doc/classes/ConfirmationDialog.xml b/doc/classes/ConfirmationDialog.xml index 0253ef21df5..871082696cf 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ConfirmationDialog.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ConfirmationDialog.xml @@ -19,8 +19,7 @@ - - + Returns the cancel button. diff --git a/doc/classes/Container.xml b/doc/classes/Container.xml index c285b448d82..e78eb8d2599 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Container.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Container.xml @@ -11,19 +11,15 @@ - - - - - - + + + Fit a child control in a given rect. This is mainly a helper for creating custom container classes. - - + Queue resort of the contained children. This is called automatically anyway, but can be called upon request. diff --git a/doc/classes/Control.xml b/doc/classes/Control.xml index 4753b34efb7..43e3c97bffa 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Control.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Control.xml @@ -23,12 +23,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Godot calls this method to test if [code]data[/code] from a control's [method _get_drag_data] can be dropped at [code]position[/code]. [code]position[/code] is local to this control. This method should only be used to test the data. Process the data in [method _drop_data]. @@ -51,12 +48,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Godot calls this method to pass you the [code]data[/code] from a control's [method _get_drag_data] result. Godot first calls [method _can_drop_data] to test if [code]data[/code] is allowed to drop at [code]position[/code] where [code]position[/code] is local to this control. [codeblocks] @@ -80,10 +74,8 @@ - - - - + + Godot calls this method to get data that can be dragged and dropped onto controls that expect drop data. Returns [code]null[/code] if there is no data to drag. Controls that want to receive drop data should implement [method _can_drop_data] and [method _drop_data]. [code]position[/code] is local to this control. Drag may be forced with [method force_drag]. A preview that will follow the mouse that should represent the data can be set with [method set_drag_preview]. A good time to set the preview is in this method. @@ -106,18 +98,15 @@ - - + Virtual method to be implemented by the user. Returns the minimum size for this control. Alternative to [member rect_min_size] for controlling minimum size via code. The actual minimum size will be the max value of these two (in each axis separately). If not overridden, defaults to [constant Vector2.ZERO]. - - - - + + Virtual method to be implemented by the user. Use this method to process and accept inputs on UI elements. See [method accept_event]. Example: clicking a control. @@ -151,10 +140,8 @@ - - - - + + Virtual method to be implemented by the user. Returns whether the given [code]point[/code] is inside this control. If not overridden, default behavior is checking if the point is within control's Rect. @@ -162,10 +149,8 @@ - - - - + + Virtual method to be implemented by the user. Returns a [Control] node that should be used as a tooltip instead of the default one. The [code]for_text[/code] includes the contents of the [member hint_tooltip] property. The returned node must be of type [Control] or Control-derived. It can have child nodes of any type. It is freed when the tooltip disappears, so make sure you always provide a new instance (if you want to use a pre-existing node from your scene tree, you can duplicate it and pass the duplicated instance). When [code]null[/code] or a non-Control node is returned, the default tooltip will be used instead. @@ -209,31 +194,24 @@ - - - - - - + + + User defined BiDi algorithm override function. Return [code]Array[/code] of [code]Vector2i[/code] text ranges, in the left-to-right order. Ranges should cover full source [code]text[/code] without overlaps. BiDi algorithm will be used on each range separately. - - + Marks an input event as handled. Once you accept an input event, it stops propagating, even to nodes listening to [method Node._unhandled_input] or [method Node._unhandled_key_input]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme [Color] with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_color_override]. See also [method get_theme_color]. @@ -259,60 +237,45 @@ - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme constant with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_constant_override]. See also [method get_theme_constant]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme [Font] with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_font_override]. See also [method get_theme_font]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme font size with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_font_size_override]. See also [method get_theme_font_size]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme icon with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_icon_override]. See also [method get_theme_icon]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a local override for a theme [StyleBox] with the specified [code]name[/code]. Local overrides always take precedence when fetching theme items for the control. An override can be removed with [method remove_theme_stylebox_override]. See also [method get_theme_stylebox]. @@ -344,137 +307,112 @@ - - + Finds the next (below in the tree) [Control] that can receive the focus. - - + Finds the previous (above in the tree) [Control] that can receive the focus. - - - - - - + + + Forces drag and bypasses [method _get_drag_data] and [method set_drag_preview] by passing [code]data[/code] and [code]preview[/code]. Drag will start even if the mouse is neither over nor pressed on this control. The methods [method _can_drop_data] and [method _drop_data] must be implemented on controls that want to receive drop data. - - - - + + Returns the anchor for the specified [enum Side]. A getter method for [member anchor_bottom], [member anchor_left], [member anchor_right] and [member anchor_top]. - - + Returns [member offset_left] and [member offset_top]. See also [member rect_position]. - - + Returns combined minimum size from [member rect_min_size] and [method get_minimum_size]. - - - - + + Returns the mouse cursor shape the control displays on mouse hover. See [enum CursorShape]. - - + Returns [member offset_right] and [member offset_bottom]. - - - - + + Returns the focus neighbor for the specified [enum Side]. A getter method for [member focus_neighbor_bottom], [member focus_neighbor_left], [member focus_neighbor_right] and [member focus_neighbor_top]. - - + Returns the control that has the keyboard focus or [code]null[/code] if none. - - + Returns the position and size of the control relative to the top-left corner of the screen. See [member rect_position] and [member rect_size]. - - + Returns the minimum size for this control. See [member rect_min_size]. - - - - + + Returns the anchor for the specified [enum Side]. A getter method for [member offset_bottom], [member offset_left], [member offset_right] and [member offset_top]. - - + Returns the width/height occupied in the parent control. - - + Returns the parent control node. - - + Returns the position and size of the control relative to the top-left corner of the parent Control. See [member rect_position] and [member rect_size]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a [Color] from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has a color item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]theme_type[/code] is omitted the class name of the current control is used as the type, or [member theme_type_variation] if it is defined. If the type is a class name its parent classes are also checked, in order of inheritance. If the type is a variation its base types are checked, in order of dependency, then the control's class name and its parent classes are checked. For the current control its local overrides are considered first (see [method add_theme_color_override]), then its assigned [member theme]. After the current control, each parent control and its assigned [member theme] are considered; controls without a [member theme] assigned are skipped. If no matching [Theme] is found in the tree, a custom project [Theme] (see [member ProjectSettings.gui/theme/custom]) and the default [Theme] are used. @@ -499,77 +437,59 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a constant from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has a constant item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - - - + + + Returns a [Font] from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has a font item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - - - + + + Returns a font size from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has a font size item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - - - + + + Returns an icon from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has an icon item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - - - + + + Returns a [StyleBox] from the first matching [Theme] in the tree if that [Theme] has a stylebox item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns the tooltip, which will appear when the cursor is resting over this control. See [member hint_tooltip]. - - + Creates an [InputEventMouseButton] that attempts to click the control. If the event is received, the control acquires focus. [codeblocks] @@ -587,237 +507,185 @@ - - + Steal the focus from another control and become the focused control (see [member focus_mode]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this is the current focused control. See [member focus_mode]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has a color item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme [Color] with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_color_override]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has a constant item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme constant with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_constant_override]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has a font item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme [Font] with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_font_override]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has a font size item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme font size with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_font_size_override]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has an icon item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme icon with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_icon_override]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a matching [Theme] in the tree that has a stylebox item with the specified [code]name[/code] and [code]theme_type[/code]. See [method get_theme_color] for details. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a local override for a theme [StyleBox] with the specified [code]name[/code] in this [Control] node. See [method add_theme_stylebox_override]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if layout is right-to-left. - - + Invalidates the size cache in this node and in parent nodes up to top_level. Intended to be used with [method get_minimum_size] when the return value is changed. Setting [member rect_min_size] directly calls this method automatically. - - + Give up the focus. No other control will be able to receive keyboard input. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme [Color] with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_color_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme constant with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_constant_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme [Font] with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_font_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme font size with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_font_size_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme icon with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_icon_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - + + Removes a local override for a theme [StyleBox] with the specified [code]name[/code] previously added by [method add_theme_stylebox_override] or via the Inspector dock. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the anchor for the specified [enum Side] to [code]anchor[/code]. A setter method for [member anchor_bottom], [member anchor_left], [member anchor_right] and [member anchor_top]. If [code]keep_offset[/code] is [code]true[/code], offsets aren't updated after this operation. @@ -825,59 +693,43 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Works the same as [method set_anchor], but instead of [code]keep_offset[/code] argument and automatic update of offset, it allows to set the offset yourself (see [method set_offset]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets both anchor preset and offset preset. See [method set_anchors_preset] and [method set_offsets_preset]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the anchors to a [code]preset[/code] from [enum Control.LayoutPreset] enum. This is the code equivalent to using the Layout menu in the 2D editor. If [code]keep_offsets[/code] is [code]true[/code], control's position will also be updated. - - - - + + Sets [member offset_left] and [member offset_top] at the same time. Equivalent of changing [member rect_position]. - - - - + + Forwards the handling of this control's drag and drop to [code]target[/code] control. Forwarding can be implemented in the target control similar to the methods [method _get_drag_data], [method _can_drop_data], and [method _drop_data] but with two differences: @@ -941,10 +793,8 @@ - - - - + + Shows the given control at the mouse pointer. A good time to call this method is in [method _get_drag_data]. The control must not be in the scene tree. You should not free the control, and you should not keep a reference to the control beyond the duration of the drag. It will be deleted automatically after the drag has ended. [codeblocks] @@ -977,57 +827,42 @@ - - - - + + Sets [member offset_right] and [member offset_bottom] at the same time. - - - - - - + + + Sets the anchor for the specified [enum Side] to the [Control] at [code]neighbor[/code] node path. A setter method for [member focus_neighbor_bottom], [member focus_neighbor_left], [member focus_neighbor_right] and [member focus_neighbor_top]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [member rect_global_position] to given [code]position[/code]. If [code]keep_offsets[/code] is [code]true[/code], control's anchors will be updated instead of offsets. - - - - - - + + + Sets the offset for the specified [enum Side] to [code]offset[/code]. A setter method for [member offset_bottom], [member offset_left], [member offset_right] and [member offset_top]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the offsets to a [code]preset[/code] from [enum Control.LayoutPreset] enum. This is the code equivalent to using the Layout menu in the 2D editor. Use parameter [code]resize_mode[/code] with constants from [enum Control.LayoutPresetMode] to better determine the resulting size of the [Control]. Constant size will be ignored if used with presets that change size, e.g. [code]PRESET_LEFT_WIDE[/code]. @@ -1035,34 +870,26 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the [member rect_position] to given [code]position[/code]. If [code]keep_offsets[/code] is [code]true[/code], control's anchors will be updated instead of offsets. - - - - - - + + + Sets the size (see [member rect_size]). If [code]keep_offsets[/code] is [code]true[/code], control's anchors will be updated instead of offsets. - - - - + + Moves the mouse cursor to [code]to_position[/code], relative to [member rect_position] of this [Control]. @@ -1218,8 +1045,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the node receives an [InputEvent]. diff --git a/doc/classes/ConvexPolygonShape2D.xml b/doc/classes/ConvexPolygonShape2D.xml index d53900e6c52..243605e2b7e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ConvexPolygonShape2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ConvexPolygonShape2D.xml @@ -11,10 +11,8 @@ - - - - + + Based on the set of points provided, this creates and assigns the [member points] property using the convex hull algorithm. Removing all unneeded points. See [method Geometry2D.convex_hull] for details. diff --git a/doc/classes/Crypto.xml b/doc/classes/Crypto.xml index deda6116f41..3d7ca956da6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Crypto.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Crypto.xml @@ -74,70 +74,52 @@ - - - - - - + + + Compares two [PackedByteArray]s for equality without leaking timing information in order to prevent timing attacks. See [url=https://paragonie.com/blog/2015/11/preventing-timing-attacks-on-string-comparison-with-double-hmac-strategy]this blog post[/url] for more information. - - - - - - + + + Decrypt the given [code]ciphertext[/code] with the provided private [code]key[/code]. [b]Note[/b]: The maximum size of accepted ciphertext is limited by the key size. - - - - - - + + + Encrypt the given [code]plaintext[/code] with the provided public [code]key[/code]. [b]Note[/b]: The maximum size of accepted plaintext is limited by the key size. - - - - + + Generates a [PackedByteArray] of cryptographically secure random bytes with given [code]size[/code]. - - - - + + Generates an RSA [CryptoKey] that can be used for creating self-signed certificates and passed to [method StreamPeerSSL.accept_stream]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Generates a self-signed [X509Certificate] from the given [CryptoKey] and [code]issuer_name[/code]. The certificate validity will be defined by [code]not_before[/code] and [code]not_after[/code] (first valid date and last valid date). The [code]issuer_name[/code] must contain at least "CN=" (common name, i.e. the domain name), "O=" (organization, i.e. your company name), "C=" (country, i.e. 2 lettered ISO-3166 code of the country the organization is based in). A small example to generate an RSA key and a X509 self-signed certificate. @@ -160,43 +142,30 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Generates an [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HMAC]HMAC[/url] digest of [code]msg[/code] using [code]key[/code]. The [code]hash_type[/code] parameter is the hashing algorithm that is used for the inner and outer hashes. Currently, only [constant HashingContext.HASH_SHA256] and [constant HashingContext.HASH_SHA1] are supported. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sign a given [code]hash[/code] of type [code]hash_type[/code] with the provided private [code]key[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Verify that a given [code]signature[/code] for [code]hash[/code] of type [code]hash_type[/code] against the provided public [code]key[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/CryptoKey.xml b/doc/classes/CryptoKey.xml index 26b3087b217..afe2c6b3012 100644 --- a/doc/classes/CryptoKey.xml +++ b/doc/classes/CryptoKey.xml @@ -12,52 +12,40 @@ - - + Return [code]true[/code] if this CryptoKey only has the public part, and not the private one. - - - - - - + + + Loads a key from [code]path[/code]. If [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], only the public key will be loaded. [b]Note[/b]: [code]path[/code] should be a "*.pub" file if [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], a "*.key" file otherwise. - - - - - - + + + Loads a key from the given [code]string[/code]. If [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], only the public key will be loaded. - - - - - - + + + Saves a key to the given [code]path[/code]. If [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], only the public key will be saved. [b]Note[/b]: [code]path[/code] should be a "*.pub" file if [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], a "*.key" file otherwise. - - - - + + Returns a string containing the key in PEM format. If [code]public_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], only the public key will be included. diff --git a/doc/classes/Curve.xml b/doc/classes/Curve.xml index e47c420a3b1..2c337c32db2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Curve.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Curve.xml @@ -10,184 +10,140 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a point to the curve. For each side, if the [code]*_mode[/code] is [constant TANGENT_LINEAR], the [code]*_tangent[/code] angle (in degrees) uses the slope of the curve halfway to the adjacent point. Allows custom assignments to the [code]*_tangent[/code] angle if [code]*_mode[/code] is set to [constant TANGENT_FREE]. - - + Recomputes the baked cache of points for the curve. - - + Removes points that are closer than [code]CMP_EPSILON[/code] (0.00001) units to their neighbor on the curve. - - + Removes all points from the curve. - - + Returns the number of points describing the curve. - - - - + + Returns the left [enum TangentMode] for the point at [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the left tangent angle (in degrees) for the point at [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the curve coordinates for the point at [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the right [enum TangentMode] for the point at [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the right tangent angle (in degrees) for the point at [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the Y value for the point that would exist at the X position [code]offset[/code] along the curve. - - - - + + Returns the Y value for the point that would exist at the X position [code]offset[/code] along the curve using the baked cache. Bakes the curve's points if not already baked. - - - - + + Removes the point at [code]index[/code] from the curve. - - - - - - + + + Sets the left [enum TangentMode] for the point at [code]index[/code] to [code]mode[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the left tangent angle for the point at [code]index[/code] to [code]tangent[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the offset from [code]0.5[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the right [enum TangentMode] for the point at [code]index[/code] to [code]mode[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the right tangent angle for the point at [code]index[/code] to [code]tangent[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Assigns the vertical position [code]y[/code] to the point at [code]index[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Curve2D.xml b/doc/classes/Curve2D.xml index c9fcbd2892e..c02b0f7eadb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Curve2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Curve2D.xml @@ -11,115 +11,90 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a point to a curve at [code]position[/code], with control points [code]in[/code] and [code]out[/code]. If [code]at_position[/code] is given, the point is inserted before the point number [code]at_position[/code], moving that point (and every point after) after the inserted point. If [code]at_position[/code] is not given, or is an illegal value ([code]at_position <0[/code] or [code]at_position >= [method get_point_count][/code]), the point will be appended at the end of the point list. - - + Removes all points from the curve. - - + Returns the total length of the curve, based on the cached points. Given enough density (see [member bake_interval]), it should be approximate enough. - - + Returns the cache of points as a [PackedVector2Array]. - - - - + + Returns the closest offset to [code]to_point[/code]. This offset is meant to be used in [method interpolate_baked]. [code]to_point[/code] must be in this curve's local space. - - - - + + Returns the closest baked point (in curve's local space) to [code]to_point[/code]. [code]to_point[/code] must be in this curve's local space. - - + Returns the number of points describing the curve. - - - - + + Returns the position of the control point leading to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. The returned position is relative to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the control point leading out of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. The returned position is relative to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the position between the vertex [code]idx[/code] and the vertex [code]idx + 1[/code], where [code]t[/code] controls if the point is the first vertex ([code]t = 0.0[/code]), the last vertex ([code]t = 1.0[/code]), or in between. Values of [code]t[/code] outside the range ([code]0.0 >= t <=1[/code]) give strange, but predictable results. If [code]idx[/code] is out of bounds it is truncated to the first or last vertex, and [code]t[/code] is ignored. If the curve has no points, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a point within the curve at position [code]offset[/code], where [code]offset[/code] is measured as a pixel distance along the curve. To do that, it finds the two cached points where the [code]offset[/code] lies between, then interpolates the values. This interpolation is cubic if [code]cubic[/code] is set to [code]true[/code], or linear if set to [code]false[/code]. @@ -127,63 +102,47 @@ - - - - + + Returns the position at the vertex [code]fofs[/code]. It calls [method interpolate] using the integer part of [code]fofs[/code] as [code]idx[/code], and its fractional part as [code]t[/code]. - - - - + + Deletes the point [code]idx[/code] from the curve. Sends an error to the console if [code]idx[/code] is out of bounds. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the control point leading to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. The position is relative to the vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the control point leading out of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. The position is relative to the vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position for the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. - - - - - - + + + Returns a list of points along the curve, with a curvature controlled point density. That is, the curvier parts will have more points than the straighter parts. This approximation makes straight segments between each point, then subdivides those segments until the resulting shape is similar enough. diff --git a/doc/classes/Curve3D.xml b/doc/classes/Curve3D.xml index fdf96b42624..5839ccba020 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Curve3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Curve3D.xml @@ -11,139 +11,110 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a point to a curve at [code]position[/code], with control points [code]in[/code] and [code]out[/code]. If [code]at_position[/code] is given, the point is inserted before the point number [code]at_position[/code], moving that point (and every point after) after the inserted point. If [code]at_position[/code] is not given, or is an illegal value ([code]at_position <0[/code] or [code]at_position >= [method get_point_count][/code]), the point will be appended at the end of the point list. - - + Removes all points from the curve. - - + Returns the total length of the curve, based on the cached points. Given enough density (see [member bake_interval]), it should be approximate enough. - - + Returns the cache of points as a [PackedVector3Array]. - - + Returns the cache of tilts as a [PackedFloat32Array]. - - + Returns the cache of up vectors as a [PackedVector3Array]. If [member up_vector_enabled] is [code]false[/code], the cache will be empty. - - - - + + Returns the closest offset to [code]to_point[/code]. This offset is meant to be used in [method interpolate_baked] or [method interpolate_baked_up_vector]. [code]to_point[/code] must be in this curve's local space. - - - - + + Returns the closest baked point (in curve's local space) to [code]to_point[/code]. [code]to_point[/code] must be in this curve's local space. - - + Returns the number of points describing the curve. - - - - + + Returns the position of the control point leading to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. The returned position is relative to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0, 0)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the control point leading out of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. The returned position is relative to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0, 0)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the position of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0, 0)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the tilt angle in radians for the point [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code]0[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the position between the vertex [code]idx[/code] and the vertex [code]idx + 1[/code], where [code]t[/code] controls if the point is the first vertex ([code]t = 0.0[/code]), the last vertex ([code]t = 1.0[/code]), or in between. Values of [code]t[/code] outside the range ([code]0.0 >= t <=1[/code]) give strange, but predictable results. If [code]idx[/code] is out of bounds it is truncated to the first or last vertex, and [code]t[/code] is ignored. If the curve has no points, the function sends an error to the console, and returns [code](0, 0, 0)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a point within the curve at position [code]offset[/code], where [code]offset[/code] is measured as a distance in 3D units along the curve. To do that, it finds the two cached points where the [code]offset[/code] lies between, then interpolates the values. This interpolation is cubic if [code]cubic[/code] is set to [code]true[/code], or linear if set to [code]false[/code]. @@ -151,12 +122,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns an up vector within the curve at position [code]offset[/code], where [code]offset[/code] is measured as a distance in 3D units along the curve. To do that, it finds the two cached up vectors where the [code]offset[/code] lies between, then interpolates the values. If [code]apply_tilt[/code] is [code]true[/code], an interpolated tilt is applied to the interpolated up vector. @@ -164,75 +132,56 @@ - - - - + + Returns the position at the vertex [code]fofs[/code]. It calls [method interpolate] using the integer part of [code]fofs[/code] as [code]idx[/code], and its fractional part as [code]t[/code]. - - - - + + Deletes the point [code]idx[/code] from the curve. Sends an error to the console if [code]idx[/code] is out of bounds. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the control point leading to the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. The position is relative to the vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the control point leading out of the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. The position is relative to the vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position for the vertex [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. - - - - - - + + + Sets the tilt angle in radians for the point [code]idx[/code]. If the index is out of bounds, the function sends an error to the console. The tilt controls the rotation along the look-at axis an object traveling the path would have. In the case of a curve controlling a [PathFollow3D], this tilt is an offset over the natural tilt the [PathFollow3D] calculates. - - - - - - + + + Returns a list of points along the curve, with a curvature controlled point density. That is, the curvier parts will have more points than the straighter parts. This approximation makes straight segments between each point, then subdivides those segments until the resulting shape is similar enough. diff --git a/doc/classes/DTLSServer.xml b/doc/classes/DTLSServer.xml index 28d68d309f0..627a7a65a5c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/DTLSServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/DTLSServer.xml @@ -147,23 +147,17 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Setup the DTLS server to use the given [code]private_key[/code] and provide the given [code]certificate[/code] to clients. You can pass the optional [code]chain[/code] parameter to provide additional CA chain information along with the certificate. - - - - + + Try to initiate the DTLS handshake with the given [code]udp_peer[/code] which must be already connected (see [method PacketPeerUDP.connect_to_host]). [b]Note[/b]: You must check that the state of the return PacketPeerUDP is [constant PacketPeerDTLS.STATUS_HANDSHAKING], as it is normal that 50% of the new connections will be invalid due to cookie exchange. diff --git a/doc/classes/Decal.xml b/doc/classes/Decal.xml index e84cea7c304..e993fc6198a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Decal.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Decal.xml @@ -12,10 +12,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the [Texture2D] associated with the specified [enum DecalTexture]. This is a convenience method, in most cases you should access the texture directly. For example, instead of [code]albedo_tex = $Decal.get_texture(Decal.TEXTURE_ALBEDO)[/code], use [code]albedo_tex = $Decal.texture_albedo[/code]. @@ -35,12 +33,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Texture2D] associated with the specified [enum DecalTexture]. This is a convenience method, in most cases you should access the texture directly. For example, instead of [code]$Decal.set_texture(Decal.TEXTURE_ALBEDO, albedo_tex)[/code], use [code]$Decal.texture_albedo = albedo_tex[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Dictionary.xml b/doc/classes/Dictionary.xml index 16c4348994b..59088f33fd8 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Dictionary.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Dictionary.xml @@ -184,62 +184,49 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [Dictionary]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Dictionary] as a copy of the given [Dictionary]. - - + Clear the dictionary, removing all key/value pairs. - - - - + + Creates a copy of the dictionary, and returns it. The [code]deep[/code] parameter causes inner dictionaries and arrays to be copied recursively, but does not apply to objects. - - - - + + Erase a dictionary key/value pair by key. Returns [code]true[/code] if the given key was present in the dictionary, [code]false[/code] otherwise. Does not erase elements while iterating over the dictionary. - - - - - - + + + Returns the current value for the specified key in the [Dictionary]. If the key does not exist, the method returns the value of the optional default argument, or [code]null[/code] if it is omitted. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the dictionary has a given key. [b]Note:[/b] This is equivalent to using the [code]in[/code] operator as follows: @@ -261,17 +248,14 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the dictionary has all the keys in the given array. - - + Returns a hashed integer value representing the dictionary contents. This can be used to compare dictionaries by value: [codeblocks] @@ -293,53 +277,43 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the dictionary is empty. - - + Returns the list of keys in the [Dictionary]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Returns the number of keys in the dictionary. - - + Returns the list of values in the [Dictionary]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Directory.xml b/doc/classes/Directory.xml index ff92f6c5ef6..919960cc9fd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Directory.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Directory.xml @@ -58,106 +58,86 @@ - - - - + + Changes the currently opened directory to the one passed as an argument. The argument can be relative to the current directory (e.g. [code]newdir[/code] or [code]../newdir[/code]), or an absolute path (e.g. [code]/tmp/newdir[/code] or [code]res://somedir/newdir[/code]). Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Copies the [code]from[/code] file to the [code]to[/code] destination. Both arguments should be paths to files, either relative or absolute. If the destination file exists and is not access-protected, it will be overwritten. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - + Returns whether the current item processed with the last [method get_next] call is a directory ([code].[/code] and [code]..[/code] are considered directories). - - - - + + Returns whether the target directory exists. The argument can be relative to the current directory, or an absolute path. If the [Directory] is not open, the path is relative to [code]res://[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether the target file exists. The argument can be relative to the current directory, or an absolute path. If the [Directory] is not open, the path is relative to [code]res://[/code]. - - + Returns the absolute path to the currently opened directory (e.g. [code]res://folder[/code] or [code]C:\tmp\folder[/code]). - - + Returns the currently opened directory's drive index. See [method get_drive] to convert returned index to the name of the drive. - - - - + + On Windows, returns the name of the drive (partition) passed as an argument (e.g. [code]C:[/code]). On other platforms, or if the requested drive does not exist, the method returns an empty String. - - + On Windows, returns the number of drives (partitions) mounted on the current filesystem. On other platforms, the method returns 0. - - + Returns the next element (file or directory) in the current directory (including [code].[/code] and [code]..[/code], unless [code]skip_navigational[/code] was given to [method list_dir_begin]). The name of the file or directory is returned (and not its full path). Once the stream has been fully processed, the method returns an empty String and closes the stream automatically (i.e. [method list_dir_end] would not be mandatory in such a case). - - + On UNIX desktop systems, returns the available space on the current directory's disk. On other platforms, this information is not available and the method returns 0 or -1. - - - - - - + + + Initializes the stream used to list all files and directories using the [method get_next] function, closing the currently opened stream if needed. Once the stream has been processed, it should typically be closed with [method list_dir_end]. If [code]show_navigational[/code] is [code]true[/code], [code].[/code] and [code]..[/code] are included too. @@ -165,59 +145,47 @@ - - + Closes the current stream opened with [method list_dir_begin] (whether it has been fully processed with [method get_next] does not matter). - - - - + + Creates a directory. The argument can be relative to the current directory, or an absolute path. The target directory should be placed in an already existing directory (to create the full path recursively, see [method make_dir_recursive]). Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - + + Creates a target directory and all necessary intermediate directories in its path, by calling [method make_dir] recursively. The argument can be relative to the current directory, or an absolute path. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - + + Opens an existing directory of the filesystem. The [code]path[/code] argument can be within the project tree ([code]res://folder[/code]), the user directory ([code]user://folder[/code]) or an absolute path of the user filesystem (e.g. [code]/tmp/folder[/code] or [code]C:\tmp\folder[/code]). Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - + + Deletes the target file or an empty directory. The argument can be relative to the current directory, or an absolute path. If the target directory is not empty, the operation will fail. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). - - - - - - + + + Renames (move) the [code]from[/code] file to the [code]to[/code] destination. Both arguments should be paths to files, either relative or absolute. If the destination file exists and is not access-protected, it will be overwritten. Returns one of the [enum Error] code constants ([code]OK[/code] on success). diff --git a/doc/classes/DisplayServer.xml b/doc/classes/DisplayServer.xml index 5c9bcc5014e..abb715b34e4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/DisplayServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/DisplayServer.xml @@ -8,470 +8,345 @@ - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + Returns active keyboard layout index. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - + Returns the number of keyboard layouts. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - - - + + Returns the ISO-639/BCP-47 language code of the keyboard layout at position [code]index[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - - - + + Returns the localized name of the keyboard layout at position [code]index[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - - - + + Sets active keyboard layout. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + Returns the dots per inch density of the specified screen. If [code]screen[/code] is [/code]SCREEN_OF_MAIN_WINDOW[/code] (the default value), a screen with the main window will be used. [b]Note:[/b] On macOS, returned value is inaccurate if fractional display scaling mode is used. @@ -488,8 +363,7 @@ - - + Return the greatest scale factor of all screens. [b]Note:[/b] On macOS returned value is [code]2.0[/code] if there is at least one hiDPI (Retina) screen in the system, and [code]1.0[/code] in all other cases. @@ -497,26 +371,20 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Return the scale factor of the specified screen by index. [b]Note:[/b] On macOS returned value is [code]2.0[/code] for hiDPI (Retina) screen, and [code]1.0[/code] for all other cases. @@ -524,134 +392,103 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Returns current active tablet driver name. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Windows. - - + Returns the total number of available tablet drivers. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Windows. - - - - + + Returns the tablet driver name for the given index. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Windows. - - - - + + Set active tablet driver name. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Windows. - - + Returns the on-screen keyboard's height in pixels. Returns 0 if there is no keyboard or if it is currently hidden. - - + Hides the virtual keyboard if it is shown, does nothing otherwise. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Shows the virtual keyboard if the platform has one. [code]existing_text[/code] parameter is useful for implementing your own [LineEdit] or [TextEdit], as it tells the virtual keyboard what text has already been typed (the virtual keyboard uses it for auto-correct and predictions). @@ -664,231 +501,167 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the VSync mode of the given window. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a polygonal region of the window which accepts mouse events. Mouse events outside the region will be passed through. Passing an empty array will disable passthrough support (all mouse events will be intercepted by the window, which is the default behavior). @@ -919,62 +692,44 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the VSync mode of the given window. See [enum DisplayServer.VSyncMode] for possible values and how they affect the behavior of your application. @@ -982,12 +737,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorDebuggerPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorDebuggerPlugin.xml index 9484d33252f..d67df8dfeee 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorDebuggerPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorDebuggerPlugin.xml @@ -12,63 +12,50 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a message capture with given name is present otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the game is in break state otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the game can be debugged otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is an instance of the game running with the attached debugger otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Registers a message capture with given [code]name[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is "my_message" then messages starting with "my_message:" will be called with the given callable. Callable must accept a message string and a data array as argument. If the message and data are valid then callable must return [code]true[/code] otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sends a message with given [code]message[/code] and [code]data[/code] array. - - - - + + Unregisters the message capture with given name. @@ -76,8 +63,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the game enters a break state. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorExportPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorExportPlugin.xml index d9e3003fbbb..16c50b4d3e5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorExportPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorExportPlugin.xml @@ -10,77 +10,57 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Virtual method to be overridden by the user. It is called when the export starts and provides all information about the export. [code]features[/code] is the list of features for the export, [code]is_debug[/code] is [code]true[/code] for debug builds, [code]path[/code] is the target path for the exported project. [code]flags[/code] is only used when running a runnable profile, e.g. when using native run on Android. - - + Virtual method to be overridden by the user. Called when the export is finished. - - - - - - - - + + + + Virtual method to be overridden by the user. Called for each exported file, providing arguments that can be used to identify the file. [code]path[/code] is the path of the file, [code]type[/code] is the [Resource] represented by the file (e.g. [PackedScene]) and [code]features[/code] is the list of features for the export. Calling [method skip] inside this callback will make the file not included in the export. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a custom file to be exported. [code]path[/code] is the virtual path that can be used to load the file, [code]file[/code] is the binary data of the file. If [code]remap[/code] is [code]true[/code], file will not be exported, but instead remapped to the given [code]path[/code]. - - - - + + Adds an iOS bundle file from the given [code]path[/code] to the exported project. - - - - + + Adds a C++ code to the iOS export. The final code is created from the code appended by each active export plugin. - - - - + + Adds a dynamic library (*.dylib, *.framework) to Linking Phase in iOS's Xcode project and embeds it into resulting binary. [b]Note:[/b] For static libraries (*.a) works in same way as [code]add_ios_framework[/code]. @@ -88,55 +68,43 @@ - - - - + + Adds a static library (*.a) or dynamic library (*.dylib, *.framework) to Linking Phase in iOS's Xcode project. - - - - + + Adds linker flags for the iOS export. - - - - + + Adds content for iOS Property List files. - - - - + + Adds a static lib from the given [code]path[/code] to the iOS project. - - - - - - + + + Adds a shared object with the given [code]tags[/code] and destination [code]path[/code]. - - + To be called inside [method _export_file]. Skips the current file, so it's not included in the export. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorFeatureProfile.xml b/doc/classes/EditorFeatureProfile.xml index 0cd839f3706..a41730d5d0b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorFeatureProfile.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorFeatureProfile.xml @@ -11,112 +11,84 @@ - - - - + + Returns the specified [code]feature[/code]'s human-readable name. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the class specified by [code]class_name[/code] is disabled. When disabled, the class won't appear in the Create New Node dialog. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if editing for the class specified by [code]class_name[/code] is disabled. When disabled, the class will still appear in the Create New Node dialog but the inspector will be read-only when selecting a node that extends the class. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]property[/code] is disabled in the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. When a property is disabled, it won't appear in the inspector when selecting a node that extends the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [code]feature[/code] is disabled. When a feature is disabled, it will disappear from the editor entirely. - - - - + + Loads an editor feature profile from a file. The file must follow the JSON format obtained by using the feature profile manager's [b]Export[/b] button or the [method save_to_file] method. - - - - + + Saves the editor feature profile to a file in JSON format. It can then be imported using the feature profile manager's [b]Import[/b] button or the [method load_from_file] button. - - - - - - + + + If [code]disable[/code] is [code]true[/code], disables the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. When disabled, the class won't appear in the Create New Node dialog. - - - - - - + + + If [code]disable[/code] is [code]true[/code], disables editing for the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. When disabled, the class will still appear in the Create New Node dialog but the inspector will be read-only when selecting a node that extends the class. - - - - - - - - + + + + If [code]disable[/code] is [code]true[/code], disables editing for [code]property[/code] in the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. When a property is disabled, it won't appear in the inspector when selecting a node that extends the class specified by [code]class_name[/code]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]disable[/code] is [code]true[/code], disables the editor feature specified in [code]feature[/code]. When a feature is disabled, it will disappear from the editor entirely. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorFileDialog.xml b/doc/classes/EditorFileDialog.xml index 084459e5182..53fba9f3b8a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorFileDialog.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorFileDialog.xml @@ -9,32 +9,27 @@ - - - - + + Adds a comma-delimited file extension filter option to the [EditorFileDialog] with an optional semi-colon-delimited label. For example, [code]"*.tscn, *.scn; Scenes"[/code] results in filter text "Scenes (*.tscn, *.scn)". - - + Removes all filters except for "All Files (*)". - - + Returns the [code]VBoxContainer[/code] used to display the file system. - - + Notify the [EditorFileDialog] that its view of the data is no longer accurate. Updates the view contents on next view update. @@ -70,22 +65,19 @@ - - + Emitted when a directory is selected. - - + Emitted when a file is selected. - - + Emitted when multiple files are selected. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorFileSystem.xml b/doc/classes/EditorFileSystem.xml index 3a045817c25..6b4a2b03a3f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorFileSystem.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorFileSystem.xml @@ -11,70 +11,58 @@ - - - - + + Gets the type of the file, given the full path. - - + Gets the root directory object. - - - - + + Returns a view into the filesystem at [code]path[/code]. - - + Returns the scan progress for 0 to 1 if the FS is being scanned. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] of the filesystem is being scanned. - - + Scan the filesystem for changes. - - + Check if the source of any imported resource changed. - - - - + + Update a file information. Call this if an external program (not Godot) modified the file. - - + Scans the script files and updates the list of custom class names. @@ -87,22 +75,19 @@ - - + Emitted if a resource is reimported. - - + Emitted if at least one resource is reloaded when the filesystem is scanned. - - + Emitted if the source of any imported file changed. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorFileSystemDirectory.xml b/doc/classes/EditorFileSystemDirectory.xml index b852ae10634..28793cb8afb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorFileSystemDirectory.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorFileSystemDirectory.xml @@ -10,117 +10,94 @@ - - - - + + Returns the index of the directory with name [code]name[/code] or [code]-1[/code] if not found. - - - - + + Returns the index of the file with name [code]name[/code] or [code]-1[/code] if not found. - - - - + + Returns the name of the file at index [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of files in this directory. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the file at index [code]idx[/code] imported properly. - - - - + + Returns the path to the file at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the base class of the script class defined in the file at index [code]idx[/code]. If the file doesn't define a script class using the [code]class_name[/code] syntax, this will return an empty string. - - - - + + Returns the name of the script class defined in the file at index [code]idx[/code]. If the file doesn't define a script class using the [code]class_name[/code] syntax, this will return an empty string. - - - - + + Returns the file extension of the file at index [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the name of this directory. - - + Returns the parent directory for this directory or [code]null[/code] if called on a directory at [code]res://[/code] or [code]user://[/code]. - - + Returns the path to this directory. - - - - + + Returns the subdirectory at index [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of subdirectories in this directory. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorImportPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorImportPlugin.xml index 1722b278f82..b379ccc8c6e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorImportPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorImportPlugin.xml @@ -114,35 +114,28 @@ - - - - + + Gets the options and default values for the preset at this index. Returns an Array of Dictionaries with the following keys: [code]name[/code], [code]default_value[/code], [code]property_hint[/code] (optional), [code]hint_string[/code] (optional), [code]usage[/code] (optional). - - + Gets the order of this importer to be run when importing resources. Importers with [i]lower[/i] import orders will be called first, and higher values will be called later. Use this to ensure the importer runs after the dependencies are already imported. The default import order is [code]0[/code] unless overridden by a specific importer. See [enum ResourceImporter.ImportOrder] for some predefined values. - - + Gets the unique name of the importer. - - - - - - + + + This method can be overridden to hide specific import options if conditions are met. This is mainly useful for hiding options that depend on others if one of them is disabled. For example: [codeblocks] @@ -171,69 +164,55 @@ - - + Gets the number of initial presets defined by the plugin. Use [method _get_import_options] to get the default options for the preset and [method _get_preset_name] to get the name of the preset. - - - - + + Gets the name of the options preset at this index. - - + Gets the priority of this plugin for the recognized extension. Higher priority plugins will be preferred. The default priority is [code]1.0[/code]. - - + Gets the list of file extensions to associate with this loader (case-insensitive). e.g. [code]["obj"][/code]. - - + Gets the Godot resource type associated with this loader. e.g. [code]"Mesh"[/code] or [code]"Animation"[/code]. - - + Gets the extension used to save this resource in the [code].godot/imported[/code] directory. - - + Gets the name to display in the import window. You should choose this name as a continuation to "Import as", e.g. "Import as Special Mesh". - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Imports [code]source_file[/code] into [code]save_path[/code] with the import [code]options[/code] specified. The [code]platform_variants[/code] and [code]gen_files[/code] arrays will be modified by this function. This method must be overridden to do the actual importing work. See this class' description for an example of overriding this method. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorInspector.xml b/doc/classes/EditorInspector.xml index d85f95baff3..515c4b4d323 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorInspector.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorInspector.xml @@ -16,55 +16,46 @@ - - + Emitted when the Edit button of an [Object] has been pressed in the inspector. This is mainly used in the remote scene tree inspector. - - + Emitted when a property is removed from the inspector. - - + Emitted when a property is edited in the inspector. - - + Emitted when a property is keyed in the inspector. Properties can be keyed by clicking the "key" icon next to a property when the Animation panel is toggled. - - + Emitted when a property is selected in the inspector. - - - - + + Emitted when a boolean property is toggled in the inspector. [b]Note:[/b] This signal is never emitted if the internal [code]autoclear[/code] property enabled. Since this property is always enabled in the editor inspector, this signal is never emitted by the editor itself. - - - - + + Emitted when a resource is selected in the inspector. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorInspectorPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorInspectorPlugin.xml index c992d0fbb4d..085568466ab 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorInspectorPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorInspectorPlugin.xml @@ -16,83 +16,62 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this object can be handled by this plugin. - - + Called to allow adding controls at the beginning of the list. - - - - + + Called to allow adding controls at the beginning of the category. - - + Called to allow adding controls at the end of the list. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Called to allow adding property specific editors to the inspector. Usually these inherit [EditorProperty]. Returning [code]true[/code] removes the built-in editor for this property, otherwise allows to insert a custom editor before the built-in one. - - - - + + Adds a custom control, not necessarily a property editor. - - - - - - + + + Adds a property editor, this must inherit [EditorProperty]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an editor that allows modifying multiple properties, this must inherit [EditorProperty]. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorInterface.xml b/doc/classes/EditorInterface.xml index 3f324bf1a07..185b4f8c399 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorInterface.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorInterface.xml @@ -11,267 +11,217 @@ - - - - + + Edits the given [Node]. The node will be also selected if it's inside the scene tree. - - - - + + Edits the given [Resource]. - - + Returns the main container of Godot editor's window. For example, you can use it to retrieve the size of the container and place your controls accordingly. - - + Returns the current path being viewed in the [FileSystemDock]. - - + Returns the edited (current) scene's root [Node]. - - + Returns the main editor control. Use this as a parent for main screens. [b]Note:[/b] This returns the main editor control containing the whole editor, not the 2D or 3D viewports specifically. - - + - - + Returns the actual scale of the editor UI ([code]1.0[/code] being 100% scale). This can be used to adjust position and dimensions of the UI added by plugins. [b]Note:[/b] This value is set via the [code]interface/editor/display_scale[/code] and [code]interface/editor/custom_display_scale[/code] editor settings. Editor must be restarted for changes to be properly applied. - - + Returns the editor's [EditorSettings] instance. - - + Returns the editor's [FileSystemDock] instance. - - + Returns the editor's [EditorInspector] instance. - - + Returns an [Array] with the file paths of the currently opened scenes. - - + Returns the name of the scene that is being played. If no scene is currently being played, returns an empty string. - - + Returns the editor's [EditorFileSystem] instance. - - + Returns the editor's [EditorResourcePreview] instance. - - + Returns the editor's [ScriptEditor] instance. - - + Returns the path of the directory currently selected in the [FileSystemDock]. If a file is selected, its base directory will be returned using [method String.get_base_dir] instead. - - + Returns the editor's [EditorSelection] instance. - - - - - - - - + + + + Shows the given property on the given [code]object[/code] in the editor's Inspector dock. If [code]inspector_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], plugins will not attempt to edit [code]object[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if a scene is currently being played, [code]false[/code] otherwise. Paused scenes are considered as being played. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified [code]plugin[/code] is enabled. The plugin name is the same as its directory name. - - - - - - + + + Returns mesh previews rendered at the given size as an [Array] of [Texture2D]s. - - - - + + Opens the scene at the given path. - - + Plays the currently active scene. - - - - + + Plays the scene specified by its filepath. - - + Plays the main scene. - - - - + + Reloads the scene at the given path. - - + Saves the scene. Returns either [code]OK[/code] or [code]ERR_CANT_CREATE[/code] (see [@GlobalScope] constants). - - - - - - + + + Saves the scene as a file at [code]path[/code]. - - - - + + Selects the file, with the path provided by [code]file[/code], in the FileSystem dock. - - - - + + Sets the editor's current main screen to the one specified in [code]name[/code]. [code]name[/code] must match the text of the tab in question exactly ([code]2D[/code], [code]3D[/code], [code]Script[/code], [code]AssetLib[/code]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the enabled status of a plugin. The plugin name is the same as its directory name. - - + Stops the scene that is currently playing. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmo.xml b/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmo.xml index d4d1e4a6522..39f6805254a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmo.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmo.xml @@ -10,253 +10,189 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to commit a handle being edited (handles must have been previously added by [method add_handles]). This usually means creating an [UndoRedo] action for the change, using the current handle value as "do" and the [code]restore[/code] argument as "undo". If the [code]cancel[/code] argument is [code]true[/code], the [code]restore[/code] value should be directly set, without any [UndoRedo] action. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to commit a group of subgizmos being edited (see [method _subgizmos_intersect_ray] and [method _subgizmos_intersect_frustum]). This usually means creating an [UndoRedo] action for the change, using the current transforms as "do" and the [code]restore[/code] transforms as "undo". If the [code]cancel[/code] argument is [code]true[/code], the [code]restore[/code] transforms should be directly set, without any [UndoRedo] action. - - - - + + Override this method to return the name of an edited handle (handles must have been previously added by [method add_handles]). Handles can be named for reference to the user when editing. - - - - + + Override this method to return the current value of a handle. This value will be requested at the start of an edit and used as the [code]restore[/code] argument in [method _commit_handle]. - - - - + + Override this method to return the current transform of a subgizmo. This transform will be requested at the start of an edit and used as the [code]restore[/code] argument in [method _commit_subgizmos]. - - - - + + Override this method to return [code]true[/code] whenever the given handle should be highlighted in the editor. - - + Override this method to add all the gizmo elements whenever a gizmo update is requested. It's common to call [method clear] at the beginning of this method and then add visual elements depending on the node's properties. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to update the node properties when the user drags a gizmo handle (previously added with [method add_handles]). The provided [code]point[/code] is the mouse position in screen coordinates and the [code]camera[/code] can be used to convert it to raycasts. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to update the node properties during subgizmo editing (see [method _subgizmos_intersect_ray] and [method _subgizmos_intersect_frustum]). The [code]transform[/code] is given in the Node3D's local coordinate system. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to allow selecting subgizmos using mouse drag box selection. Given a [code]camera[/code] and a [code]frustum[/code], this method should return which subgizmos are contained within the frustum. The [code]frustum[/code] argument consists of an [code]Array[/code] with all the [code]Plane[/code]s that make up the selection frustum. The returned value should contain a list of unique subgizmo identifiers, which can have any non-negative value and will be used in other virtual methods like [method _get_subgizmo_transform] or [method _commit_subgizmos]. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to allow selecting subgizmos using mouse clicks. Given a [code]camera[/code] and a [code]point[/code] in screen coordinates, this method should return which subgizmo should be selected. The returned value should be a unique subgizmo identifier, which can have any non-negative value and will be used in other virtual methods like [method _get_subgizmo_transform] or [method _commit_subgizmos]. - - - - + + Adds the specified [code]segments[/code] to the gizmo's collision shape for picking. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - - - + + Adds collision triangles to the gizmo for picking. A [TriangleMesh] can be generated from a regular [Mesh] too. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a list of handles (points) which can be used to edit the properties of the gizmo's Node3D. The [code]ids[/code] argument can be used to specify a custom identifier for each handle, if an empty [code]Array[/code] is passed, the ids will be assigned automatically from the [code]handles[/code] argument order. There are virtual methods which will be called upon editing of these handles. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds lines to the gizmo (as sets of 2 points), with a given material. The lines are used for visualizing the gizmo. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a mesh to the gizmo with the specified [code]material[/code], local [code]transform[/code] and [code]skeleton[/code]. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an unscaled billboard for visualization and selection. Call this method during [method _redraw]. - - + Removes everything in the gizmo including meshes, collisions and handles. - - + Returns the [EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin] that owns this gizmo. It's useful to retrieve materials using [method EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin.get_material]. - - + Returns the Node3D node associated with this gizmo. - - + Returns a list of the currently selected subgizmos. Can be used to highlight selected elements during [method _redraw]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given subgizmo is currently selected. Can be used to highlight selected elements during [method _redraw]. - - - - + + Sets the gizmo's hidden state. If [code]true[/code], the gizmo will be hidden. If [code]false[/code], it will be shown. - - - - + + Sets the reference [Node3D] node for the gizmo. [code]node[/code] must inherit from [Node3D]. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin.xml index 6152487eaf0..fb72427a7aa 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin.xml @@ -11,255 +11,185 @@ - - + Override this method to define whether the gizmos handled by this plugin can be hidden or not. Returns [code]true[/code] if not overridden. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Override this method to commit a handle being edited (handles must have been previously added by [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_handles] during [method _redraw]). This usually means creating an [UndoRedo] action for the change, using the current handle value as "do" and the [code]restore[/code] argument as "undo". If the [code]cancel[/code] argument is [code]true[/code], the [code]restore[/code] value should be directly set, without any [UndoRedo] action. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Override this method to commit a group of subgizmos being edited (see [method _subgizmos_intersect_ray] and [method _subgizmos_intersect_frustum]). This usually means creating an [UndoRedo] action for the change, using the current transforms as "do" and the [code]restore[/code] transforms as "undo". If the [code]cancel[/code] argument is [code]true[/code], the [code]restore[/code] transforms should be directly set, without any [UndoRedo] action. As with all subgizmo methods, transforms are given in local space respect to the gizmo's Node3D. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - + + Override this method to return a custom [EditorNode3DGizmo] for the spatial nodes of your choice, return [code]null[/code] for the rest of nodes. See also [method _has_gizmo]. - - + Override this method to provide the name that will appear in the gizmo visibility menu. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to provide gizmo's handle names. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to return the current value of a handle. This value will be requested at the start of an edit and used as the [code]restore[/code] argument in [method _commit_handle]. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - + Override this method to set the gizmo's priority. Gizmos with higher priority will have precedence when processing inputs like handles or subgizmos selection. All built-in editor gizmos return a priority of [code]-1[/code]. If not overridden, this method will return [code]0[/code], which means custom gizmos will automatically get higher priority than built-in gizmos. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to return the current transform of a subgizmo. As with all subgizmo methods, the transform should be in local space respect to the gizmo's Node3D. This transform will be requested at the start of an edit and used in the [code]restore[/code] argument in [method _commit_subgizmos]. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - + + Override this method to define which Node3D nodes have a gizmo from this plugin. Whenever a [Node3D] node is added to a scene this method is called, if it returns [code]true[/code] the node gets a generic [EditorNode3DGizmo] assigned and is added to this plugin's list of active gizmos. - - - - - - + + + Override this method to return [code]true[/code] whenever to given handle should be highlighted in the editor. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - + Override this method to define whether Node3D with this gizmo should be selectable even when the gizmo is hidden. - - - - + + Override this method to add all the gizmo elements whenever a gizmo update is requested. It's common to call [method EditorNode3DGizmo.clear] at the beginning of this method and then add visual elements depending on the node's properties. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Override this method to update the node's properties when the user drags a gizmo handle (previously added with [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_handles]). The provided [code]point[/code] is the mouse position in screen coordinates and the [code]camera[/code] can be used to convert it to raycasts. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to update the node properties during subgizmo editing (see [method _subgizmos_intersect_ray] and [method _subgizmos_intersect_frustum]). The [code]transform[/code] is given in the Node3D's local coordinate system. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to allow selecting subgizmos using mouse drag box selection. Given a [code]camera[/code] and a [code]frustum[/code], this method should return which subgizmos are contained within the frustum. The [code]frustum[/code] argument consists of an [code]Array[/code] with all the [code]Plane[/code]s that make up the selection frustum. The returned value should contain a list of unique subgizmo identifiers, these identifiers can have any non-negative value and will be used in other virtual methods like [method _get_subgizmo_transform] or [method _commit_subgizmos]. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to allow selecting subgizmos using mouse clicks. Given a [code]camera[/code] and a [code]point[/code] in screen coordinates, this method should return which subgizmo should be selected. The returned value should be a unique subgizmo identifier, which can have any non-negative value and will be used in other virtual methods like [method _get_subgizmo_transform] or [method _commit_subgizmos]. Called for this plugin's active gizmos. - - - - - - + + + Adds a new material to the internal material list for the plugin. It can then be accessed with [method get_material]. Should not be overridden. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates a handle material with its variants (selected and/or editable) and adds them to the internal material list. They can then be accessed with [method get_material] and used in [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_handles]. Should not be overridden. You can optionally provide a texture to use instead of the default icon. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates an icon material with its variants (selected and/or editable) and adds them to the internal material list. They can then be accessed with [method get_material] and used in [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_unscaled_billboard]. Should not be overridden. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Creates an unshaded material with its variants (selected and/or editable) and adds them to the internal material list. They can then be accessed with [method get_material] and used in [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_mesh] and [method EditorNode3DGizmo.add_lines]. Should not be overridden. - - - - - - + + + Gets material from the internal list of materials. If an [EditorNode3DGizmo] is provided, it will try to get the corresponding variant (selected and/or editable). diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorPaths.xml b/doc/classes/EditorPaths.xml index d0d785dbb89..28a8314857e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorPaths.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorPaths.xml @@ -8,32 +8,27 @@ - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorPlugin.xml index efd1d305657..37efca7f48e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorPlugin.xml @@ -11,56 +11,47 @@ - - + This method is called when the editor is about to save the project, switch to another tab, etc. It asks the plugin to apply any pending state changes to ensure consistency. This is used, for example, in shader editors to let the plugin know that it must apply the shader code being written by the user to the object. - - + This method is called when the editor is about to run the project. The plugin can then perform required operations before the project runs. This method must return a boolean. If this method returns [code]false[/code], the project will not run. The run is aborted immediately, so this also prevents all other plugins' [method _build] methods from running. - - + Clear all the state and reset the object being edited to zero. This ensures your plugin does not keep editing a currently existing node, or a node from the wrong scene. - - + Called by the engine when the user disables the [EditorPlugin] in the Plugin tab of the project settings window. - - - - + + This function is used for plugins that edit specific object types (nodes or resources). It requests the editor to edit the given object. - - + Called by the engine when the user enables the [EditorPlugin] in the Plugin tab of the project settings window. - - - - + + Called by the engine when the 2D editor's viewport is updated. Use the [code]overlay[/code] [Control] for drawing. You can update the viewport manually by calling [method update_overlays]. [codeblocks] @@ -97,20 +88,16 @@ - - - - + + This method is the same as [method _forward_canvas_draw_over_viewport], except it draws on top of everything. Useful when you need an extra layer that shows over anything else. You need to enable calling of this method by using [method set_force_draw_over_forwarding_enabled]. - - - - + + Called when there is a root node in the current edited scene, [method _handles] is implemented and an [InputEvent] happens in the 2D viewport. Intercepts the [InputEvent], if [code]return true[/code] [EditorPlugin] consumes the [code]event[/code], otherwise forwards [code]event[/code] to other Editor classes. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -145,10 +132,8 @@ - - - - + + Called by the engine when the 3D editor's viewport is updated. Use the [code]overlay[/code] [Control] for drawing. You can update the viewport manually by calling [method update_overlays]. [codeblocks] @@ -185,22 +170,17 @@ - - - - + + This method is the same as [method _forward_spatial_draw_over_viewport], except it draws on top of everything. Useful when you need an extra layer that shows over anything else. You need to enable calling of this method by using [method set_force_draw_over_forwarding_enabled]. - - - - - - + + + Called when there is a root node in the current edited scene, [method _handles] is implemented and an [InputEvent] happens in the 3D viewport. Intercepts the [InputEvent], if [code]return true[/code] [EditorPlugin] consumes the [code]event[/code], otherwise forwards [code]event[/code] to other Editor classes. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -235,15 +215,13 @@ - - + This is for editors that edit script-based objects. You can return a list of breakpoints in the format ([code]script:line[/code]), for example: [code]res://path_to_script.gd:25[/code]. - - + Override this method in your plugin to return a [Texture2D] in order to give it an icon. For main screen plugins, this appears at the top of the screen, to the right of the "2D", "3D", "Script", and "AssetLib" buttons. @@ -269,109 +247,86 @@ - - + Override this method in your plugin to provide the name of the plugin when displayed in the Godot editor. For main screen plugins, this appears at the top of the screen, to the right of the "2D", "3D", "Script", and "AssetLib" buttons. - - + Gets the state of your plugin editor. This is used when saving the scene (so state is kept when opening it again) and for switching tabs (so state can be restored when the tab returns). - - - - + + Gets the GUI layout of the plugin. This is used to save the project's editor layout when [method queue_save_layout] is called or the editor layout was changed(For example changing the position of a dock). - - - - + + Implement this function if your plugin edits a specific type of object (Resource or Node). If you return [code]true[/code], then you will get the functions [method _edit] and [method _make_visible] called when the editor requests them. If you have declared the methods [method _forward_canvas_gui_input] and [method _forward_spatial_gui_input] these will be called too. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this is a main screen editor plugin (it goes in the workspace selector together with [b]2D[/b], [b]3D[/b], [b]Script[/b] and [b]AssetLib[/b]). - - - - + + This function will be called when the editor is requested to become visible. It is used for plugins that edit a specific object type. Remember that you have to manage the visibility of all your editor controls manually. - - + This method is called after the editor saves the project or when it's closed. It asks the plugin to save edited external scenes/resources. - - - - + + Restore the state saved by [method _get_state]. - - - - + + Restore the plugin GUI layout saved by [method _get_window_layout]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a script at [code]path[/code] to the Autoload list as [code]name[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a control to the bottom panel (together with Output, Debug, Animation, etc). Returns a reference to the button added. It's up to you to hide/show the button when needed. When your plugin is deactivated, make sure to remove your custom control with [method remove_control_from_bottom_panel] and free it with [method Node.queue_free]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a custom control to a container (see [enum CustomControlContainer]). There are many locations where custom controls can be added in the editor UI. Please remember that you have to manage the visibility of your custom controls yourself (and likely hide it after adding it). @@ -379,12 +334,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds the control to a specific dock slot (see [enum DockSlot] for options). If the dock is repositioned and as long as the plugin is active, the editor will save the dock position on further sessions. @@ -392,16 +344,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a custom type, which will appear in the list of nodes or resources. An icon can be optionally passed. When a given node or resource is selected, the base type will be instantiated (e.g. "Node3D", "Control", "Resource"), then the script will be loaded and set to this object. @@ -410,29 +357,23 @@ - - - - + + Adds a [Script] as debugger plugin to the Debugger. The script must extend [EditorDebuggerPlugin]. - - - - + + Registers a new [EditorExportPlugin]. Export plugins are used to perform tasks when the project is being exported. See [method add_inspector_plugin] for an example of how to register a plugin. - - - - + + Registers a new [EditorImportPlugin]. Import plugins are used to import custom and unsupported assets as a custom [Resource] type. [b]Note:[/b] If you want to import custom 3D asset formats use [method add_scene_import_plugin] instead. @@ -440,10 +381,8 @@ - - - - + + Registers a new [EditorInspectorPlugin]. Inspector plugins are used to extend [EditorInspector] and provide custom configuration tools for your object's properties. [b]Note:[/b] Always use [method remove_inspector_plugin] to remove the registered [EditorInspectorPlugin] when your [EditorPlugin] is disabled to prevent leaks and an unexpected behavior. @@ -462,255 +401,202 @@ - - - - + + Registers a new [EditorSceneImporter]. Scene importers are used to import custom 3D asset formats as scenes. - - - - + + Registers a new [EditorNode3DGizmoPlugin]. Gizmo plugins are used to add custom gizmos to the 3D preview viewport for a [Node3D]. See [method add_inspector_plugin] for an example of how to register a plugin. - - - - - - + + + Adds a custom menu item to [b]Project > Tools[/b] named [code]name[/code]. When clicked, the provided [code]callable[/code] will be called. - - - - - - + + + Adds a custom submenu under [b]Project > Tools >[/b] [code]name[/code]. [code]submenu[/code] should be an object of class [PopupMenu]. Use [code]remove_tool_menu_item(name)[/code] on plugin clean up to remove the menu. - - - - + + Registers a custom translation parser plugin for extracting translatable strings from custom files. - - - - + + Hooks a callback into the undo/redo action creation when a property is modified in the inspector. This allows, for example, to save other properties that may be lost when a given property is modified. The callback should have 4 arguments: [Object] [code]undo_redo[/code], [Object] [code]modified_object[/code], [String] [code]property[/code] and [Variant] [code]new_value[/code]. They are, respectively, the [UndoRedo] object used by the inspector, the currently modified object, the name of the modified property and the new value the property is about to take. - - + Returns the [EditorInterface] object that gives you control over Godot editor's window and its functionalities. - - + Gets the Editor's dialogue used for making scripts. [b]Note:[/b] Users can configure it before use. - - + Gets the undo/redo object. Most actions in the editor can be undoable, so use this object to make sure this happens when it's worth it. - - + Minimizes the bottom panel. - - - - + + Makes a specific item in the bottom panel visible. - - + Queue save the project's editor layout. - - - - + + Removes an Autoload [code]name[/code] from the list. - - - - + + Removes the control from the bottom panel. You have to manually [method Node.queue_free] the control. - - - - - - + + + Removes the control from the specified container. You have to manually [method Node.queue_free] the control. - - - - + + Removes the control from the dock. You have to manually [method Node.queue_free] the control. - - - - + + Removes a custom type added by [method add_custom_type]. - - - - + + Removes the debugger plugin with given script from the Debugger. - - - - + + Removes an export plugin registered by [method add_export_plugin]. - - - - + + Removes an import plugin registered by [method add_import_plugin]. - - - - + + Removes an inspector plugin registered by [method add_import_plugin] - - - - + + Removes a scene importer registered by [method add_scene_import_plugin]. - - - - + + Removes a gizmo plugin registered by [method add_spatial_gizmo_plugin]. - - - - + + Removes a menu [code]name[/code] from [b]Project > Tools[/b]. - - - - + + Removes a custom translation parser plugin registered by [method add_translation_parser_plugin]. - - - - + + Removes a callback previsously added by [method add_undo_redo_inspector_hook_callback]. - - + Enables calling of [method _forward_canvas_force_draw_over_viewport] for the 2D editor and [method _forward_spatial_force_draw_over_viewport] for the 3D editor when their viewports are updated. You need to call this method only once and it will work permanently for this plugin. - - + Use this method if you always want to receive inputs from 3D view screen inside [method _forward_spatial_gui_input]. It might be especially usable if your plugin will want to use raycast in the scene. - - + Updates the overlays of the 2D and 3D editor viewport. Causes methods [method _forward_canvas_draw_over_viewport], [method _forward_canvas_force_draw_over_viewport], [method _forward_spatial_draw_over_viewport] and [method _forward_spatial_force_draw_over_viewport] to be called. @@ -718,8 +604,7 @@ - - + Emitted when user changes the workspace ([b]2D[/b], [b]3D[/b], [b]Script[/b], [b]AssetLib[/b]). Also works with custom screens defined by plugins. @@ -729,21 +614,18 @@ - - + - - + Emitted when the scene is changed in the editor. The argument will return the root node of the scene that has just become active. If this scene is new and empty, the argument will be [code]null[/code]. - - + Emitted when user closes a scene. The argument is file path to a closed scene. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorProperty.xml b/doc/classes/EditorProperty.xml index 549d2c1628b..41f42568add 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorProperty.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorProperty.xml @@ -10,62 +10,49 @@ - - + When this virtual function is called, you must update your editor. - - - - + + If any of the controls added can gain keyboard focus, add it here. This ensures that focus will be restored if the inspector is refreshed. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + If one or several properties have changed, this must be called. [code]field[/code] is used in case your editor can modify fields separately (as an example, Vector3.x). The [code]changing[/code] argument avoids the editor requesting this property to be refreshed (leave as [code]false[/code] if unsure). - - + Gets the edited object. - - + Gets the edited property. If your editor is for a single property (added via [method EditorInspectorPlugin._parse_property]), then this will return the property. - - + Override if you want to allow a custom tooltip over your property. - - - - + + Adds controls with this function if you want them on the bottom (below the label). @@ -96,78 +83,62 @@ - - - - + + Emit it if you want multiple properties modified at the same time. Do not use if added via [method EditorInspectorPlugin._parse_property]. - - - - + + Used by sub-inspectors. Emit it if what was selected was an Object ID. - - - - + + Do not emit this manually, use the [method emit_changed] method instead. - - - - + + Emitted when a property was checked. Used internally. - - + Emitted when a property was deleted. Used internally. - - + Emit it if you want to add this value as an animation key (check for keying being enabled first). - - - - + + Emit it if you want to key a property with a single value. - - - - + + If you want a sub-resource to be edited, emit this signal with the resource. - - - - + + Emitted when selected. Used internally. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorResourceConversionPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorResourceConversionPlugin.xml index 1d7e98c99dc..3de508c88d3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorResourceConversionPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorResourceConversionPlugin.xml @@ -8,16 +8,13 @@ - - - - + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePicker.xml b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePicker.xml index 00299558195..a0f2df1f0cf 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePicker.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePicker.xml @@ -11,36 +11,29 @@ - - - - + + This virtual method can be implemented to handle context menu items not handled by default. See [method _set_create_options]. - - - - + + This virtual method is called when updating the context menu of [EditorResourcePicker]. Implement this method to override the "New ..." items with your own options. [code]menu_node[/code] is a reference to the [PopupMenu] node. [b]Note:[/b] Implement [method _handle_menu_selected] to handle these custom items. - - + Returns a list of all allowed types and subtypes corresponding to the [member base_type]. If the [member base_type] is empty, an empty list is returned. - - - - + + Sets the toggle mode state for the main button. Works only if [member toggle_mode] is set to [code]true[/code]. @@ -62,15 +55,13 @@ - - + Emitted when the value of the edited resource was changed. - - + Emitted when the resource value was set and user clicked to edit it. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreview.xml b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreview.xml index 3239a75adac..c2693b4e1ea 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreview.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreview.xml @@ -11,60 +11,44 @@ - - - - + + Create an own, custom preview generator. - - - - + + Check if the resource changed, if so, it will be invalidated and the corresponding signal emitted. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Queue the [code]resource[/code] being edited for preview. Once the preview is ready, the [code]receiver[/code]'s [code]receiver_func[/code] will be called. The [code]receiver_func[/code] must take the following four arguments: [String] path, [Texture2D] preview, [Texture2D] thumbnail_preview, [Variant] userdata. [code]userdata[/code] can be anything, and will be returned when [code]receiver_func[/code] is called. [b]Note[/b]: If it was not possible to create the preview the [code]receiver_func[/code] will still be called, but the preview will be null. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Queue a resource file located at [code]path[/code] for preview. Once the preview is ready, the [code]receiver[/code]'s [code]receiver_func[/code] will be called. The [code]receiver_func[/code] must take the following four arguments: [String] path, [Texture2D] preview, [Texture2D] thumbnail_preview, [Variant] userdata. [code]userdata[/code] can be anything, and will be returned when [code]receiver_func[/code] is called. [b]Note[/b]: If it was not possible to create the preview the [code]receiver_func[/code] will still be called, but the preview will be null. - - - - + + Removes a custom preview generator. @@ -72,8 +56,7 @@ - - + Emitted if a preview was invalidated (changed). [code]path[/code] corresponds to the path of the preview. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreviewGenerator.xml b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreviewGenerator.xml index 3594474e361..7054b1f4d02 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreviewGenerator.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorResourcePreviewGenerator.xml @@ -10,20 +10,16 @@ - - + If this function returns [code]true[/code], the generator will call [method _generate] or [method _generate_from_path] for small previews as well. By default, it returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Generate a preview from a given resource with the specified size. This must always be implemented. Returning an empty texture is an OK way to fail and let another generator take care. @@ -31,12 +27,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Generate a preview directly from a path with the specified size. Implementing this is optional, as default code will load and call [method _generate]. Returning an empty texture is an OK way to fail and let another generator take care. @@ -44,18 +37,15 @@ - - + If this function returns [code]true[/code], the generator will automatically generate the small previews from the normal preview texture generated by the methods [method _generate] or [method _generate_from_path]. By default, it returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if your generator supports the resource of type [code]type[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporter.xml b/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporter.xml index 8df3091057b..2e9d6a43d8e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporter.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporter.xml @@ -9,62 +9,44 @@ - - + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporterMesh.xml b/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporterMesh.xml index 90eca9072b5..3a9eea87bb9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporterMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorSceneImporterMesh.xml @@ -8,161 +8,120 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - +}" /> + + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorScenePostImport.xml b/doc/classes/EditorScenePostImport.xml index d2b5e84ff76..95b0b42d9f4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorScenePostImport.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorScenePostImport.xml @@ -56,17 +56,14 @@ - - - - + + Called after the scene was imported. This method must return the modified version of the scene. - - + Returns the source file path which got imported (e.g. [code]res://scene.dae[/code]). diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorScript.xml b/doc/classes/EditorScript.xml index a91ea0eb14a..6d793fe9616 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorScript.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorScript.xml @@ -35,32 +35,27 @@ - - + This method is executed by the Editor when [b]File > Run[/b] is used. - - - - + + Adds [code]node[/code] as a child of the root node in the editor context. [b]Warning:[/b] The implementation of this method is currently disabled. - - + Returns the [EditorInterface] singleton instance. - - + Returns the Editor's currently active scene. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorSelection.xml b/doc/classes/EditorSelection.xml index 63e89750c37..69ae865d5d5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorSelection.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorSelection.xml @@ -11,41 +11,34 @@ - - - - + + Adds a node to the selection. [b]Note:[/b] The newly selected node will not be automatically edited in the inspector. If you want to edit a node, use [method EditorInterface.edit_node]. - - + Clear the selection. - - + Gets the list of selected nodes. - - + Gets the list of selected nodes, optimized for transform operations (i.e. moving them, rotating, etc). This list avoids situations where a node is selected and also child/grandchild. - - - - + + Removes a node from the selection. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorSettings.xml b/doc/classes/EditorSettings.xml index e7322235169..ad63abafa65 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorSettings.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorSettings.xml @@ -31,10 +31,8 @@ - - - - + + Adds a custom property info to a property. The dictionary must contain: - [code]name[/code]: [String] (the name of the property) @@ -73,145 +71,110 @@ - - - - + + Erases the setting whose name is specified by [code]property[/code]. - - + Returns the list of favorite files and directories for this project. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns project-specific metadata for the [code]section[/code] and [code]key[/code] specified. If the metadata doesn't exist, [code]default[/code] will be returned instead. See also [method set_project_metadata]. - - + Returns the project-specific settings path. Projects all have a unique subdirectory inside the settings path where project-specific settings are saved. - - + Returns the list of recently visited folders in the file dialog for this project. - - - - + + Returns the value of the setting specified by [code]name[/code]. This is equivalent to using [method Object.get] on the EditorSettings instance. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the setting specified by [code]name[/code] exists, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the setting specified by [code]name[/code] can have its value reverted to the default value, [code]false[/code] otherwise. When this method returns [code]true[/code], a Revert button will display next to the setting in the Editor Settings. - - - - + + Returns the default value of the setting specified by [code]name[/code]. This is the value that would be applied when clicking the Revert button in the Editor Settings. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Sets the list of favorite files and directories for this project. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the initial value of the setting specified by [code]name[/code] to [code]value[/code]. This is used to provide a value for the Revert button in the Editor Settings. If [code]update_current[/code] is true, the current value of the setting will be set to [code]value[/code] as well. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets project-specific metadata with the [code]section[/code], [code]key[/code] and [code]data[/code] specified. This metadata is stored outside the project folder and therefore won't be checked into version control. See also [method get_project_metadata]. - - - - + + Sets the list of recently visited folders in the file dialog for this project. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]value[/code] of the setting specified by [code]name[/code]. This is equivalent to using [method Object.set] on the EditorSettings instance. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorSyntaxHighlighter.xml b/doc/classes/EditorSyntaxHighlighter.xml index d81b25345f4..37644a85954 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorSyntaxHighlighter.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorSyntaxHighlighter.xml @@ -11,22 +11,19 @@ - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to return the syntax highlighter name. - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to return the supported file extensions. - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to return the supported language names. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorTranslationParserPlugin.xml b/doc/classes/EditorTranslationParserPlugin.xml index a9f4e90e726..47da8ec37bd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorTranslationParserPlugin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorTranslationParserPlugin.xml @@ -103,21 +103,16 @@ - - + Gets the list of file extensions to associate with this parser, e.g. [code]["csv"][/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Override this method to define a custom parsing logic to extract the translatable strings. diff --git a/doc/classes/EditorVCSInterface.xml b/doc/classes/EditorVCSInterface.xml index 0056b5ce160..5dd4901e3e1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EditorVCSInterface.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EditorVCSInterface.xml @@ -10,19 +10,15 @@ - - - - + + Creates a version commit if the addon is initialized, else returns without doing anything. Uses the files which have been staged previously, with the commit message set to a value as provided as in the argument. - - - - + + Returns an [Array] of [Dictionary] objects containing the diff output from the VCS in use, if a VCS addon is initialized, else returns an empty [Array] object. The diff contents also consist of some contextual lines which provide context to the observed line change in the file. Each [Dictionary] object has the line diff contents under the keys: @@ -35,8 +31,7 @@ - - + Returns a [Dictionary] containing the path of the detected file change mapped to an integer signifying what kind of change the corresponding file has experienced. The following integer values are being used to signify that the detected file is: @@ -48,63 +43,52 @@ - - + Returns the project name of the VCS working directory. - - + Returns the name of the VCS if the VCS has been initialized, else return an empty string. - - - - + + Initializes the VCS addon if not already. Uses the argument value as the path to the working directory of the project. Creates the initial commit if required. Returns [code]true[/code] if no failure occurs, else returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the addon is ready to respond to function calls, else returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the VCS addon has been initialized, else returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Shuts down the VCS addon to allow cleanup code to run on call. Returns [code]true[/code] is no failure occurs, else returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Stages the file which should be committed when [method EditorVCSInterface.commit] is called. Argument should contain the absolute path. - - - - + + Unstages the file which was staged previously to be committed, so that it is no longer committed when [method EditorVCSInterface.commit] is called. Argument should contain the absolute path. diff --git a/doc/classes/Engine.xml b/doc/classes/Engine.xml index 3fa7894fdc2..e4411ab1254 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Engine.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Engine.xml @@ -10,8 +10,7 @@ - - + Returns engine author information in a Dictionary. [code]lead_developers[/code] - Array of Strings, lead developer names @@ -21,8 +20,7 @@ - - + Returns an Array of copyright information Dictionaries. [code]name[/code] - String, component name @@ -30,81 +28,69 @@ - - + Returns a Dictionary of Arrays of donor names. {[code]platinum_sponsors[/code], [code]gold_sponsors[/code], [code]silver_sponsors[/code], [code]bronze_sponsors[/code], [code]mini_sponsors[/code], [code]gold_donors[/code], [code]silver_donors[/code], [code]bronze_donors[/code]} - - + Returns the total number of frames drawn. If the render loop is disabled with [code]--disable-render-loop[/code] via command line, this returns [code]0[/code]. See also [method get_process_frames]. - - + Returns the frames per second of the running game. - - + Returns Dictionary of licenses used by Godot and included third party components. - - + Returns Godot license text. - - + Returns the main loop object (see [MainLoop] and [SceneTree]). - - + Returns the total number of frames passed since engine initialization which is advanced on each [b]physics frame[/b]. - - + Returns the fraction through the current physics tick we are at the time of rendering the frame. This can be used to implement fixed timestep interpolation. - - + Returns the total number of frames passed since engine initialization which is advanced on each [b]process frame[/b], regardless of whether the render loop is enabled. See also [method get_frames_drawn]. - - - - + + Returns a global singleton with given [code]name[/code]. Often used for plugins, e.g. GodotPayments. - - + Returns the current engine version information in a Dictionary. [code]major[/code] - Holds the major version number as an int @@ -138,17 +124,14 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a singleton with given [code]name[/code] exists in global scope. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the game is inside the fixed process and physics phase of the game loop. diff --git a/doc/classes/EngineDebugger.xml b/doc/classes/EngineDebugger.xml index 50ccb6b0759..30d5193384b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/EngineDebugger.xml +++ b/doc/classes/EngineDebugger.xml @@ -10,86 +10,64 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a capture with the given name is present otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a profiler with the given name is present otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the debugger is active otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a profiler with the given name is present and active otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Calls the [code]add[/code] callable of the profiler with given [code]name[/code] and [code]data[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Calls the [code]toggle[/code] callable of the profiler with given [code]name[/code] and [code]arguments[/code]. Enables/Disables the same profiler depending on [code]enable[/code] argument. - - - - - - + + + Registers a message capture with given [code]name[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is "my_message" then messages starting with "my_message:" will be called with the given callable. Callable must accept a message string and a data array as argument. If the message and data are valid then callable must return [code]true[/code] otherwise [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Registers a profiler with the given [code]name[/code]. [code]toggle[/code] callable is called when the profiler is enabled/disabled. It must take an argument array as an argument. @@ -98,30 +76,23 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sends a message with given [code]message[/code] and [code]data[/code] array. - - - - + + Unregisters the message capture with given [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Unregisters a profiler with given [code]name[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Environment.xml b/doc/classes/Environment.xml index ae87a62c84e..2c4e5ea886c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Environment.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Environment.xml @@ -19,21 +19,16 @@ - - - - + + Returns the intensity of the glow level [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the intensity of the glow level [code]idx[/code]. A value above [code]0.0[/code] enables the level. Each level relies on the previous level. This means that enabling higher glow levels will slow down the glow effect rendering, even if previous levels aren't enabled. diff --git a/doc/classes/Expression.xml b/doc/classes/Expression.xml index 640b45dca45..809a5bb80c1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Expression.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Expression.xml @@ -52,40 +52,31 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Executes the expression that was previously parsed by [method parse] and returns the result. Before you use the returned object, you should check if the method failed by calling [method has_execute_failed]. If you defined input variables in [method parse], you can specify their values in the inputs array, in the same order. - - + Returns the error text if [method parse] has failed. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if [method execute] has failed. - - - - - - + + + Parses the expression and returns an [enum Error] code. You can optionally specify names of variables that may appear in the expression with [code]input_names[/code], so that you can bind them when it gets executed. diff --git a/doc/classes/File.xml b/doc/classes/File.xml index f98c31dc7fd..de3beedf0fe 100644 --- a/doc/classes/File.xml +++ b/doc/classes/File.xml @@ -50,285 +50,231 @@ - - + Closes the currently opened file and prevents subsequent read/write operations. Use [method flush] to persist the data to disk without closing the file. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the file cursor has read past the end of the file. [b]Note:[/b] This function will still return [code]false[/code] while at the end of the file and only activates when reading past it. This can be confusing but it conforms to how low-level file access works in all operating systems. There is always [method get_length] and [method get_position] to implement a custom logic. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the file exists in the given path. [b]Note:[/b] Many resources types are imported (e.g. textures or sound files), and their source asset will not be included in the exported game, as only the imported version is used. See [method ResourceLoader.exists] for an alternative approach that takes resource remapping into account. - - + Writes the file's buffer to disk. Flushing is automatically performed when the file is closed. This means you don't need to call [method flush] manually before closing a file using [method close]. Still, calling [method flush] can be used to ensure the data is safe even if the project crashes instead of being closed gracefully. [b]Note:[/b] Only call [method flush] when you actually need it. Otherwise, it will decrease performance due to constant disk writes. - - + Returns the next 16 bits from the file as an integer. See [method store_16] for details on what values can be stored and retrieved this way. - - + Returns the next 32 bits from the file as an integer. See [method store_32] for details on what values can be stored and retrieved this way. - - + Returns the next 64 bits from the file as an integer. See [method store_64] for details on what values can be stored and retrieved this way. - - + Returns the next 8 bits from the file as an integer. See [method store_8] for details on what values can be stored and retrieved this way. - - + Returns the whole file as a [String]. Text is interpreted as being UTF-8 encoded. - - - - + + Returns next [code]length[/code] bytes of the file as a [PackedByteArray]. - - - - + + Returns the next value of the file in CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format. You can pass a different delimiter [code]delim[/code] to use other than the default [code]","[/code] (comma). This delimiter must be one-character long. Text is interpreted as being UTF-8 encoded. - - + Returns the next 64 bits from the file as a floating-point number. - - + Returns the last error that happened when trying to perform operations. Compare with the [code]ERR_FILE_*[/code] constants from [enum Error]. - - + Returns the next 32 bits from the file as a floating-point number. - - + Returns the size of the file in bytes. - - + Returns the next line of the file as a [String]. Text is interpreted as being UTF-8 encoded. - - - - + + Returns an MD5 String representing the file at the given path or an empty [String] on failure. - - - - + + Returns the last time the [code]file[/code] was modified in Unix timestamp format or returns a [String] "ERROR IN [code]file[/code]". This Unix timestamp can be converted to another format using the [Time] singleton. - - + Returns a [String] saved in Pascal format from the file. Text is interpreted as being UTF-8 encoded. - - + Returns the path as a [String] for the current open file. - - + Returns the absolute path as a [String] for the current open file. - - + Returns the file cursor's position. - - + Returns the next bits from the file as a floating-point number. - - - - + + Returns a SHA-256 [String] representing the file at the given path or an empty [String] on failure. - - - - + + Returns the next [Variant] value from the file. If [code]allow_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], decoding objects is allowed. [b]Warning:[/b] Deserialized objects can contain code which gets executed. Do not use this option if the serialized object comes from untrusted sources to avoid potential security threats such as remote code execution. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the file is currently opened. - - - - - - + + + Opens the file for writing or reading, depending on the flags. - - - - - - - - + + + + Opens a compressed file for reading or writing. [b]Note:[/b] [method open_compressed] can only read files that were saved by Godot, not third-party compression formats. See [url=https://github.com/godotengine/godot/issues/28999]GitHub issue #28999[/url] for a workaround. - - - - - - - - + + + + Opens an encrypted file in write or read mode. You need to pass a binary key to encrypt/decrypt it. [b]Note:[/b] The provided key must be 32 bytes long. - - - - - - - - + + + + Opens an encrypted file in write or read mode. You need to pass a password to encrypt/decrypt it. - - - - + + Changes the file reading/writing cursor to the specified position (in bytes from the beginning of the file). - - - - + + Changes the file reading/writing cursor to the specified position (in bytes from the end of the file). [b]Note:[/b] This is an offset, so you should use negative numbers or the cursor will be at the end of the file. - - - - + + Stores an integer as 16 bits in the file. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]value[/code] should lie in the interval [code][0, 2^16 - 1][/code]. Any other value will overflow and wrap around. @@ -370,10 +316,8 @@ - - - - + + Stores an integer as 32 bits in the file. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]value[/code] should lie in the interval [code][0, 2^32 - 1][/code]. Any other value will overflow and wrap around. @@ -381,20 +325,16 @@ - - - - + + Stores an integer as 64 bits in the file. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]value[/code] must lie in the interval [code][-2^63, 2^63 - 1][/code] (i.e. be a valid [int] value). - - - - + + Stores an integer as 8 bits in the file. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]value[/code] should lie in the interval [code][0, 255][/code]. Any other value will overflow and wrap around. @@ -402,88 +342,68 @@ - - - - + + Stores the given array of bytes in the file. - - - - - - + + + Store the given [PackedStringArray] in the file as a line formatted in the CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format. You can pass a different delimiter [code]delim[/code] to use other than the default [code]","[/code] (comma). This delimiter must be one-character long. Text will be encoded as UTF-8. - - - - + + Stores a floating-point number as 64 bits in the file. - - - - + + Stores a floating-point number as 32 bits in the file. - - - - + + Appends [code]line[/code] to the file followed by a line return character ([code]\n[/code]), encoding the text as UTF-8. - - - - + + Stores the given [String] as a line in the file in Pascal format (i.e. also store the length of the string). Text will be encoded as UTF-8. - - - - + + Stores a floating-point number in the file. - - - - + + Appends [code]string[/code] to the file without a line return, encoding the text as UTF-8. - - - - - - + + + Stores any Variant value in the file. If [code]full_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], encoding objects is allowed (and can potentially include code). [b]Note:[/b] Not all properties are included. Only properties that are configured with the [constant PROPERTY_USAGE_STORAGE] flag set will be serialized. You can add a new usage flag to a property by overriding the [method Object._get_property_list] method in your class. You can also check how property usage is configured by calling [method Object._get_property_list]. See [enum PropertyUsageFlags] for the possible usage flags. diff --git a/doc/classes/FileDialog.xml b/doc/classes/FileDialog.xml index 8ccee1c82eb..7e16a6bf5a6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/FileDialog.xml +++ b/doc/classes/FileDialog.xml @@ -10,45 +10,38 @@ - - - - + + Adds [code]filter[/code] as a custom filter; [code]filter[/code] should be of the form [code]"filename.extension ; Description"[/code]. For example, [code]"*.png ; PNG Images"[/code]. - - + Clear all the added filters in the dialog. - - + Clear all currently selected items in the dialog. - - + Returns the LineEdit for the selected file. - - + Returns the vertical box container of the dialog, custom controls can be added to it. - - + Invalidate and update the current dialog content list. @@ -85,22 +78,19 @@ - - + Emitted when the user selects a directory. - - + Emitted when the user selects a file by double-clicking it or pressing the [b]OK[/b] button. - - + Emitted when the user selects multiple files. diff --git a/doc/classes/FileSystemDock.xml b/doc/classes/FileSystemDock.xml index 15f92e90e37..a1644152456 100644 --- a/doc/classes/FileSystemDock.xml +++ b/doc/classes/FileSystemDock.xml @@ -8,10 +8,8 @@ - - - - + + @@ -22,42 +20,34 @@ - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/Font.xml b/doc/classes/Font.xml index 186bfbb931d..06dcaca846d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Font.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Font.xml @@ -64,188 +64,131 @@ - - - - + + Add font data source to the set. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + Draw a single Unicode character [code]char[/code] into a canvas item using the font, at a given position, with [code]modulate[/code] color, and optionally kerning if [code]next[/code] is passed. [code]position[/code] specifies the baseline, not the top. To draw from the top, [i]ascent[/i] must be added to the Y axis. [b]Note:[/b] Do not use this function to draw strings character by character, use [method draw_string] or [TextLine] instead. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + Breaks [code]text[/code] to the lines using rules specified by [code]flags[/code] and draws it into a canvas item using the font, at a given position, with [code]modulate[/code] color, optionally clipping the width and aligning horizontally. [code]position[/code] specifies the baseline of the first line, not the top. To draw from the top, [i]ascent[/i] must be added to the Y axis. See also [method CanvasItem.draw_multiline_string]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + Draw [code]text[/code] into a canvas item using the font, at a given position, with [code]modulate[/code] color, optionally clipping the width and aligning horizontally. [code]position[/code] specifies the baseline, not the top. To draw from the top, [i]ascent[/i] must be added to the Y axis. See also [method CanvasItem.draw_string]. - - - - + + Returns the average font ascent (number of pixels above the baseline). [b]Note:[/b] Real ascent of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by this function. Use it only as rough estimate (e.g. as the ascent of empty line). - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the size of a character, optionally taking kerning into account if the next character is provided. [b]Note:[/b] Do not use this function to calculate width of the string character by character, use [method get_string_size] or [TextLine] instead. The height returned is the font height (see also [method get_height]) and has no relation to the glyph height. - - - - + + Returns the font data source at index [code]idx[/code]. If the index does not exist, returns [code]null[/code]. - - + Returns the number of font data sources. - - - - + + Returns the average font descent (number of pixels below the baseline). [b]Note:[/b] Real descent of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by this function. Use it only as rough estimate (e.g. as the descent of empty line). - - - - + + Returns the total average font height (ascent plus descent) in pixels. [b]Note:[/b] Real height of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by this function. Use it only as rough estimate (e.g. as the height of empty line). - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns the size of a bounding box of a string broken into the lines, taking kerning and advance into account. See also [method draw_multiline_string]. - - - - + + Returns the spacing for the given [code]type[/code] (see [enum SpacingType]). - - - - - - + + + Returns the size of a bounding box of a string, taking kerning and advance into account. [b]Note:[/b] Real height of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by [method get_height]. @@ -253,76 +196,60 @@ - - + Returns a string containing all the characters available in the font. If a given character is included in more than one font data source, it appears only once in the returned string. - - - - + + Return average pixel offset of the underline below the baseline. [b]Note:[/b] Real underline position of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by this function. Use it only as rough estimate. - - - - + + Return average thickness of the underline. [b]Note:[/b] Real underline thickness of the string is context-dependent and can be significantly different from the value returned by this function. Use it only as rough estimate. - - - - + + Return [code]true[/code] if a Unicode [code]char[/code] is available in the font. - - - - + + Removes the font data source at index [code]idx[/code]. If the index does not exist, nothing happens. - - - - - - + + + Sets the font data source at index [code]idx[/code]. If the index does not exist, nothing happens. - - - - - - + + + Sets the spacing for [code]type[/code] (see [enum SpacingType]) to [code]value[/code] in pixels (not relative to the font size). - - + After editing a font (changing data sources, etc.). Call this function to propagate changes to controls that might use it. diff --git a/doc/classes/FontData.xml b/doc/classes/FontData.xml index 0a2fb037501..7a845a698f9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/FontData.xml +++ b/doc/classes/FontData.xml @@ -12,57 +12,39 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a character to the font, where [code]character[/code] is the Unicode value, [code]texture[/code] is the texture index, [code]rect[/code] is the region in the texture (in pixels!), [code]align[/code] is the (optional) alignment for the character and [code]advance[/code] is the (optional) advance. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a kerning pair to the bitmap font as a difference. Kerning pairs are special cases where a typeface advance is determined by the next character. - - - - + + Adds a texture to the bitmap font. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draws single glyph into a canvas item at the position, using [code]font[/code] at the size [code]size[/code]. Returns advance of the glyph for horizontal and vertical layouts. @@ -70,20 +52,13 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Draws single glyph outline of size [code]outline_size[/code] into a canvas item at the position, using [code]font[/code] at the size [code]size[/code]. If outline drawing is not supported, nothing is drawn. Returns advance of the glyph for horizontal and vertical layouts (regardless of outline drawing support). @@ -91,290 +66,223 @@ - - - - + + Returns the font ascent (number of pixels above the baseline). - - + Returns the base size of the font (the only size supported for non-scalable fonts, meaningless for scalable fonts). - - - - + + Returns the font descent (number of pixels below the baseline). - - - - - - + + + Returns advance of the glyph for horizontal and vertical layouts. Note: Glyph index is bound to the font data, use only glyphs indices returned by [method TextServer.shaped_text_get_glyphs] or [method get_glyph_index] for this font data. - - - - - - + + + Return the glyph index of a [code]char[/code], optionally modified by the [code]variation_selector[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a kerning of the pair of glyphs for horizontal and vertical layouts. Note: Glyph index is bound to the font data, use only glyphs indices returned by [method TextServer.shaped_text_get_glyphs] or [method get_glyph_index] for this font data. - - - - + + Returns the total font height (ascent plus descent) in pixels. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if support override is enabled for the [code]language[/code]. - - + Returns list of language support overrides. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if support override is enabled for the [code]script[/code]. - - + Returns list of script support overrides. - - - - + + Returns the spacing for the given [code]type[/code] (see [enum SpacingType]). - - + Returns a string containing all the characters available in the font. - - - - + + Returns underline offset (number of pixels below the baseline). - - - - + + Returns underline thickness in pixels. - - - - + + Returns variation coordinate [code]tag[/code]. - - + Returns list of supported [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/dvaraxisreg]variation coordinates[/url], each coordinate is returned as [code]tag: Vector3i(min_value,max_value,default_value)[/code]. Font variations allow for continuous change of glyph characteristics along some given design axis, such as weight, width or slant. - - - - + + Return [code]true[/code] if a Unicode [code]char[/code] is available in the font. - - + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports drawing glyph outlines. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports given language ([url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_639-1]ISO 639[/url] code). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports given script ([url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_15924]ISO 15924[/url] code). - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates new font from the data in memory. Note: For non-scalable fonts [code]base_size[/code] is ignored, use [method get_base_size] to check actual font size. - - - - - - + + + Creates new font from the file. Note: For non-scalable fonts [code]base_size[/code] is ignored, use [method get_base_size] to check actual font size. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates new, empty bitmap font. - - - - + + Remove language support override. - - - - + + Removes script support override. - - - - - - + + + Adds override for [method is_language_supported]. - - - - - - + + + Adds override for [method is_script_supported]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the spacing for [code]type[/code] (see [enum SpacingType]) to [code]value[/code] in pixels (not relative to the font size). - - - - - - + + + Sets variation coordinate [code]tag[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/GPUParticles2D.xml b/doc/classes/GPUParticles2D.xml index 8684a7f41a4..72bd6a64118 100644 --- a/doc/classes/GPUParticles2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/GPUParticles2D.xml @@ -13,15 +13,13 @@ - - + Returns a rectangle containing the positions of all existing particles. - - + Restarts all the existing particles. diff --git a/doc/classes/GPUParticles3D.xml b/doc/classes/GPUParticles3D.xml index 55e9b33aa85..3f7b20f274c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/GPUParticles3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/GPUParticles3D.xml @@ -13,51 +13,38 @@ - - + Returns the axis-aligned bounding box that contains all the particles that are active in the current frame. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - + + Returns the [Mesh] that is drawn at index [code]pass[/code]. - - + Restarts the particle emission, clearing existing particles. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Mesh] that is drawn at index [code]pass[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Generic6DOFJoint3D.xml b/doc/classes/Generic6DOFJoint3D.xml index 79b861dfb8f..ebfcaa7678e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Generic6DOFJoint3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Generic6DOFJoint3D.xml @@ -10,110 +10,80 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Geometry2D.xml b/doc/classes/Geometry2D.xml index 13354ec19e0..157124cded7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Geometry2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Geometry2D.xml @@ -10,192 +10,139 @@ - - - - - - + + + Clips [code]polygon_a[/code] against [code]polygon_b[/code] and returns an array of clipped polygons. This performs [constant OPERATION_DIFFERENCE] between polygons. Returns an empty array if [code]polygon_b[/code] completely overlaps [code]polygon_a[/code]. If [code]polygon_b[/code] is enclosed by [code]polygon_a[/code], returns an outer polygon (boundary) and inner polygon (hole) which could be distinguished by calling [method is_polygon_clockwise]. - - - - - - + + + Clips [code]polyline[/code] against [code]polygon[/code] and returns an array of clipped polylines. This performs [constant OPERATION_DIFFERENCE] between the polyline and the polygon. This operation can be thought of as cutting a line with a closed shape. - - - - + + Given an array of [Vector2]s, returns the convex hull as a list of points in counterclockwise order. The last point is the same as the first one. - - - - - - + + + Mutually excludes common area defined by intersection of [code]polygon_a[/code] and [code]polygon_b[/code] (see [method intersect_polygons]) and returns an array of excluded polygons. This performs [constant OPERATION_XOR] between polygons. In other words, returns all but common area between polygons. The operation may result in an outer polygon (boundary) and inner polygon (hole) produced which could be distinguished by calling [method is_polygon_clockwise]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the 2D point on the 2D segment ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) that is closest to [code]point[/code]. The returned point will always be inside the specified segment. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the 2D point on the 2D line defined by ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) that is closest to [code]point[/code]. The returned point can be inside the segment ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) or outside of it, i.e. somewhere on the line extending from the segment. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Given the two 2D segments ([code]p1[/code], [code]q1[/code]) and ([code]p2[/code], [code]q2[/code]), finds those two points on the two segments that are closest to each other. Returns a [PackedVector2Array] that contains this point on ([code]p1[/code], [code]q1[/code]) as well the accompanying point on ([code]p2[/code], [code]q2[/code]). - - - - - - + + + Intersects [code]polygon_a[/code] with [code]polygon_b[/code] and returns an array of intersected polygons. This performs [constant OPERATION_INTERSECTION] between polygons. In other words, returns common area shared by polygons. Returns an empty array if no intersection occurs. The operation may result in an outer polygon (boundary) and inner polygon (hole) produced which could be distinguished by calling [method is_polygon_clockwise]. - - - - - - + + + Intersects [code]polyline[/code] with [code]polygon[/code] and returns an array of intersected polylines. This performs [constant OPERATION_INTERSECTION] between the polyline and the polygon. This operation can be thought of as chopping a line with a closed shape. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]point[/code] is inside the circle or if it's located exactly [i]on[/i] the circle's boundary, otherwise returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]point[/code] is inside [code]polygon[/code] or if it's located exactly [i]on[/i] polygon's boundary, otherwise returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]polygon[/code]'s vertices are ordered in clockwise order, otherwise returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Checks if the two lines ([code]from_a[/code], [code]dir_a[/code]) and ([code]from_b[/code], [code]dir_b[/code]) intersect. If yes, return the point of intersection as [Vector2]. If no intersection takes place, returns an empty [Variant]. [b]Note:[/b] The lines are specified using direction vectors, not end points. - - - - + + Given an array of [Vector2]s representing tiles, builds an atlas. The returned dictionary has two keys: [code]points[/code] is a vector of [Vector2] that specifies the positions of each tile, [code]size[/code] contains the overall size of the whole atlas as [Vector2]. - - - - - - + + + Merges (combines) [code]polygon_a[/code] and [code]polygon_b[/code] and returns an array of merged polygons. This performs [constant OPERATION_UNION] between polygons. The operation may result in an outer polygon (boundary) and multiple inner polygons (holes) produced which could be distinguished by calling [method is_polygon_clockwise]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Inflates or deflates [code]polygon[/code] by [code]delta[/code] units (pixels). If [code]delta[/code] is positive, makes the polygon grow outward. If [code]delta[/code] is negative, shrinks the polygon inward. Returns an array of polygons because inflating/deflating may result in multiple discrete polygons. Returns an empty array if [code]delta[/code] is negative and the absolute value of it approximately exceeds the minimum bounding rectangle dimensions of the polygon. Each polygon's vertices will be rounded as determined by [code]join_type[/code], see [enum PolyJoinType]. @@ -219,16 +166,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Inflates or deflates [code]polyline[/code] by [code]delta[/code] units (pixels), producing polygons. If [code]delta[/code] is positive, makes the polyline grow outward. Returns an array of polygons because inflating/deflating may result in multiple discrete polygons. If [code]delta[/code] is negative, returns an empty array. Each polygon's vertices will be rounded as determined by [code]join_type[/code], see [enum PolyJoinType]. @@ -237,49 +179,35 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns if [code]point[/code] is inside the triangle specified by [code]a[/code], [code]b[/code] and [code]c[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Checks if the two segments ([code]from_a[/code], [code]to_a[/code]) and ([code]from_b[/code], [code]to_b[/code]) intersect. If yes, return the point of intersection as [Vector2]. If no intersection takes place, returns an empty [Variant]. - - - - + + Triangulates the area specified by discrete set of [code]points[/code] such that no point is inside the circumcircle of any resulting triangle. Returns a [PackedInt32Array] where each triangle consists of three consecutive point indices into [code]points[/code] (i.e. the returned array will have [code]n * 3[/code] elements, with [code]n[/code] being the number of found triangles). If the triangulation did not succeed, an empty [PackedInt32Array] is returned. - - - - + + Triangulates the polygon specified by the points in [code]polygon[/code]. Returns a [PackedInt32Array] where each triangle consists of three consecutive point indices into [code]polygon[/code] (i.e. the returned array will have [code]n * 3[/code] elements, with [code]n[/code] being the number of found triangles). If the triangulation did not succeed, an empty [PackedInt32Array] is returned. diff --git a/doc/classes/Geometry3D.xml b/doc/classes/Geometry3D.xml index 9f012008e3f..9d0234529af 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Geometry3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Geometry3D.xml @@ -10,171 +10,116 @@ - - - - + + Returns an array with 6 [Plane]s that describe the sides of a box centered at the origin. The box size is defined by [code]extents[/code], which represents one (positive) corner of the box (i.e. half its actual size). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns an array of [Plane]s closely bounding a faceted capsule centered at the origin with radius [code]radius[/code] and height [code]height[/code]. The parameter [code]sides[/code] defines how many planes will be generated for the side part of the capsule, whereas [code]lats[/code] gives the number of latitudinal steps at the bottom and top of the capsule. The parameter [code]axis[/code] describes the axis along which the capsule is oriented (0 for X, 1 for Y, 2 for Z). - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns an array of [Plane]s closely bounding a faceted cylinder centered at the origin with radius [code]radius[/code] and height [code]height[/code]. The parameter [code]sides[/code] defines how many planes will be generated for the round part of the cylinder. The parameter [code]axis[/code] describes the axis along which the cylinder is oriented (0 for X, 1 for Y, 2 for Z). - - - - - - + + + Clips the polygon defined by the points in [code]points[/code] against the [code]plane[/code] and returns the points of the clipped polygon. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the 3D point on the 3D segment ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) that is closest to [code]point[/code]. The returned point will always be inside the specified segment. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the 3D point on the 3D line defined by ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) that is closest to [code]point[/code]. The returned point can be inside the segment ([code]s1[/code], [code]s2[/code]) or outside of it, i.e. somewhere on the line extending from the segment. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Given the two 3D segments ([code]p1[/code], [code]p2[/code]) and ([code]q1[/code], [code]q2[/code]), finds those two points on the two segments that are closest to each other. Returns a [PackedVector3Array] that contains this point on ([code]p1[/code], [code]p2[/code]) as well the accompanying point on ([code]q1[/code], [code]q2[/code]). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Tests if the 3D ray starting at [code]from[/code] with the direction of [code]dir[/code] intersects the triangle specified by [code]a[/code], [code]b[/code] and [code]c[/code]. If yes, returns the point of intersection as [Vector3]. If no intersection takes place, an empty [Variant] is returned. - - - - - - - - + + + + Given a convex hull defined though the [Plane]s in the array [code]planes[/code], tests if the segment ([code]from[/code], [code]to[/code]) intersects with that hull. If an intersection is found, returns a [PackedVector3Array] containing the point the intersection and the hull's normal. Otherwise, returns an empty array. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Checks if the segment ([code]from[/code], [code]to[/code]) intersects the cylinder with height [code]height[/code] that is centered at the origin and has radius [code]radius[/code]. If no, returns an empty [PackedVector3Array]. If an intersection takes place, the returned array contains the point of intersection and the cylinder's normal at the point of intersection. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Checks if the segment ([code]from[/code], [code]to[/code]) intersects the sphere that is located at [code]sphere_position[/code] and has radius [code]sphere_radius[/code]. If no, returns an empty [PackedVector3Array]. If yes, returns a [PackedVector3Array] containing the point of intersection and the sphere's normal at the point of intersection. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Tests if the segment ([code]from[/code], [code]to[/code]) intersects the triangle [code]a[/code], [code]b[/code], [code]c[/code]. If yes, returns the point of intersection as [Vector3]. If no intersection takes place, an empty [Variant] is returned. diff --git a/doc/classes/GeometryInstance3D.xml b/doc/classes/GeometryInstance3D.xml index 667ca2dacf4..97cef205c3c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/GeometryInstance3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/GeometryInstance3D.xml @@ -10,29 +10,22 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + Overrides the bounding box of this node with a custom one. To remove it, set an [AABB] with all fields set to zero. - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Gradient.xml b/doc/classes/Gradient.xml index 1f1f266c594..a9577fda902 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Gradient.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Gradient.xml @@ -10,77 +10,59 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds the specified color to the end of the gradient, with the specified offset. - - - - + + Returns the color of the gradient color at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the offset of the gradient color at index [code]point[/code]. - - + Returns the number of colors in the gradient. - - - - + + Returns the interpolated color specified by [code]offset[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the color at the index [code]point[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of the gradient color at index [code]point[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the offset for the gradient color at index [code]point[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/GraphEdit.xml b/doc/classes/GraphEdit.xml index 65701b3a6a0..44c571e8009 100644 --- a/doc/classes/GraphEdit.xml +++ b/doc/classes/GraphEdit.xml @@ -11,163 +11,120 @@ - - - - - - + + + Makes possible the connection between two different slot types. The type is defined with the [method GraphNode.set_slot] method. - - - - + + Makes possible to disconnect nodes when dragging from the slot at the left if it has the specified type. - - - - + + Makes possible to disconnect nodes when dragging from the slot at the right if it has the specified type. - - + Removes all connections between nodes. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Create a connection between the [code]from_port[/code] slot of the [code]from[/code] GraphNode and the [code]to_port[/code] slot of the [code]to[/code] GraphNode. If the connection already exists, no connection is created. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Removes the connection between the [code]from_port[/code] slot of the [code]from[/code] GraphNode and the [code]to_port[/code] slot of the [code]to[/code] GraphNode. If the connection does not exist, no connection is removed. - - + Returns an Array containing the list of connections. A connection consists in a structure of the form [code]{ from_port: 0, from: "GraphNode name 0", to_port: 1, to: "GraphNode name 1" }[/code]. - - + Gets the [HBoxContainer] that contains the zooming and grid snap controls in the top left of the graph. Warning: The intended usage of this function is to allow you to reposition or add your own custom controls to the container. This is an internal control and as such should not be freed. If you wish to hide this or any of its children, use their [member CanvasItem.visible] property instead. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [code]from_port[/code] slot of the [code]from[/code] GraphNode is connected to the [code]to_port[/code] slot of the [code]to[/code] GraphNode. - - - - - - + + + Returns whether it's possible to connect slots of the specified types. - - - - - - + + + Makes it not possible to connect between two different slot types. The type is defined with the [method GraphNode.set_slot] method. - - - - + + Removes the possibility to disconnect nodes when dragging from the slot at the left if it has the specified type. - - - - + + Removes the possibility to disconnect nodes when dragging from the slot at the right if it has the specified type. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Sets the coloration of the connection between [code]from[/code]'s [code]from_port[/code] and [code]to[/code]'s [code]to_port[/code] with the color provided in the [code]activity[/code] theme property. - - - - + + Sets the specified [code]node[/code] as the one selected. @@ -226,36 +183,26 @@ - - - - - - + + + Emitted when user dragging connection from input port into empty space of the graph. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted to the GraphEdit when the connection between the [code]from_slot[/code] slot of the [code]from[/code] GraphNode and the [code]to_slot[/code] slot of the [code]to[/code] GraphNode is attempted to be created. - - - - - - + + + Emitted when user dragging connection from output port into empty space of the graph. @@ -271,14 +218,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted to the GraphEdit when the connection between [code]from_slot[/code] slot of [code]from[/code] GraphNode and [code]to_slot[/code] slot of [code]to[/code] GraphNode is attempted to be removed. @@ -294,14 +237,12 @@ - - + - - + Emitted when a GraphNode is selected. @@ -312,15 +253,13 @@ - - + Emitted when a popup is requested. Happens on right-clicking in the GraphEdit. [code]position[/code] is the position of the mouse pointer when the signal is sent. - - + Emitted when the scroll offset is changed by the user. It will not be emitted when changed in code. diff --git a/doc/classes/GraphNode.xml b/doc/classes/GraphNode.xml index 84eda7fcea8..e1374b4f7a3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/GraphNode.xml +++ b/doc/classes/GraphNode.xml @@ -12,191 +12,146 @@ - - + Disables all input and output slots of the GraphNode. - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - - - + + Disables input and output slot whose index is [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the [Color] of the input connection [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of enabled input slots (connections) to the GraphNode. - - - - + + Returns the position of the input connection [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the type of the input connection [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the [Color] of the output connection [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of enabled output slots (connections) of the GraphNode. - - - - + + Returns the position of the output connection [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the type of the output connection [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the left (input) [Color] of the slot [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the right (output) [Color] of the slot [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the left (input) type of the slot [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the right (output) type of the slot [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if left (input) side of the slot [code]idx[/code] is enabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if right (output) side of the slot [code]idx[/code] is enabled. - - - - - - + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + Sets properties of the slot with ID [code]idx[/code]. If [code]enable_left[/code]/[code]right[/code], a port will appear and the slot will be able to be connected from this side. @@ -208,67 +163,49 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Color] of the left (input) side of the slot [code]idx[/code] to [code]color_left[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Color] of the right (output) side of the slot [code]idx[/code] to [code]color_right[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Toggles the left (input) side of the slot [code]idx[/code]. If [code]enable_left[/code] is [code]true[/code], a port will appear on the left side and the slot will be able to be connected from this side. - - - - - - + + + Toggles the right (output) side of the slot [code]idx[/code]. If [code]enable_right[/code] is [code]true[/code], a port will appear on the right side and the slot will be able to be connected from this side. - - - - - - + + + Sets the left (input) type of the slot [code]idx[/code] to [code]type_left[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the right (output) type of the slot [code]idx[/code] to [code]type_right[/code]. @@ -314,10 +251,8 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when the GraphNode is dragged. @@ -333,15 +268,13 @@ - - + Emitted when the GraphNode is requested to be resized. Happens on dragging the resizer handle (see [member resizable]). - - + Emitted when any GraphNode's slot is updated. diff --git a/doc/classes/HMACContext.xml b/doc/classes/HMACContext.xml index 9fa96e5ddf8..88d3c5e2f3d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/HMACContext.xml +++ b/doc/classes/HMACContext.xml @@ -56,28 +56,22 @@ - - + Returns the resulting HMAC. If the HMAC failed, an empty [PackedByteArray] is returned. - - - - - - + + + Initializes the HMACContext. This method cannot be called again on the same HMACContext until [method finish] has been called. - - - - + + Updates the message to be HMACed. This can be called multiple times before [method finish] is called to append [code]data[/code] to the message, but cannot be called until [method start] has been called. diff --git a/doc/classes/HTTPClient.xml b/doc/classes/HTTPClient.xml index a08bed751ff..df42869dbe6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/HTTPClient.xml +++ b/doc/classes/HTTPClient.xml @@ -17,23 +17,17 @@ - - + Closes the current connection, allowing reuse of this [HTTPClient]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connects to a host. This needs to be done before any requests are sent. The host should not have http:// prepended but will strip the protocol identifier if provided. @@ -42,30 +36,26 @@ - - + Returns the response's body length. [b]Note:[/b] Some Web servers may not send a body length. In this case, the value returned will be [code]-1[/code]. If using chunked transfer encoding, the body length will also be [code]-1[/code]. - - + Returns the response's HTTP status code. - - + Returns the response headers. - - + Returns all response headers as a Dictionary of structure [code]{ "key": "value1; value2" }[/code] where the case-sensitivity of the keys and values is kept like the server delivers it. A value is a simple String, this string can have more than one value where "; " is used as separator. [b]Example:[/b] @@ -78,38 +68,32 @@ - - + Returns a [enum Status] constant. Need to call [method poll] in order to get status updates. - - + If [code]true[/code], this [HTTPClient] has a response available. - - + If [code]true[/code], this [HTTPClient] has a response that is chunked. - - + This needs to be called in order to have any request processed. Check results with [method get_status]. - - - - + + Generates a GET/POST application/x-www-form-urlencoded style query string from a provided dictionary, e.g.: [codeblocks] @@ -140,23 +124,17 @@ - - + Reads one chunk from the response. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sends a request to the connected host. The URL parameter is usually just the part after the host, so for [code]http://somehost.com/index.php[/code], it is [code]/index.php[/code]. When sending requests to an HTTP proxy server, it should be an absolute URL. For [constant HTTPClient.METHOD_OPTIONS] requests, [code]*[/code] is also allowed. For [constant HTTPClient.METHOD_CONNECT] requests, it should be the authority component ([code]host:port[/code]). @@ -180,16 +158,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sends a raw request to the connected host. The URL parameter is usually just the part after the host, so for [code]http://somehost.com/index.php[/code], it is [code]/index.php[/code]. When sending requests to an HTTP proxy server, it should be an absolute URL. For [constant HTTPClient.METHOD_OPTIONS] requests, [code]*[/code] is also allowed. For [constant HTTPClient.METHOD_CONNECT] requests, it should be the authority component ([code]host:port[/code]). diff --git a/doc/classes/HTTPRequest.xml b/doc/classes/HTTPRequest.xml index 908e355db35..4a56c7e3fd8 100644 --- a/doc/classes/HTTPRequest.xml +++ b/doc/classes/HTTPRequest.xml @@ -159,47 +159,37 @@ - - + Cancels the current request. - - + Returns the response body length. [b]Note:[/b] Some Web servers may not send a body length. In this case, the value returned will be [code]-1[/code]. If using chunked transfer encoding, the body length will also be [code]-1[/code]. - - + Returns the amount of bytes this HTTPRequest downloaded. - - + Returns the current status of the underlying [HTTPClient]. See [enum HTTPClient.Status]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Creates request on the underlying [HTTPClient]. If there is no configuration errors, it tries to connect using [method HTTPClient.connect_to_host] and passes parameters onto [method HTTPClient.request]. Returns [constant OK] if request is successfully created. (Does not imply that the server has responded), [constant ERR_UNCONFIGURED] if not in the tree, [constant ERR_BUSY] if still processing previous request, [constant ERR_INVALID_PARAMETER] if given string is not a valid URL format, or [constant ERR_CANT_CONNECT] if not using thread and the [HTTPClient] cannot connect to host. @@ -207,18 +197,12 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Creates request on the underlying [HTTPClient] using a raw array of bytes for the request body. If there is no configuration errors, it tries to connect using [method HTTPClient.connect_to_host] and passes parameters onto [method HTTPClient.request]. Returns [constant OK] if request is successfully created. (Does not imply that the server has responded), [constant ERR_UNCONFIGURED] if not in the tree, [constant ERR_BUSY] if still processing previous request, [constant ERR_INVALID_PARAMETER] if given string is not a valid URL format, or [constant ERR_CANT_CONNECT] if not using thread and the [HTTPClient] cannot connect to host. @@ -253,14 +237,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when a request is completed. diff --git a/doc/classes/HashingContext.xml b/doc/classes/HashingContext.xml index 1c7b7ca9375..f470f1611d6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/HashingContext.xml +++ b/doc/classes/HashingContext.xml @@ -63,26 +63,21 @@ - - + Closes the current context, and return the computed hash. - - - - + + Starts a new hash computation of the given [code]type[/code] (e.g. [constant HASH_SHA256] to start computation of a SHA-256). - - - - + + Updates the computation with the given [code]chunk[/code] of data. diff --git a/doc/classes/HingeJoint3D.xml b/doc/classes/HingeJoint3D.xml index f2c652d51a5..a8e7f343ffe 100644 --- a/doc/classes/HingeJoint3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/HingeJoint3D.xml @@ -10,41 +10,31 @@ - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified flag. - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified parameter. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], enables the specified flag. - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of the specified parameter. diff --git a/doc/classes/IP.xml b/doc/classes/IP.xml index b3ce1abaeb6..8eb994a9132 100644 --- a/doc/classes/IP.xml +++ b/doc/classes/IP.xml @@ -10,33 +10,27 @@ - - - - + + Removes all of a [code]hostname[/code]'s cached references. If no [code]hostname[/code] is given, all cached IP addresses are removed. - - - - + + Removes a given item [code]id[/code] from the queue. This should be used to free a queue after it has completed to enable more queries to happen. - - + Returns all the user's current IPv4 and IPv6 addresses as an array. - - + Returns all network adapters as an array. Each adapter is a dictionary of the form: @@ -51,61 +45,46 @@ - - - - + + Returns a queued hostname's IP address, given its queue [code]id[/code]. Returns an empty string on error or if resolution hasn't happened yet (see [method get_resolve_item_status]). - - - - + + Returns resolved addresses, or an empty array if an error happened or resolution didn't happen yet (see [method get_resolve_item_status]). - - - - + + Returns a queued hostname's status as a [enum ResolverStatus] constant, given its queue [code]id[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a given hostname's IPv4 or IPv6 address when resolved (blocking-type method). The address type returned depends on the [enum Type] constant given as [code]ip_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Resolves a given hostname in a blocking way. Addresses are returned as an [Array] of IPv4 or IPv6 addresses depending on [code]ip_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a queue item to resolve a hostname to an IPv4 or IPv6 address depending on the [enum Type] constant given as [code]ip_type[/code]. Returns the queue ID if successful, or [constant RESOLVER_INVALID_ID] on error. diff --git a/doc/classes/Image.xml b/doc/classes/Image.xml index 37a96fef3d4..34c5fb582ef 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Image.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Image.xml @@ -13,352 +13,269 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Alpha-blends [code]src_rect[/code] from [code]src[/code] image to this image at coordinates [code]dest[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Alpha-blends [code]src_rect[/code] from [code]src[/code] image to this image using [code]mask[/code] image at coordinates [code]dst[/code]. Alpha channels are required for both [code]src[/code] and [code]mask[/code]. [code]dst[/code] pixels and [code]src[/code] pixels will blend if the corresponding mask pixel's alpha value is not 0. [code]src[/code] image and [code]mask[/code] image [b]must[/b] have the same size (width and height) but they can have different formats. - - - - - - - - + + + + Copies [code]src_rect[/code] from [code]src[/code] image to this image at coordinates [code]dst[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Blits [code]src_rect[/code] area from [code]src[/code] image to this image at the coordinates given by [code]dst[/code]. [code]src[/code] pixel is copied onto [code]dst[/code] if the corresponding [code]mask[/code] pixel's alpha value is not 0. [code]src[/code] image and [code]mask[/code] image [b]must[/b] have the same size (width and height) but they can have different formats. - - - - + + Converts a bump map to a normal map. A bump map provides a height offset per-pixel, while a normal map provides a normal direction per pixel. - - + Removes the image's mipmaps. - - - - - - - - + + + + Compresses the image to use less memory. Can not directly access pixel data while the image is compressed. Returns error if the chosen compression mode is not available. See [enum CompressMode] and [enum CompressSource] constants. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + Converts the image's format. See [enum Format] constants. - - - - + + Copies [code]src[/code] image to this image. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates an empty image of given size and format. See [enum Format] constants. If [code]use_mipmaps[/code] is [code]true[/code] then generate mipmaps for this image. See the [method generate_mipmaps]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Creates a new image of given size and format. See [enum Format] constants. Fills the image with the given raw data. If [code]use_mipmaps[/code] is [code]true[/code] then loads mipmaps for this image from [code]data[/code]. See [method generate_mipmaps]. - - - - - - + + + Crops the image to the given [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code]. If the specified size is larger than the current size, the extra area is filled with black pixels. - - + Decompresses the image if it is VRAM compressed in a supported format. Returns [constant OK] if the format is supported, otherwise [constant ERR_UNAVAILABLE]. [b]Note:[/b] The following formats can be decompressed: DXT, RGTC, BPTC, PVRTC1. The formats ETC1 and ETC2 are not supported. - - + Returns [constant ALPHA_BLEND] if the image has data for alpha values. Returns [constant ALPHA_BIT] if all the alpha values are stored in a single bit. Returns [constant ALPHA_NONE] if no data for alpha values is found. - - - - + + - - - - + + Fills the image with a given [Color]. - - + Blends low-alpha pixels with nearby pixels. - - + Flips the image horizontally. - - + Flips the image vertically. - - - - + + Generates mipmaps for the image. Mipmaps are precalculated lower-resolution copies of the image that are automatically used if the image needs to be scaled down when rendered. They help improve image quality and performance when rendering. This method returns an error if the image is compressed, in a custom format, or if the image's width/height is [code]0[/code]. - - + Returns a copy of the image's raw data. - - + Returns the image's format. See [enum Format] constants. - - + Returns the image's height. - - - - + + Returns the offset where the image's mipmap with index [code]mipmap[/code] is stored in the [code]data[/code] dictionary. - - - - - - + + + Returns the color of the pixel at [code](x, y)[/code]. This is the same as [method get_pixelv], but with two integer arguments instead of a [Vector2i] argument. - - - - + + Returns the color of the pixel at [code]point[/code]. This is the same as [method get_pixel], but with a [Vector2i] argument instead of two integer arguments. - - - - + + Returns a new image that is a copy of the image's area specified with [code]rect[/code]. - - + Returns the image's size (width and height). - - + Returns a [Rect2] enclosing the visible portion of the image, considering each pixel with a non-zero alpha channel as visible. - - + Returns the image's width. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the image has generated mipmaps. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the image is compressed. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the image has no data. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if all the image's pixels have an alpha value of 0. Returns [code]false[/code] if any pixel has an alpha value higher than 0. - - - - + + Loads an image from file [code]path[/code]. See [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/getting_started/workflow/assets/importing_images.html#supported-image-formats]Supported image formats[/url] for a list of supported image formats and limitations. [b]Warning:[/b] This method should only be used in the editor or in cases when you need to load external images at run-time, such as images located at the [code]user://[/code] directory, and may not work in exported projects. @@ -366,132 +283,102 @@ - - - - + + Loads an image from the binary contents of a BMP file. [b]Note:[/b] Godot's BMP module doesn't support 16-bit per pixel images. Only 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit per pixel images are supported. - - - - + + Loads an image from the binary contents of a JPEG file. - - - - + + Loads an image from the binary contents of a PNG file. - - - - + + Loads an image from the binary contents of a TGA file. - - - - + + Loads an image from the binary contents of a WebP file. - - + Converts the image's data to represent coordinates on a 3D plane. This is used when the image represents a normal map. A normal map can add lots of detail to a 3D surface without increasing the polygon count. - - + Multiplies color values with alpha values. Resulting color values for a pixel are [code](color * alpha)/256[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Resizes the image to the given [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code]. New pixels are calculated using the [code]interpolation[/code] mode defined via [enum Interpolation] constants. - - - - - - + + + Resizes the image to the nearest power of 2 for the width and height. If [code]square[/code] is [code]true[/code] then set width and height to be the same. New pixels are calculated using the [code]interpolation[/code] mode defined via [enum Interpolation] constants. - - + Converts a standard RGBE (Red Green Blue Exponent) image to an sRGB image. - - - - - - + + + Saves the image as an EXR file to [code]path[/code]. If [code]grayscale[/code] is [code]true[/code] and the image has only one channel, it will be saved explicitly as monochrome rather than one red channel. This function will return [constant ERR_UNAVAILABLE] if Godot was compiled without the TinyEXR module. [b]Note:[/b] The TinyEXR module is disabled in non-editor builds, which means [method save_exr] will return [constant ERR_UNAVAILABLE] when it is called from an exported project. - - - - + + Saves the image as a PNG file to [code]path[/code]. - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [Color] of the pixel at [code](x, y)[/code] to [code]color[/code]. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -516,12 +403,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Color] of the pixel at [code]point[/code] to [code]color[/code]. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -546,15 +430,13 @@ - - + Shrinks the image by a factor of 2. - - + Converts the raw data from the sRGB colorspace to a linear scale. diff --git a/doc/classes/ImageTexture.xml b/doc/classes/ImageTexture.xml index f89b6ad57b9..435fec6a501 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ImageTexture.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ImageTexture.xml @@ -32,35 +32,28 @@ - - - - + + Initializes the texture by allocating and setting the data from an [Image]. - - + Returns the format of the texture, one of [enum Image.Format]. - - - - + + Resizes the texture to the specified dimensions. - - - - + + Replaces the texture's data with a new [Image]. [b]Note:[/b] The texture has to be initialized first with the [method create_from_image] method before it can be updated. The new image dimensions, format, and mipmaps configuration should match the existing texture's image configuration, otherwise it has to be re-created with the [method create_from_image] method. diff --git a/doc/classes/ImageTexture3D.xml b/doc/classes/ImageTexture3D.xml index d05082487d8..538a836c1c5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ImageTexture3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ImageTexture3D.xml @@ -8,28 +8,19 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/ImageTextureLayered.xml b/doc/classes/ImageTextureLayered.xml index d06b44afa93..1b7400803da 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ImageTextureLayered.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ImageTextureLayered.xml @@ -8,20 +8,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/ImmediateMesh.xml b/doc/classes/ImmediateMesh.xml index d2ae091cad2..69637d5bdd5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ImmediateMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ImmediateMesh.xml @@ -10,89 +10,70 @@ - - + Clear all surfaces. - - - - + + Add a 3D vertex using the current attributes previously set. - - - - + + Add a 2D vertex using the current attributes previously set. - - - - - - + + + Begin a new surface. - - + End and commit current surface. Note that surface being created will not be visible until this function is called. - - - - + + Set the color attribute that will be pushed with the next vertex. - - - - + + Set the normal attribute that will be pushed with the next vertex. - - - - + + Set the tangent attribute that will be pushed with the next vertex. - - - - + + Set the UV attribute that will be pushed with the next vertex. - - - - + + Set the UV2 attribute that will be pushed with the next vertex. diff --git a/doc/classes/Input.xml b/doc/classes/Input.xml index 89736e4a8d9..293456b645c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Input.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Input.xml @@ -13,12 +13,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + This will simulate pressing the specified action. The strength can be used for non-boolean actions, it's ranged between 0 and 1 representing the intensity of the given action. @@ -26,28 +23,22 @@ - - - - + + If the specified action is already pressed, this will release it. - - - - - - + + + Adds a new mapping entry (in SDL2 format) to the mapping database. Optionally update already connected devices. - - + Returns the acceleration in m/s² of the device's accelerometer sensor, if the device has one. Otherwise, the method returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. Note this method returns an empty [Vector3] when running from the editor even when your device has an accelerometer. You must export your project to a supported device to read values from the accelerometer. @@ -55,160 +46,126 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a value between 0 and 1 representing the raw intensity of the given action, ignoring the action's deadzone. In most cases, you should use [method get_action_strength] instead. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Returns a value between 0 and 1 representing the intensity of the given action. In a joypad, for example, the further away the axis (analog sticks or L2, R2 triggers) is from the dead zone, the closer the value will be to 1. If the action is mapped to a control that has no axis as the keyboard, the value returned will be 0 or 1. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Get axis input by specifying two actions, one negative and one positive. This is a shorthand for writing [code]Input.get_action_strength("positive_action") - Input.get_action_strength("negative_action")[/code]. - - + Returns an [Array] containing the device IDs of all currently connected joypads. - - + Returns the currently assigned cursor shape (see [enum CursorShape]). - - + Returns the gravity in m/s² of the device's accelerometer sensor, if the device has one. Otherwise, the method returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. [b]Note:[/b] This method only works on Android and iOS. On other platforms, it always returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. - - + Returns the rotation rate in rad/s around a device's X, Y, and Z axes of the gyroscope sensor, if the device has one. Otherwise, the method returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. [b]Note:[/b] This method only works on Android and iOS. On other platforms, it always returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the current value of the joypad axis at given index (see [enum JoyAxis]). - - - - + + Returns a SDL2-compatible device GUID on platforms that use gamepad remapping. Returns [code]"Default Gamepad"[/code] otherwise. - - - - + + Returns the name of the joypad at the specified device index. - - - - + + Returns the duration of the current vibration effect in seconds. - - - - + + Returns the strength of the joypad vibration: x is the strength of the weak motor, and y is the strength of the strong motor. - - + Returns the mouse speed for the last time the cursor was moved, and this until the next frame where the mouse moves. This means that even if the mouse is not moving, this function will still return the value of the last motion. - - + Returns the magnetic field strength in micro-Tesla for all axes of the device's magnetometer sensor, if the device has one. Otherwise, the method returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. [b]Note:[/b] This method only works on Android, iOS and UWP. On other platforms, it always returns [constant Vector3.ZERO]. - - + Returns mouse buttons as a bitmask. If multiple mouse buttons are pressed at the same time, the bits are added together. - - + Returns the mouse mode. See the constants for more information. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Gets an input vector by specifying four actions for the positive and negative X and Y axes. This method is useful when getting vector input, such as from a joystick, directional pad, arrows, or WASD. The vector has its length limited to 1 and has a circular deadzone, which is useful for using vector input as movement. @@ -216,12 +173,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] when the user starts pressing the action event, meaning it's [code]true[/code] only on the frame that the user pressed down the button. This is useful for code that needs to run only once when an action is pressed, instead of every frame while it's pressed. @@ -229,88 +183,66 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] when the user stops pressing the action event, meaning it's [code]true[/code] only on the frame that the user released the button. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if you are pressing the action event. Note that if an action has multiple buttons assigned and more than one of them is pressed, releasing one button will release the action, even if some other button assigned to this action is still pressed. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if you are pressing the joypad button (see [enum JoyButton]). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the system knows the specified device. This means that it sets all button and axis indices. Unknown joypads are not expected to match these constants, but you can still retrieve events from them. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if you are pressing the key in the current keyboard layout. You can pass a [enum Key] constant. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if you are pressing the mouse button specified with [enum MouseButton]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Notifies the [Input] singleton that a connection has changed, to update the state for the [code]device[/code] index. This is used internally and should not have to be called from user scripts. See [signal joy_connection_changed] for the signal emitted when this is triggered internally. - - - - + + Feeds an [InputEvent] to the game. Can be used to artificially trigger input events from code. Also generates [method Node._input] calls. Example: @@ -331,23 +263,17 @@ - - - - + + Removes all mappings from the internal database that match the given GUID. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a custom mouse cursor image, which is only visible inside the game window. The hotspot can also be specified. Passing [code]null[/code] to the image parameter resets to the system cursor. See [enum CursorShape] for the list of shapes. [code]image[/code]'s size must be lower than 256×256. @@ -357,10 +283,8 @@ - - - - + + Sets the default cursor shape to be used in the viewport instead of [constant CURSOR_ARROW]. [b]Note:[/b] If you want to change the default cursor shape for [Control]'s nodes, use [member Control.mouse_default_cursor_shape] instead. @@ -368,64 +292,49 @@ - - - - + + Sets the mouse mode. See the constants for more information. - - - - + + Enables or disables the accumulation of similar input events sent by the operating system. When input accumulation is enabled, all input events generated during a frame will be merged and emitted when the frame is done rendering. Therefore, this limits the number of input method calls per second to the rendering FPS. Input accumulation is enabled by default. It can be disabled to get slightly more precise/reactive input at the cost of increased CPU usage. In applications where drawing freehand lines is required, input accumulation should generally be disabled while the user is drawing the line to get results that closely follow the actual input. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Starts to vibrate the joypad. Joypads usually come with two rumble motors, a strong and a weak one. [code]weak_magnitude[/code] is the strength of the weak motor (between 0 and 1) and [code]strong_magnitude[/code] is the strength of the strong motor (between 0 and 1). [code]duration[/code] is the duration of the effect in seconds (a duration of 0 will try to play the vibration indefinitely). [b]Note:[/b] Not every hardware is compatible with long effect durations; it is recommended to restart an effect if it has to be played for more than a few seconds. - - - - + + Stops the vibration of the joypad. - - - - + + Vibrate Android and iOS devices. [b]Note:[/b] It needs [code]VIBRATE[/code] permission for Android at export settings. iOS does not support duration. - - - - + + Sets the mouse position to the specified vector. @@ -433,10 +342,8 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when a joypad device has been connected or disconnected. diff --git a/doc/classes/InputEvent.xml b/doc/classes/InputEvent.xml index 9ed965bbf40..cd14965d1b0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/InputEvent.xml +++ b/doc/classes/InputEvent.xml @@ -14,112 +14,87 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given input event and this input event can be added together (only for events of type [InputEventMouseMotion]). The given input event's position, global position and speed will be copied. The resulting [code]relative[/code] is a sum of both events. Both events' modifiers have to be identical. - - + Returns a [String] representation of the event. - - - - - - + + + Returns a value between 0.0 and 1.0 depending on the given actions' state. Useful for getting the value of events of type [InputEventJoypadMotion]. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this input event matches a pre-defined action of any type. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given action is being pressed (and is not an echo event for [InputEventKey] events, unless [code]allow_echo[/code] is [code]true[/code]). Not relevant for events of type [InputEventMouseMotion] or [InputEventScreenDrag]. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given action is released (i.e. not pressed). Not relevant for events of type [InputEventMouseMotion] or [InputEventScreenDrag]. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this input event's type is one that can be assigned to an input action. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this input event is an echo event (only for events of type [InputEventKey]). - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified [code]event[/code] matches this event. Only valid for action events i.e key ([InputEventKey]), button ([InputEventMouseButton] or [InputEventJoypadButton]), axis [InputEventJoypadMotion] or action ([InputEventAction]) events. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this input event is pressed. Not relevant for events of type [InputEventMouseMotion] or [InputEventScreenDrag]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the given input event which has been offset by [code]local_ofs[/code] and transformed by [code]xform[/code]. Relevant for events of type [InputEventMouseButton], [InputEventMouseMotion], [InputEventScreenTouch], [InputEventScreenDrag], [InputEventMagnifyGesture] and [InputEventPanGesture]. diff --git a/doc/classes/InputEventKey.xml b/doc/classes/InputEventKey.xml index 9f2b8298230..1b09ddee948 100644 --- a/doc/classes/InputEventKey.xml +++ b/doc/classes/InputEventKey.xml @@ -11,16 +11,14 @@ - - + Returns the keycode combined with modifier keys such as [kbd]Shift[/kbd] or [kbd]Alt[/kbd]. See also [InputEventWithModifiers]. To get a human-readable representation of the [InputEventKey] with modifiers, use [code]OS.get_keycode_string(event.get_keycode_with_modifiers())[/code] where [code]event[/code] is the [InputEventKey]. - - + Returns the physical keycode combined with modifier keys such as [kbd]Shift[/kbd] or [kbd]Alt[/kbd]. See also [InputEventWithModifiers]. To get a human-readable representation of the [InputEventKey] with modifiers, use [code]OS.get_keycode_string(event.get_physical_keycode_with_modifiers())[/code] where [code]event[/code] is the [InputEventKey]. diff --git a/doc/classes/InputMap.xml b/doc/classes/InputMap.xml index 3292555b4e2..16c26956131 100644 --- a/doc/classes/InputMap.xml +++ b/doc/classes/InputMap.xml @@ -11,130 +11,99 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds an [InputEvent] to an action. This [InputEvent] will trigger the action. - - - - - - + + + Removes an [InputEvent] from an action. - - - - + + Removes all events from an action. - - - - + + Returns a deadzone value for the action. - - - - + + Returns an array of [InputEvent]s associated with a given action. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the action has the given [InputEvent] associated with it. - - - - - - + + + Sets a deadzone value for the action. - - - - - - + + + Adds an empty action to the [InputMap] with a configurable [code]deadzone[/code]. An [InputEvent] can then be added to this action with [method action_add_event]. - - - - + + Removes an action from the [InputMap]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given event is part of an existing action. This method ignores keyboard modifiers if the given [InputEvent] is not pressed (for proper release detection). See [method action_has_event] if you don't want this behavior. If [code]exact_match[/code] is [code]false[/code], it ignores the input modifiers for [InputEventKey] and [InputEventMouseButton] events, and the direction for [InputEventJoypadMotion] events. - - + Returns an array of all actions in the [InputMap]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [InputMap] has a registered action with the given name. - - + Clears all [InputEventAction] in the [InputMap] and load it anew from [ProjectSettings]. diff --git a/doc/classes/InstancePlaceholder.xml b/doc/classes/InstancePlaceholder.xml index 934764b4612..75892895d7f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/InstancePlaceholder.xml +++ b/doc/classes/InstancePlaceholder.xml @@ -11,28 +11,22 @@ - - - - - - + + + Not thread-safe. Use [method Object.call_deferred] if calling from a thread. - - + Gets the path to the [PackedScene] resource file that is loaded by default when calling [method create_instance]. Not thread-safe. Use [method Object.call_deferred] if calling from a thread. - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/ItemList.xml b/doc/classes/ItemList.xml index c639e0b88ed..c60864886e2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ItemList.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ItemList.xml @@ -12,25 +12,18 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds an item to the item list with no text, only an icon. Returns the index of an added item. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an item to the item list with specified text. Returns the index of an added item. Specify an [code]icon[/code], or use [code]null[/code] as the [code]icon[/code] for a list item with no icon. @@ -38,433 +31,331 @@ - - + Removes all items from the list. - - - - + + Removes all OpenType features from the item's text. - - - - + + Ensures the item associated with the specified index is not selected. - - + Ensures there are no items selected. - - + Ensure current selection is visible, adjusting the scroll position as necessary. - - - - - - + + + Returns the item index at the given [code]position[/code]. When there is no item at that point, -1 will be returned if [code]exact[/code] is [code]true[/code], and the closest item index will be returned otherwise. - - + Returns the number of items currently in the list. - - - - + + Returns the custom background color of the item specified by [code]idx[/code] index. - - - - + + Returns the custom foreground color of the item specified by [code]idx[/code] index. - - - - + + Returns the icon associated with the specified index. - - - - + + Returns a [Color] modulating item's icon at the specified index. - - - - + + Returns the region of item's icon used. The whole icon will be used if the region has no area. - - - - + + Returns item's text language code. - - - - + + Returns the metadata value of the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] of the item's text. - - - - + + Returns the text associated with the specified index. - - - - + + Returns item's text base writing direction. - - - - + + Returns the tooltip hint associated with the specified index. - - + Returns an array with the indexes of the selected items. - - + Returns the [Object] ID associated with the list. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if one or more items are selected. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at the specified index is disabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item icon will be drawn transposed, i.e. the X and Y axes are swapped. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at the specified index is selectable. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the tooltip is enabled for specified item index. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at the specified index is currently selected. - - - - - - + + + Moves item from index [code]from_idx[/code] to [code]to_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the item specified by [code]idx[/code] index from the list. - - - - - - + + + Select the item at the specified index. [b]Note:[/b] This method does not trigger the item selection signal. - - - - - - + + + Sets the background color of the item specified by [code]idx[/code] index to the specified [Color]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the foreground color of the item specified by [code]idx[/code] index to the specified [Color]. - - - - - - + + + Disables (or enables) the item at the specified index. Disabled items cannot be selected and do not trigger activation signals (when double-clicking or pressing [kbd]Enter[/kbd]). - - - - - - + + + Sets (or replaces) the icon's [Texture2D] associated with the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Sets a modulating [Color] of the item associated with the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Sets the region of item's icon used. The whole icon will be used if the region has no area. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the item icon will be drawn transposed. - - - - - - + + + Sets language code of item's text used for line-breaking and text shaping algorithms, if left empty current locale is used instead. - - - - - - + + + Sets a value (of any type) to be stored with the item associated with the specified index. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] for the item's text. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. - - - - - - + + + Allows or disallows selection of the item associated with the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Sets text of the item associated with the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Sets item's text base writing direction. - - - - - - + + + Sets the tooltip hint for the item associated with the specified index. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the tooltip hint is enabled for specified item index. - - + Sorts items in the list by their text. @@ -515,17 +406,14 @@ - - + Triggered when specified list item is activated via double-clicking or by pressing [kbd]Enter[/kbd]. - - - - + + Triggered when specified list item has been selected via right mouse clicking. The click position is also provided to allow appropriate popup of context menus at the correct location. @@ -533,18 +421,15 @@ - - + Triggered when specified item has been selected. [member allow_reselect] must be enabled to reselect an item. - - - - + + Triggered when a multiple selection is altered on a list allowing multiple selection. @@ -555,8 +440,7 @@ - - + Triggered when a right mouse click is issued within the rect of the list but on empty space. [member allow_rmb_select] must be enabled. diff --git a/doc/classes/JSON.xml b/doc/classes/JSON.xml index b95aaed143c..cee7db08e9b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/JSON.xml +++ b/doc/classes/JSON.xml @@ -30,48 +30,38 @@ - - + Returns the [Variant] containing the data of a successful [method parse]. [b]Note:[/b] It will return [code]Null[/code] if the last call to parse was unsuccessful or [method parse] has not yet been called. - - + Returns [code]0[/code] if the last call to [method parse] was successful, or the line number where the parse failed. - - + Returns an empty string if the last call to [method parse] was successful, or the error message if it failed. - - - - + + Attempts to parse the [code]json_string[/code] provided. Returns an [enum Error]. If the parse was successful, it returns [code]OK[/code] and the result can be retrieved using [method get_data]. If unsuccessful, use [method get_error_line] and [method get_error_message] for identifying the source of the failure. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Converts a [Variant] var to JSON text and returns the result. Useful for serializing data to store or send over the network. [b]Note:[/b] The JSON specification does not define integer or float types, but only a [i]number[/i] type. Therefore, converting a Variant to JSON text will convert all numerical values to [float] types. diff --git a/doc/classes/JSONRPC.xml b/doc/classes/JSONRPC.xml index 1e74159f588..30e99f4a30b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/JSONRPC.xml +++ b/doc/classes/JSONRPC.xml @@ -8,74 +8,52 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/JavaClassWrapper.xml b/doc/classes/JavaClassWrapper.xml index 7bad336af99..90d988f9bb7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/JavaClassWrapper.xml +++ b/doc/classes/JavaClassWrapper.xml @@ -8,10 +8,8 @@ - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/JavaScript.xml b/doc/classes/JavaScript.xml index c87e637ff57..d68b4492c72 100644 --- a/doc/classes/JavaScript.xml +++ b/doc/classes/JavaScript.xml @@ -12,32 +12,24 @@ - - - - + + Creates a reference to a [Callable] that can be used as a callback by JavaScript. The reference must be kept until the callback happens, or it won't be called at all. See [JavaScriptObject] for usage. - - - - + + Creates a new JavaScript object using the [code]new[/code] constructor. The [code]object[/code] must a valid property of the JavaScript [code]window[/code]. See [JavaScriptObject] for usage. - - - - - - - - + + + + Prompts the user to download a file containing the specified [code]buffer[/code]. The file will have the given [code]name[/code] and [code]mime[/code] type. [b]Note:[/b] The browser may override the [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Media_type]MIME type[/url] provided based on the file [code]name[/code]'s extension. @@ -46,22 +38,17 @@ - - - - - - + + + Execute the string [code]code[/code] as JavaScript code within the browser window. This is a call to the actual global JavaScript function [code]eval()[/code]. If [code]use_global_execution_context[/code] is [code]true[/code], the code will be evaluated in the global execution context. Otherwise, it is evaluated in the execution context of a function within the engine's runtime environment. - - - - + + Returns an interface to a JavaScript object that can be used by scripts. The [code]interface[/code] must be a valid property of the JavaScript [code]window[/code]. The callback must accept a single [Array] argument, which will contain the JavaScript [code]arguments[/code]. See [JavaScriptObject] for usage. diff --git a/doc/classes/Label.xml b/doc/classes/Label.xml index 9e96f11cccf..42ee2467306 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Label.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Label.xml @@ -12,24 +12,20 @@ - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - + Returns the amount of lines of text the Label has. - - - - + + Returns the height of the line [code]line[/code]. If [code]line[/code] is set to [code]-1[/code], returns the biggest line height. @@ -37,35 +33,28 @@ - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - + Returns the total number of printable characters in the text (excluding spaces and newlines). - - + Returns the number of lines shown. Useful if the [Label]'s height cannot currently display all lines. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Light2D.xml b/doc/classes/Light2D.xml index 0e71f29b585..918e8a5c8a8 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Light2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Light2D.xml @@ -12,16 +12,13 @@ - - + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Light3D.xml b/doc/classes/Light3D.xml index 815d20223dc..380e9314d4b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Light3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Light3D.xml @@ -12,21 +12,16 @@ - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified [enum Light3D.Param] parameter. - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of the specified [enum Light3D.Param] parameter. diff --git a/doc/classes/LightmapGIData.xml b/doc/classes/LightmapGIData.xml index 3a37c6dcb7c..c577439c8f5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/LightmapGIData.xml +++ b/doc/classes/LightmapGIData.xml @@ -8,50 +8,38 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Line2D.xml b/doc/classes/Line2D.xml index 587d5833b92..093ba517552 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Line2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Line2D.xml @@ -12,56 +12,44 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a point at the [code]position[/code]. Appends the point at the end of the line. If [code]at_position[/code] is given, the point is inserted before the point number [code]at_position[/code], moving that point (and every point after) after the inserted point. If [code]at_position[/code] is not given, or is an illegal value ([code]at_position < 0[/code] or [code]at_position >= [method get_point_count][/code]), the point will be appended at the end of the point list. - - + Removes all points from the line. - - + Returns the Line2D's amount of points. - - - - + + Returns point [code]i[/code]'s position. - - - - + + Removes the point at index [code]i[/code] from the line. - - - - - - + + + Overwrites the position in point [code]i[/code] with the supplied [code]position[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/LineEdit.xml b/doc/classes/LineEdit.xml index af6fc738c79..45bb553c9c6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/LineEdit.xml +++ b/doc/classes/LineEdit.xml @@ -32,99 +32,80 @@ - - + Erases the [LineEdit]'s [member text]. - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - + Deletes one character at the caret's current position (equivalent to pressing [kbd]Delete[/kbd]). - - - - - - + + + Deletes a section of the [member text] going from position [code]from_column[/code] to [code]to_column[/code]. Both parameters should be within the text's length. - - + Clears the current selection. - - + Returns the [PopupMenu] of this [LineEdit]. By default, this menu is displayed when right-clicking on the [LineEdit]. - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - + Returns the scroll offset due to [member caret_column], as a number of characters. - - - - + + Inserts [code]text[/code] at the caret. If the resulting value is longer than [member max_length], nothing happens. - - + Returns whether the menu is visible. Use this instead of [code]get_menu().visible[/code] to improve performance (so the creation of the menu is avoided). - - - - + + Executes a given action as defined in the [enum MenuItems] enum. - - - - - - + + + Selects characters inside [LineEdit] between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code]. By default, [code]from[/code] is at the beginning and [code]to[/code] at the end. [codeblocks] @@ -144,19 +125,15 @@ - - + Selects the whole [String]. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. @@ -267,22 +244,19 @@ - - + Emitted when appending text that overflows the [member max_length]. The appended text is truncated to fit [member max_length], and the part that couldn't fit is passed as the [code]rejected_substring[/code] argument. - - + Emitted when the text changes. - - + Emitted when the user presses [constant KEY_ENTER] on the [LineEdit]. diff --git a/doc/classes/LinkButton.xml b/doc/classes/LinkButton.xml index 51b20cd04dc..dbf13fd842d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/LinkButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/LinkButton.xml @@ -11,28 +11,22 @@ - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Listener3D.xml b/doc/classes/Listener3D.xml index b2fcbe534d1..9cc803f2412 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Listener3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Listener3D.xml @@ -11,30 +11,26 @@ - - + Disables the listener to use the current camera's listener instead. - - + Returns the listener's global orthonormalized [Transform3D]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the listener was made current using [method make_current], [code]false[/code] otherwise. [b]Note:[/b] There may be more than one Listener3D marked as "current" in the scene tree, but only the one that was made current last will be used. - - + Enables the listener. This will override the current camera's listener. diff --git a/doc/classes/MainLoop.xml b/doc/classes/MainLoop.xml index 537ecf2b2b8..11124a14360 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MainLoop.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MainLoop.xml @@ -45,34 +45,28 @@ - - + Called before the program exits. - - + Called once during initialization. - - - - + + Called each physics frame with the time since the last physics frame as argument ([code]delta[/code], in seconds). Equivalent to [method Node._physics_process]. If implemented, the method must return a boolean value. [code]true[/code] ends the main loop, while [code]false[/code] lets it proceed to the next frame. - - - - + + Called each process (idle) frame with the time since the last process frame as argument (in seconds). Equivalent to [method Node._process]. If implemented, the method must return a boolean value. [code]true[/code] ends the main loop, while [code]false[/code] lets it proceed to the next frame. @@ -81,10 +75,8 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when a user responds to a permission request. diff --git a/doc/classes/Marshalls.xml b/doc/classes/Marshalls.xml index 4250ffd7005..0f36dd11ca6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Marshalls.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Marshalls.xml @@ -10,60 +10,46 @@ - - - - + + Returns a decoded [PackedByteArray] corresponding to the Base64-encoded string [code]base64_str[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a decoded string corresponding to the Base64-encoded string [code]base64_str[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a decoded [Variant] corresponding to the Base64-encoded string [code]base64_str[/code]. If [code]allow_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], decoding objects is allowed. [b]Warning:[/b] Deserialized objects can contain code which gets executed. Do not use this option if the serialized object comes from untrusted sources to avoid potential security threats such as remote code execution. - - - - + + Returns a Base64-encoded string of a given [PackedByteArray]. - - - - + + Returns a Base64-encoded string of the UTF-8 string [code]utf8_str[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a Base64-encoded string of the [Variant] [code]variant[/code]. If [code]full_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], encoding objects is allowed (and can potentially include code). diff --git a/doc/classes/Material.xml b/doc/classes/Material.xml index 0d287a5d1d0..a3e98228c65 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Material.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Material.xml @@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/MenuButton.xml b/doc/classes/MenuButton.xml index 3b37853d702..2d4df97895d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MenuButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MenuButton.xml @@ -12,17 +12,14 @@ - - + Returns the [PopupMenu] contained in this button. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], shortcuts are disabled and cannot be used to trigger the button. diff --git a/doc/classes/Mesh.xml b/doc/classes/Mesh.xml index 2cc0bd2ef9b..bfa55c2d35b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Mesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Mesh.xml @@ -14,12 +14,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Calculate a [ConvexPolygonShape3D] from the mesh. If [code]clean[/code] is [code]true[/code] (default), duplicate and interior vertices are removed automatically. You can set it to [code]false[/code] to make the process faster if not needed. @@ -27,85 +24,69 @@ - - - - + + Calculate an outline mesh at a defined offset (margin) from the original mesh. [b]Note:[/b] This method typically returns the vertices in reverse order (e.g. clockwise to counterclockwise). - - + Calculate a [ConcavePolygonShape3D] from the mesh. - - + Generate a [TriangleMesh] from the mesh. - - + Returns the smallest [AABB] enclosing this mesh in local space. Not affected by [code]custom_aabb[/code]. See also [method VisualInstance3D.get_transformed_aabb]. [b]Note:[/b] This is only implemented for [ArrayMesh] and [PrimitiveMesh]. - - + Returns all the vertices that make up the faces of the mesh. Each three vertices represent one triangle. - - + Returns the amount of surfaces that the [Mesh] holds. - - - - + + Returns the arrays for the vertices, normals, uvs, etc. that make up the requested surface (see [method ArrayMesh.add_surface_from_arrays]). - - - - + + Returns the blend shape arrays for the requested surface. - - - - + + Returns a [Material] in a given surface. Surface is rendered using this material. - - - - - - + + + Sets a [Material] for a given surface. Surface will be rendered using this material. diff --git a/doc/classes/MeshDataTool.xml b/doc/classes/MeshDataTool.xml index c0ee1e19567..338deed0bea 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MeshDataTool.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MeshDataTool.xml @@ -52,366 +52,281 @@ - - + Clears all data currently in MeshDataTool. - - - - + + Adds a new surface to specified [Mesh] with edited data. - - - - - - + + + Uses specified surface of given [Mesh] to populate data for MeshDataTool. Requires [Mesh] with primitive type [constant Mesh.PRIMITIVE_TRIANGLES]. - - + Returns the number of edges in this [Mesh]. - - - - + + Returns array of faces that touch given edge. - - - - + + Returns meta information assigned to given edge. - - - - - - + + + Returns index of specified vertex connected to given edge. Vertex argument can only be 0 or 1 because edges are comprised of two vertices. - - + Returns the number of faces in this [Mesh]. - - - - - - + + + Returns specified edge associated with given face. Edge argument must 2 or less because a face only has three edges. - - - - + + Returns the metadata associated with the given face. - - - - + + Calculates and returns the face normal of the given face. - - - - - - + + + Returns the specified vertex of the given face. Vertex argument must be 2 or less because faces contain three vertices. - - + Returns the [Mesh]'s format. Format is an integer made up of [Mesh] format flags combined together. For example, a mesh containing both vertices and normals would return a format of [code]3[/code] because [constant Mesh.ARRAY_FORMAT_VERTEX] is [code]1[/code] and [constant Mesh.ARRAY_FORMAT_NORMAL] is [code]2[/code]. See [enum Mesh.ArrayFormat] for a list of format flags. - - + Returns the material assigned to the [Mesh]. - - - - + + Returns the vertex at given index. - - - - + + Returns the bones of the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the color of the given vertex. - - + Returns the total number of vertices in [Mesh]. - - - - + + Returns an array of edges that share the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns an array of faces that share the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the metadata associated with the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the normal of the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the tangent of the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the UV of the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns the UV2 of the given vertex. - - - - + + Returns bone weights of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata of the given edge. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata of the given face. - - - - + + Sets the material to be used by newly-constructed [Mesh]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bones of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata associated with the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the normal of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the tangent of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the UV of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the UV2 of the given vertex. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bone weights of the given vertex. diff --git a/doc/classes/MeshInstance3D.xml b/doc/classes/MeshInstance3D.xml index 930301a7421..665d5d3c779 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MeshInstance3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MeshInstance3D.xml @@ -14,12 +14,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + This helper creates a [StaticBody3D] child node with a [ConvexPolygonShape3D] collision shape calculated from the mesh geometry. It's mainly used for testing. If [code]clean[/code] is [code]true[/code] (default), duplicate and interior vertices are removed automatically. You can set it to [code]false[/code] to make the process faster if not needed. @@ -27,58 +24,47 @@ - - + This helper creates a [MeshInstance3D] child node with gizmos at every vertex calculated from the mesh geometry. It's mainly used for testing. - - + This helper creates a [StaticBody3D] child node with multiple [ConvexPolygonShape3D] collision shapes calculated from the mesh geometry via convex decomposition. It's mainly used for testing. - - + This helper creates a [StaticBody3D] child node with a [ConcavePolygonShape3D] collision shape calculated from the mesh geometry. It's mainly used for testing. - - - - + + Returns the [Material] that will be used by the [Mesh] when drawing. This can return the [member GeometryInstance3D.material_override], the surface override [Material] defined in this [MeshInstance3D], or the surface [Material] defined in the [Mesh]. For example, if [member GeometryInstance3D.material_override] is used, all surfaces will return the override material. - - - - + + Returns the override [Material] for the specified surface of the [Mesh] resource. - - + Returns the number of surface override materials. This is equivalent to [method Mesh.get_surface_count]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the override [Material] for the specified surface of the [Mesh] resource. This material is associated with this [MeshInstance3D] rather than with the [Mesh] resource. diff --git a/doc/classes/MeshLibrary.xml b/doc/classes/MeshLibrary.xml index b33bcc89e3a..9e0292f9468 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MeshLibrary.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MeshLibrary.xml @@ -12,172 +12,133 @@ - - + Clears the library. - - - - + + Creates a new item in the library with the given ID. You can get an unused ID from [method get_last_unused_item_id]. - - - - + + Returns the first item with the given name. - - + Returns the list of item IDs in use. - - - - + + Returns the item's mesh. - - - - + + Returns the item's name. - - - - + + Returns the item's navigation mesh. - - - - + + Returns the transform applied to the item's navigation mesh. - - - - + + When running in the editor, returns a generated item preview (a 3D rendering in isometric perspective). When used in a running project, returns the manually-defined item preview which can be set using [method set_item_preview]. Returns an empty [Texture2D] if no preview was manually set in a running project. - - - - + + Returns an item's collision shapes. The array consists of each [Shape3D] followed by its [Transform3D]. - - + Gets an unused ID for a new item. - - - - + + Removes the item. - - - - - - + + + Sets the item's mesh. - - - - - - + + + Sets the item's name. This name is shown in the editor. It can also be used to look up the item later using [method find_item_by_name]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the item's navigation mesh. - - - - - - + + + Sets the transform to apply to the item's navigation mesh. - - - - - - + + + Sets a texture to use as the item's preview icon in the editor. - - - - - - + + + Sets an item's collision shapes. The array should consist of [Shape3D] objects, each followed by a [Transform3D] that will be applied to it. For shapes that should not have a transform, use [constant Transform3D.IDENTITY]. diff --git a/doc/classes/MethodTweener.xml b/doc/classes/MethodTweener.xml index 3badeb164b5..1b93b20d9f9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MethodTweener.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MethodTweener.xml @@ -11,28 +11,22 @@ - - - - + + Sets the time in seconds after which the [MethodTweener] will start interpolating. By default there's no delay. - - - - + + Sets the type of used easing from [enum Tween.EaseType]. If not set, the default easing is used from the [Tween] that contains this Tweener. - - - - + + Sets the type of used transition from [enum Tween.TransitionType]. If not set, the default transition is used from the [Tween] that contains this Tweener. diff --git a/doc/classes/MultiMesh.xml b/doc/classes/MultiMesh.xml index 45326f12e9a..7b4a53a8102 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MultiMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MultiMesh.xml @@ -15,90 +15,69 @@ - - + Returns the visibility axis-aligned bounding box in local space. See also [method VisualInstance3D.get_transformed_aabb]. - - - - + + Gets a specific instance's color. - - - - + + Returns the custom data that has been set for a specific instance. - - - - + + Returns the [Transform3D] of a specific instance. - - - - + + Returns the [Transform2D] of a specific instance. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of a specific instance by [i]multiplying[/i] the mesh's existing vertex colors. For the color to take effect, ensure that [member use_colors] is [code]true[/code] on the [MultiMesh] and [member BaseMaterial3D.vertex_color_use_as_albedo] is [code]true[/code] on the material. - - - - - - + + + Sets custom data for a specific instance. Although [Color] is used, it is just a container for 4 floating point numbers. For the custom data to be used, ensure that [member use_custom_data] is [code]true[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Transform3D] for a specific instance. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Transform2D] for a specific instance. diff --git a/doc/classes/MultiplayerAPI.xml b/doc/classes/MultiplayerAPI.xml index 82b929c1f7f..104f649921e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MultiplayerAPI.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MultiplayerAPI.xml @@ -13,65 +13,54 @@ - - + Clears the current MultiplayerAPI network state (you shouldn't call this unless you know what you are doing). - - + Returns the peer IDs of all connected peers of this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer]. - - + Returns the unique peer ID of this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer]. - - + Returns the sender's peer ID for the RPC currently being executed. [b]Note:[/b] If not inside an RPC this method will return 0. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if there is a [member network_peer] set. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer] is in server mode (listening for connections). - - + Method used for polling the MultiplayerAPI. You only need to worry about this if you are using [member Node.custom_multiplayer] override or you set [member SceneTree.multiplayer_poll] to [code]false[/code]. By default, [SceneTree] will poll its MultiplayerAPI for you. [b]Note:[/b] This method results in RPCs and RSETs being called, so they will be executed in the same context of this function (e.g. [code]_process[/code], [code]physics[/code], [Thread]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sends the given raw [code]bytes[/code] to a specific peer identified by [code]id[/code] (see [method MultiplayerPeer.set_target_peer]). Default ID is [code]0[/code], i.e. broadcast to all peers. @@ -105,24 +94,20 @@ - - + Emitted when this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer] connects with a new peer. ID is the peer ID of the new peer. Clients get notified when other clients connect to the same server. Upon connecting to a server, a client also receives this signal for the server (with ID being 1). - - + Emitted when this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer] disconnects from a peer. Clients get notified when other clients disconnect from the same server. - - - - + + Emitted when this MultiplayerAPI's [member network_peer] receive a [code]packet[/code] with custom data (see [method send_bytes]). ID is the peer ID of the peer that sent the packet. diff --git a/doc/classes/MultiplayerPeer.xml b/doc/classes/MultiplayerPeer.xml index fa8f0e2de95..88cd058c51c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/MultiplayerPeer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/MultiplayerPeer.xml @@ -13,45 +13,38 @@ - - + Returns a randomly generated integer that can be used as a network unique ID. - - + Returns the current state of the connection. See [enum ConnectionStatus]. - - + Returns the ID of the [MultiplayerPeer] who sent the most recent packet. - - + Returns the ID of this [MultiplayerPeer]. - - + Waits up to 1 second to receive a new network event. - - - - + + Sets the peer to which packets will be sent. The [code]id[/code] can be one of: [constant TARGET_PEER_BROADCAST] to send to all connected peers, [constant TARGET_PEER_SERVER] to send to the peer acting as server, a valid peer ID to send to that specific peer, a negative peer ID to send to all peers except that one. By default, the target peer is [constant TARGET_PEER_BROADCAST]. @@ -78,15 +71,13 @@ - - + Emitted by the server when a client connects. - - + Emitted by the server when a client disconnects. diff --git a/doc/classes/Mutex.xml b/doc/classes/Mutex.xml index dfda614f8e4..f97b2344a50 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Mutex.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Mutex.xml @@ -11,22 +11,19 @@ - - + Locks this [Mutex], blocks until it is unlocked by the current owner. - - + Tries locking this [Mutex], but does not block. Returns [constant OK] on success, [constant ERR_BUSY] otherwise. - - + Unlocks this [Mutex], leaving it to other threads. diff --git a/doc/classes/NativeExtension.xml b/doc/classes/NativeExtension.xml index c48af7df7b8..fa8575383c4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NativeExtension.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NativeExtension.xml @@ -8,38 +8,30 @@ - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/NativeExtensionManager.xml b/doc/classes/NativeExtensionManager.xml index ba9018ff4c5..c14ce94aff1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NativeExtensionManager.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NativeExtensionManager.xml @@ -8,40 +8,31 @@ - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationAgent2D.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationAgent2D.xml index de81ae4d912..c05f7c20949 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationAgent2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationAgent2D.xml @@ -10,88 +10,74 @@ - - + Returns the distance to the target location, using the agent's global position. The user must set the target location with [method set_target_location] in order for this to be accurate. - - + Returns the reachable final location in global coordinates. This can change if the navigation path is altered in any way. - - + Returns the path from start to finish in global coordinates. - - + Returns which index the agent is currently on in the navigation path's [PackedVector2Array]. - - + Returns a [Vector2] in global coordinates, that can be moved to, making sure that there are no static objects in the way. If the agent does not have a navigation path, it will return the position of the agent's parent. - - + - - + Returns the user defined [Vector2] after setting the target location. - - + Returns true if the navigation path's final location has been reached. - - + Returns true if the target location is reachable. The target location is set using [method set_target_location]. - - + Returns true if the target location is reached. The target location is set using [method set_target_location]. It may not always be possible to reach the target location. It should always be possible to reach the final location though. See [method get_final_location]. - - - - + + Sets the user desired final location. This will clear the current navigation path. - - - - + + Sends the passed in velocity to the collision avoidance algorithm. It will adjust the velocity to avoid collisions. Once the adjustment to the velocity is complete, it will emit the [signal velocity_computed] signal. @@ -137,8 +123,7 @@ - - + Notifies when the collision avoidance velocity is calculated. Emitted by [method set_velocity]. diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationAgent3D.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationAgent3D.xml index 8942a37774d..af4a058489e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationAgent3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationAgent3D.xml @@ -10,88 +10,74 @@ - - + Returns the distance to the target location, using the agent's global position. The user must set the target location with [method set_target_location] in order for this to be accurate. - - + Returns the reachable final location in global coordinates. This can change if the navigation path is altered in any way. Because of this, it would be best to check this each frame. - - + Returns the path from start to finish in global coordinates. - - + Returns which index the agent is currently on in the navigation path's [PackedVector3Array]. - - + Returns a [Vector3] in global coordinates, that can be moved to, making sure that there are no static objects in the way. If the agent does not have a navigation path, it will return the origin of the agent's parent. - - + - - + Returns the user defined [Vector3] after setting the target location. - - + Returns true if the navigation path's final location has been reached. - - + Returns true if the target location is reachable. The target location is set using [method set_target_location]. - - + Returns true if the target location is reached. The target location is set using [method set_target_location]. It may not always be possible to reach the target location. It should always be possible to reach the final location though. See [method get_final_location]. - - - - + + Sets the user desired final location. This will clear the current navigation path. - - - - + + Sends the passed in velocity to the collision avoidance algorithm. It will adjust the velocity to avoid collisions. Once the adjustment to the velocity is complete, it will emit the [signal velocity_computed] signal. @@ -143,8 +129,7 @@ - - + Notifies when the collision avoidance velocity is calculated. Emitted by [method set_velocity]. diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationMesh.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationMesh.xml index 871c92798a0..1d9b2b0a366 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationMesh.xml @@ -9,70 +9,54 @@ - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationMeshGenerator.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationMeshGenerator.xml index ce1182ffbe7..99310332601 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationMeshGenerator.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationMeshGenerator.xml @@ -8,20 +8,15 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationPolygon.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationPolygon.xml index 38921078d7a..e1e2c34a632 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationPolygon.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationPolygon.xml @@ -47,119 +47,95 @@ - - - - + + Appends a [PackedVector2Array] that contains the vertices of an outline to the internal array that contains all the outlines. You have to call [method make_polygons_from_outlines] in order for this array to be converted to polygons that the engine will use. - - - - - - + + + Adds a [PackedVector2Array] that contains the vertices of an outline to the internal array that contains all the outlines at a fixed position. You have to call [method make_polygons_from_outlines] in order for this array to be converted to polygons that the engine will use. - - - - + + Adds a polygon using the indices of the vertices you get when calling [method get_vertices]. - - + Clears the array of the outlines, but it doesn't clear the vertices and the polygons that were created by them. - - + Clears the array of polygons, but it doesn't clear the array of outlines and vertices. - - - - + + Returns a [PackedVector2Array] containing the vertices of an outline that was created in the editor or by script. - - + Returns the number of outlines that were created in the editor or by script. - - - - + + Returns a [PackedInt32Array] containing the indices of the vertices of a created polygon. - - + Returns the count of all polygons. - - + Returns a [PackedVector2Array] containing all the vertices being used to create the polygons. - - + Creates polygons from the outlines added in the editor or by script. - - - - + + Removes an outline created in the editor or by script. You have to call [method make_polygons_from_outlines] for the polygons to update. - - - - - - + + + Changes an outline created in the editor or by script. You have to call [method make_polygons_from_outlines] for the polygons to update. - - - - + + Sets the vertices that can be then indexed to create polygons with the [method add_polygon] method. diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationRegion3D.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationRegion3D.xml index 2904ba42003..da06641b48e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationRegion3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationRegion3D.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + Bakes the [NavigationMesh]. The baking is done in a separate thread because navigation baking is not a cheap operation. This can be done at runtime. When it is completed, it automatically sets the new [NavigationMesh]. diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationServer2D.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationServer2D.xml index b0a57ed2274..042ab06e6f6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationServer2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationServer2D.xml @@ -16,337 +16,249 @@ - - + Creates the agent. - - - - + + Returns true if the map got changed the previous frame. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Callback called at the end of the RVO process. - - - - - - + + + Puts the agent in the map. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum number of other agents the agent takes into account in the navigation. The larger this number, the longer the running time of the simulation. If the number is too low, the simulation will not be safe. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum speed of the agent. Must be positive. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum distance to other agents this agent takes into account in the navigation. The larger this number, the longer the running time of the simulation. If the number is too low, the simulation will not be safe. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the agent in world space. - - - - - - + + + Sets the radius of the agent. - - - - - - + + + Sets the new target velocity. - - - - - - + + + The minimal amount of time for which the agent's velocities that are computed by the simulation are safe with respect to other agents. The larger this number, the sooner this agent will respond to the presence of other agents, but the less freedom this agent has in choosing its velocities. Must be positive. - - - - - - + + + Sets the current velocity of the agent. - - - - + + Destroy the RID - - + Create a new map. - - - - + + Returns the map cell size. - - - - - - + + + Returns the point closest to the provided [code]to_point[/code] on the navigation mesh surface. - - - - - - + + + Returns the owner region RID for the point returned by [method map_get_closest_point]. - - - - + + Returns the edge connection margin of the map. The edge connection margin is a distance used to connect two regions. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns the navigation path to reach the destination from the origin. [code]layers[/code] is a bitmask of all region layers that are allowed to be in the path. - - - - + + Returns true if the map is active. - - - - - - + + + Sets the map active. - - - - - - + + + Set the map cell size used to weld the navigation mesh polygons. - - - - - - + + + Set the map edge connection margin used to weld the compatible region edges. - - + Creates a new region. - - - - - - + + + Returns the ending point of a connection door. [code]connection[/code] is an index between 0 and the return value of [method region_get_connections_count]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the starting point of a connection door. [code]connection[/code] is an index between 0 and the return value of [method region_get_connections_count]. - - - - + + Returns how many connections this [code]region[/code] has with other regions in the map. - - - - + + Returns the region's layers. - - - - - - + + + Set the region's layers. This allows selecting regions from a path request (when using [method NavigationServer2D.map_get_path]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the map for the region. - - - - - - + + + Sets the navigation mesh for the region. - - - - - - + + + Sets the global transformation for the region. @@ -354,8 +266,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a navigation map is updated, when a region moves or is modified. diff --git a/doc/classes/NavigationServer3D.xml b/doc/classes/NavigationServer3D.xml index ef9efcb99c9..73ca18655a3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NavigationServer3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NavigationServer3D.xml @@ -16,301 +16,221 @@ - - + Creates the agent. - - - - + + Returns true if the map got changed the previous frame. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Callback called at the end of the RVO process. - - - - - - + + + Puts the agent in the map. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum number of other agents the agent takes into account in the navigation. The larger this number, the longer the running time of the simulation. If the number is too low, the simulation will not be safe. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum speed of the agent. Must be positive. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum distance to other agents this agent takes into account in the navigation. The larger this number, the longer the running time of the simulation. If the number is too low, the simulation will not be safe. - - - - - - + + + Sets the position of the agent in world space. - - - - - - + + + Sets the radius of the agent. - - - - - - + + + Sets the new target velocity. - - - - - - + + + The minimal amount of time for which the agent's velocities that are computed by the simulation are safe with respect to other agents. The larger this number, the sooner this agent will respond to the presence of other agents, but the less freedom this agent has in choosing its velocities. Must be positive. - - - - - - + + + Sets the current velocity of the agent. - - - - + + Destroy the RID - - + Create a new map. - - - - + + Returns the map cell size. - - - - - - + + + Returns the point closest to the provided [code]point[/code] on the navigation mesh surface. - - - - - - + + + Returns the normal for the point returned by [method map_get_closest_point]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the owner region RID for the point returned by [method map_get_closest_point]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns the closest point between the navigation surface and the segment. - - - - + + Returns the edge connection margin of the map. This distance is the minimum vertex distance needed to connect two edges from different regions. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns the navigation path to reach the destination from the origin. [code]layers[/code] is a bitmask of all region layers that are allowed to be in the path. - - - - + + Returns the map's up direction. - - - - + + Returns true if the map is active. - - - - - - + + + Sets the map active. - - - - - - + + + Set the map cell size used to weld the navigation mesh polygons. - - - - - - + + + Set the map edge connection margin used to weld the compatible region edges. - - - - - - + + + Sets the map up direction. - - - - + + Process the collision avoidance agents. The result of this process is needed by the physics server, so this must be called in the main thread. @@ -318,112 +238,84 @@ - - - - - - + + + Bakes the navigation mesh. - - + Creates a new region. - - - - - - + + + Returns the ending point of a connection door. [code]connection[/code] is an index between 0 and the return value of [method region_get_connections_count]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the starting point of a connection door. [code]connection[/code] is an index between 0 and the return value of [method region_get_connections_count]. - - - - + + Returns how many connections this [code]region[/code] has with other regions in the map. - - - - + + Returns the region's layers. - - - - - - + + + Set the region's layers. This allows selecting regions from a path request (when using [method NavigationServer3D.map_get_path]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the map for the region. - - - - - - + + + Sets the navigation mesh for the region. - - - - - - + + + Sets the global transformation for the region. - - - - + + Control activation of this server. @@ -431,8 +323,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a navigation map is updated, when a region moves or is modified. diff --git a/doc/classes/NinePatchRect.xml b/doc/classes/NinePatchRect.xml index 5d59f994d34..77fd9165bbd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NinePatchRect.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NinePatchRect.xml @@ -10,21 +10,16 @@ - - - - + + Returns the size of the margin on the specified [enum Side]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the size of the margin on the specified [enum Side] to [code]value[/code] pixels. diff --git a/doc/classes/Node.xml b/doc/classes/Node.xml index fc971effd74..3874046628a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Node.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Node.xml @@ -22,24 +22,21 @@ - - + Called when the node enters the [SceneTree] (e.g. upon instancing, scene changing, or after calling [method add_child] in a script). If the node has children, its [method _enter_tree] callback will be called first, and then that of the children. Corresponds to the [constant NOTIFICATION_ENTER_TREE] notification in [method Object._notification]. - - + Called when the node is about to leave the [SceneTree] (e.g. upon freeing, scene changing, or after calling [method remove_child] in a script). If the node has children, its [method _exit_tree] callback will be called last, after all its children have left the tree. Corresponds to the [constant NOTIFICATION_EXIT_TREE] notification in [method Object._notification] and signal [signal tree_exiting]. To get notified when the node has already left the active tree, connect to the [signal tree_exited]. - - + The elements in the array returned from this method are displayed as warnings in the Scene Dock if the script that overrides it is a [code]tool[/code] script. Returning an empty array produces no warnings. @@ -47,10 +44,8 @@ - - - - + + Called when there is an input event. The input event propagates up through the node tree until a node consumes it. It is only called if input processing is enabled, which is done automatically if this method is overridden, and can be toggled with [method set_process_input]. @@ -60,10 +55,8 @@ - - - - + + Called during the physics processing step of the main loop. Physics processing means that the frame rate is synced to the physics, i.e. the [code]delta[/code] variable should be constant. [code]delta[/code] is in seconds. It is only called if physics processing is enabled, which is done automatically if this method is overridden, and can be toggled with [method set_physics_process]. @@ -72,10 +65,8 @@ - - - - + + Called during the processing step of the main loop. Processing happens at every frame and as fast as possible, so the [code]delta[/code] time since the previous frame is not constant. [code]delta[/code] is in seconds. It is only called if processing is enabled, which is done automatically if this method is overridden, and can be toggled with [method set_process]. @@ -84,8 +75,7 @@ - - + Called when the node is "ready", i.e. when both the node and its children have entered the scene tree. If the node has children, their [method _ready] callbacks get triggered first, and the parent node will receive the ready notification afterwards. Corresponds to the [constant NOTIFICATION_READY] notification in [method Object._notification]. See also the [code]onready[/code] keyword for variables. @@ -94,10 +84,8 @@ - - - - + + Called when an [InputEvent] hasn't been consumed by [method _input] or any GUI. The input event propagates up through the node tree until a node consumes it. It is only called if unhandled input processing is enabled, which is done automatically if this method is overridden, and can be toggled with [method set_process_unhandled_input]. @@ -107,10 +95,8 @@ - - - - + + Called when an [InputEventKey] hasn't been consumed by [method _input] or any GUI. The input event propagates up through the node tree until a node consumes it. It is only called if unhandled key input processing is enabled, which is done automatically if this method is overridden, and can be toggled with [method set_process_unhandled_key_input]. @@ -120,12 +106,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a child node. Nodes can have any number of children, but every child must have a unique name. Child nodes are automatically deleted when the parent node is deleted, so an entire scene can be removed by deleting its topmost node. If [code]legible_unique_name[/code] is [code]true[/code], the child node will have a human-readable name based on the name of the node being instantiated instead of its type. @@ -151,12 +134,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a [code]sibling[/code] node to current's node parent, at the same level as that node, right below it. If [code]legible_unique_name[/code] is [code]true[/code], the child node will have a human-readable name based on the name of the node being instantiated instead of its type. @@ -164,27 +144,22 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds the node to a group. Groups are helpers to name and organize a subset of nodes, for example "enemies" or "collectables". A node can be in any number of groups. Nodes can be assigned a group at any time, but will not be added until they are inside the scene tree (see [method is_inside_tree]). See notes in the description, and the group methods in [SceneTree]. The [code]persistent[/code] option is used when packing node to [PackedScene] and saving to file. Non-persistent groups aren't stored. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node can process while the scene tree is paused (see [member process_mode]). Always returns [code]true[/code] if the scene tree is not paused, and [code]false[/code] if the node is not in the tree. - - + Creates a new [Tween] and binds it to this node. This is equivalent of doing: [codeblock] @@ -193,10 +168,8 @@ - - - - + + Duplicates the node, returning a new node. You can fine-tune the behavior using the [code]flags[/code] (see [enum DuplicateFlags]). @@ -204,14 +177,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Finds a descendant of this node whose name matches [code]mask[/code] as in [method String.match] (i.e. case-sensitive, but [code]"*"[/code] matches zero or more characters and [code]"?"[/code] matches any single character except [code]"."[/code]). [b]Note:[/b] It does not match against the full path, just against individual node names. @@ -220,10 +189,8 @@ - - - - + + Finds the first parent of the current node whose name matches [code]mask[/code] as in [method String.match] (i.e. case-sensitive, but [code]"*"[/code] matches zero or more characters and [code]"?"[/code] matches any single character except [code]"."[/code]). [b]Note:[/b] It does not match against the full path, just against individual node names. @@ -231,10 +198,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns a child node by its index (see [method get_child_count]). This method is often used for iterating all children of a node. Negative indices access the children from the last one. @@ -242,51 +207,43 @@ - - + Returns the number of child nodes. - - + Returns an array of references to node's children. - - + - - + Returns an array listing the groups that the node is a member of. - - + Returns the node's order in the scene tree branch. For example, if called on the first child node the position is [code]0[/code]. - - + Returns the peer ID of the network master for this node. See [method set_network_master]. - - - - + + Fetches a node. The [NodePath] can be either a relative path (from the current node) or an absolute path (in the scene tree) to a node. If the path does not exist, a [code]null instance[/code] is returned and an error is logged. Attempts to access methods on the return value will result in an "Attempt to call <method> on a null instance." error. [b]Note:[/b] Fetching absolute paths only works when the node is inside the scene tree (see [method is_inside_tree]). @@ -319,10 +276,8 @@ - - - - + + Fetches a node and one of its resources as specified by the [NodePath]'s subname (e.g. [code]Area2D/CollisionShape2D:shape[/code]). If several nested resources are specified in the [NodePath], the last one will be fetched. The return value is an array of size 3: the first index points to the [Node] (or [code]null[/code] if not found), the second index points to the [Resource] (or [code]null[/code] if not found), and the third index is the remaining [NodePath], if any. @@ -342,208 +297,172 @@ - - - - + + Similar to [method get_node], but does not log an error if [code]path[/code] does not point to a valid [Node]. - - + Returns the parent node of the current node, or a [code]null instance[/code] if the node lacks a parent. - - + Returns the absolute path of the current node. This only works if the current node is inside the scene tree (see [method is_inside_tree]). - - - - + + Returns the relative [NodePath] from this node to the specified [code]node[/code]. Both nodes must be in the same scene or the function will fail. - - + Returns the time elapsed (in seconds) since the last physics-bound frame (see [method _physics_process]). This is always a constant value in physics processing unless the frames per second is changed via [member Engine.iterations_per_second]. - - + Returns the time elapsed (in seconds) since the last process callback. This value may vary from frame to frame. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this is an instance load placeholder. See [InstancePlaceholder]. - - + Returns the [SceneTree] that contains this node. - - + Returns the node's [Viewport]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node that the [NodePath] points to exists. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [NodePath] points to a valid node and its subname points to a valid resource, e.g. [code]Area2D/CollisionShape2D:shape[/code]. Properties with a non-[Resource] type (e.g. nodes or primitive math types) are not considered resources. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given node is a direct or indirect child of the current node. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is folded (collapsed) in the Scene dock. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given node occurs later in the scene hierarchy than the current node. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this node is in the specified group. See notes in the description, and the group methods in [SceneTree]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this node is currently inside a [SceneTree]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the local system is the master of this node. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if physics processing is enabled (see [method set_physics_process]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if internal physics processing is enabled (see [method set_physics_process_internal]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if processing is enabled (see [method set_process]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is processing input (see [method set_process_input]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if internal processing is enabled (see [method set_process_internal]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is processing unhandled input (see [method set_process_unhandled_input]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is processing unhandled key input (see [method set_process_unhandled_key_input]). - - - - - - + + + Moves a child node to a different position (order) among the other children. Since calls, signals, etc are performed by tree order, changing the order of children nodes may be useful. - - + Prints all stray nodes (nodes outside the [SceneTree]). Used for debugging. Works only in debug builds. - - + Prints the tree to stdout. Used mainly for debugging purposes. This version displays the path relative to the current node, and is good for copy/pasting into the [method get_node] function. [b]Example output:[/b] @@ -558,8 +477,7 @@ - - + Similar to [method print_tree], this prints the tree to stdout. This version displays a more graphical representation similar to what is displayed in the scene inspector. It is useful for inspecting larger trees. [b]Example output:[/b] @@ -574,226 +492,175 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Calls the given method (if present) with the arguments given in [code]args[/code] on this node and recursively on all its children. If the [code]parent_first[/code] argument is [code]true[/code], the method will be called on the current node first, then on all its children. If [code]parent_first[/code] is [code]false[/code], the children will be called first. - - - - + + Notifies the current node and all its children recursively by calling [method Object.notification] on all of them. - - + Queues a node for deletion at the end of the current frame. When deleted, all of its child nodes will be deleted as well. This method ensures it's safe to delete the node, contrary to [method Object.free]. Use [method Object.is_queued_for_deletion] to check whether a node will be deleted at the end of the frame. - - + Moves this node to the bottom of parent node's children hierarchy. This is often useful in GUIs ([Control] nodes), because their order of drawing depends on their order in the tree. The top Node is drawn first, then any siblings below the top Node in the hierarchy are successively drawn on top of it. After using [code]raise[/code], a Control will be drawn on top of its siblings. - - + Removes a node and sets all its children as children of the parent node (if it exists). All event subscriptions that pass by the removed node will be unsubscribed. - - - - + + Removes a child node. The node is NOT deleted and must be deleted manually. - - - - + + Removes a node from a group. See notes in the description, and the group methods in [SceneTree]. - - - - - - + + + Replaces a node in a scene by the given one. Subscriptions that pass through this node will be lost. If [code]keep_groups[/code] is [code]true[/code], the [code]node[/code] is added to the same groups that the replaced node is in. - - + Requests that [code]_ready[/code] be called again. Note that the method won't be called immediately, but is scheduled for when the node is added to the scene tree again (see [method _ready]). [code]_ready[/code] is called only for the node which requested it, which means that you need to request ready for each child if you want them to call [code]_ready[/code] too (in which case, [code]_ready[/code] will be called in the same order as it would normally). - - - - + + Sends a remote procedure call request for the given [code]method[/code] to peers on the network (and locally), optionally sending all additional arguments as arguments to the method called by the RPC. The call request will only be received by nodes with the same [NodePath], including the exact same node name. Behaviour depends on the RPC configuration for the given method, see [method rpc_config]. Methods are not exposed to RPCs by default. Returns an empty [Variant]. [b]Note:[/b] You can only safely use RPCs on clients after you received the [code]connected_to_server[/code] signal from the [MultiplayerAPI]. You also need to keep track of the connection state, either by the [MultiplayerAPI] signals like [code]server_disconnected[/code] or by checking [code]get_multiplayer().network_peer.get_connection_status() == CONNECTION_CONNECTED[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Changes the RPC mode for the given [code]method[/code] to the given [code]rpc_mode[/code], optionally specifying the [code]transfer_mode[/code] and [code]channel[/code] (on supported peers). See [enum MultiplayerAPI.RPCMode] and [enum MultiplayerPeer.TransferMode]. An alternative is annotating methods and properties with the corresponding keywords ([code]remote[/code], [code]master[/code], [code]puppet[/code], [code]remotesync[/code], [code]mastersync[/code], [code]puppetsync[/code]). By default, methods are not exposed to networking (and RPCs). - - - - - - + + + Sends a [method rpc] to a specific peer identified by [code]peer_id[/code] (see [method MultiplayerPeer.set_target_peer]). Returns an empty [Variant]. - - - - + + Sets the folded state of the node in the Scene dock. - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the node's network master to the peer with the given peer ID. The network master is the peer that has authority over the node on the network. Useful in conjunction with the [code]master[/code] and [code]puppet[/code] keywords. Inherited from the parent node by default, which ultimately defaults to peer ID 1 (the server). If [code]recursive[/code], the given peer is recursively set as the master for all children of this node. - - - - + + Enables or disables physics (i.e. fixed framerate) processing. When a node is being processed, it will receive a [constant NOTIFICATION_PHYSICS_PROCESS] at a fixed (usually 60 FPS, see [member Engine.iterations_per_second] to change) interval (and the [method _physics_process] callback will be called if exists). Enabled automatically if [method _physics_process] is overridden. Any calls to this before [method _ready] will be ignored. - - - - + + Enables or disables internal physics for this node. Internal physics processing happens in isolation from the normal [method _physics_process] calls and is used by some nodes internally to guarantee proper functioning even if the node is paused or physics processing is disabled for scripting ([method set_physics_process]). Only useful for advanced uses to manipulate built-in nodes' behavior. [b]Warning:[/b] Built-in Nodes rely on the internal processing for their own logic, so changing this value from your code may lead to unexpected behavior. Script access to this internal logic is provided for specific advanced uses, but is unsafe and not supported. - - - - + + Enables or disables processing. When a node is being processed, it will receive a [constant NOTIFICATION_PROCESS] on every drawn frame (and the [method _process] callback will be called if exists). Enabled automatically if [method _process] is overridden. Any calls to this before [method _ready] will be ignored. - - - - + + Enables or disables input processing. This is not required for GUI controls! Enabled automatically if [method _input] is overridden. Any calls to this before [method _ready] will be ignored. - - - - + + Enables or disabled internal processing for this node. Internal processing happens in isolation from the normal [method _process] calls and is used by some nodes internally to guarantee proper functioning even if the node is paused or processing is disabled for scripting ([method set_process]). Only useful for advanced uses to manipulate built-in nodes' behavior. [b]Warning:[/b] Built-in Nodes rely on the internal processing for their own logic, so changing this value from your code may lead to unexpected behavior. Script access to this internal logic is provided for specific advanced uses, but is unsafe and not supported. - - - - + + Enables unhandled input processing. This is not required for GUI controls! It enables the node to receive all input that was not previously handled (usually by a [Control]). Enabled automatically if [method _unhandled_input] is overridden. Any calls to this before [method _ready] will be ignored. - - - - + + Enables unhandled key input processing. Enabled automatically if [method _unhandled_key_input] is overridden. Any calls to this before [method _ready] will be ignored. - - - - + + Sets whether this is an instance load placeholder. See [InstancePlaceholder]. - - + Updates the warning displayed for this node in the Scene Dock. Use [method _get_configuration_warnings] to setup the warning message to display. diff --git a/doc/classes/Node2D.xml b/doc/classes/Node2D.xml index 9ffa333f17f..cc790b7c28b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Node2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Node2D.xml @@ -12,104 +12,80 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies the current scale by the [code]ratio[/code] vector. - - - - + + Returns the angle between the node and the [code]point[/code] in radians. - - - - + + Returns the [Transform2D] relative to this node's parent. - - - - + + Adds the [code]offset[/code] vector to the node's global position. - - - - + + Rotates the node so it points towards the [code]point[/code], which is expected to use global coordinates. - - - - - - + + + Applies a local translation on the node's X axis based on the [method Node._process]'s [code]delta[/code]. If [code]scaled[/code] is [code]false[/code], normalizes the movement. - - - - - - + + + Applies a local translation on the node's Y axis based on the [method Node._process]'s [code]delta[/code]. If [code]scaled[/code] is [code]false[/code], normalizes the movement. - - - - + + Applies a rotation to the node, in radians, starting from its current rotation. - - - - + + Transforms the provided local position into a position in global coordinate space. The input is expected to be local relative to the [Node2D] it is called on. e.g. Applying this method to the positions of child nodes will correctly transform their positions into the global coordinate space, but applying it to a node's own position will give an incorrect result, as it will incorporate the node's own transformation into its global position. - - - - + + Transforms the provided global position into a position in local coordinate space. The output will be local relative to the [Node2D] it is called on. e.g. It is appropriate for determining the positions of child nodes, but it is not appropriate for determining its own position relative to its parent. - - - - + + Translates the node by the given [code]offset[/code] in local coordinates. diff --git a/doc/classes/Node3D.xml b/doc/classes/Node3D.xml index 8cb331a578a..983d8961fbc 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Node3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Node3D.xml @@ -14,127 +14,104 @@ - - - - + + Attach a gizmo to this [code]Node3D[/code]. - - + Clear all gizmos attached to this [code]Node3D[/code]. - - + Clears subgizmo selection for this node in the editor. Useful when subgizmo IDs become invalid after a property change. - - + Forces the transform to update. Transform changes in physics are not instant for performance reasons. Transforms are accumulated and then set. Use this if you need an up-to-date transform when doing physics operations. - - + Returns all the gizmos attached to this [code]Node3D[/code]. - - + Returns the parent [Node3D], or an empty [Object] if no parent exists or parent is not of type [Node3D]. - - + Returns the current [World3D] resource this [Node3D] node is registered to. - - - - - - + + + Rotates the global (world) transformation around axis, a unit [Vector3], by specified angle in radians. The rotation axis is in global coordinate system. - - - - + + Scales the global (world) transformation by the given [Vector3] scale factors. - - - - + + Moves the global (world) transformation by [Vector3] offset. The offset is in global coordinate system. - - + Disables rendering of this node. Changes [member visible] to [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns whether node notifies about its local transformation changes. [Node3D] will not propagate this by default. - - + Returns whether this node uses a scale of [code](1, 1, 1)[/code] or its local transformation scale. - - + Returns whether the node notifies about its global and local transformation changes. [Node3D] will not propagate this by default. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node is present in the [SceneTree], its [member visible] property is [code]true[/code] and all its antecedents are also visible. If any antecedent is hidden, this node will not be visible in the scene tree. - - - - - - + + + Rotates itself so that the local -Z axis points towards the [code]target[/code] position. The transform will first be rotated around the given [code]up[/code] vector, and then fully aligned to the target by a further rotation around an axis perpendicular to both the [code]target[/code] and [code]up[/code] vectors. @@ -142,173 +119,135 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Moves the node to the specified [code]position[/code], and then rotates itself to point toward the [code]target[/code] as per [method look_at]. Operations take place in global space. - - + Resets this node's transformations (like scale, skew and taper) preserving its rotation and translation by performing Gram-Schmidt orthonormalization on this node's [Transform3D]. - - - - - - + + + Rotates the local transformation around axis, a unit [Vector3], by specified angle in radians. - - - - - - + + + Rotates the local transformation around axis, a unit [Vector3], by specified angle in radians. The rotation axis is in object-local coordinate system. - - - - + + Rotates the local transformation around the X axis by angle in radians. - - - - + + Rotates the local transformation around the Y axis by angle in radians. - - - - + + Rotates the local transformation around the Z axis by angle in radians. - - - - + + Scales the local transformation by given 3D scale factors in object-local coordinate system. - - - - + + Sets whether the node uses a scale of [code](1, 1, 1)[/code] or its local transformation scale. Changes to the local transformation scale are preserved. - - + Reset all transformations for this node (sets its [Transform3D] to the identity matrix). - - - - + + Sets whether the node ignores notification that its transformation (global or local) changed. - - - - + + Sets whether the node notifies about its local transformation changes. [Node3D] will not propagate this by default. - - - - + + Sets whether the node notifies about its global and local transformation changes. [Node3D] will not propagate this by default, unless it is in the editor context and it has a valid gizmo. - - + Enables rendering of this node. Changes [member visible] to [code]true[/code]. - - - - + + Transforms [code]local_point[/code] from this node's local space to world space. - - - - + + Transforms [code]global_point[/code] from world space to this node's local space. - - - - + + Changes the node's position by the given offset [Vector3]. Note that the translation [code]offset[/code] is affected by the node's scale, so if scaled by e.g. [code](10, 1, 1)[/code], a translation by an offset of [code](2, 0, 0)[/code] would actually add 20 ([code]2 * 10[/code]) to the X coordinate. - - - - + + Changes the node's position by the given offset [Vector3] in local space. - - + Updates all the [Node3DGizmo]s attached to this node. diff --git a/doc/classes/NodePath.xml b/doc/classes/NodePath.xml index 0ba2e73ad4f..d05630d2773 100644 --- a/doc/classes/NodePath.xml +++ b/doc/classes/NodePath.xml @@ -27,26 +27,21 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [NodePath]. - - - - + + Constructs a [NodePath] as a copy of the given [NodePath]. - - - - + + Creates a NodePath from a string, e.g. [code]"Path2D/PathFollow2D/Sprite2D:texture:size"[/code]. A path is absolute if it starts with a slash. Absolute paths are only valid in the global scene tree, not within individual scenes. In a relative path, [code]"."[/code] and [code]".."[/code] indicate the current node and its parent. The "subnames" optionally included after the path to the target node can point to resources or properties, and can also be nested. @@ -68,8 +63,7 @@ - - + Returns a node path with a colon character ([code]:[/code]) prepended, transforming it to a pure property path with no node name (defaults to resolving from the current node). [codeblocks] @@ -91,8 +85,7 @@ - - + Returns all subnames concatenated with a colon character ([code]:[/code]) as separator, i.e. the right side of the first colon in a node path. [codeblocks] @@ -108,10 +101,8 @@ - - - - + + Gets the node name indicated by [code]idx[/code] (0 to [method get_name_count]). [codeblocks] @@ -131,18 +122,15 @@ - - + Gets the number of node names which make up the path. Subnames (see [method get_subname_count]) are not included. For example, [code]"Path2D/PathFollow2D/Sprite2D"[/code] has 3 names. - - - - + + Gets the resource or property name indicated by [code]idx[/code] (0 to [method get_subname_count]). [codeblocks] @@ -160,40 +148,33 @@ - - + Gets the number of resource or property names ("subnames") in the path. Each subname is listed after a colon character ([code]:[/code]) in the node path. For example, [code]"Path2D/PathFollow2D/Sprite2D:texture:load_path"[/code] has 2 subnames. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node path is absolute (as opposed to relative), which means that it starts with a slash character ([code]/[/code]). Absolute node paths can be used to access the root node ([code]"/root"[/code]) or autoloads (e.g. [code]"/global"[/code] if a "global" autoload was registered). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node path is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/OS.xml b/doc/classes/OS.xml index 679a51935d1..e5d45189c72 100644 --- a/doc/classes/OS.xml +++ b/doc/classes/OS.xml @@ -11,38 +11,30 @@ - - - - - - + + + Displays a modal dialog box using the host OS' facilities. Execution is blocked until the dialog is closed. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the current host platform is using multiple threads. - - + Shuts down system MIDI driver. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - - - - - + + + Creates a new process that runs independently of Godot. It will not terminate if Godot terminates. The file specified in [code]path[/code] must exist and be executable. Platform path resolution will be used. The [code]arguments[/code] are used in the given order and separated by a space. If the process creation succeeds, the method will return the new process ID, which you can use to monitor the process (and potentially terminate it with [method kill]). If the process creation fails, the method will return [code]-1[/code]. @@ -60,38 +52,30 @@ - - - - + + Delay execution of the current thread by [code]msec[/code] milliseconds. [code]msec[/code] must be greater than or equal to [code]0[/code]. Otherwise, [method delay_msec] will do nothing and will print an error message. - - - - + + Delay execution of the current thread by [code]usec[/code] microseconds. [code]usec[/code] must be greater than or equal to [code]0[/code]. Otherwise, [method delay_usec] will do nothing and will print an error message. - - - - + + Dumps the memory allocation ringlist to a file (only works in debug). Entry format per line: "Address - Size - Description". - - - - + + Dumps all used resources to file (only works in debug). Entry format per line: "Resource Type : Resource Location". @@ -99,16 +83,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Executes a command. The file specified in [code]path[/code] must exist and be executable. Platform path resolution will be used. The [code]arguments[/code] are used in the given order and separated by a space. If an [code]output[/code] [Array] is provided, the complete shell output of the process will be appended as a single [String] element in [code]output[/code]. If [code]read_stderr[/code] is [code]true[/code], the output to the standard error stream will be included too. If the command is successfully executed, the method will return the exit code of the command, or [code]-1[/code] if it fails. @@ -139,25 +118,21 @@ - - - - + + Returns the keycode of the given string (e.g. "Escape"). - - + Returns the [i]global[/i] cache data directory according to the operating system's standards. On desktop platforms, this path can be overridden by setting the [code]XDG_CACHE_HOME[/code] environment variable before starting the project. See [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/tutorials/io/data_paths.html]File paths in Godot projects[/url] in the documentation for more information. See also [method get_config_dir] and [method get_data_dir]. Not to be confused with [method get_user_data_dir], which returns the [i]project-specific[/i] user data path. - - + Returns the command-line arguments passed to the engine. Command-line arguments can be written in any form, including both [code]--key value[/code] and [code]--key=value[/code] forms so they can be properly parsed, as long as custom command-line arguments do not conflict with engine arguments. @@ -187,16 +162,14 @@ - - + Returns the [i]global[/i] user configuration directory according to the operating system's standards. On desktop platforms, this path can be overridden by setting the [code]XDG_CONFIG_HOME[/code] environment variable before starting the project. See [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/tutorials/io/data_paths.html]File paths in Godot projects[/url] in the documentation for more information. See also [method get_cache_dir] and [method get_data_dir]. Not to be confused with [method get_user_data_dir], which returns the [i]project-specific[/i] user data path. - - + Returns an array of MIDI device names. The returned array will be empty if the system MIDI driver has not previously been initialised with [method open_midi_inputs]. @@ -204,58 +177,49 @@ - - + Returns the [i]global[/i] user data directory according to the operating system's standards. On desktop platforms, this path can be overridden by setting the [code]XDG_DATA_HOME[/code] environment variable before starting the project. See [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/tutorials/io/data_paths.html]File paths in Godot projects[/url] in the documentation for more information. See also [method get_cache_dir] and [method get_config_dir]. Not to be confused with [method get_user_data_dir], which returns the [i]project-specific[/i] user data path. - - - - + + Returns the value of an environment variable. Returns an empty string if the environment variable doesn't exist. [b]Note:[/b] Double-check the casing of [code]variable[/code]. Environment variable names are case-sensitive on all platforms except Windows. - - + Returns the path to the current engine executable. - - + On Android, returns the absolute directory path where user data can be written to external storage if available. On all other platforms, this will return the same location as [method get_user_data_dir]. - - + With this function, you can get the list of dangerous permissions that have been granted to the Android application. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Android. - - - - + + Returns the given keycode as a string (e.g. Return values: [code]"Escape"[/code], [code]"Shift+Escape"[/code]). See also [member InputEventKey.keycode] and [method InputEventKey.get_keycode_with_modifiers]. - - + Returns the host OS locale as a string of the form [code]language_Script_COUNTRY_VARIANT@extra[/code]. [code]language[/code] - 2 or 3-letter [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes]language code[/url], in lower case. @@ -266,70 +230,60 @@ - - + Returns the model name of the current device. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Android and iOS. Returns [code]"GenericDevice"[/code] on unsupported platforms. - - + Returns the name of the host OS. Possible values are: [code]"Android"[/code], [code]"iOS"[/code], [code]"HTML5"[/code], [code]"OSX"[/code], [code]"Server"[/code], [code]"Windows"[/code], [code]"UWP"[/code], [code]"X11"[/code]. - - + Returns the project's process ID. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Android, iOS, Linux, macOS and Windows. - - + Returns the number of threads available on the host machine. - - + Returns the maximum amount of static memory used (only works in debug). - - + Returns the amount of static memory being used by the program in bytes. - - - - + + Returns the actual path to commonly used folders across different platforms. Available locations are specified in [enum SystemDir]. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Android, Linux, macOS and Windows. - - + Returns the ID of the current thread. This can be used in logs to ease debugging of multi-threaded applications. [b]Note:[/b] Thread IDs are not deterministic and may be reused across application restarts. - - + Returns a string that is unique to the device. [b]Note:[/b] This string may change without notice if the user reinstalls/upgrades their operating system or changes their hardware. This means it should generally not be used to encrypt persistent data as the data saved before an unexpected ID change would become inaccessible. The returned string may also be falsified using external programs, so do not rely on the string returned by [method get_unique_id] for security purposes. @@ -337,8 +291,7 @@ - - + Returns the absolute directory path where user data is written ([code]user://[/code]). On Linux, this is [code]~/.local/share/godot/app_userdata/[project_name][/code], or [code]~/.local/share/[custom_name][/code] if [code]use_custom_user_dir[/code] is set. @@ -349,28 +302,23 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the environment variable with the name [code]variable[/code] exists. [b]Note:[/b] Double-check the casing of [code]variable[/code]. Environment variable names are case-sensitive on all platforms except Windows. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the feature for the given feature tag is supported in the currently running instance, depending on the platform, build, etc. Can be used to check whether you're currently running a debug build, on a certain platform or arch, etc. Refer to the [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/getting_started/workflow/export/feature_tags.html]Feature Tags[/url] documentation for more details. [b]Note:[/b] Tag names are case-sensitive. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the Godot binary used to run the project is a [i]debug[/i] export template, or when running in the editor. Returns [code]false[/code] if the Godot binary used to run the project is a [i]release[/i] export template. @@ -378,33 +326,27 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the input keycode corresponds to a Unicode character. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the engine was executed with [code]-v[/code] (verbose stdout). - - + If [code]true[/code], the [code]user://[/code] file system is persistent, so that its state is the same after a player quits and starts the game again. Relevant to the HTML5 platform, where this persistence may be unavailable. - - - - + + Kill (terminate) the process identified by the given process ID ([code]pid[/code]), e.g. the one returned by [method execute] in non-blocking mode. [b]Note:[/b] This method can also be used to kill processes that were not spawned by the game. @@ -412,99 +354,79 @@ - - + Initialises the singleton for the system MIDI driver. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Linux, macOS and Windows. - - - - + + Shows all resources in the game. Optionally, the list can be written to a file by specifying a file path in [code]tofile[/code]. - - + Shows the list of loaded textures sorted by size in memory. - - - - + + Shows the number of resources loaded by the game of the given types. - - - - + + Shows all resources currently used by the game. - - - - + + At the moment this function is only used by [code]AudioDriverOpenSL[/code] to request permission for [code]RECORD_AUDIO[/code] on Android. - - + With this function, you can request dangerous permissions since normal permissions are automatically granted at install time in Android applications. [b]Note:[/b] This method is implemented on Android. - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of the environment variable [code]variable[/code] to [code]value[/code]. The environment variable will be set for the Godot process and any process executed with [method execute] after running [method set_environment]. The environment variable will [i]not[/i] persist to processes run after the Godot process was terminated. [b]Note:[/b] Double-check the casing of [code]variable[/code]. Environment variable names are case-sensitive on all platforms except Windows. - - - - + + Sets the name of the current thread. - - - - + + Enables backup saves if [code]enabled[/code] is [code]true[/code]. - - - - + + Requests the OS to open a resource with the most appropriate program. For example: - [code]OS.shell_open("C:\\Users\name\Downloads")[/code] on Windows opens the file explorer at the user's Downloads folder. diff --git a/doc/classes/Object.xml b/doc/classes/Object.xml index fe7529bceb8..9ad79dc17ad 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Object.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Object.xml @@ -33,18 +33,15 @@ - - - - + + Virtual method which can be overridden to customize the return value of [method get]. Returns the given property. Returns [code]null[/code] if the [code]property[/code] does not exist. - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to customize the return value of [method get_property_list]. Returns the object's property list as an [Array] of dictionaries. @@ -52,57 +49,45 @@ - - + Called when the object is initialized. - - - - + + Called whenever the object receives a notification, which is identified in [code]what[/code] by a constant. The base [Object] has two constants [constant NOTIFICATION_POSTINITIALIZE] and [constant NOTIFICATION_PREDELETE], but subclasses such as [Node] define a lot more notifications which are also received by this method. - - - - - - + + + Virtual method which can be overridden to customize the return value of [method set]. Sets a property. Returns [code]true[/code] if the [code]property[/code] exists. - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to customize the return value of [method to_string], and thus the object's representation where it is converted to a string, e.g. with [code]print(obj)[/code]. Returns a [String] representing the object. If not overridden, defaults to [code]"[ClassName:RID]"[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a user-defined [code]signal[/code]. Arguments are optional, but can be added as an [Array] of dictionaries, each containing [code]name: String[/code] and [code]type: int[/code] (see [enum Variant.Type]) entries. - - - - + + Calls the [code]method[/code] on the object and returns the result. This method supports a variable number of arguments, so parameters are passed as a comma separated list. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -119,10 +104,8 @@ - - - - + + Calls the [code]method[/code] on the object during idle time. This method supports a variable number of arguments, so parameters are passed as a comma separated list. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -139,12 +122,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Calls the [code]method[/code] on the object and returns the result. Contrarily to [method call], this method does not support a variable number of arguments but expects all parameters to be via a single [Array]. [codeblocks] @@ -160,23 +140,17 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the object can translate strings. See [method set_message_translation] and [method tr]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connects a [code]signal[/code] to a [code]callable[/code]. Pass optional [code]binds[/code] to the call as an [Array] of parameters. These parameters will be passed to the [Callable]'s method after any parameter used in the call to [method emit_signal]. Use [code]flags[/code] to set deferred or one-shot connections. See [enum ConnectFlags] constants. [b]Note:[/b] This method is the legacy implementation for connecting signals. The recommended modern approach is to use [method Signal.connect] and to use [method Callable.bind] to add and validate parameter binds. Both syntaxes are shown below. @@ -315,22 +289,17 @@ - - - - - - + + + Disconnects a [code]signal[/code] from a given [code]callable[/code]. If you try to disconnect a connection that does not exist, the method will throw an error. Use [method is_connected] to ensure that the connection exists. - - - - + + Emits the given [code]signal[/code]. The signal must exist, so it should be a built-in signal of this class or one of its parent classes, or a user-defined signal. This method supports a variable number of arguments, so parameters are passed as a comma separated list. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -346,32 +315,27 @@ - - + Deletes the object from memory. Any pre-existing reference to the freed object will become invalid, e.g. [code]is_instance_valid(object)[/code] will return [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the [Variant] value of the given [code]property[/code]. If the [code]property[/code] doesn't exist, this will return [code]null[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] In C#, the property name must be specified as snake_case if it is defined by a built-in Godot node. This doesn't apply to user-defined properties where you should use the same convention as in the C# source (typically PascalCase). - - + Returns the object's class as a [String]. - - + Returns an [Array] of dictionaries with information about signals that are connected to the object. Each [Dictionary] contains three String entries: @@ -381,214 +345,170 @@ - - - - + + Gets the object's property indexed by the given [NodePath]. The node path should be relative to the current object and can use the colon character ([code]:[/code]) to access nested properties. Examples: [code]"position:x"[/code] or [code]"material:next_pass:blend_mode"[/code]. - - + Returns the object's unique instance ID. This ID can be saved in [EncodedObjectAsID], and can be used to retrieve the object instance with [method @GlobalScope.instance_from_id]. - - - - + + Returns the object's metadata entry for the given [code]name[/code]. - - + Returns the object's metadata as a [PackedStringArray]. - - + Returns the object's methods and their signatures as an [Array]. - - + Returns the object's property list as an [Array] of dictionaries. Each property's [Dictionary] contain at least [code]name: String[/code] and [code]type: int[/code] (see [enum Variant.Type]) entries. Optionally, it can also include [code]hint: int[/code] (see [enum PropertyHint]), [code]hint_string: String[/code], and [code]usage: int[/code] (see [enum PropertyUsageFlags]). - - + Returns the object's [Script] instance, or [code]null[/code] if none is assigned. - - - - + + Returns an [Array] of connections for the given [code]signal[/code]. - - + Returns the list of signals as an [Array] of dictionaries. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a metadata entry is found with the given [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the object contains the given [code]method[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given [code]signal[/code] exists. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given user-defined [code]signal[/code] exists. Only signals added using [method add_user_signal] are taken into account. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if signal emission blocking is enabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the object inherits from the given [code]class[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a connection exists for a given [code]signal[/code] and [code]callable[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [method Node.queue_free] method was called for the object. - - - - - - + + + Send a given notification to the object, which will also trigger a call to the [method _notification] method of all classes that the object inherits from. If [code]reversed[/code] is [code]true[/code], [method _notification] is called first on the object's own class, and then up to its successive parent classes. If [code]reversed[/code] is [code]false[/code], [method _notification] is called first on the highest ancestor ([Object] itself), and then down to its successive inheriting classes. - - + Notify the editor that the property list has changed by emitting the [signal property_list_changed] signal, so that editor plugins can take the new values into account. - - - - + + Removes a given entry from the object's metadata. See also [method set_meta]. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a new value to the given property. If the [code]property[/code] does not exist, nothing will happen. [b]Note:[/b] In C#, the property name must be specified as snake_case if it is defined by a built-in Godot node. This doesn't apply to user-defined properties where you should use the same convention as in the C# source (typically PascalCase). - - - - + + If set to [code]true[/code], signal emission is blocked. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a new value to the given property, after the current frame's physics step. This is equivalent to calling [method set] via [method call_deferred], i.e. [code]call_deferred("set", property, value)[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] In C#, the property name must be specified as snake_case if it is defined by a built-in Godot node. This doesn't apply to user-defined properties where you should use the same convention as in the C# source (typically PascalCase). - - - - - - + + + Assigns a new value to the property identified by the [NodePath]. The node path should be relative to the current object and can use the colon character ([code]:[/code]) to access nested properties. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -608,51 +528,40 @@ - - - - + + Defines whether the object can translate strings (with calls to [method tr]). Enabled by default. - - - - - - + + + Adds, changes or removes a given entry in the object's metadata. Metadata are serialized and can take any [Variant] value. To remove a given entry from the object's metadata, use [method remove_meta]. Metadata is also removed if its value is set to [code]null[/code]. This means you can also use [code]set_meta("name", null)[/code] to remove metadata for [code]"name"[/code]. - - - - + + Assigns a script to the object. Each object can have a single script assigned to it, which are used to extend its functionality. If the object already had a script, the previous script instance will be freed and its variables and state will be lost. The new script's [method _init] method will be called. - - + Returns a [String] representing the object. If not overridden, defaults to [code]"[ClassName:RID]"[/code]. Override the method [method _to_string] to customize the [String] representation. - - - - - - + + + Translates a message using translation catalogs configured in the Project Settings. An additional context could be used to specify the translation context. Only works if message translation is enabled (which it is by default), otherwise it returns the [code]message[/code] unchanged. See [method set_message_translation]. @@ -660,16 +569,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Translates a message involving plurals using translation catalogs configured in the Project Settings. An additional context could be used to specify the translation context. Only works if message translation is enabled (which it is by default), otherwise it returns the [code]message[/code] or [code]plural_message[/code] unchanged. See [method set_message_translation]. diff --git a/doc/classes/OccluderInstance3D.xml b/doc/classes/OccluderInstance3D.xml index 76b784d21d6..150bfd9257e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/OccluderInstance3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/OccluderInstance3D.xml @@ -8,20 +8,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/OptimizedTranslation.xml b/doc/classes/OptimizedTranslation.xml index a5ca93c7ff7..195fa281884 100644 --- a/doc/classes/OptimizedTranslation.xml +++ b/doc/classes/OptimizedTranslation.xml @@ -10,10 +10,8 @@ - - - - + + Generates and sets an optimized translation from the given [Translation] resource. diff --git a/doc/classes/OptionButton.xml b/doc/classes/OptionButton.xml index 4c03c59f8bb..ae268203ad4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/OptionButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/OptionButton.xml @@ -11,195 +11,151 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an item, with a [code]texture[/code] icon, text [code]label[/code] and (optionally) [code]id[/code]. If no [code]id[/code] is passed, the item index will be used as the item's ID. New items are appended at the end. - - - - - - + + + Adds an item, with text [code]label[/code] and (optionally) [code]id[/code]. If no [code]id[/code] is passed, the item index will be used as the item's ID. New items are appended at the end. - - + Adds a separator to the list of items. Separators help to group items. Separator also takes up an index and is appended at the end. - - + Clears all the items in the [OptionButton]. - - + Returns the amount of items in the OptionButton, including separators. - - - - + + Returns the icon of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the ID of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the index of the item with the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - + + Retrieves the metadata of an item. Metadata may be any type and can be used to store extra information about an item, such as an external string ID. - - - - + + Returns the text of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the [PopupMenu] contained in this button. - - + Returns the ID of the selected item, or [code]0[/code] if no item is selected. - - + Gets the metadata of the selected item. Metadata for items can be set using [method set_item_metadata]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at index [code]idx[/code] is disabled. - - - - + + Removes the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Selects an item by index and makes it the current item. This will work even if the item is disabled. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the item at index [code]idx[/code] is disabled. Disabled items are drawn differently in the dropdown and are not selectable by the user. If the current selected item is set as disabled, it will remain selected. - - - - - - + + + Sets the icon of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the ID of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata of an item. Metadata may be of any type and can be used to store extra information about an item, such as an external string ID. - - - - - - + + + Sets the text of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. @@ -215,15 +171,13 @@ - - + Emitted when the user navigates to an item using the [code]ui_up[/code] or [code]ui_down[/code] actions. The index of the item selected is passed as argument. - - + Emitted when the current item has been changed by the user. The index of the item selected is passed as argument. diff --git a/doc/classes/PCKPacker.xml b/doc/classes/PCKPacker.xml index 40e8683c93c..0af329983d7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PCKPacker.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PCKPacker.xml @@ -25,38 +25,27 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds the [code]source_path[/code] file to the current PCK package at the [code]pck_path[/code] internal path (should start with [code]res://[/code]). - - - - + + Writes the files specified using all [method add_file] calls since the last flush. If [code]verbose[/code] is [code]true[/code], a list of files added will be printed to the console for easier debugging. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates a new PCK file with the name [code]pck_name[/code]. The [code].pck[/code] file extension isn't added automatically, so it should be part of [code]pck_name[/code] (even though it's not required). diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedByteArray.xml b/doc/classes/PackedByteArray.xml index 82bfa14ded7..af92590da3f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedByteArray.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedByteArray.xml @@ -10,183 +10,138 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedByteArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedByteArray] as a copy of the given [PackedByteArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedByteArray]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedByteArray] at the end of this array. - - - - + + Returns a new [PackedByteArray] with the data compressed. Set the compression mode using one of [enum File.CompressionMode]'s constants. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns a new [PackedByteArray] with the data decompressed. Set [code]buffer_size[/code] to the size of the uncompressed data. Set the compression mode using one of [enum File.CompressionMode]'s constants. - - - - - - + + + Returns a new [PackedByteArray] with the data decompressed. Set the compression mode using one of [enum File.CompressionMode]'s constants. [b]This method only accepts gzip and deflate compression modes.[/b] This method is potentially slower than [code]decompress[/code], as it may have to re-allocate its output buffer multiple times while decompressing, whereas [code]decompress[/code] knows it's output buffer size from the beginning. @@ -194,193 +149,143 @@ - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - + Converts ASCII/Latin-1 encoded array to [String]. Fast alternative to [method get_string_from_utf8] if the content is ASCII/Latin-1 only. Unlike the UTF-8 function this function maps every byte to a character in the array. Multibyte sequences will not be interpreted correctly. For parsing user input always use [method get_string_from_utf8]. - - + Converts UTF-16 encoded array to [String]. If the BOM is missing, system endianness is assumed. Returns empty string if source array is not valid UTF-16 string. - - + Converts UTF-32 encoded array to [String]. System endianness is assumed. Returns empty string if source array is not valid UTF-32 string. - - + Converts UTF-8 encoded array to [String]. Slower than [method get_string_from_ascii] but supports UTF-8 encoded data. Use this function if you are unsure about the source of the data. For user input this function should always be preferred. Returns empty string if source array is not valid UTF-8 string. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns a hexadecimal representation of this array as a [String]. [codeblocks] @@ -396,128 +301,100 @@ - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the byte at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + Returns the slice of the [PackedByteArray] between indices (inclusive) as a new [PackedByteArray]. Any negative index is considered to be from the end of the array. - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedFloat32Array], where each block of 4 bytes has been converted to a 32-bit float (C++ [code]float[/code]). The size of the new array will be [code]byte_array.size() / 4[/code]. @@ -525,8 +402,7 @@ - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedFloat64Array], where each block of 8 bytes has been converted to a 64-bit float (C++ [code]double[/code], Godot [float]). The size of the new array will be [code]byte_array.size() / 8[/code]. @@ -534,8 +410,7 @@ - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedInt32Array], where each block of 4 bytes has been converted to a signed 32-bit integer (C++ [code]int32_t[/code]). The size of the new array will be [code]byte_array.size() / 4[/code]. @@ -543,8 +418,7 @@ - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedInt64Array], where each block of 4 bytes has been converted to a signed 64-bit integer (C++ [code]int64_t[/code], Godot [int]). The size of the new array will be [code]byte_array.size() / 8[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedColorArray.xml b/doc/classes/PackedColorArray.xml index 19cfcd7c878..a5a5703bfa9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedColorArray.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedColorArray.xml @@ -10,195 +10,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedColorArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedColorArray] as a copy of the given [PackedColorArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedColorArray]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedColorArray] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends a value to the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [Color] at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedDataContainer.xml b/doc/classes/PackedDataContainer.xml index f72db514f0f..0a765fcc75e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedDataContainer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedDataContainer.xml @@ -8,16 +8,13 @@ - - - - + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedDataContainerRef.xml b/doc/classes/PackedDataContainerRef.xml index bfd5a6f1c10..5e42079b97b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedDataContainerRef.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedDataContainerRef.xml @@ -9,8 +9,7 @@ - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedFloat32Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedFloat32Array.xml index 663aeeb21d8..9e7dd8f99e3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedFloat32Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedFloat32Array.xml @@ -11,195 +11,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedFloat32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedFloat32Array] as a copy of the given [PackedFloat32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedFloat32Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedFloat32Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the float at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedByteArray], where each element have been encoded as 4 bytes. The size of the new array will be [code]float32_array.size() * 4[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedFloat64Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedFloat64Array.xml index bf2200f5bbd..ff4cf0edf8b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedFloat64Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedFloat64Array.xml @@ -11,195 +11,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedFloat64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedFloat64Array] as a copy of the given [PackedFloat64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedFloat64Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedFloat64Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the float at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedByteArray], where each element have been encoded as 8 bytes. The size of the new array will be [code]float64_array.size() * 8[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedInt32Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedInt32Array.xml index c587126d500..2e9716b6656 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedInt32Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedInt32Array.xml @@ -11,195 +11,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedInt32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedInt32Array] as a copy of the given [PackedInt32Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedInt32Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedInt32Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new integer at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends a value to the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the integer at the given index. - - + Returns the array size. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedByteArray], where each element have been encoded as 4 bytes. The size of the new array will be [code]int32_array.size() * 4[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedInt64Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedInt64Array.xml index a9ebc806018..1e7fff3bc65 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedInt64Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedInt64Array.xml @@ -11,195 +11,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedInt64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedInt64Array] as a copy of the given [PackedInt64Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedInt64Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedInt64Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new integer at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends a value to the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the integer at the given index. - - + Returns the array size. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns a copy of the data converted to a [PackedByteArray], where each element have been encoded as 8 bytes. The size of the new array will be [code]int64_array.size() * 8[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedScene.xml b/doc/classes/PackedScene.xml index f39cae8be5b..1374496b52b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedScene.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedScene.xml @@ -77,33 +77,27 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the scene file has nodes. - - + Returns the [code]SceneState[/code] representing the scene file contents. - - - - + + Instantiates the scene's node hierarchy. Triggers child scene instantiation(s). Triggers a [constant Node.NOTIFICATION_INSTANCED] notification on the root node. - - - - + + Pack will ignore any sub-nodes not owned by given node. See [member Node.owner]. diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedStringArray.xml b/doc/classes/PackedStringArray.xml index 22458832dad..04113d4a2e1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedStringArray.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedStringArray.xml @@ -11,195 +11,153 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedStringArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedStringArray] as a copy of the given [PackedStringArray]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedStringArray]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedStringArray] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Appends a string element at end of the array. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [String] at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedVector2Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedVector2Array.xml index 6c8791f9884..76d3aff20e7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedVector2Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedVector2Array.xml @@ -11,203 +11,159 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedVector2Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedVector2Array] as a copy of the given [PackedVector2Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedVector2Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedVector2Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Inserts a [Vector2] at the end. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [Vector2] at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PackedVector3Array.xml b/doc/classes/PackedVector3Array.xml index 00ded390828..1a35f71619b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PackedVector3Array.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PackedVector3Array.xml @@ -10,203 +10,159 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [PackedVector3Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a [PackedVector3Array] as a copy of the given [PackedVector3Array]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [PackedVector3Array]. Optionally, you can pass in a generic [Array] that will be converted. - - - - + + Appends an element at the end of the array (alias of [method push_back]). - - - - + + Appends a [PackedVector3Array] at the end of this array. - - + Creates a copy of the array, and returns it. - - - - + + Assigns the given value to all elements in the array. This can typically be used together with [method resize] to create an array with a given size and initialized elements. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array contains [code]value[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Inserts a new element at a given position in the array. The position must be valid, or at the end of the array ([code]idx == size()[/code]). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the array is empty. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Inserts a [Vector3] at the end. - - - - + + Removes an element from the array by index. - - - - + + Sets the size of the array. If the array is grown, reserves elements at the end of the array. If the array is shrunk, truncates the array to the new size. - - + Reverses the order of the elements in the array. - - - - - - + + + Changes the [Vector3] at the given index. - - + Returns the size of the array. - - + Sorts the elements of the array in ascending order. - - - - - - + + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PacketPeer.xml b/doc/classes/PacketPeer.xml index 0a758c2cd66..8d0aa89287e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PacketPeer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PacketPeer.xml @@ -10,52 +10,42 @@ - - + Returns the number of packets currently available in the ring-buffer. - - + Gets a raw packet. - - + Returns the error state of the last packet received (via [method get_packet] and [method get_var]). - - - - + + Gets a Variant. If [code]allow_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], decoding objects is allowed. [b]Warning:[/b] Deserialized objects can contain code which gets executed. Do not use this option if the serialized object comes from untrusted sources to avoid potential security threats such as remote code execution. - - - - + + Sends a raw packet. - - - - - - + + + Sends a [Variant] as a packet. If [code]full_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], encoding objects is allowed (and can potentially include code). diff --git a/doc/classes/PacketPeerDTLS.xml b/doc/classes/PacketPeerDTLS.xml index 19ebb9d81ea..99a1aea5a69 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PacketPeerDTLS.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PacketPeerDTLS.xml @@ -10,37 +10,29 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connects a [code]peer[/code] beginning the DTLS handshake using the underlying [PacketPeerUDP] which must be connected (see [method PacketPeerUDP.connect_to_host]). If [code]validate_certs[/code] is [code]true[/code], [PacketPeerDTLS] will validate that the certificate presented by the remote peer and match it with the [code]for_hostname[/code] argument. You can specify a custom [X509Certificate] to use for validation via the [code]valid_certificate[/code] argument. - - + Disconnects this peer, terminating the DTLS session. - - + Returns the status of the connection. See [enum Status] for values. - - + Poll the connection to check for incoming packets. Call this frequently to update the status and keep the connection working. diff --git a/doc/classes/PacketPeerUDP.xml b/doc/classes/PacketPeerUDP.xml index 2707df612c7..e2acb910585 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PacketPeerUDP.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PacketPeerUDP.xml @@ -10,14 +10,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Binds this [PacketPeerUDP] to the specified [code]port[/code] and [code]address[/code] with a buffer size [code]recv_buf_size[/code], allowing it to receive incoming packets. If [code]address[/code] is set to [code]"*"[/code] (default), the peer will be bound on all available addresses (both IPv4 and IPv6). @@ -26,66 +22,54 @@ - - + Closes the [PacketPeerUDP]'s underlying UDP socket. - - - - - - + + + Calling this method connects this UDP peer to the given [code]host[/code]/[code]port[/code] pair. UDP is in reality connectionless, so this option only means that incoming packets from different addresses are automatically discarded, and that outgoing packets are always sent to the connected address (future calls to [method set_dest_address] are not allowed). This method does not send any data to the remote peer, to do that, use [method PacketPeer.put_var] or [method PacketPeer.put_packet] as usual. See also [UDPServer]. [b]Note:[/b] Connecting to the remote peer does not help to protect from malicious attacks like IP spoofing, etc. Think about using an encryption technique like SSL or DTLS if you feel like your application is transferring sensitive information. - - + Returns the local port to which this peer is bound. - - + Returns the IP of the remote peer that sent the last packet(that was received with [method PacketPeer.get_packet] or [method PacketPeer.get_var]). - - + Returns the port of the remote peer that sent the last packet(that was received with [method PacketPeer.get_packet] or [method PacketPeer.get_var]). - - + Returns whether this [PacketPeerUDP] is bound to an address and can receive packets. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the UDP socket is open and has been connected to a remote address. See [method connect_to_host]. - - - - - - + + + Joins the multicast group specified by [code]multicast_address[/code] using the interface identified by [code]interface_name[/code]. You can join the same multicast group with multiple interfaces. Use [method IP.get_local_interfaces] to know which are available. @@ -93,41 +77,32 @@ - - - - - - + + + Removes the interface identified by [code]interface_name[/code] from the multicast group specified by [code]multicast_address[/code]. - - - - + + Enable or disable sending of broadcast packets (e.g. [code]set_dest_address("255.255.255.255", 4343)[/code]. This option is disabled by default. Note: Some Android devices might require the [code]CHANGE_WIFI_MULTICAST_STATE[/code] permission and this option to be enabled to receive broadcast packets too. - - - - - - + + + Sets the destination address and port for sending packets and variables. A hostname will be resolved using DNS if needed. Note: [method set_broadcast_enabled] must be enabled before sending packets to a broadcast address (e.g. [code]255.255.255.255[/code]). - - + Waits for a packet to arrive on the bound address. See [method bind]. [b]Note:[/b] [method wait] can't be interrupted once it has been called. This can be worked around by allowing the other party to send a specific "death pill" packet like this: diff --git a/doc/classes/ParticlesMaterial.xml b/doc/classes/ParticlesMaterial.xml index 640a26b8cbb..3520d3b9668 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ParticlesMaterial.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ParticlesMaterial.xml @@ -12,81 +12,61 @@ - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified parameter. - - - - + + Returns the randomness ratio associated with the specified parameter. - - - - + + Returns the [Texture2D] used by the specified parameter. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified particle flag is enabled. See [enum ParticleFlags] for options. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the randomness ratio for the specified [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Texture2D] for the specified [enum Parameter]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], enables the specified particle flag. See [enum ParticleFlags] for options. diff --git a/doc/classes/Performance.xml b/doc/classes/Performance.xml index a141961df5f..335c3d254bf 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Performance.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Performance.xml @@ -14,14 +14,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a custom monitor with name same as id. You can specify the category of monitor using '/' in id. If there are more than one '/' then default category is used. Default category is "Custom". [codeblocks] @@ -77,27 +73,22 @@ - - - - + + Returns the value of custom monitor with given id. The callable is called to get the value of custom monitor. [b]Note:[/b] It throws an error if the given id is absent. - - + Returns the names of active custom monitors in an array. - - - - + + Returns the value of one of the available monitors. You should provide one of the [enum Monitor] constants as the argument, like this: [codeblocks] @@ -111,26 +102,21 @@ - - + Returns the last tick in which custom monitor was added/removed. - - - - + + Returns true if custom monitor with the given id is present otherwise returns false. - - - - + + Removes the custom monitor with given id. [b]Note:[/b] It throws an error if the given id is already absent. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicalBone2D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicalBone2D.xml index cea75bad52e..b4d92475a13 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicalBone2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicalBone2D.xml @@ -12,15 +12,13 @@ - - + Returns the first [Joint2D] child node, if one exists. This is mainly a helper function to make it easier to get the [Joint2D] that the [code]PhysicalBone2D[/code] is autoconfiguring. - - + Returns a boolean that indicates whether the [code]PhysicalBone2D[/code] node is running and simulating using the Godot 2D physics engine. When [code]true[/code], the PhysicalBone2D node is using physics. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicalBone3D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicalBone3D.xml index 2ed862e9cec..710e96239b5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicalBone3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicalBone3D.xml @@ -8,38 +8,30 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsBody2D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsBody2D.xml index 654b0fb6680..4d1cd072d09 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsBody2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsBody2D.xml @@ -11,34 +11,25 @@ - - - - + + Adds a body to the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - + Returns an array of nodes that were added as collision exceptions for this body. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Moves the body along the vector [code]rel_vec[/code]. The body will stop if it collides. Returns a [KinematicCollision2D], which contains information about the collision. If [code]test_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], the body does not move but the would-be collision information is given. @@ -46,29 +37,20 @@ - - - - + + Removes a body from the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Checks for collisions without moving the body. Virtually sets the node's position, scale and rotation to that of the given [Transform2D], then tries to move the body along the vector [code]rel_vec[/code]. Returns [code]true[/code] if a collision would occur. [code]collision[/code] is an optional object of type [KinematicCollision2D], which contains additional information about the collision (should there be one). diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsBody3D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsBody3D.xml index 1ec38000be2..a2a68115d0f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsBody3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsBody3D.xml @@ -11,43 +11,32 @@ - - - - + + Adds a body to the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified linear or rotational [code]axis[/code] is locked. - - + Returns an array of nodes that were added as collision exceptions for this body. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Moves the body along the vector [code]rel_vec[/code]. The body will stop if it collides. Returns a [KinematicCollision3D], which contains information about the collision. If [code]test_only[/code] is [code]true[/code], the body does not move but the would-be collision information is given. @@ -55,40 +44,28 @@ - - - - + + Removes a body from the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - - - - - + + + Locks or unlocks the specified linear or rotational [code]axis[/code] depending on the value of [code]lock[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Checks for collisions without moving the body. Virtually sets the node's position, scale and rotation to that of the given [Transform3D], then tries to move the body along the vector [code]rel_vec[/code]. Returns [code]true[/code] if a collision would occur. [code]collision[/code] is an optional object of type [KinematicCollision3D], which contains additional information about the collision (should there be one). diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState2D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState2D.xml index 65cb3e7f383..ab3a04698f0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState2D.xml @@ -11,171 +11,134 @@ - - - - + + Adds a constant directional force without affecting rotation. - - - - - - + + + Adds a positioned force to the body. Both the force and the offset from the body origin are in global coordinates. - - - - + + Adds a constant rotational force. - - - - + + Applies a directional impulse without affecting rotation. - - - - - - + + + Applies a positioned impulse to the body. An impulse is time-independent! Applying an impulse every frame would result in a framerate-dependent force. For this reason, it should only be used when simulating one-time impacts (use the "_force" functions otherwise). The offset uses the rotation of the global coordinate system, but is centered at the object's origin. - - - - + + Applies a rotational impulse to the body. - - - - + + Returns the collider's [RID]. - - - - + + Returns the collider's object id. - - - - + + Returns the collider object. This depends on how it was created (will return a scene node if such was used to create it). - - - - + + Returns the contact position in the collider. - - - - + + Returns the collider's shape index. - - - - + + Returns the collided shape's metadata. This metadata is different from [method Object.get_meta], and is set with [method PhysicsServer2D.shape_set_data]. - - - - + + Returns the linear velocity vector at the collider's contact point. - - + Returns the number of contacts this body has with other bodies. [b]Note:[/b] By default, this returns 0 unless bodies are configured to monitor contacts. See [member RigidBody2D.contact_monitor]. - - - - + + Returns the local normal at the contact point. - - - - + + Returns the local position of the contact point. - - - - + + Returns the local shape index of the collision. - - + Returns the current state of the space, useful for queries. - - + Calls the built-in force integration code. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState3D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState3D.xml index 85feeef86ee..6af62c2bcc3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectBodyState3D.xml @@ -10,173 +10,136 @@ - - - - + + Adds a constant directional force without affecting rotation. This is equivalent to [code]add_force(force, Vector3(0,0,0))[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a positioned force to the body. Both the force and the offset from the body origin are in global coordinates. - - - - + + Adds a constant rotational force without affecting position. - - - - + + Applies a single directional impulse without affecting rotation. This is equivalent to [code]apply_impulse(Vector3(0, 0, 0), impulse)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Applies a positioned impulse to the body. An impulse is time-independent! Applying an impulse every frame would result in a framerate-dependent force. For this reason it should only be used when simulating one-time impacts. The position uses the rotation of the global coordinate system, but is centered at the object's origin. - - - - + + Apply a torque impulse (which will be affected by the body mass and shape). This will rotate the body around the vector [code]j[/code] passed as parameter. - - - - + + Returns the collider's [RID]. - - - - + + Returns the collider's object id. - - - - + + Returns the collider object. - - - - + + Returns the contact position in the collider. - - - - + + Returns the collider's shape index. - - - - + + Returns the linear velocity vector at the collider's contact point. - - + Returns the number of contacts this body has with other bodies. [b]Note:[/b] By default, this returns 0 unless bodies are configured to monitor contacts. See [member RigidBody3D.contact_monitor]. - - - - + + Impulse created by the contact. Only implemented for Bullet physics. - - - - + + Returns the local normal at the contact point. - - - - + + Returns the local position of the contact point. - - - - + + Returns the local shape index of the collision. - - + Returns the current state of the space, useful for queries. - - + Calls the built-in force integration code. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState2D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState2D.xml index 6c8c957e5db..2a32bc1cb94 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState2D.xml @@ -11,10 +11,8 @@ - - - - + + Checks how far a [Shape2D] can move without colliding. All the parameters for the query, including the shape and the motion, are supplied through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters2D] object. Returns an array with the safe and unsafe proportions (between 0 and 1) of the motion. The safe proportion is the maximum fraction of the motion that can be made without a collision. The unsafe proportion is the minimum fraction of the distance that must be moved for a collision. If no collision is detected a result of [code][1.0, 1.0][/code] will be returned. @@ -22,21 +20,16 @@ - - - - - - + + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters2D] object, against the space. The resulting array contains a list of points where the shape intersects another. Like with [method intersect_shape], the number of returned results can be limited to save processing time. - - - - + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters2D] object, against the space. If it collides with more than one shape, the nearest one is selected. If the shape did not intersect anything, then an empty dictionary is returned instead. [b]Note:[/b] This method does not take into account the [code]motion[/code] property of the object. The returned object is a dictionary containing the following fields: @@ -50,20 +43,13 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Checks whether a point is inside any solid shape. The shapes the point is inside of are returned in an array containing dictionaries with the following fields: [code]collider[/code]: The colliding object. @@ -76,40 +62,25 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Intersects a ray in a given space. The returned object is a dictionary with the following fields: [code]collider[/code]: The colliding object. @@ -124,12 +95,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters2D] object, against the space. [b]Note:[/b] This method does not take into account the [code]motion[/code] property of the object. The intersected shapes are returned in an array containing dictionaries with the following fields: diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState3D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState3D.xml index a69b6f07fda..a6bfc8754d2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsDirectSpaceState3D.xml @@ -11,12 +11,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Checks how far a [Shape3D] can move without colliding. All the parameters for the query, including the shape, are supplied through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters3D] object. Returns an array with the safe and unsafe proportions (between 0 and 1) of the motion. The safe proportion is the maximum fraction of the motion that can be made without a collision. The unsafe proportion is the minimum fraction of the distance that must be moved for a collision. If no collision is detected a result of [code][1.0, 1.0][/code] will be returned. @@ -24,21 +21,16 @@ - - - - - - + + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters3D] object, against the space. The resulting array contains a list of points where the shape intersects another. Like with [method intersect_shape], the number of returned results can be limited to save processing time. - - - - + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters3D] object, against the space. If it collides with more than one shape, the nearest one is selected. The returned object is a dictionary containing the following fields: [code]collider_id[/code]: The colliding object's ID. @@ -51,20 +43,13 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Intersects a ray in a given space. The returned object is a dictionary with the following fields: [code]collider[/code]: The colliding object. @@ -78,12 +63,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Checks the intersections of a shape, given through a [PhysicsShapeQueryParameters3D] object, against the space. The intersected shapes are returned in an array containing dictionaries with the following fields: [code]collider[/code]: The colliding object. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsServer2D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsServer2D.xml index b492ddaa251..cf23fecd08d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsServer2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsServer2D.xml @@ -10,197 +10,145 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a shape to the area, along with a transform matrix. Shapes are usually referenced by their index, so you should track which shape has a given index. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to a descendant of [Object], so it can exist in the node tree. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from an area. It does not delete the shapes, so they can be reassigned later. - - + Creates an [Area2D]. After creating an [Area2D] with this method, assign it to a space using [method area_set_space] to use the created [Area2D] in the physics world. - - - - + + - - - - + + Gets the instance ID of the object the area is assigned to. - - - - - - + + + Returns an area parameter value. See [enum AreaParameter] for a list of available parameters. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [RID] of the nth shape of an area. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes assigned to an area. - - - - - - + + + Returns the transform matrix of a shape within an area. - - - - + + Returns the space assigned to the area. - - - - + + Returns the space override mode for the area. - - - - + + Returns the transform matrix for an area. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from an area. It does not delete the shape, so it can be reassigned later. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to one or many physics layers. - - - - - - + + + Sets which physics layers the area will monitor. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the function to call when any body/area enters or exits the area. This callback will be called for any object interacting with the area, and takes five parameters: 1: [constant AREA_BODY_ADDED] or [constant AREA_BODY_REMOVED], depending on whether the object entered or exited the area. @@ -211,911 +159,662 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value for an area parameter. See [enum AreaParameter] for a list of available parameters. - - - - - - - - + + + + Substitutes a given area shape by another. The old shape is selected by its index, the new one by its [RID]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Disables a given shape in an area. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transform matrix for an area shape. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a space to the area. - - - - - - + + + Sets the space override mode for the area. See [enum AreaSpaceOverrideMode] for a list of available modes. - - - - - - + + + Sets the transform matrix for an area. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Adds a body to the list of bodies exempt from collisions. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a positioned force to the applied force and torque. As with [method body_apply_impulse], both the force and the offset from the body origin are in global coordinates. A force differs from an impulse in that, while the two are forces, the impulse clears itself after being applied. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a shape to the body, along with a transform matrix. Shapes are usually referenced by their index, so you should track which shape has a given index. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a positioned impulse to the applied force and torque. Both the force and the offset from the body origin are in global coordinates. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to a descendant of [Object], so it can exist in the node tree. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from a body. - - + Creates a physics body. - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the physics layer or layers a body belongs to. - - - - + + Returns the physics layer or layers a body can collide with. - - - - + + Returns the continuous collision detection mode. - - - - + + Returns the [PhysicsDirectBodyState2D] of the body. - - - - + + Returns the maximum contacts that can be reported. See [method body_set_max_contacts_reported]. - - - - + + Returns the body mode. - - - - + + Gets the instance ID of the object the area is assigned to. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a body parameter. See [enum BodyParameter] for a list of available parameters. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [RID] of the nth shape of a body. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes assigned to a body. - - - - - - + + + Returns the metadata of a shape of a body. - - - - - - + + + Returns the transform matrix of a body shape. - - - - + + Returns the [RID] of the space assigned to a body. - - - - - - + + + Returns a body state. - - - - + + Returns whether a body uses a callback function to calculate its own physics (see [method body_set_force_integration_callback]). - - - - - - + + + Removes a body from the list of bodies exempt from collisions. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from a body. The shape is not deleted, so it can be reused afterwards. - - - - - - + + + Sets an axis velocity. The velocity in the given vector axis will be set as the given vector length. This is useful for jumping behavior. - - - - - - + + + Sets the physics layer or layers a body belongs to. - - - - - - + + + Sets the physics layer or layers a body can collide with. - - - - - - + + + Sets the continuous collision detection mode using one of the [enum CCDMode] constants. Continuous collision detection tries to predict where a moving body will collide, instead of moving it and correcting its movement if it collided. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the function used to calculate physics for an object, if that object allows it (see [method body_set_omit_force_integration]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum contacts to report. Bodies can keep a log of the contacts with other bodies, this is enabled by setting the maximum amount of contacts reported to a number greater than 0. - - - - - - + + + Sets the body mode using one of the [enum BodyMode] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether a body uses a callback function to calculate its own physics (see [method body_set_force_integration_callback]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a body parameter. See [enum BodyParameter] for a list of available parameters. - - - - - - - - + + + + Substitutes a given body shape by another. The old shape is selected by its index, the new one by its [RID]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Enables one way collision on body if [code]enable[/code] is [code]true[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Disables shape in body if [code]disable[/code] is [code]true[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets metadata of a shape within a body. This metadata is different from [method Object.set_meta], and can be retrieved on shape queries. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transform matrix for a body shape. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a space to the body (see [method space_create]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a body state using one of the [enum BodyState] constants. Note that the method doesn't take effect immediately. The state will change on the next physics frame. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a collision would result from moving in the given direction from a given point in space. Margin increases the size of the shapes involved in the collision detection. [PhysicsTestMotionResult2D] can be passed to return additional information in. - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a damped spring joint parameter. See [enum DampedSpringParam] for a list of available parameters. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a damped spring joint parameter. See [enum DampedSpringParam] for a list of available parameters. - - - - + + Destroys any of the objects created by PhysicsServer2D. If the [RID] passed is not one of the objects that can be created by PhysicsServer2D, an error will be sent to the console. - - - - + + Returns information about the current state of the 2D physics engine. See [enum ProcessInfo] for a list of available states. - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a joint parameter. - - - - + + Returns a joint's type (see [enum JointType]). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a joint parameter. See [enum JointParam] for a list of available parameters. - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + Activates or deactivates the 2D physics engine. - - - - + + Sets the amount of iterations for calculating velocities of colliding bodies. The greater the amount of iterations, the more accurate the collisions will be. However, a greater amount of iterations requires more CPU power, which can decrease performance. The default value is [code]8[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the shape data. - - - - + + Returns a shape's type (see [enum ShapeType]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the shape data that defines its shape and size. The data to be passed depends on the kind of shape created [method shape_get_type]. - - + Creates a space. A space is a collection of parameters for the physics engine that can be assigned to an area or a body. It can be assigned to an area with [method area_set_space], or to a body with [method body_set_space]. - - - - + + Returns the state of a space, a [PhysicsDirectSpaceState2D]. This object can be used to make collision/intersection queries. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a space parameter. - - - - + + Returns whether the space is active. - - - - - - + + + Marks a space as active. It will not have an effect, unless it is assigned to an area or body. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value for a space parameter. See [enum SpaceParameter] for a list of available parameters. diff --git a/doc/classes/PhysicsServer3D.xml b/doc/classes/PhysicsServer3D.xml index 9db7ff5c128..7bca8afddaf 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PhysicsServer3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PhysicsServer3D.xml @@ -10,179 +10,132 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a shape to the area, along with a transform matrix. Shapes are usually referenced by their index, so you should track which shape has a given index. - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to a descendant of [Object], so it can exist in the node tree. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from an area. It does not delete the shapes, so they can be reassigned later. - - + Creates an [Area3D]. - - - - + + Gets the instance ID of the object the area is assigned to. - - - - - - + + + Returns an area parameter value. A list of available parameters is on the [enum AreaParameter] constants. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [RID] of the nth shape of an area. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes assigned to an area. - - - - - - + + + Returns the transform matrix of a shape within an area. - - - - + + Returns the space assigned to the area. - - - - + + Returns the space override mode for the area. - - - - + + Returns the transform matrix for an area. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from an area. It does not delete the shape, so it can be reassigned later. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to one or many physics layers. - - - - - - + + + Sets which physics layers the area will monitor. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the function to call when any body/area enters or exits the area. This callback will be called for any object interacting with the area, and takes five parameters: 1: [constant AREA_BODY_ADDED] or [constant AREA_BODY_REMOVED], depending on whether the object entered or exited the area. @@ -193,1134 +146,821 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value for an area parameter. A list of available parameters is on the [enum AreaParameter] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets object pickable with rays. - - - - - - - - + + + + Substitutes a given area shape by another. The old shape is selected by its index, the new one by its [RID]. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transform matrix for an area shape. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a space to the area. - - - - - - + + + Sets the space override mode for the area. The modes are described in the [enum AreaSpaceOverrideMode] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets the transform matrix for an area. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Adds a body to the list of bodies exempt from collisions. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a shape to the body, along with a transform matrix. Shapes are usually referenced by their index, so you should track which shape has a given index. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Gives the body a push at a [code]position[/code] in the direction of the [code]impulse[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Gives the body a push to rotate it. - - - - - - + + + Assigns the area to a descendant of [Object], so it can exist in the node tree. - - - - + + Removes all shapes from a body. - - + - - - - + + Returns the physics layer or layers a body belongs to. - - - - + + Returns the physics layer or layers a body can collide with. - - - - - + + Returns the [PhysicsDirectBodyState3D] of the body. - - - - + + Returns the maximum contacts that can be reported. See [method body_set_max_contacts_reported]. - - - - + + Returns the body mode. - - - - + + Gets the instance ID of the object the area is assigned to. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a body parameter. A list of available parameters is on the [enum BodyParameter] constants. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [RID] of the nth shape of a body. - - - - + + Returns the number of shapes assigned to a body. - - - - - - + + + Returns the transform matrix of a body shape. - - - - + + Returns the [RID] of the space assigned to a body. - - - - - - + + + Returns a body state. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the continuous collision detection mode is enabled. - - - - + + Returns whether a body uses a callback function to calculate its own physics (see [method body_set_force_integration_callback]). - - - - - - + + + Removes a body from the list of bodies exempt from collisions. Continuous collision detection tries to predict where a moving body will collide, instead of moving it and correcting its movement if it collided. - - - - - - + + + Removes a shape from a body. The shape is not deleted, so it can be reused afterwards. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets an axis velocity. The velocity in the given vector axis will be set as the given vector length. This is useful for jumping behavior. - - - - - - + + + Sets the physics layer or layers a body belongs to. - - - - - - + + + Sets the physics layer or layers a body can collide with. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the continuous collision detection mode is enabled. Continuous collision detection tries to predict where a moving body will collide, instead of moving it and correcting its movement if it collided. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the function used to calculate physics for an object, if that object allows it (see [method body_set_omit_force_integration]). - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum contacts to report. Bodies can keep a log of the contacts with other bodies, this is enabled by setting the maximum amount of contacts reported to a number greater than 0. - - - - - - + + + Sets the body mode, from one of the [enum BodyMode] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether a body uses a callback function to calculate its own physics (see [method body_set_force_integration_callback]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a body parameter. A list of available parameters is on the [enum BodyParameter] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets the body pickable with rays if [code]enabled[/code] is set. - - - - - - - - + + + + Substitutes a given body shape by another. The old shape is selected by its index, the new one by its [RID]. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transform matrix for a body shape. - - - - - - + + + Assigns a space to the body (see [method space_create]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a body state (see [enum BodyState] constants). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a collision would result from moving in the given direction from a given point in space. Margin increases the size of the shapes involved in the collision detection. [PhysicsTestMotionResult3D] can be passed to return additional information in. - - + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + Gets a cone_twist_joint parameter (see [enum ConeTwistJointParam] constants). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a cone_twist_joint parameter (see [enum ConeTwistJointParam] constants). - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + Destroys any of the objects created by PhysicsServer3D. If the [RID] passed is not one of the objects that can be created by PhysicsServer3D, an error will be sent to the console. - - - - - - - - + + + + Gets a generic_6_DOF_joint flag (see [enum G6DOFJointAxisFlag] constants). - - - - - - - - + + + + Gets a generic_6_DOF_joint parameter (see [enum G6DOFJointAxisParam] constants). - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets a generic_6_DOF_joint flag (see [enum G6DOFJointAxisFlag] constants). - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets a generic_6_DOF_joint parameter (see [enum G6DOFJointAxisParam] constants). - - - - + + Returns an Info defined by the [enum ProcessInfo] input given. - - + - - - - - - + + + Gets a hinge_joint flag (see [enum HingeJointFlag] constants). - - - - - - + + + Gets a hinge_joint parameter (see [enum HingeJointParam]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a hinge_joint flag (see [enum HingeJointFlag] constants). - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a hinge_joint parameter (see [enum HingeJointParam] constants). - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + Gets the priority value of the Joint3D. - - - - + + Returns the type of the Joint3D. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the priority value of the Joint3D. - - - - + + Returns position of the joint in the local space of body a of the joint. - - - - + + Returns position of the joint in the local space of body b of the joint. - - - - - - + + + Gets a pin_joint parameter (see [enum PinJointParam] constants). - - - - - - + + + Sets position of the joint in the local space of body a of the joint. - - - - - - + + + Sets position of the joint in the local space of body b of the joint. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a pin_joint parameter (see [enum PinJointParam] constants). - - + - - + - - - - + + Activates or deactivates the 3D physics engine. - - - - + + Sets the amount of iterations for calculating velocities of colliding bodies. The greater the amount of iterations, the more accurate the collisions will be. However, a greater amount of iterations requires more CPU power, which can decrease performance. The default value is [code]8[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Only has an effect when using the default GodotPhysics engine, not the Bullet physics engine. - - - - + + Returns the shape data. - - - - + + Returns the type of shape (see [enum ShapeType] constants). - - - - - - + + + Sets the shape data that defines its shape and size. The data to be passed depends on the kind of shape created [method shape_get_type]. - - - - - - + + + Gets a slider_joint parameter (see [enum SliderJointParam] constants). - - - - - - - - + + + + Gets a slider_joint parameter (see [enum SliderJointParam] constants). - - - - + + - - + Creates a space. A space is a collection of parameters for the physics engine that can be assigned to an area or a body. It can be assigned to an area with [method area_set_space], or to a body with [method body_set_space]. - - - - + + Returns the state of a space, a [PhysicsDirectSpaceState3D]. This object can be used to make collision/intersection queries. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a space parameter. - - - - + + Returns whether the space is active. - - - - - - + + + Marks a space as active. It will not have an effect, unless it is assigned to an area or body. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the value for a space parameter. A list of available parameters is on the [enum SpaceParameter] constants. - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/PinJoint3D.xml b/doc/classes/PinJoint3D.xml index 37a85e497ff..84b60c0d8c2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PinJoint3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PinJoint3D.xml @@ -10,21 +10,16 @@ - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified parameter. - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of the specified parameter. diff --git a/doc/classes/Plane.xml b/doc/classes/Plane.xml index 12869061c4b..c243c3ad15a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Plane.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Plane.xml @@ -11,189 +11,143 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Plane] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Plane] as a copy of the given [Plane]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates a plane from the four parameters. The three components of the resulting plane's [member normal] are [code]a[/code], [code]b[/code] and [code]c[/code], and the plane has a distance of [code]d[/code] from the origin. - - - - - - + + + Creates a plane from the normal and the plane's distance to the origin. - - - - - - + + + Creates a plane from the given position and a plane normal. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates a plane from the three points, given in clockwise order. - - + Returns the center of the plane. - - - - + + Returns the shortest distance from the plane to the position [code]point[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]point[/code] is inside the plane. Comparison uses a custom minimum [code]epsilon[/code] threshold. - - - - - - + + + Returns the intersection point of the three planes [code]b[/code], [code]c[/code] and this plane. If no intersection is found, [code]null[/code] is returned. - - - - - - + + + Returns the intersection point of a ray consisting of the position [code]from[/code] and the direction normal [code]dir[/code] with this plane. If no intersection is found, [code]null[/code] is returned. - - - - - - + + + Returns the intersection point of a segment from position [code]begin[/code] to position [code]end[/code] with this plane. If no intersection is found, [code]null[/code] is returned. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this plane and [code]plane[/code] are approximately equal, by running [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]point[/code] is located above the plane. - - + Returns a copy of the plane, normalized. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - - - + + Returns the orthogonal projection of [code]point[/code] into a point in the plane. diff --git a/doc/classes/Polygon2D.xml b/doc/classes/Polygon2D.xml index 5a530631489..23106cddf76 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Polygon2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Polygon2D.xml @@ -10,75 +10,58 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a bone with the specified [code]path[/code] and [code]weights[/code]. - - + Removes all bones from this [Polygon2D]. - - - - + + Removes the specified bone from this [Polygon2D]. - - + Returns the number of bones in this [Polygon2D]. - - - - + + Returns the path to the node associated with the specified bone. - - - - + + Returns the height values of the specified bone. - - - - - - + + + Sets the path to the node associated with the specified bone. - - - - - - + + + Sets the weight values for the specified bone. diff --git a/doc/classes/PolygonPathFinder.xml b/doc/classes/PolygonPathFinder.xml index 49453d32acc..f77912bafe7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PolygonPathFinder.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PolygonPathFinder.xml @@ -8,72 +8,53 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/PopupMenu.xml b/doc/classes/PopupMenu.xml index 3489c5435a0..a2c8a581cf5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PopupMenu.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PopupMenu.xml @@ -12,14 +12,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new checkable item with text [code]label[/code]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided, as well as an accelerator ([code]accel[/code]). If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. If no [code]accel[/code] is provided then the default [code]0[/code] will be assigned to it. See [method get_item_accelerator] for more info on accelerators. @@ -27,14 +23,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new checkable item and assigns the specified [Shortcut] to it. Sets the label of the checkbox to the [Shortcut]'s name. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. @@ -42,16 +34,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a new checkable item with text [code]label[/code] and icon [code]texture[/code]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided, as well as an accelerator ([code]accel[/code]). If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. If no [code]accel[/code] is provided then the default [code]0[/code] will be assigned to it. See [method get_item_accelerator] for more info on accelerators. @@ -59,16 +46,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a new checkable item and assigns the specified [Shortcut] and icon [code]texture[/code] to it. Sets the label of the checkbox to the [Shortcut]'s name. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. @@ -76,94 +58,64 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a new item with text [code]label[/code] and icon [code]texture[/code]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided, as well as an accelerator ([code]accel[/code]). If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. If no [code]accel[/code] is provided then the default [code]0[/code] will be assigned to it. See [method get_item_accelerator] for more info on accelerators. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Same as [method add_icon_check_item], but uses a radio check button. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Same as [method add_icon_check_shortcut], but uses a radio check button. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a new item and assigns the specified [Shortcut] and icon [code]texture[/code] to it. Sets the label of the checkbox to the [Shortcut]'s name. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new item with text [code]label[/code]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided, as well as an accelerator ([code]accel[/code]). If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. If no [code]accel[/code] is provided then the default [code]0[/code] will be assigned to it. See [method get_item_accelerator] for more info on accelerators. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a new multistate item with text [code]label[/code]. Contrarily to normal binary items, multistate items can have more than two states, as defined by [code]max_states[/code]. Each press or activate of the item will increase the state by one. The default value is defined by [code]default_state[/code]. @@ -171,14 +123,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new radio check button with text [code]label[/code]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided, as well as an accelerator ([code]accel[/code]). If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. If no [code]accel[/code] is provided then the default [code]0[/code] will be assigned to it. See [method get_item_accelerator] for more info on accelerators. @@ -186,14 +134,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a new radio check button and assigns a [Shortcut] to it. Sets the label of the checkbox to the [Shortcut]'s name. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. @@ -201,469 +145,354 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a separator between items. Separators also occupy an index, which you can set by using the [code]id[/code] parameter. A [code]label[/code] can optionally be provided, which will appear at the center of the separator. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a [Shortcut]. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an item that will act as a submenu of the parent [PopupMenu] node when clicked. The [code]submenu[/code] argument is the name of the child [PopupMenu] node that will be shown when the item is clicked. An [code]id[/code] can optionally be provided. If no [code]id[/code] is provided, one will be created from the index. - - + Removes all items from the [PopupMenu]. - - - - + + Removes all OpenType features form the item's text. - - + Returns the index of the currently focused item. Returns [code]-1[/code] if no item is focused. - - - - + + Returns the accelerator of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. Accelerators are special combinations of keys that activate the item, no matter which control is focused. - - + Returns the number of items in the [PopupMenu]. - - - - + + Returns the icon of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the id of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. [code]id[/code] can be manually assigned, while index can not. - - - - + + Returns the index of the item containing the specified [code]id[/code]. Index is automatically assigned to each item by the engine. Index can not be set manually. - - - - + + Returns item's text language code. - - - - + + Returns the metadata of the specified item, which might be of any type. You can set it with [method set_item_metadata], which provides a simple way of assigning context data to items. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] of the item's text. - - - - + + Returns the [Shortcut] associated with the specified [code]idx[/code] item. - - - - + + Returns the submenu name of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. See [method add_submenu_item] for more info on how to add a submenu. - - - - + + Returns the text of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns item's text base writing direction. - - - - + + Returns the tooltip associated with the specified index index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at index [code]idx[/code] is checkable in some way, i.e. if it has a checkbox or radio button. [b]Note:[/b] Checkable items just display a checkmark or radio button, but don't have any built-in checking behavior and must be checked/unchecked manually. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at index [code]idx[/code] is checked. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at index [code]idx[/code] is disabled. When it is disabled it can't be selected, or its action invoked. See [method set_item_disabled] for more info on how to disable an item. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item at index [code]idx[/code] has radio button-style checkability. [b]Note:[/b] This is purely cosmetic; you must add the logic for checking/unchecking items in radio groups. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the item is a separator. If it is, it will be displayed as a line. See [method add_separator] for more info on how to add a separator. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified item's shortcut is disabled. - - - - + + Removes the item at index [code]idx[/code] from the menu. [b]Note:[/b] The indices of items after the removed item will be shifted by one. - - - - - - + + + Sets the accelerator of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. Accelerators are special combinations of keys that activate the item, no matter which control is focused. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the item at index [code]idx[/code] has a checkbox. If [code]false[/code], sets the type of the item to plain text. [b]Note:[/b] Checkable items just display a checkmark, but don't have any built-in checking behavior and must be checked/unchecked manually. - - - - - - + + + Sets the type of the item at the specified index [code]idx[/code] to radio button. If [code]false[/code], sets the type of the item to plain text. - - - - - - + + + Mark the item at index [code]idx[/code] as a separator, which means that it would be displayed as a line. If [code]false[/code], sets the type of the item to plain text. - - - - - - + + + Sets the checkstate status of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Enables/disables the item at index [code]idx[/code]. When it is disabled, it can't be selected and its action can't be invoked. - - - - - - + + + Replaces the [Texture2D] icon of the specified [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [code]id[/code] of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets language code of item's text used for line-breaking and text shaping algorithms, if left empty current locale is used instead. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata of an item, which may be of any type. You can later get it with [method get_item_metadata], which provides a simple way of assigning context data to items. - - - - - - + + + Sets the state of a multistate item. See [method add_multistate_item] for details. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] for the item's text. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a [Shortcut] for the specified item [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Disables the [Shortcut] of the specified index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the submenu of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. The submenu is the name of a child [PopupMenu] node that would be shown when the item is clicked. - - - - - - + + + Sets the text of the item at index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets item's text base writing direction. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [String] tooltip of the item at the specified index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Toggles the check state of the item of the specified index [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Cycle to the next state of a multistate item. See [method add_multistate_item] for details. @@ -688,22 +517,19 @@ - - + Emitted when user navigated to an item of some [code]id[/code] using [code]ui_up[/code] or [code]ui_down[/code] action. - - + Emitted when an item of some [code]id[/code] is pressed or its accelerator is activated. - - + Emitted when an item of some [code]index[/code] is pressed or its accelerator is activated. diff --git a/doc/classes/PrimitiveMesh.xml b/doc/classes/PrimitiveMesh.xml index ca41c367c84..36bec3ff614 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PrimitiveMesh.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PrimitiveMesh.xml @@ -10,8 +10,7 @@ - - + Returns mesh arrays used to constitute surface of [Mesh]. The result can be passed to [method ArrayMesh.add_surface_from_arrays] to create a new surface. For example: [codeblocks] diff --git a/doc/classes/ProjectSettings.xml b/doc/classes/ProjectSettings.xml index c3ef9f24250..a1a320446b3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ProjectSettings.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ProjectSettings.xml @@ -16,10 +16,8 @@ - - - - + + Adds a custom property info to a property. The dictionary must contain: - [code]name[/code]: [String] (the property's name) @@ -56,28 +54,22 @@ - - - - + + Clears the whole configuration (not recommended, may break things). - - - - + + Returns the order of a configuration value (influences when saved to the config file). - - - - + + Returns the value of a setting. [b]Example:[/b] @@ -92,10 +84,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the absolute, native OS path corresponding to the localized [code]path[/code] (starting with [code]res://[/code] or [code]user://[/code]). The returned path will vary depending on the operating system and user preferences. See [url=https://docs.godotengine.org/en/latest/tutorials/io/data_paths.html]File paths in Godot projects[/url] to see what those paths convert to. See also [method localize_path]. [b]Note:[/b] [method globalize_path] with [code]res://[/code] will not work in an exported project. Instead, prepend the executable's base directory to the path when running from an exported project: @@ -115,23 +105,17 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a configuration value is present. - - - - - - - - + + + + Loads the contents of the .pck or .zip file specified by [code]pack[/code] into the resource filesystem ([code]res://[/code]). Returns [code]true[/code] on success. [b]Note:[/b] If a file from [code]pack[/code] shares the same path as a file already in the resource filesystem, any attempts to load that file will use the file from [code]pack[/code] unless [code]replace_files[/code] is set to [code]false[/code]. @@ -139,78 +123,60 @@ - - - - + + Returns the localized path (starting with [code]res://[/code]) corresponding to the absolute, native OS [code]path[/code]. See also [method globalize_path]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified property exists and its initial value differs from the current value. - - - - + + Returns the specified property's initial value. Returns [code]null[/code] if the property does not exist. - - + Saves the configuration to the [code]project.godot[/code] file. [b]Note:[/b] This method is intended to be used by editor plugins, as modified [ProjectSettings] can't be loaded back in the running app. If you want to change project settings in exported projects, use [method save_custom] to save [code]override.cfg[/code] file. - - - - + + Saves the configuration to a custom file. The file extension must be [code].godot[/code] (to save in text-based [ConfigFile] format) or [code].binary[/code] (to save in binary format). You can also save [code]override.cfg[/code] file, which is also text, but can be used in exported projects unlike other formats. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified property's initial value. This is the value the property reverts to. - - - - - - + + + Sets the order of a configuration value (influences when saved to the config file). - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of a setting. [b]Example:[/b] diff --git a/doc/classes/PropertyTweener.xml b/doc/classes/PropertyTweener.xml index 1e77bb33c63..7914b266768 100644 --- a/doc/classes/PropertyTweener.xml +++ b/doc/classes/PropertyTweener.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + When called, the final value will be used as a relative value instead. Example: [codeblock] @@ -22,10 +21,8 @@ - - - - + + Sets a custom initial value to the [PropertyTweener]. Example: [codeblock] @@ -35,8 +32,7 @@ - - + Makes the [PropertyTweener] use the current property value (i.e. at the time of creating this [PropertyTweener]) as a starting point. This is equivalent of using [method from] with the current value. These two calls will do the same: [codeblock] @@ -46,28 +42,22 @@ - - - - + + Sets the time in seconds after which the [PropertyTweener] will start interpolating. By default there's no delay. - - - - + + Sets the type of used easing from [enum Tween.EaseType]. If not set, the default easing is used from the [Tween] that contains this Tweener. - - - - + + Sets the type of used transition from [enum Tween.TransitionType]. If not set, the default transition is used from the [Tween] that contains this Tweener. diff --git a/doc/classes/ProximityGroup3D.xml b/doc/classes/ProximityGroup3D.xml index 22e397b832c..15735bd6f60 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ProximityGroup3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ProximityGroup3D.xml @@ -10,12 +10,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + @@ -30,10 +27,8 @@ - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Quaternion.xml b/doc/classes/Quaternion.xml index 06434ab268a..720188f67ec 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Quaternion.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Quaternion.xml @@ -14,279 +14,214 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized quaternion with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Quaternion] as a copy of the given [Quaternion]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Constructs a quaternion that will rotate around the given axis by the specified angle. The axis must be a normalized vector. - - - - + + Constructs a quaternion that will perform a rotation specified by Euler angles (in the YXZ convention: when decomposing, first Z, then X, and Y last), given in the vector format as (X angle, Y angle, Z angle). - - - - + + Constructs a quaternion from the given [Basis]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Constructs a quaternion defined by the given values. - - - - + + Returns the angle between this quaternion and [code]to[/code]. This is the magnitude of the angle you would need to rotate by to get from one to the other. [b]Note:[/b] This method has an abnormally high amount of floating-point error, so methods such as [code]is_zero_approx[/code] will not work reliably. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Performs a cubic spherical interpolation between quaternions [code]pre_a[/code], this vector, [code]b[/code], and [code]post_b[/code], by the given amount [code]weight[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the dot product of two quaternions. - - + Returns Euler angles (in the YXZ convention: when decomposing, first Z, then X, and Y last) corresponding to the rotation represented by the unit quaternion. Returned vector contains the rotation angles in the format (X angle, Y angle, Z angle). - - + Returns the inverse of the quaternion. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this quaternion and [code]quat[/code] are approximately equal, by running [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - + Returns whether the quaternion is normalized or not. - - + Returns the length of the quaternion. - - + Returns the length of the quaternion, squared. - - + Returns a copy of the quaternion, normalized to unit length. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of the spherical linear interpolation between this quaternion and [code]to[/code] by amount [code]weight[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Both quaternions must be normalized. - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of the spherical linear interpolation between this quaternion and [code]to[/code] by amount [code]weight[/code], but without checking if the rotation path is not bigger than 90 degrees. diff --git a/doc/classes/RDPipelineColorBlendStateAttachment.xml b/doc/classes/RDPipelineColorBlendStateAttachment.xml index a6a1900cb5b..30430d6670b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDPipelineColorBlendStateAttachment.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDPipelineColorBlendStateAttachment.xml @@ -8,8 +8,7 @@ - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/RDShaderFile.xml b/doc/classes/RDShaderFile.xml index dab2b9822f8..22fcf9867cf 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDShaderFile.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDShaderFile.xml @@ -8,26 +8,20 @@ - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RDShaderSPIRV.xml b/doc/classes/RDShaderSPIRV.xml index c9aefe31dcc..20de8230aa6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDShaderSPIRV.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDShaderSPIRV.xml @@ -8,38 +8,28 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RDShaderSource.xml b/doc/classes/RDShaderSource.xml index 68fc43d8efa..2d37ce37f26 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDShaderSource.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDShaderSource.xml @@ -8,20 +8,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RDTextureFormat.xml b/doc/classes/RDTextureFormat.xml index ccfa6d1b955..2588dcfc40e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDTextureFormat.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDTextureFormat.xml @@ -8,18 +8,14 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RDUniform.xml b/doc/classes/RDUniform.xml index 666935d663c..93adecc7de0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RDUniform.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RDUniform.xml @@ -8,22 +8,18 @@ - - - - + + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/RID.xml b/doc/classes/RID.xml index e686a4b8fdc..ddd30dbc829 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RID.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RID.xml @@ -10,73 +10,57 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [RID] with the invalid ID [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [RID] as a copy of the given [RID]. - - + Returns the ID of the referenced resource. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RandomNumberGenerator.xml b/doc/classes/RandomNumberGenerator.xml index 9c84cdd03e1..2cf3cbb83d9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RandomNumberGenerator.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RandomNumberGenerator.xml @@ -20,55 +20,43 @@ - - + Returns a pseudo-random float between [code]0.0[/code] and [code]1.0[/code] (inclusive). - - - - - - + + + Returns a pseudo-random float between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] (inclusive). - - - - - - + + + Returns a [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normal_distribution]normally-distributed[/url] pseudo-random number, using Box-Muller transform with the specified [code]mean[/code] and a standard [code]deviation[/code]. This is also called Gaussian distribution. - - + Returns a pseudo-random 32-bit unsigned integer between [code]0[/code] and [code]4294967295[/code] (inclusive). - - - - - - + + + Returns a pseudo-random 32-bit signed integer between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] (inclusive). - - + Setups a time-based seed to for this [RandomNumberGenerator] instance. Unlike the [@GlobalScope] random number generation functions, different [RandomNumberGenerator] instances can use different seeds. diff --git a/doc/classes/Range.xml b/doc/classes/Range.xml index 8690f6d7e70..30b915b437e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Range.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Range.xml @@ -10,17 +10,14 @@ - - - - + + Binds two ranges together along with any ranges previously grouped with either of them. When any of range's member variables change, it will share the new value with all other ranges in its group. - - + Stops range from sharing its member variables with any other. @@ -65,8 +62,7 @@ - - + Emitted when [member value] changes. diff --git a/doc/classes/RayCast2D.xml b/doc/classes/RayCast2D.xml index 14b67b46dfe..d8a5fc85085 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RayCast2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RayCast2D.xml @@ -15,108 +15,88 @@ - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the ray does not report collisions with the specified node. - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the ray does not report collisions with the specified [RID]. - - + Removes all collision exceptions for this ray. - - + Updates the collision information for the ray. Use this method to update the collision information immediately instead of waiting for the next [code]_physics_process[/code] call, for example if the ray or its parent has changed state. [b]Note:[/b] [member enabled] does not need to be [code]true[/code] for this to work. - - + Returns the first object that the ray intersects, or [code]null[/code] if no object is intersecting the ray (i.e. [method is_colliding] returns [code]false[/code]). - - + Returns the shape ID of the first object that the ray intersects, or [code]0[/code] if no object is intersecting the ray (i.e. [method is_colliding] returns [code]false[/code]). - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the collision mask. - - + Returns the normal of the intersecting object's shape at the collision point. - - + Returns the collision point at which the ray intersects the closest object. [b]Note:[/b] this point is in the [b]global[/b] coordinate system. - - + Returns whether any object is intersecting with the ray's vector (considering the vector length). - - - - + + Removes a collision exception so the ray does report collisions with the specified node. - - - - + + Removes a collision exception so the ray does report collisions with the specified [RID]. - - - - - - + + + Sets or clears individual bits on the collision mask. This makes selecting the areas scanned easier. diff --git a/doc/classes/RayCast3D.xml b/doc/classes/RayCast3D.xml index 98c8c964037..4e8eb960db0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RayCast3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RayCast3D.xml @@ -16,33 +16,27 @@ - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the ray does not report collisions with the specified node. - - - - + + Adds a collision exception so the ray does not report collisions with the specified [RID]. - - + Removes all collision exceptions for this ray. - - + Updates the collision information for the ray. Use this method to update the collision information immediately instead of waiting for the next [code]_physics_process[/code] call, for example if the ray or its parent has changed state. @@ -50,76 +44,62 @@ - - + Returns the first object that the ray intersects, or [code]null[/code] if no object is intersecting the ray (i.e. [method is_colliding] returns [code]false[/code]). - - + Returns the shape ID of the first object that the ray intersects, or [code]0[/code] if no object is intersecting the ray (i.e. [method is_colliding] returns [code]false[/code]). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the bit index passed is turned on. [b]Note:[/b] Bit indices range from 0-19. - - + Returns the normal of the intersecting object's shape at the collision point. - - + Returns the collision point at which the ray intersects the closest object. [b]Note:[/b] This point is in the [b]global[/b] coordinate system. - - + Returns whether any object is intersecting with the ray's vector (considering the vector length). - - - - + + Removes a collision exception so the ray does report collisions with the specified node. - - - - + + Removes a collision exception so the ray does report collisions with the specified [RID]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bit index passed to the [code]value[/code] passed. [b]Note:[/b] Bit indexes range from 0-19. diff --git a/doc/classes/Rect2.xml b/doc/classes/Rect2.xml index 627c488b012..e6c8ff86b65 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Rect2.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Rect2.xml @@ -15,200 +15,153 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Rect2] with default (zero) values of [member position] and [member size]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Rect2] as a copy of the given [Rect2]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Rect2] from a [Rect2i]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a [Rect2] by position and size. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Constructs a [Rect2] by x, y, width, and height. - - + Returns a [Rect2] with equivalent position and area, modified so that the top-left corner is the origin and [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code] are positive. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Rect2] completely encloses another one. - - - - + + Returns this [Rect2] expanded to include a given point. - - + Returns the area of the [Rect2]. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2] grown by the specified [code]amount[/code] on all sides. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2] grown by the specified amount on each side individually. - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2] grown by the specified [code]amount[/code] on the specified [enum Side]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2] is flat or empty. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2] contains a point. - - - - + + Returns the intersection of this [Rect2] and [code]b[/code]. If the rectangles do not intersect, an empty [Rect2] is returned. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2] overlaps with [code]b[/code] (i.e. they have at least one point in common). If [code]include_borders[/code] is [code]true[/code], they will also be considered overlapping if their borders touch, even without intersection. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Rect2] and [code]rect[/code] are approximately equal, by calling [code]is_equal_approx[/code] on each component. - - - - + + Returns a larger [Rect2] that contains this [Rect2] and [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Rect2i.xml b/doc/classes/Rect2i.xml index 67d148084f7..a75c31a007b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Rect2i.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Rect2i.xml @@ -13,181 +13,139 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Rect2i] with default (zero) values of [member position] and [member size]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Rect2i] as a copy of the given [Rect2i]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [Rect2i] from [Rect2]. The floating point coordinates will be truncated. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a [Rect2i] by position and size. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Constructs a [Rect2i] by x, y, width, and height. - - + Returns a [Rect2i] with equivalent position and area, modified so that the top-left corner is the origin and [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code] are positive. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Rect2i] completely encloses another one. - - - - + + Returns this [Rect2i] expanded to include a given point. - - + Returns the area of the [Rect2i]. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2i] grown by the specified [code]amount[/code] on all sides. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2i] grown by the specified amount on each side individually. - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the [Rect2i] grown by the specified [code]amount[/code] on the specified [enum Side]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2i] is flat or empty. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2i] contains a point. - - - - + + Returns the intersection of this [Rect2i] and [code]b[/code]. If the rectangles do not intersect, an empty [Rect2i] is returned. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Rect2i] overlaps with [code]b[/code] (i.e. they have at least one point in common). If [code]include_borders[/code] is [code]true[/code], they will also be considered overlapping if their borders touch, even without intersection. - - - - + + Returns a larger [Rect2i] that contains this [Rect2i] and [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RefCounted.xml b/doc/classes/RefCounted.xml index cf965142035..bf52c34777d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RefCounted.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RefCounted.xml @@ -14,24 +14,21 @@ - - + Initializes the internal reference counter. Use this only if you really know what you are doing. Returns whether the initialization was successful. - - + Increments the internal reference counter. Use this only if you really know what you are doing. Returns [code]true[/code] if the increment was successful, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Decrements the internal reference counter. Use this only if you really know what you are doing. Returns [code]true[/code] if the decrement was successful, [code]false[/code] otherwise. diff --git a/doc/classes/RemoteTransform2D.xml b/doc/classes/RemoteTransform2D.xml index 84ec673920f..613726b5554 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RemoteTransform2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RemoteTransform2D.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + [RemoteTransform2D] caches the remote node. It may not notice if the remote node disappears; [method force_update_cache] forces it to update the cache again. diff --git a/doc/classes/RemoteTransform3D.xml b/doc/classes/RemoteTransform3D.xml index 453177496f1..cc19d5c25d0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RemoteTransform3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RemoteTransform3D.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + [RemoteTransform3D] caches the remote node. It may not notice if the remote node disappears; [method force_update_cache] forces it to update the cache again. diff --git a/doc/classes/RenderingDevice.xml b/doc/classes/RenderingDevice.xml index c73c2ddfd7e..c017bcaa1a7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RenderingDevice.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RenderingDevice.xml @@ -8,904 +8,627 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RenderingServer.xml b/doc/classes/RenderingServer.xml index 31ced67ac49..df8bfb7e344 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RenderingServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RenderingServer.xml @@ -19,1207 +19,840 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + Creates a camera and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]camera_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the cull mask associated with this camera. The cull mask describes which 3D layers are rendered by this camera. Equivalent to [member Camera3D.cull_mask]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the environment used by this camera. Equivalent to [member Camera3D.environment]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Sets camera to use frustum projection. This mode allows adjusting the [code]offset[/code] argument to create "tilted frustum" effects. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets camera to use orthogonal projection, also known as orthographic projection. Objects remain the same size on the screen no matter how far away they are. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets camera to use perspective projection. Objects on the screen becomes smaller when they are far away. - - - - - - + + + Sets [Transform3D] of camera. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], preserves the horizontal aspect ratio which is equivalent to [constant Camera3D.KEEP_WIDTH]. If [code]false[/code], preserves the vertical aspect ratio which is equivalent to [constant Camera3D.KEEP_HEIGHT]. - - + Creates a canvas and returns the assigned [RID]. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]canvas_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + Clears the [CanvasItem] and removes all commands in it. - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [CanvasItem] to copy a rect to the backbuffer. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the index for the [CanvasItem]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a new material to the [CanvasItem]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets if the [CanvasItem] uses its parent's material. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If this is enabled, the Z index of the parent will be added to the children's Z index. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [CanvasItem]'s Z index, i.e. its draw order (lower indexes are drawn first). - - - - - - + + + Attaches the canvas light to the canvas. Removes it from its previous canvas. - - + Creates a canvas light and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]canvas_light_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + Attaches a light occluder to the canvas. Removes it from its previous canvas. - - + Creates a light occluder and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]canvas_light_ocluder_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables light occluder. - - - - - - + + + The light mask. See [LightOccluder2D] for more information on light masks. - - - - - - + + + Sets a light occluder's polygon. - - - - - - + + + Sets a light occluder's [Transform2D]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color for a light. - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables a canvas light. - - - - - - + + + Sets a canvas light's energy. - - - - - - + + + Sets a canvas light's height. - - - - - - + + + The light mask. See [LightOccluder2D] for more information on light masks. - - - - - - + + + The binary mask used to determine which layers this canvas light's shadows affects. See [LightOccluder2D] for more information on light masks. - - - - - - - - + + + + The layer range that gets rendered with this light. - - - - - - + + + The mode of the light, see [enum CanvasLightMode] constants. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of the canvas light's shadow. - - - - - - + + + Enables or disables the canvas light's shadow. - - - - - - + + + Sets the canvas light's shadow's filter, see [enum CanvasLightShadowFilter] constants. - - - - - - + + + Smoothens the shadow. The lower, the smoother. - - - - - - + + + Sets the texture to be used by a [PointLight2D]. Equivalent to [member PointLight2D.texture]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the offset of a [PointLight2D]'s texture. Equivalent to [member PointLight2D.offset]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the scale factor of a [PointLight2D]'s texture. Equivalent to [member PointLight2D.texture_scale]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the canvas light's [Transform2D]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the Z range of objects that will be affected by this light. Equivalent to [member Light2D.range_z_min] and [member Light2D.range_z_max]. - - + Creates a new light occluder polygon and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]canvas_occluder_polygon_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + Sets an occluder polygons cull mode. See [enum CanvasOccluderPolygonCullMode] constants. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the shape of the occluder polygon. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + A copy of the canvas item will be drawn with a local offset of the mirroring [Vector2]. - - - - - - + + + Modulates all colors in the given canvas. - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - + Creates a directional light and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID can be used in most [code]light_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -1227,610 +860,423 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + Creates an environment and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]environment_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Sets the values to be used with the "Adjustment" post-process effect. See [Environment] for more details. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the [i]BGMode[/i] of the environment. Equivalent to [member Environment.background_mode]. - - - - - - + + + Color displayed for clear areas of the scene (if using Custom color or Color+Sky background modes). - - - - - - + + + Sets the intensity of the background color. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum layer to use if using Canvas background mode. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Sky] to be used as the environment's background when using [i]BGMode[/i] sky. Equivalent to [member Environment.sky]. - - - - - - + + + Sets a custom field of view for the background [Sky]. Equivalent to [member Environment.sky_custom_fov]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the rotation of the background [Sky] expressed as a [Basis]. Equivalent to [member Environment.sky_rotation], where the rotation vector is used to construct the [Basis]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + Sets the variables to be used with the "screen space ambient occlusion" post-process effect. See [Environment] for more details. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Sets the variables to be used with the "screen space reflections" post-process effect. See [Environment] for more details. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + Sets the variables to be used with the "tonemap" post-process effect. See [Environment] for more details. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + Tries to free an object in the RenderingServer. - - + - - - - + + - - + Returns the id of the test cube. Creates one if none exists. - - + Returns the id of the test texture. Creates one if none exists. - - + Returns the name of the video adapter (e.g. "GeForce GTX 1080/PCIe/SSE2"). [b]Note:[/b] When running a headless or server binary, this function returns an empty string. - - + Returns the vendor of the video adapter (e.g. "NVIDIA Corporation"). [b]Note:[/b] When running a headless or server binary, this function returns an empty string. - - + Returns the id of a white texture. Creates one if none exists. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if changes have been made to the RenderingServer's data. [method force_draw] is usually called if this happens. - - - - + + Not yet implemented. Always returns [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the OS supports a certain feature. Features might be [code]s3tc[/code], [code]etc[/code], [code]etc2[/code] and [code]pvrtc[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Attaches a unique Object ID to instance. Object ID must be attached to instance for proper culling with [method instances_cull_aabb], [method instances_cull_convex], and [method instances_cull_ray]. - - - - - - + + + Attaches a skeleton to an instance. Removes the previous skeleton from the instance. - - + Creates a visual instance and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]instance_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -1838,660 +1284,473 @@ - - - - - - + + + Creates a visual instance, adds it to the RenderingServer, and sets both base and scenario. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]instance_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the shadow casting setting to one of [enum ShadowCastingSetting]. Equivalent to [member GeometryInstance3D.cast_shadow]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the flag for a given [enum InstanceFlags]. See [enum InstanceFlags] for more details. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a material that will override the material for all surfaces on the mesh associated with this instance. Equivalent to [member GeometryInstance3D.material_override]. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Sets the visibility range values for the given geometry instance. Equivalent to [member GeometryInstance3D.visibility_range_begin] and related properties. - - - - - - + + + Sets the base of the instance. A base can be any of the 3D objects that are created in the RenderingServer that can be displayed. For example, any of the light types, mesh, multimesh, immediate geometry, particle system, reflection probe, lightmap, and the GI probe are all types that can be set as the base of an instance in order to be displayed in the scenario. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the weight for a given blend shape associated with this instance. - - - - - - + + + Sets a custom AABB to use when culling objects from the view frustum. Equivalent to [method GeometryInstance3D.set_custom_aabb]. - - - - - - + + + Sets a margin to increase the size of the AABB when culling objects from the view frustum. This allows you to avoid culling objects that fall outside the view frustum. Equivalent to [member GeometryInstance3D.extra_cull_margin]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the render layers that this instance will be drawn to. Equivalent to [member VisualInstance3D.layers]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the scenario that the instance is in. The scenario is the 3D world that the objects will be displayed in. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the override material of a specific surface. Equivalent to [method MeshInstance3D.set_surface_override_material]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the world space transform of the instance. Equivalent to [member Node3D.transform]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the visibility parent for the given instance. Equivalent to [member Node3D.visibility_parent]. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether an instance is drawn or not. Equivalent to [member Node3D.visible]. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array of object IDs intersecting with the provided AABB. Only visual 3D nodes are considered, such as [MeshInstance3D] or [DirectionalLight3D]. Use [method @GlobalScope.instance_from_id] to obtain the actual nodes. A scenario RID must be provided, which is available in the [World3D] you want to query. This forces an update for all resources queued to update. [b]Warning:[/b] This function is primarily intended for editor usage. For in-game use cases, prefer physics collision. - - - - - - + + + Returns an array of object IDs intersecting with the provided convex shape. Only visual 3D nodes are considered, such as [MeshInstance3D] or [DirectionalLight3D]. Use [method @GlobalScope.instance_from_id] to obtain the actual nodes. A scenario RID must be provided, which is available in the [World3D] you want to query. This forces an update for all resources queued to update. [b]Warning:[/b] This function is primarily intended for editor usage. For in-game use cases, prefer physics collision. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns an array of object IDs intersecting with the provided 3D ray. Only visual 3D nodes are considered, such as [MeshInstance3D] or [DirectionalLight3D]. Use [method @GlobalScope.instance_from_id] to obtain the actual nodes. A scenario RID must be provided, which is available in the [World3D] you want to query. This forces an update for all resources queued to update. [b]Warning:[/b] This function is primarily intended for editor usage. For in-game use cases, prefer physics collision. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], this directional light will blend between shadow map splits resulting in a smoother transition between them. Equivalent to [member DirectionalLight3D.directional_shadow_blend_splits]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the shadow mode for this directional light. Equivalent to [member DirectionalLight3D.directional_shadow_mode]. See [enum LightDirectionalShadowMode] for options. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], this light will not be used for anything except sky shaders. Use this for lights that impact your sky shader that you may want to hide from affecting the rest of the scene. For example, you may want to enable this when the sun in your sky shader falls below the horizon. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether to use a dual paraboloid or a cubemap for the shadow map. Dual paraboloid is faster but may suffer from artifacts. Equivalent to [member OmniLight3D.omni_shadow_mode]. - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of the light. Equivalent to [member Light3D.light_color]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the cull mask for this Light3D. Lights only affect objects in the selected layers. Equivalent to [member Light3D.light_cull_mask]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], light will subtract light instead of adding light. Equivalent to [member Light3D.light_negative]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the specified light parameter. See [enum LightParam] for options. Equivalent to [method Light3D.set_param]. - - - - - - + + + Not implemented in Godot 3.x. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], reverses the backface culling of the mesh. This can be useful when you have a flat mesh that has a light behind it. If you need to cast a shadow on both sides of the mesh, set the mesh to use double-sided shadows with [method instance_geometry_set_cast_shadows_setting]. Equivalent to [member Light3D.shadow_reverse_cull_face]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], light will cast shadows. Equivalent to [member Light3D.shadow_enabled]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the color of the shadow cast by the light. Equivalent to [member Light3D.shadow_color]. - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a mesh of a sphere with the given amount of horizontal and vertical subdivisions. - - + Creates an empty material and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]material_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of a certain material's parameter. - - - - - - + + + Sets an object's next material. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a material's parameter. - - - - - - + + + Sets a material's render priority. - - - - - - + + + Sets a shader material's shader. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - +}" /> + - - - - + + Removes all surfaces from a mesh. - - + Creates a new mesh and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]mesh_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -2499,242 +1758,171 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns a mesh's blend shape count. - - - - + + Returns a mesh's blend shape mode. - - - - + + Returns a mesh's custom aabb. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns a mesh's number of surfaces. - - - - - - + + + Sets a mesh's blend shape mode. - - - - - - + + + Sets a mesh's custom aabb. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns a mesh's surface's buffer arrays. - - - - - - + + + Returns a mesh's surface's arrays for blend shapes. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns a mesh's surface's material. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a mesh's surface's material. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + - - + Creates a new multimesh on the RenderingServer and returns an [RID] handle. This RID will be used in all [code]multimesh_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -2742,198 +1930,145 @@ - - - - + + Calculates and returns the axis-aligned bounding box that encloses all instances within the multimesh. - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the number of instances allocated for this multimesh. - - - - + + Returns the RID of the mesh that will be used in drawing this multimesh. - - - - + + Returns the number of visible instances for this multimesh. - - - - - - + + + Returns the color by which the specified instance will be modulated. - - - - - - + + + Returns the custom data associated with the specified instance. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Transform3D] of the specified instance. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Transform2D] of the specified instance. For use when the multimesh is set to use 2D transforms. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the color by which this instance will be modulated. Equivalent to [method MultiMesh.set_instance_color]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the custom data for this instance. Custom data is passed as a [Color], but is interpreted as a [code]vec4[/code] in the shader. Equivalent to [method MultiMesh.set_instance_custom_data]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [Transform3D] for this instance. Equivalent to [method MultiMesh.set_instance_transform]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [Transform2D] for this instance. For use when multimesh is used in 2D. Equivalent to [method MultiMesh.set_instance_transform_2d]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the mesh to be drawn by the multimesh. Equivalent to [member MultiMesh.mesh]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the number of instances visible at a given time. If -1, all instances that have been allocated are drawn. Equivalent to [member MultiMesh.visible_instance_count]. - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + Creates a new omni light and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID can be used in most [code]light_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -2941,112 +2076,81 @@ - - + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + Creates a particle system and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]particles_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -3054,332 +2158,240 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - + + Calculates and returns the axis-aligned bounding box that contains all the particles. Equivalent to [method GPUParticles3D.capture_aabb]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if particles are currently set to emitting. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if particles are not emitting and particles are set to inactive. - - - - + + Add particle system to list of particle systems that need to be updated. Update will take place on the next frame, or on the next call to [method instances_cull_aabb], [method instances_cull_convex], or [method instances_cull_ray]. - - - - + + Reset the particles on the next update. Equivalent to [method GPUParticles3D.restart]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the number of particles to be drawn and allocates the memory for them. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.amount]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a custom axis-aligned bounding box for the particle system. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.visibility_aabb]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the draw order of the particles to one of the named enums from [enum ParticlesDrawOrder]. See [enum ParticlesDrawOrder] for options. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.draw_order]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the mesh to be used for the specified draw pass. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.draw_pass_1], [member GPUParticles3D.draw_pass_2], [member GPUParticles3D.draw_pass_3], and [member GPUParticles3D.draw_pass_4]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the number of draw passes to use. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.draw_passes]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Transform3D] that will be used by the particles when they first emit. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], particles will emit over time. Setting to false does not reset the particles, but only stops their emission. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.emitting]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the explosiveness ratio. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.explosiveness]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the frame rate that the particle system rendering will be fixed to. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.fixed_fps]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], uses fractional delta which smooths the movement of the particles. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.fract_delta]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the lifetime of each particle in the system. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.lifetime]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], particles will emit once and then stop. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.one_shot]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the preprocess time for the particles' animation. This lets you delay starting an animation until after the particles have begun emitting. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.preprocess]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the material for processing the particles. Note: this is not the material used to draw the materials. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.process_material]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the emission randomness ratio. This randomizes the emission of particles within their phase. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.randomness]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the speed scale of the particle system. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.speed_scale]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], particles use local coordinates. If [code]false[/code] they use global coordinates. Equivalent to [member GPUParticles3D.local_coords]. - - + Creates a reflection probe and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]reflection_probe_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -3387,171 +2399,124 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], reflections will ignore sky contribution. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.interior]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the render cull mask for this reflection probe. Only instances with a matching cull mask will be rendered by this probe. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.cull_mask]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], uses box projection. This can make reflections look more correct in certain situations. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.box_projection]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], computes shadows in the reflection probe. This makes the reflection much slower to compute. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.enable_shadows]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the size of the area that the reflection probe will capture. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.extents]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the intensity of the reflection probe. Intensity modulates the strength of the reflection. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.intensity]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the max distance away from the probe an object can be before it is culled. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.max_distance]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the origin offset to be used when this reflection probe is in box project mode. Equivalent to [member ReflectionProbe.origin_offset]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets how often the reflection probe updates. Can either be once or every frame. See [enum ReflectionProbeUpdateMode] for options. - - - - - - - - + + + + Schedules a callback to the corresponding named [code]method[/code] on [code]where[/code] after a frame has been drawn. The callback method must use only 1 argument which will be called with [code]userdata[/code]. - - + Creates a scenario and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]scenario_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -3559,293 +2524,214 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the environment that will be used with this scenario. - - - - - - + + + Sets the fallback environment to be used by this scenario. The fallback environment is used if no environment is set. Internally, this is used by the editor to provide a default environment. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets a boot image. The color defines the background color. If [code]scale[/code] is [code]true[/code], the image will be scaled to fit the screen size. If [code]use_filter[/code] is [code]true[/code], the image will be scaled with linear interpolation. If [code]use_filter[/code] is [code]false[/code], the image will be scaled with nearest-neighbor interpolation. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the engine will generate wireframes for use with the wireframe debug mode. - - - - + + Sets the default clear color which is used when a specific clear color has not been selected. - - + Creates an empty shader and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]shader_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - + + Returns a shader's code. - - - - - - + + + Returns a default texture from a shader searched by name. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns the parameters of a shader. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets a shader's default texture. Overwrites the texture given by name. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Transform3D] set for a specific bone of this skeleton. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Transform2D] set for a specific bone of this skeleton. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [Transform3D] for a specific bone of this skeleton. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the [Transform2D] for a specific bone of this skeleton. - - + Creates a skeleton and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]skeleton_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - + + Returns the number of bones allocated for this skeleton. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - + Creates an empty sky and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]sky_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - - - + + + Sets the material that the sky uses to render the background and reflection maps. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + Creates a spot light and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID can be used in most [code]light_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. @@ -3853,226 +2739,161 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a viewport's camera. - - - - - - + + + Sets a viewport's canvas. - - - - - - - - + + + + Copies the viewport to a region of the screen specified by [code]rect[/code]. If [method viewport_set_render_direct_to_screen] is [code]true[/code], then the viewport does not use a framebuffer and the contents of the viewport are rendered directly to screen. However, note that the root viewport is drawn last, therefore it will draw over the screen. Accordingly, you must set the root viewport to an area that does not cover the area that you have attached this viewport to. For example, you can set the root viewport to not render at all with the following code: @@ -4088,570 +2909,408 @@ - - + Creates an empty viewport and adds it to the RenderingServer. It can be accessed with the RID that is returned. This RID will be used in all [code]viewport_*[/code] RenderingServer functions. Once finished with your RID, you will want to free the RID using the RenderingServer's [method free_rid] static method. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + Returns the viewport's last rendered frame. - - - - - - + + + Detaches a viewport from a canvas and vice versa. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], sets the viewport active, else sets it inactive. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the stacking order for a viewport's canvas. [code]layer[/code] is the actual canvas layer, while [code]sublayer[/code] specifies the stacking order of the canvas among those in the same layer. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the transformation of a viewport's canvas. - - - - - - + + + Sets the clear mode of a viewport. See [enum ViewportClearMode] for options. - - - - - - + + + Sets the debug draw mode of a viewport. See [enum ViewportDebugDraw] for options. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the viewport's canvas is not rendered. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], rendering of a viewport's environment is disabled. - - - - - - + + + Sets the viewport's global transformation matrix. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the anti-aliasing mode. See [enum ViewportMSAA] for options. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the viewport's parent to another viewport. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], render the contents of the viewport directly to screen. This allows a low-level optimization where you can skip drawing a viewport to the root viewport. While this optimization can result in a significant increase in speed (especially on older devices), it comes at a cost of usability. When this is enabled, you cannot read from the viewport or from the [code]SCREEN_TEXTURE[/code]. You also lose the benefit of certain window settings, such as the various stretch modes. Another consequence to be aware of is that in 2D the rendering happens in window coordinates, so if you have a viewport that is double the size of the window, and you set this, then only the portion that fits within the window will be drawn, no automatic scaling is possible, even if your game scene is significantly larger than the window size. - - - - - - + + + Sets a viewport's scenario. The scenario contains information about environment information, reflection atlas etc. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the shadow atlas quadrant's subdivision. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the size of the shadow atlas's images (used for omni and spot lights). The value will be rounded up to the nearest power of 2. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the viewport's width and height. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the viewport renders its background as transparent. - - - - - - + + + Sets when the viewport should be updated. See [enum ViewportUpdateMode] constants for options. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the viewport uses augmented or virtual reality technologies. See [XRInterface]. - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Resource.xml b/doc/classes/Resource.xml index c8800a3c25b..701ecf815ca 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Resource.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Resource.xml @@ -13,17 +13,14 @@ - - + Virtual function which can be overridden to customize the behavior value of [method setup_local_to_scene]. - - - - + + Duplicates the resource, returning a new resource. By default, sub-resources are shared between resource copies for efficiency. This can be changed by passing [code]true[/code] to the [code]subresources[/code] argument which will copy the subresources. [b]Note:[/b] If [code]subresources[/code] is [code]true[/code], this method will only perform a shallow copy. Nested resources within subresources will not be duplicated and will still be shared. @@ -31,8 +28,7 @@ - - + Emits the [signal changed] signal. If external objects which depend on this resource should be updated, this method must be called manually whenever the state of this resource has changed (such as modification of properties). @@ -44,32 +40,27 @@ - - + If [member resource_local_to_scene] is enabled and the resource was loaded from a [PackedScene] instantiation, returns the local scene where this resource's unique copy is in use. Otherwise, returns [code]null[/code]. - - + Returns the RID of the resource (or an empty RID). Many resources (such as [Texture2D], [Mesh], etc) are high-level abstractions of resources stored in a server, so this function will return the original RID. - - + This method is called when a resource with [member resource_local_to_scene] enabled is loaded from a [PackedScene] instantiation. Its behavior can be customized by overriding [method _setup_local_to_scene] from script. For most resources, this method performs no base logic. [ViewportTexture] performs custom logic to properly set the proxy texture and flags in the local viewport. - - - - + + Sets the path of the resource, potentially overriding an existing cache entry for this path. This differs from setting [member resource_path], as the latter would error out if another resource was already cached for the given path. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourceFormatLoader.xml b/doc/classes/ResourceFormatLoader.xml index 6abe5c813b4..bce5785cc12 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourceFormatLoader.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourceFormatLoader.xml @@ -12,67 +12,51 @@ - - - - - - + + + If implemented, gets the dependencies of a given resource. If [code]add_types[/code] is [code]true[/code], paths should be appended [code]::TypeName[/code], where [code]TypeName[/code] is the class name of the dependency. [b]Note:[/b] Custom resource types defined by scripts aren't known by the [ClassDB], so you might just return [code]"Resource"[/code] for them. - - + Gets the list of extensions for files this loader is able to read. - - - - + + Gets the class name of the resource associated with the given path. If the loader cannot handle it, it should return [code]""[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Custom resource types defined by scripts aren't known by the [ClassDB], so you might just return [code]"Resource"[/code] for them. - - - - + + Tells which resource class this loader can load. [b]Note:[/b] Custom resource types defined by scripts aren't known by the [ClassDB], so you might just handle [code]"Resource"[/code] for them. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Loads a resource when the engine finds this loader to be compatible. If the loaded resource is the result of an import, [code]original_path[/code] will target the source file. Returns a [Resource] object on success, or an [enum Error] constant in case of failure. The [code]cache_mode[/code] property defines whether and how the cache should be used or updated when loading the resource. See [enum CacheMode] for details. - - - - - - + + + If implemented, renames dependencies within the given resource and saves it. [code]renames[/code] is a dictionary [code]{ String => String }[/code] mapping old dependency paths to new paths. Returns [constant OK] on success, or an [enum Error] constant in case of failure. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourceFormatSaver.xml b/doc/classes/ResourceFormatSaver.xml index df71e05d025..ef9eebc9531 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourceFormatSaver.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourceFormatSaver.xml @@ -11,32 +11,24 @@ - - - - + + Returns the list of extensions available for saving the resource object, provided it is recognized (see [method _recognize]). - - - - + + Returns whether the given resource object can be saved by this saver. - - - - - - - - + + + + Saves the given resource object to a file at the target [code]path[/code]. [code]flags[/code] is a bitmask composed with [enum ResourceSaver.SaverFlags] constants. Returns [constant OK] on success, or an [enum Error] constant in case of failure. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourceLoader.xml b/doc/classes/ResourceLoader.xml index 682d7b97f36..3a3ce189d55 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourceLoader.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourceLoader.xml @@ -12,54 +12,41 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns whether a recognized resource exists for the given [code]path[/code]. An optional [code]type_hint[/code] can be used to further specify the [Resource] type that should be handled by the [ResourceFormatLoader]. Anything that inherits from [Resource] can be used as a type hint, for example [Image]. - - - - + + Returns the dependencies for the resource at the given [code]path[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the list of recognized extensions for a resource type. - - - - + + Returns whether a cached resource is available for the given [code]path[/code]. Once a resource has been loaded by the engine, it is cached in memory for faster access, and future calls to the [method load] method will use the cached version. The cached resource can be overridden by using [method Resource.take_over_path] on a new resource for that same path. - - - - - - - - + + + + Loads a resource at the given [code]path[/code], caching the result for further access. The registered [ResourceFormatLoader]s are queried sequentially to find the first one which can handle the file's extension, and then attempt loading. If loading fails, the remaining ResourceFormatLoaders are also attempted. @@ -70,45 +57,34 @@ - - - - + + Returns the resource loaded by [method load_threaded_request]. If this is called before the loading thread is done (i.e. [method load_threaded_get_status] is not [constant THREAD_LOAD_LOADED]), the calling thread will be blocked until the resource has finished loading. - - - - - - + + + Returns the status of a threaded loading operation started with [method load_threaded_request] for the resource at [code]path[/code]. See [enum ThreadLoadStatus] for possible return values. An array variable can optionally be passed via [code]progress[/code], and will return a one-element array containing the percentage of completion of the threaded loading. - - - - - - - - + + + + Loads the resource using threads. If [code]use_sub_threads[/code] is [code]true[/code], multiple threads will be used to load the resource, which makes loading faster, but may affect the main thread (and thus cause game slowdowns). - - - - + + Changes the behavior on missing sub-resources. The default behavior is to abort loading. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourcePreloader.xml b/doc/classes/ResourcePreloader.xml index 3159a4c4240..8ac8717581a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourcePreloader.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourcePreloader.xml @@ -11,57 +11,44 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a resource to the preloader with the given [code]name[/code]. If a resource with the given [code]name[/code] already exists, the new resource will be renamed to "[code]name[/code] N" where N is an incrementing number starting from 2. - - - - + + Returns the resource associated to [code]name[/code]. - - + Returns the list of resources inside the preloader. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the preloader contains a resource associated to [code]name[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the resource associated to [code]name[/code] from the preloader. - - - - - - + + + Renames a resource inside the preloader from [code]name[/code] to [code]newname[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourceSaver.xml b/doc/classes/ResourceSaver.xml index 437b0ce730b..39f166db2e2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourceSaver.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourceSaver.xml @@ -11,23 +11,17 @@ - - - - + + Returns the list of extensions available for saving a resource of a given type. - - - - - - - - + + + + Saves a resource to disk to the given path, using a [ResourceFormatSaver] that recognizes the resource object. The [code]flags[/code] bitmask can be specified to customize the save behavior. diff --git a/doc/classes/ResourceUID.xml b/doc/classes/ResourceUID.xml index 9fe61d80081..9e3d647ccf5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ResourceUID.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ResourceUID.xml @@ -8,68 +8,51 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/RichTextEffect.xml b/doc/classes/RichTextEffect.xml index edab35f162e..142afbb8602 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RichTextEffect.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RichTextEffect.xml @@ -24,10 +24,8 @@ - - - - + + Override this method to modify properties in [code]char_fx[/code]. The method must return [code]true[/code] if the character could be transformed successfully. If the method returns [code]false[/code], it will skip transformation to avoid displaying broken text. diff --git a/doc/classes/RichTextLabel.xml b/doc/classes/RichTextLabel.xml index 38884a027f2..e1362917b03 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RichTextLabel.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RichTextLabel.xml @@ -16,443 +16,346 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds an image's opening and closing tags to the tag stack, optionally providing a [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code] to resize the image and a [code]color[/code] to tint the image. If [code]width[/code] or [code]height[/code] is set to 0, the image size will be adjusted in order to keep the original aspect ratio. - - - - + + Adds raw non-BBCode-parsed text to the tag stack. - - - - + + Parses [code]bbcode[/code] and adds tags to the tag stack as needed. Returns the result of the parsing, [constant OK] if successful. [b]Note:[/b] Using this method, you can't close a tag that was opened in a previous [method append_bbcode] call. This is done to improve performance, especially when updating large RichTextLabels since rebuilding the whole BBCode every time would be slower. If you absolutely need to close a tag in a future method call, append the [member bbcode_text] instead of using [method append_bbcode]. - - + Clears the tag stack and sets [member bbcode_text] to an empty string. - - + Returns the height of the content. - - + Returns the total number of lines in the text. Wrapped text is counted as multiple lines. - - + Returns the total number of paragraphs (newlines or [code]p[/code] tags in the tag stack's text tags). Considers wrapped text as one paragraph. - - + Returns the current selection text. Does not include BBCodes. - - + Returns the current selection first character index if a selection is active, [code]-1[/code] otherwise. Does not include BBCodes. - - + Returns the current selection last character index if a selection is active, [code]-1[/code] otherwise. Does not include BBCodes. - - + Returns the total number of characters from text tags. Does not include BBCodes. - - + Returns the vertical scrollbar. - - + Returns the number of visible lines. - - + Returns the number of visible paragraphs. A paragraph is considered visible if at least one of its lines is visible. - - - - + + Installs a custom effect. [code]effect[/code] should be a valid [RichTextEffect]. - - + Adds a newline tag to the tag stack. - - - - + + The assignment version of [method append_bbcode]. Clears the tag stack and inserts the new content. Returns [constant OK] if parses [code]bbcode[/code] successfully. - - - - + + Parses BBCode parameter [code]expressions[/code] into a dictionary. - - + Terminates the current tag. Use after [code]push_*[/code] methods to close BBCodes manually. Does not need to follow [code]add_*[/code] methods. - - - - + + Adds a [code][bgcolor][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag with a bold font to the tag stack. This is the same as adding a [code][b][/code] tag if not currently in a [code][i][/code] tag. - - + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag with a bold italics font to the tag stack. - - + Adds a [code][cell][/code] tag to the tag stack. Must be inside a [code][table][/code] tag. See [method push_table] for details. - - - - + + Adds a [code][color][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Adds a [code][dropcap][/code] tag to the tag stack. Drop cap (dropped capital) is a decorative element at the beginning of a paragraph that is larger than the rest of the text. - - - - + + Adds a [code][fgcolor][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - - - + + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag to the tag stack. Overrides default fonts for its duration. - - - - + + Adds a [code][ot_feature][/code] tag to the tag stack. Overrides default OpenType font feature for its duration. - - - - + + Adds a [code][font_size][/code] tag to the tag stack. Overrides default font size for its duration. - - - - + + Adds an [code][indent][/code] tag to the tag stack. Multiplies [code]level[/code] by current [member tab_size] to determine new margin length. - - + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag with a italics font to the tag stack. This is the same as adding a [code][i][/code] tag if not currently in a [code][b][/code] tag. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds [code][ol][/code] or [code][ul][/code] tag to the tag stack. Multiplies [code]level[/code] by current [member tab_size] to determine new margin length. - - - - + + Adds a [code][meta][/code] tag to the tag stack. Similar to the BBCode [code][url=something]{text}[/url][/code], but supports non-[String] metadata types. - - + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag with a monospace font to the tag stack. - - + Adds a [code][font][/code] tag with a normal font to the tag stack. - - - - + + Adds a [code][outline_color][/code] tag to the tag stack. Adds text outline for its duration. - - - - + + Adds a [code][outline_size][/code] tag to the tag stack. Overrides default text outline size for its duration. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a [code][p][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - + Adds a [code][s][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - - - - - + + + Adds a [code][table=columns,inline_align][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - + Adds a [code][u][/code] tag to the tag stack. - - - - + + Removes a line of content from the label. Returns [code]true[/code] if the line exists. The [code]line[/code] argument is the index of the line to remove, it can take values in the interval [code][0, get_line_count() - 1][/code]. - - - - + + Scrolls the window's top line to match [code]line[/code]. - - - - + + Scrolls the window's top line to match first line of the [code]paragraph[/code]. - - - - + + Sets color of a table cell border. - - - - + + Sets inner padding of a table cell. - - - - - - + + + Sets color of a table cell. Separate colors for alternating rows can be specified. - - - - - - + + + Sets minimum and maximum size overrides for a table cell. - - - - - - - - + + + + Edits the selected column's expansion options. If [code]expand[/code] is [code]true[/code], the column expands in proportion to its expansion ratio versus the other columns' ratios. For example, 2 columns with ratios 3 and 4 plus 70 pixels in available width would expand 30 and 40 pixels, respectively. @@ -522,22 +425,19 @@ - - + Triggered when the user clicks on content between meta tags. If the meta is defined in text, e.g. [code][url={"data"="hi"}]hi[/url][/code], then the parameter for this signal will be a [String] type. If a particular type or an object is desired, the [method push_meta] method must be used to manually insert the data into the tag stack. - - + Triggers when the mouse exits a meta tag. - - + Triggers when the mouse enters a meta tag. diff --git a/doc/classes/RigidBody2D.xml b/doc/classes/RigidBody2D.xml index 64573b7282a..db16552db35 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RigidBody2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RigidBody2D.xml @@ -17,85 +17,66 @@ - - - - + + Allows you to read and safely modify the simulation state for the object. Use this instead of [method Node._physics_process] if you need to directly change the body's [code]position[/code] or other physics properties. By default, it works in addition to the usual physics behavior, but [member custom_integrator] allows you to disable the default behavior and write custom force integration for a body. - - - - + + Adds a constant directional force without affecting rotation. - - - - - - + + + Adds a positioned force to the body. Both the force and the offset from the body origin are in global coordinates. - - - - + + Adds a constant rotational force. - - - - + + Applies a directional impulse without affecting rotation. - - - - - - + + + Applies a positioned impulse to the body. An impulse is time-independent! Applying an impulse every frame would result in a framerate-dependent force. For this reason it should only be used when simulating one-time impacts (use the "_force" functions otherwise). The position uses the rotation of the global coordinate system, but is centered at the object's origin. - - - - + + Applies a rotational impulse to the body. - - + Returns a list of the bodies colliding with this one. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, list of collisions is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. - - - - + + Sets the body's velocity on the given axis. The velocity in the given vector axis will be set as the given vector length. This is useful for jumping behavior. @@ -161,30 +142,24 @@ - - + Emitted when a collision with another [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap] occurs. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]. - - + Emitted when the collision with another [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap] ends. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of this RigidBody2D's [Shape2D]s collides with another [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]'s [Shape2D]s. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileSet]'s [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. @@ -194,14 +169,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when the collision between one of this RigidBody2D's [Shape2D]s and another [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileMap]'s [Shape2D]s ends. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [TileMap]s are detected if the [TileSet] has Collision [Shape2D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the other [PhysicsBody2D] or [TileSet]'s [CollisionObject2D] used by the [PhysicsServer2D]. diff --git a/doc/classes/RigidBody3D.xml b/doc/classes/RigidBody3D.xml index fb2b9690a35..f4299335bf3 100644 --- a/doc/classes/RigidBody3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/RigidBody3D.xml @@ -17,95 +17,75 @@ - - - - + + Called during physics processing, allowing you to read and safely modify the simulation state for the object. By default, it works in addition to the usual physics behavior, but the [member custom_integrator] property allows you to disable the default behavior and do fully custom force integration for a body. - - - - + + Adds a constant directional force (i.e. acceleration) without affecting rotation. This is equivalent to [code]add_force(force, Vector3(0,0,0))[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Adds a constant directional force (i.e. acceleration). The position uses the rotation of the global coordinate system, but is centered at the object's origin. - - - - + + Adds a constant rotational force (i.e. a motor) without affecting position. - - - - + + Applies a directional impulse without affecting rotation. This is equivalent to [code]apply_impulse(Vector3(0,0,0), impulse)[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Applies a positioned impulse to the body. An impulse is time independent! Applying an impulse every frame would result in a framerate-dependent force. For this reason it should only be used when simulating one-time impacts. The position uses the rotation of the global coordinate system, but is centered at the object's origin. - - - - + + Applies a torque impulse which will be affected by the body mass and shape. This will rotate the body around the [code]impulse[/code] vector passed. - - + Returns a list of the bodies colliding with this one. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [b]Note:[/b] The result of this test is not immediate after moving objects. For performance, list of collisions is updated once per frame and before the physics step. Consider using signals instead. - - + Returns the inverse inertia tensor basis. This is used to calculate the angular acceleration resulting from a torque applied to the [RigidBody3D]. - - - - + + Sets an axis velocity. The velocity in the given vector axis will be set as the given vector length. This is useful for jumping behavior. @@ -162,30 +142,24 @@ - - + Emitted when a collision with another [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap] occurs. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]. - - + Emitted when the collision with another [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap] ends. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body[/code] the [Node], if it exists in the tree, of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when one of this RigidBody3D's [Shape3D]s collides with another [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]'s [Shape3D]s. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [MeshLibrary]'s [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. @@ -196,14 +170,10 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Emitted when the collision between one of this RigidBody3D's [Shape3D]s and another [PhysicsBody3D] or [GridMap]'s [Shape3D]s ends. Requires [member contact_monitor] to be set to [code]true[/code] and [member contacts_reported] to be set high enough to detect all the collisions. [GridMap]s are detected if the [MeshLibrary] has Collision [Shape3D]s. [code]body_id[/code] the [RID] of the other [PhysicsBody3D] or [MeshLibrary]'s [CollisionObject3D] used by the [PhysicsServer3D]. [GridMap]s are detected if the Meshes have [Shape3D]s. diff --git a/doc/classes/SceneState.xml b/doc/classes/SceneState.xml index 6d804cc697d..1c3bac92706 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SceneState.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SceneState.xml @@ -11,187 +11,146 @@ - - - - + + Returns the list of bound parameters for the signal at [code]idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of signal connections in the scene. The [code]idx[/code] argument used to query connection metadata in other [code]get_connection_*[/code] methods in the interval [code][0, get_connection_count() - 1][/code]. - - - - + + Returns the connection flags for the signal at [code]idx[/code]. See [enum Object.ConnectFlags] constants. - - - - + + Returns the method connected to the signal at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the name of the signal at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the path to the node that owns the signal at [code]idx[/code], relative to the root node. - - - - + + Returns the path to the node that owns the method connected to the signal at [code]idx[/code], relative to the root node. - - + Returns the number of nodes in the scene. The [code]idx[/code] argument used to query node data in other [code]get_node_*[/code] methods in the interval [code][0, get_node_count() - 1][/code]. - - - - + + Returns the list of group names associated with the node at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the node's index, which is its position relative to its siblings. This is only relevant and saved in scenes for cases where new nodes are added to an instantiated or inherited scene among siblings from the base scene. Despite the name, this index is not related to the [code]idx[/code] argument used here and in other methods. - - - - + + Returns a [PackedScene] for the node at [code]idx[/code] (i.e. the whole branch starting at this node, with its child nodes and resources), or [code]null[/code] if the node is not an instance. - - - - + + Returns the path to the represented scene file if the node at [code]idx[/code] is an [InstancePlaceholder]. - - - - + + Returns the name of the node at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the path to the owner of the node at [code]idx[/code], relative to the root node. - - - - - - + + + Returns the path to the node at [code]idx[/code]. If [code]for_parent[/code] is [code]true[/code], returns the path of the [code]idx[/code] node's parent instead. - - - - + + Returns the number of exported or overridden properties for the node at [code]idx[/code]. The [code]prop_idx[/code] argument used to query node property data in other [code]get_node_property_*[/code] methods in the interval [code][0, get_node_property_count() - 1][/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the name of the property at [code]prop_idx[/code] for the node at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the value of the property at [code]prop_idx[/code] for the node at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the type of the node at [code]idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the node at [code]idx[/code] is an [InstancePlaceholder]. diff --git a/doc/classes/SceneTree.xml b/doc/classes/SceneTree.xml index 9930665d260..59e31902132 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SceneTree.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SceneTree.xml @@ -14,36 +14,27 @@ - - - - - - + + + Calls [code]method[/code] on each member of the given group. You can pass arguments to [code]method[/code] by specifying them at the end of the method call. [b]Note:[/b] [method call_group] will always call methods with an one-frame delay, in a way similar to [method Object.call_deferred]. To call methods immediately, use [method call_group_flags] with the [constant GROUP_CALL_REALTIME] flag. - - - - - - - - + + + + Calls [code]method[/code] on each member of the given group, respecting the given [enum GroupCallFlags]. You can pass arguments to [code]method[/code] by specifying them at the end of the method call. [b]Note:[/b] Group call flags are used to control the method calling behavior. If the [constant GROUP_CALL_REALTIME] flag is present in the [code]flags[/code] argument, methods will be called immediately. If this flag isn't present in [code]flags[/code], methods will be called with a one-frame delay in a way similar to [method call_group]. - - - - + + Changes the running scene to the one at the given [code]path[/code], after loading it into a [PackedScene] and creating a new instance. Returns [constant OK] on success, [constant ERR_CANT_OPEN] if the [code]path[/code] cannot be loaded into a [PackedScene], or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] if that scene cannot be instantiated. @@ -51,10 +42,8 @@ - - - - + + Changes the running scene to a new instance of the given [PackedScene]. Returns [constant OK] on success or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] if the scene cannot be instantiated. @@ -62,12 +51,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns a [SceneTreeTimer] which will [signal SceneTreeTimer.timeout] after the given time in seconds elapsed in this [SceneTree]. If [code]process_always[/code] is set to [code]false[/code], pausing the [SceneTree] will also pause the timer. Commonly used to create a one-shot delay timer as in the following example: @@ -91,97 +77,76 @@ - - + Creates and returns a new [Tween]. - - - - + + - - + Returns the current frame number, i.e. the total frame count since the application started. - - + Returns the number of nodes in this [SceneTree]. - - - - + + Returns a list of all nodes assigned to the given group. - - + Returns an array of currently existing [Tween]s in the [SceneTree] (both running and paused). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given group exists. - - - - - - + + + Sends the given notification to all members of the [code]group[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sends the given notification to all members of the [code]group[/code], respecting the given [enum GroupCallFlags]. - - - - + + Queues the given object for deletion, delaying the call to [method Object.free] to after the current frame. - - - - + + Quits the application at the end of the current iteration. Argument [code]exit_code[/code] can optionally be given (defaulting to 0) to customize the exit status code. By convention, an exit code of [code]0[/code] indicates success whereas a non-zero exit code indicates an error. @@ -190,56 +155,42 @@ - - + Reloads the currently active scene. Returns [constant OK] on success, [constant ERR_UNCONFIGURED] if no [member current_scene] was defined yet, [constant ERR_CANT_OPEN] if [member current_scene] cannot be loaded into a [PackedScene], or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] if the scene cannot be instantiated. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the application automatically accepts quitting. Enabled by default. For mobile platforms, see [method set_quit_on_go_back]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the given [code]property[/code] to [code]value[/code] on all members of the given group. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the given [code]property[/code] to [code]value[/code] on all members of the given group, respecting the given [enum GroupCallFlags]. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the application quits automatically on going back (e.g. on Android). Enabled by default. To handle 'Go Back' button when this option is disabled, use [constant DisplayServer.WINDOW_EVENT_GO_BACK_REQUEST]. @@ -277,38 +228,32 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when files are dragged from the OS file manager and dropped in the game window. The arguments are a list of file paths and the identifier of the screen where the drag originated. - - + Emitted whenever a node is added to the [SceneTree]. - - + Emitted when a node's configuration changed. Only emitted in [code]tool[/code] mode. - - + Emitted whenever a node is removed from the [SceneTree]. - - + Emitted whenever a node is renamed. diff --git a/doc/classes/Script.xml b/doc/classes/Script.xml index e7527d73e20..843d8ef9cb7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Script.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Script.xml @@ -12,100 +12,83 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the script can be instantiated. - - + Returns the script directly inherited by this script. - - + Returns the script's base type. - - - - + + Returns the default value of the specified property. - - + Returns a dictionary containing constant names and their values. - - + Returns the list of methods in this [Script]. - - + Returns the list of properties in this [Script]. - - + Returns the list of user signals defined in this [Script]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the script, or a base class, defines a signal with the given name. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the script contains non-empty source code. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]base_object[/code] is an instance of this script. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the script is a tool script. A tool script can run in the editor. - - - - + + Reloads the script's class implementation. Returns an error code. diff --git a/doc/classes/ScriptCreateDialog.xml b/doc/classes/ScriptCreateDialog.xml index 7185213c445..189bfdc3b8c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ScriptCreateDialog.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ScriptCreateDialog.xml @@ -28,16 +28,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Prefills required fields to configure the ScriptCreateDialog for use. @@ -49,8 +44,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the user clicks the OK button. diff --git a/doc/classes/ScriptEditor.xml b/doc/classes/ScriptEditor.xml index 31dbf7453fe..628be54e1d7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ScriptEditor.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ScriptEditor.xml @@ -10,68 +10,55 @@ - - + Returns the [ScriptEditorBase] object that the user is currently editing. - - + Returns a [Script] that is currently active in editor. - - + Returns an array with all [ScriptEditorBase] objects which are currently open in editor. - - + Returns an array with all [Script] objects which are currently open in editor. - - - - + + Goes to the specified line in the current script. - - - - - - + + + Opens the script create dialog. The script will extend [code]base_name[/code]. The file extension can be omitted from [code]base_path[/code]. It will be added based on the selected scripting language. - - - - + + Registers the [EditorSyntaxHighlighter] to the editor, the [EditorSyntaxHighlighter] will be available on all open scripts. [b]Note:[/b] Does not apply to scripts that are already opened. - - - - + + Unregisters the [EditorSyntaxHighlighter] from the editor. [b]Note:[/b] The [EditorSyntaxHighlighter] will still be applied to scripts that are already opened. @@ -80,15 +67,13 @@ - - + Emitted when user changed active script. Argument is a freshly activated [Script]. - - + Emitted when editor is about to close the active script. Argument is a [Script] that is going to be closed. diff --git a/doc/classes/ScriptEditorBase.xml b/doc/classes/ScriptEditorBase.xml index a135062bd8a..0efcde56381 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ScriptEditorBase.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ScriptEditorBase.xml @@ -10,17 +10,14 @@ - - - - + + Adds a [EditorSyntaxHighlighter] to the open script. - - + Returns the underlying [Control] used for editing scripts. This can be either [CodeEdit] (for text scripts) or [GraphEdit] (for visual scripts). @@ -33,8 +30,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the user requests a specific documentation page. @@ -45,24 +41,20 @@ - - + Emitted when the user request to find and replace text in the file system. Not used by visual scripts. - - + Emitted when the user requests contextual help. - - - - + + Emitted when the user requests a script. @@ -73,8 +65,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the user request to search text in the file system. Not used by visual scripts. diff --git a/doc/classes/ScrollContainer.xml b/doc/classes/ScrollContainer.xml index 60f3106b4b9..600e2ee2458 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ScrollContainer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ScrollContainer.xml @@ -12,24 +12,20 @@ - - - - + + Ensures the given [code]control[/code] is visible (must be a direct or indirect child of the ScrollContainer). Used by [member follow_focus]. - - + Returns the horizontal scrollbar [HScrollBar] of this [ScrollContainer]. - - + Returns the vertical scrollbar [VScrollBar] of this [ScrollContainer]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Semaphore.xml b/doc/classes/Semaphore.xml index e8b405e52a7..7794161ac4d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Semaphore.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Semaphore.xml @@ -11,22 +11,19 @@ - - + Lowers the [Semaphore], allowing one more thread in. - - + Like [method wait], but won't block, so if the value is zero, fails immediately and returns [constant ERR_BUSY]. If non-zero, it returns [constant OK] to report success. - - + Waits for the [Semaphore], if its value is zero, blocks until non-zero. diff --git a/doc/classes/Shader.xml b/doc/classes/Shader.xml index a717eba438b..bc5457b8ce5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Shader.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Shader.xml @@ -12,39 +12,31 @@ - - - - + + Returns the texture that is set as default for the specified parameter. [b]Note:[/b] [code]param[/code] must match the name of the uniform in the code exactly. - - + Returns the shader mode for the shader, either [constant MODE_CANVAS_ITEM], [constant MODE_SPATIAL] or [constant MODE_PARTICLES]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the shader has this param defined as a uniform in its code. [b]Note:[/b] [code]param[/code] must match the name of the uniform in the code exactly. - - - - - - + + + Sets the default texture to be used with a texture uniform. The default is used if a texture is not set in the [ShaderMaterial]. [b]Note:[/b] [code]param[/code] must match the name of the uniform in the code exactly. diff --git a/doc/classes/ShaderMaterial.xml b/doc/classes/ShaderMaterial.xml index b1748703ffc..fe3ddc1b604 100644 --- a/doc/classes/ShaderMaterial.xml +++ b/doc/classes/ShaderMaterial.xml @@ -11,39 +11,30 @@ - - - - + + Returns the current value set for this material of a uniform in the shader. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the property identified by [code]name[/code] can be reverted to a default value. - - - - + + Returns the default value of the material property with given [code]name[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Changes the value set for this material of a uniform in the shader. [b]Note:[/b] [code]param[/code] must match the name of the uniform in the code exactly. diff --git a/doc/classes/Shape2D.xml b/doc/classes/Shape2D.xml index 65a37314f6b..c1191aa9deb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Shape2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Shape2D.xml @@ -11,76 +11,53 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this shape is colliding with another. This method needs the transformation matrix for this shape ([code]local_xform[/code]), the shape to check collisions with ([code]with_shape[/code]), and the transformation matrix of that shape ([code]shape_xform[/code]). - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a list of the points where this shape touches another. If there are no collisions the list is empty. This method needs the transformation matrix for this shape ([code]local_xform[/code]), the shape to check collisions with ([code]with_shape[/code]), and the transformation matrix of that shape ([code]shape_xform[/code]). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns whether this shape would collide with another, if a given movement was applied. This method needs the transformation matrix for this shape ([code]local_xform[/code]), the movement to test on this shape ([code]local_motion[/code]), the shape to check collisions with ([code]with_shape[/code]), the transformation matrix of that shape ([code]shape_xform[/code]), and the movement to test onto the other object ([code]shape_motion[/code]). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns a list of the points where this shape would touch another, if a given movement was applied. If there are no collisions the list is empty. This method needs the transformation matrix for this shape ([code]local_xform[/code]), the movement to test on this shape ([code]local_motion[/code]), the shape to check collisions with ([code]with_shape[/code]), the transformation matrix of that shape ([code]shape_xform[/code]), and the movement to test onto the other object ([code]shape_motion[/code]). - - - - - - + + + Draws a solid shape onto a [CanvasItem] with the [RenderingServer] API filled with the specified [code]color[/code]. The exact drawing method is specific for each shape and cannot be configured. diff --git a/doc/classes/Shape3D.xml b/doc/classes/Shape3D.xml index b5f70132d71..5fd16d8d36d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Shape3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Shape3D.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + Returns the [ArrayMesh] used to draw the debug collision for this [Shape3D]. diff --git a/doc/classes/Shortcut.xml b/doc/classes/Shortcut.xml index 55bbb083c98..04955103dce 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Shortcut.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Shortcut.xml @@ -11,24 +11,20 @@ - - + Returns the shortcut's [InputEvent] as a [String]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the shortcut's [InputEvent] equals [code]event[/code]. - - + If [code]true[/code], this shortcut is valid. diff --git a/doc/classes/Signal.xml b/doc/classes/Signal.xml index 1fd70a43fdd..0e44abef427 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Signal.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Signal.xml @@ -9,117 +9,93 @@ - - + Constructs a null [Signal] with no object nor signal name bound. - - - - + + Constructs a [Signal] as a copy of the given [Signal]. - - - - - - + + + Creates a new [Signal] with the name [code]signal[/code] in the specified [code]object[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Connects this signal to the specified [Callable], optionally providing binds and connection flags. - - - - + + Disconnects this signal from the specified [Callable]. - - + Emits this signal to all connected objects. - - + Returns the list of [Callable]s connected to this signal. - - + Returns the name of this signal. - - + Returns the object emitting this signal. - - + Returns the ID of the object emitting this signal (see [method Object.get_instance_id]). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified [Callable] is connected to this signal. - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Skeleton2D.xml b/doc/classes/Skeleton2D.xml index 1ae39dfc079..828d24338b0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Skeleton2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Skeleton2D.xml @@ -11,66 +11,51 @@ - - - - - - + + + Executes all the modifications on the [SkeletonModificationStack2D], if the Skeleton3D has one assigned. - - - - + + Returns a [Bone2D] from the node hierarchy parented by Skeleton2D. The object to return is identified by the parameter [code]idx[/code]. Bones are indexed by descending the node hierarchy from top to bottom, adding the children of each branch before moving to the next sibling. - - + Returns the number of [Bone2D] nodes in the node hierarchy parented by Skeleton2D. - - - - + + Returns the local pose override transform for [code]bone_idx[/code]. - - + Returns the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] attached to this skeleton, if one exists. - - + Returns the [RID] of a Skeleton2D instance. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the local pose transform, [code]pose[/code], for the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code]. [code]amount[/code] is the interpolation strength that will be used when applying the pose, and [code]persistent[/code] determines if the applied pose will remain. @@ -78,10 +63,8 @@ - - - - + + Sets the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] attached to this skeleton. diff --git a/doc/classes/Skeleton3D.xml b/doc/classes/Skeleton3D.xml index 136f2f0a63c..0ec2f6b7ca5 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Skeleton3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Skeleton3D.xml @@ -14,220 +14,173 @@ - - - - + + Adds a bone, with name [code]name[/code]. [method get_bone_count] will become the bone index. - - - - + + Takes the given bone pose/transform and converts it to a world transform, relative to the [Skeleton3D] node. This is useful for using the bone transform in calculations with transforms from [Node3D]-based nodes. - - + Clear all the bones in this skeleton. - - + Removes the global pose override on all bones in the skeleton. - - - - + + Returns the bone index that matches [code]name[/code] as its name. - - + Returns the amount of bones in the skeleton. - - - - + + Returns the custom pose of the specified bone. Custom pose is applied on top of the rest pose. - - - - + + Returns the overall transform of the specified bone, with respect to the skeleton. Being relative to the skeleton frame, this is not the actual "global" transform of the bone. - - - - + + Returns the overall transform of the specified bone, with respect to the skeleton, but without any global pose overrides. Being relative to the skeleton frame, this is not the actual "global" transform of the bone. - - - - + + Returns the name of the bone at index [code]index[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the bone index which is the parent of the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code]. If -1, then bone has no parent. [b]Note:[/b] The parent bone returned will always be less than [code]bone_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the pose transform of the specified bone. Pose is applied on top of the custom pose, which is applied on top the rest pose. - - + - - - - + + Returns the rest transform for a bone [code]bone_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether the bone rest for the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code] is disabled. - - + Returns all bones in the skeleton to their rest poses. - - - - + + Adds a collision exception to the physical bone. Works just like the [RigidBody3D] node. - - - - + + Removes a collision exception to the physical bone. Works just like the [RigidBody3D] node. - - - - + + Tells the [PhysicalBone3D] nodes in the Skeleton to start simulating and reacting to the physics world. Optionally, a list of bone names can be passed-in, allowing only the passed-in bones to be simulated. - - + Tells the [PhysicalBone3D] nodes in the Skeleton to stop simulating. - - - - + + Binds the given Skin to the Skeleton. - - - - - - + + + Sets the custom pose transform, [code]custom_pose[/code], for the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code]. This pose is an addition to the bone rest pose. [b]Note[/b]: The pose transform needs to be in bone space. Use [method world_transform_to_bone_transform] to convert a world transform, like one you can get from a [Node3D], to bone space. - - - - - - + + + Disables the rest pose for the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code] if [code]true[/code], enables the bone rest if [code]false[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the global pose transform, [code]pose[/code], for the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code]. [code]amount[/code] is the interpolation strength that will be used when applying the pose, and [code]persistent[/code] determines if the applied pose will remain. @@ -235,64 +188,48 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the bone index [code]parent_idx[/code] as the parent of the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code]. If -1, then bone has no parent. [b]Note:[/b] [code]parent_idx[/code] must be less than [code]bone_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the pose transform for bone [code]bone_idx[/code]. [b]Note[/b]: The pose transform needs to be in bone space. Use [method world_transform_to_bone_transform] to convert a world transform, like one you can get from a [Node3D], to bone space. - - - - - - + + + Sets the rest transform for bone [code]bone_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Unparents the bone at [code]bone_idx[/code] and sets its rest position to that of its parent prior to being reset. - - - - + + Takes the given world transform, relative to the [Skeleton3D], and converts it to a bone pose/transform. This is useful for using setting bone poses using transforms from [Node3D]-based nodes. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonIK3D.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonIK3D.xml index 138ebe44110..93cdd770cc9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonIK3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonIK3D.xml @@ -9,28 +9,23 @@ - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2D.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2D.xml index dfd0256d9b4..cff55b6a179 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2D.xml @@ -11,81 +11,64 @@ - - + Used for drawing [b]editor-only[/b] modification gizmos. This function will only be called in the Godot editor and can be overridden to draw custom gizmos. [b]Note:[/b] You will need to use the Skeleton2D from [method SkeletonModificationStack2D.get_skeleton] and it's draw functions, as the [SkeletonModification2D] resource cannot draw on its own. - - - - + + Executes the given modification. This is where the modification performs whatever function it is designed to do. - - - - + + Called when the modification is setup. This is where the modification performs initialization. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Takes a angle and clamps it so it is within the passed-in [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code] range. [code]invert[/code] will inversely clamp the angle, clamping it to the range outside of the given bounds. - - + Returns whether this modification will call [method _draw_editor_gizmo] in the Godot editor to draw modification-specific gizmos. - - + Returns whether this modification has been successfully setup or not. - - + Returns the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] that this modification is bound to. Through the modification stack, you can access the Skeleton3D the modification is operating on. - - - - + + Sets whether this modification will call [method _draw_editor_gizmo] in the Godot editor to draw modification-specific gizmos. - - - - + + Manually allows you to set the setup state of the modification. This function should only rarely be used, as the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] the modification is bound to should handle setting the modification up. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DCCDIK.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DCCDIK.xml index 1a74905df28..f876615de7d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DCCDIK.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DCCDIK.xml @@ -13,142 +13,107 @@ - - - - + + Returns the [Bone2D] node assigned to the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the index of the [Bone2D] node assigned to the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] uses an inverted joint constraint. See [method set_ccdik_joint_constraint_angle_invert] for details. - - - - + + Returns the maximum angle constraint for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the minimum angle constraint for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether angle constraints on the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] are enabled. - - - - + + Returns whether the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] is set to rotate from the joint, [code]true[/code], or to rotate from the tip, [code]false[/code]. The default is to rotate from the tip. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Bone2D] node assigned to the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bone index, [code]bone_index[/code], of the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. When possible, this will also update the [code]bone2d_node[/code] of the CCDIK joint based on data provided by the linked skeleton. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] uses an inverted joint constraint. An inverted joint constraint only constraints the CCDIK joint to the angles [i]outside of[/i] the inputted minimum and maximum angles. For this reason, it is referred to as an inverted joint constraint, as it constraints the joint to the outside of the inputted values. - - - - - - + + + Sets the maximum angle constraint for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the minimum angle constraint for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Determines whether angle constraints on the CCDIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] are enabled. When [code]true[/code], constraints will be enabled and taken into account when solving. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] is set to rotate from the joint, [code]true[/code], or to rotate from the tip, [code]false[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DFABRIK.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DFABRIK.xml index 62ab34b06fe..314405498ac 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DFABRIK.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DFABRIK.xml @@ -14,81 +14,61 @@ - - - - + + Returns the [Bone2D] node assigned to the FABRIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the index of the [Bone2D] node assigned to the FABRIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the magnet position vector for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns whether the joint is using the target's rotation rather than allowing FABRIK to rotate the joint. This option only applies to the tip/final joint in the chain. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Bone2D] node assigned to the FABRIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bone index, [code]bone_index[/code], of the FABRIK joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. When possible, this will also update the [code]bone2d_node[/code] of the FABRIK joint based on data provided by the linked skeleton. - - - - - - + + + Sets the magnet position vector for the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] will use the target node's rotation rather than letting FABRIK rotate the node. [b]Note:[/b] This option only works for the tip/final joint in the chain. For all other nodes, this option will be ignored. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DJiggle.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DJiggle.xml index da25191dc04..8d3732e225a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DJiggle.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DJiggle.xml @@ -12,193 +12,147 @@ - - + Returns the collision mask used by the Jiggle modifier when collisions are enabled. - - - - + + Returns the [Bone2D] node assigned to the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the index of the [Bone2D] node assigned to the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the amount of damping of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a [Vector2] representing the amount of gravity the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] is influenced by. - - - - + + Returns the amount of mass of the jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a boolean that indicates whether the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] is overriding the default Jiggle joint data defined in the modification. - - - - + + Returns the stiffness of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a boolean that indicates whether the joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] is using gravity or not. - - + Returns whether the jiggle modifier is taking physics colliders into account when solving. - - - - + + Sets the collision mask that the Jiggle modifier will use when reacting to colliders, if the Jiggle modifier is set to take colliders into account. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [Bone2D] node assigned to the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the bone index, [code]bone_index[/code], of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. When possible, this will also update the [code]bone2d_node[/code] of the Jiggle joint based on data provided by the linked skeleton. - - - - - - + + + Sets the amount of dampening of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the gravity vector of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the of mass of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] should override the default Jiggle joint settings. Setting this to [code]true[/code] will make the joint use its own settings rather than the default ones attached to the modification. - - - - - - + + + Sets the of stiffness of the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets whether the Jiggle joint at [code]joint_idx[/code] should use gravity. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the Jiggle modifier will take colliders into account, keeping them from entering into these collision objects. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DLookAt.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DLookAt.xml index b0fa0e5a01d..998a897d20b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DLookAt.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DLookAt.xml @@ -10,82 +10,67 @@ - - + Returns the amount of additional rotation that is applied after the LookAt modification executes. - - + Returns whether the constraints to this modification are inverted or not. - - + Returns the constraint's maximum allowed angle. - - + Returns the constraint's minimum allowed angle. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the LookAt modification is using constraints. - - - - + + Sets the amount of additional rotation that is to be applied after executing the modification. This allows for offsetting the results by the inputted rotation amount. - - - - + + When [code]true[/code], the modification will use an inverted joint constraint. An inverted joint constraint only constraints the [Bone2D] to the angles [i]outside of[/i] the inputted minimum and maximum angles. For this reason, it is referred to as an inverted joint constraint, as it constraints the joint to the outside of the inputted values. - - - - + + Sets the constraint's maximum allowed angle. - - - - + + Sets the constraint's minimum allowed angle. - - - - + + Sets whether this modification will use constraints or not. When [code]true[/code], constraints will be applied when solving the LookAt modification. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DPhysicalBones.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DPhysicalBones.xml index 25477270973..e6bcb3c9d77 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DPhysicalBones.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DPhysicalBones.xml @@ -10,48 +10,38 @@ - - + Empties the list of [PhysicalBone2D] nodes and populates it will all [PhysicalBone2D] nodes that are children of the [Skeleton2D]. - - - - + + Returns the [PhysicalBone2D] node at [code]joint_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the [PhysicalBone2D] node at [code]joint_idx[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] This is just the index used for this modification, not the bone index used in the [Skeleton2D]. - - - - + + Tell the [PhysicalBone2D] nodes to start simulating and interacting with the physics world. Optionally, an array of bone names can be passed to this function, and that will cause only [PhysicalBone2D] nodes with those names to start simulating. - - - - + + Tell the [PhysicalBone2D] nodes to stop simulating and interacting with the physics world. Optionally, an array of bone names can be passed to this function, and that will cause only [PhysicalBone2D] nodes with those names to stop simulating. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DStackHolder.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DStackHolder.xml index 313cf814828..e5d9f2194ae 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DStackHolder.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DStackHolder.xml @@ -11,17 +11,14 @@ - - + Returns the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] that this modification is holding. - - - - + + Sets the [SkeletonModificationStack2D] that this modification is holding. This modification stack will then be executed when this modification is executed. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DTwoBoneIK.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DTwoBoneIK.xml index 0eecfa635c1..25ee981d5dd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DTwoBoneIK.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModification2DTwoBoneIK.xml @@ -11,65 +11,53 @@ - - + Returns the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the first bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - + Returns the index of the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the first bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - + Returns the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the second bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - + Returns the index of the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the second bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - - - + + Sets the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the first bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - - - + + Sets the index of the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the first bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - - - + + Sets the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the second bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. - - - - + + Sets the index of the [Bone2D] node that is being used as the second bone in the TwoBoneIK modification. diff --git a/doc/classes/SkeletonModificationStack2D.xml b/doc/classes/SkeletonModificationStack2D.xml index 4ffd2c33fb3..97b8e3b9459 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkeletonModificationStack2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkeletonModificationStack2D.xml @@ -12,81 +12,64 @@ - - - - + + Adds the passed-in [SkeletonModification2D] to the stack. - - - - + + Deletes the [SkeletonModification2D] at the index position [code]mod_idx[/code], if it exists. - - - - + + Enables all [SkeletonModification2D]s in the stack. - - - - - - + + + Executes all of the [SkeletonModification2D]s in the stack that use the same execution mode as the passed-in [code]execution_mode[/code], starting from index [code]0[/code] to [member modification_count]. [b]Note:[/b] The order of the modifications can matter depending on the modifications. For example, modifications on a spine should operate before modifications on the arms in order to get proper results. - - + Returns a boolean that indicates whether the modification stack is setup and can execute. - - - - + + Returns the [SkeletonModification2D] at the passed-in index, [code]mod_idx[/code]. - - + Returns the [Skeleton2D] node that the SkeletonModificationStack2D is bound to. - - - - - - + + + Sets the modification at [code]mod_idx[/code] to the passed-in modification, [code]modification[/code]. - - + Sets up the modification stack so it can execute. This function should be called by [Skeleton2D] and shouldn't be manually called unless you know what you are doing. diff --git a/doc/classes/Skin.xml b/doc/classes/Skin.xml index f409b6c80ca..67ca36f4d6d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Skin.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Skin.xml @@ -8,86 +8,64 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/SkinReference.xml b/doc/classes/SkinReference.xml index 3f8bc3be824..d0634c543c7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SkinReference.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SkinReference.xml @@ -8,14 +8,12 @@ - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/SliderJoint3D.xml b/doc/classes/SliderJoint3D.xml index ef9c9a48b66..dc9760b6675 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SliderJoint3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SliderJoint3D.xml @@ -10,20 +10,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/SoftBody3D.xml b/doc/classes/SoftBody3D.xml index b143c60d9d9..16f80c43bcb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SoftBody3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SoftBody3D.xml @@ -11,72 +11,56 @@ - - - - + + Adds a body to the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - + Returns an array of nodes that were added as collision exceptions for this body. - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the collision mask. - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the collision mask. - - + - - - - + + Removes a body from the list of bodies that this body can't collide with. - - - - - - + + + Sets individual bits on the layer mask. Use this if you only need to change one layer's value. - - - - - - + + + Sets individual bits on the collision mask. Use this if you only need to change one layer's value. diff --git a/doc/classes/SpinBox.xml b/doc/classes/SpinBox.xml index 7e2481f4589..1c1e6e5a159 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SpinBox.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SpinBox.xml @@ -30,15 +30,13 @@ - - + Applies the current value of this [SpinBox]. - - + Returns the [LineEdit] instance from this [SpinBox]. You can use it to access properties and methods of [LineEdit]. diff --git a/doc/classes/SplitContainer.xml b/doc/classes/SplitContainer.xml index b3f85ce7e12..be49a99988e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SplitContainer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SplitContainer.xml @@ -10,8 +10,7 @@ - - + Clamps the [member split_offset] value to not go outside the currently possible minimal and maximum values. @@ -30,8 +29,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the dragger is dragged by user. diff --git a/doc/classes/SpringArm3D.xml b/doc/classes/SpringArm3D.xml index 3ffdbebae83..50aa3d39b8d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SpringArm3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SpringArm3D.xml @@ -13,33 +13,27 @@ - - - - + + Adds the [PhysicsBody3D] object with the given [RID] to the list of [PhysicsBody3D] objects excluded from the collision check. - - + Clears the list of [PhysicsBody3D] objects excluded from the collision check. - - + Returns the spring arm's current length. - - - - + + Removes the given [RID] from the list of [PhysicsBody3D] objects excluded from the collision check. diff --git a/doc/classes/Sprite2D.xml b/doc/classes/Sprite2D.xml index b419b003bf3..0b26fdc055b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Sprite2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Sprite2D.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + Returns a [Rect2] representing the Sprite2D's boundary in local coordinates. Can be used to detect if the Sprite2D was clicked. Example: [codeblocks] @@ -41,10 +40,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if the pixel at the given position is opaque and [code]false[/code] in other case. [b]Note:[/b] It also returns [code]false[/code], if the sprite's texture is [code]null[/code] or if the given position is invalid. diff --git a/doc/classes/SpriteBase3D.xml b/doc/classes/SpriteBase3D.xml index 3168e2d8482..b723c9f4d4c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SpriteBase3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SpriteBase3D.xml @@ -10,35 +10,28 @@ - - + Returns a [TriangleMesh] with the sprite's vertices following its current configuration (such as its [member axis] and [member pixel_size]). - - - - + + Returns the value of the specified flag. - - + Returns the rectangle representing this sprite. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the specified flag will be enabled. See [enum SpriteBase3D.DrawFlags] for a list of flags. diff --git a/doc/classes/SpriteFrames.xml b/doc/classes/SpriteFrames.xml index 1c7d84c5a2a..3bd40ff6f4c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SpriteFrames.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SpriteFrames.xml @@ -11,159 +11,120 @@ - - - - + + Adds a new animation to the library. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a frame to the given animation. - - - - + + Removes all frames from the given animation. - - + Removes all animations. A "default" animation will be created. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given animation is configured to loop when it finishes playing. Otherwise, returns [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns an array containing the names associated to each animation. Values are placed in alphabetical order. - - - - + + The animation's speed in frames per second. - - - - - - + + + Returns the animation's selected frame. - - - - + + Returns the number of frames in the animation. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], the named animation exists. - - - - + + Removes the given animation. - - - - - - + + + Removes the animation's selected frame. - - - - - - + + + Changes the animation's name to [code]newname[/code]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the animation will loop. - - - - - - + + + The animation's speed in frames per second. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the texture of the given frame. diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamPeer.xml b/doc/classes/StreamPeer.xml index 5367a572f15..e3d77d22c54 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamPeer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamPeer.xml @@ -10,205 +10,166 @@ - - + Gets a signed 16-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets a signed 32-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets a signed 64-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets a signed byte from the stream. - - + Returns the amount of bytes this [StreamPeer] has available. - - - - + + Returns a chunk data with the received bytes. The amount of bytes to be received can be requested in the [code]bytes[/code] argument. If not enough bytes are available, the function will block until the desired amount is received. This function returns two values, an [enum @GlobalScope.Error] code and a data array. - - + Gets a double-precision float from the stream. - - + Gets a single-precision float from the stream. - - - - + + Returns a chunk data with the received bytes. The amount of bytes to be received can be requested in the "bytes" argument. If not enough bytes are available, the function will return how many were actually received. This function returns two values, an [enum @GlobalScope.Error] code, and a data array. - - - - + + Gets a string with byte-length [code]bytes[/code] from the stream. If [code]bytes[/code] is negative (default) the length will be read from the stream using the reverse process of [method put_string]. - - + Gets an unsigned 16-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets an unsigned 32-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets an unsigned 64-bit value from the stream. - - + Gets an unsigned byte from the stream. - - - - + + Gets an UTF-8 string with byte-length [code]bytes[/code] from the stream (this decodes the string sent as UTF-8). If [code]bytes[/code] is negative (default) the length will be read from the stream using the reverse process of [method put_utf8_string]. - - - - + + Gets a Variant from the stream. If [code]allow_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code], decoding objects is allowed. [b]Warning:[/b] Deserialized objects can contain code which gets executed. Do not use this option if the serialized object comes from untrusted sources to avoid potential security threats such as remote code execution. - - - - + + Puts a signed 16-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts a signed 32-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts a signed 64-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts a signed byte into the stream. - - - - + + Sends a chunk of data through the connection, blocking if necessary until the data is done sending. This function returns an [enum @GlobalScope.Error] code. - - - - + + Puts a double-precision float into the stream. - - - - + + Puts a single-precision float into the stream. - - - - + + Sends a chunk of data through the connection. If all the data could not be sent at once, only part of it will. This function returns two values, an [enum @GlobalScope.Error] code and an integer, describing how much data was actually sent. - - - - + + Puts a zero-terminated ASCII string into the stream prepended by a 32-bit unsigned integer representing its size. Note: To put an ASCII string without prepending its size, you can use [method put_data]: @@ -223,46 +184,36 @@ - - - - + + Puts an unsigned 16-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts an unsigned 32-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts an unsigned 64-bit value into the stream. - - - - + + Puts an unsigned byte into the stream. - - - - + + Puts a zero-terminated UTF-8 string into the stream prepended by a 32 bits unsigned integer representing its size. Note: To put an UTF-8 string without prepending its size, you can use [method put_data]: @@ -277,12 +228,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Puts a Variant into the stream. If [code]full_objects[/code] is [code]true[/code] encoding objects is allowed (and can potentially include code). diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamPeerBuffer.xml b/doc/classes/StreamPeerBuffer.xml index 03a150b90ff..62476ca1664 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamPeerBuffer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamPeerBuffer.xml @@ -8,42 +8,34 @@ - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamPeerSSL.xml b/doc/classes/StreamPeerSSL.xml index 6a06c0b3f47..034168c2a00 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamPeerSSL.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamPeerSSL.xml @@ -11,53 +11,40 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Accepts a peer connection as a server using the given [code]private_key[/code] and providing the given [code]certificate[/code] to the client. You can pass the optional [code]chain[/code] parameter to provide additional CA chain information along with the certificate. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connects to a peer using an underlying [StreamPeer] [code]stream[/code]. If [code]validate_certs[/code] is [code]true[/code], [StreamPeerSSL] will validate that the certificate presented by the peer matches the [code]for_hostname[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Specifying a custom [code]valid_certificate[/code] is not supported in HTML5 exports due to browsers restrictions. - - + Disconnects from host. - - + Returns the status of the connection. See [enum Status] for values. - - + Poll the connection to check for incoming bytes. Call this right before [method StreamPeer.get_available_bytes] for it to work properly. diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamPeerTCP.xml b/doc/classes/StreamPeerTCP.xml index 7b7c1d74264..bba48e72750 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamPeerTCP.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamPeerTCP.xml @@ -10,75 +10,61 @@ - - - - - - + + + Opens the TCP socket, and binds it to the specified local address. This method is generally not needed, and only used to force the subsequent call to [method connect_to_host] to use the specified [code]host[/code] and [code]port[/code] as source address. This can be desired in some NAT punchthrough techniques, or when forcing the source network interface. - - - - - - + + + Connects to the specified [code]host:port[/code] pair. A hostname will be resolved if valid. Returns [constant OK] on success. - - + Disconnects from host. - - + Returns the IP of this peer. - - + Returns the port of this peer. - - + Returns the local port to which this peer is bound. - - + Returns the status of the connection, see [enum Status]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this peer is currently connected or is connecting to a host, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - - - + + If [code]enabled[/code] is [code]true[/code], packets will be sent immediately. If [code]enabled[/code] is [code]false[/code] (the default), packet transfers will be delayed and combined using [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nagle%27s_algorithm]Nagle's algorithm[/url]. [b]Note:[/b] It's recommended to leave this disabled for applications that send large packets or need to transfer a lot of data, as enabling this can decrease the total available bandwidth. diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamTexture2D.xml b/doc/classes/StreamTexture2D.xml index 214298475cb..7b6c594786c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamTexture2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamTexture2D.xml @@ -10,10 +10,8 @@ - - - - + + Loads the texture from the given path. diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamTexture3D.xml b/doc/classes/StreamTexture3D.xml index 7054a4ee995..4b2eb16ba3f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamTexture3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamTexture3D.xml @@ -8,10 +8,8 @@ - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/StreamTextureLayered.xml b/doc/classes/StreamTextureLayered.xml index 10a7aae9763..888fb339db7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StreamTextureLayered.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StreamTextureLayered.xml @@ -8,10 +8,8 @@ - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/String.xml b/doc/classes/String.xml index 3bf05e7c922..027ae2000a1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/String.xml +++ b/doc/classes/String.xml @@ -11,58 +11,47 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [String] ([code]""[/code]). - - - - + + Constructs a [String] as a copy of the given [String]. - - - - + + Constructs a new String from the given [NodePath]. - - - - + + Constructs a new String from the given [StringName]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the string begins with the given string. - - + Returns the bigrams (pairs of consecutive letters) of this string. - - + Converts a string containing a binary number into an integer. Binary strings can either be prefixed with [code]0b[/code] or not, and they can also start with a [code]-[/code] before the optional prefix. [codeblocks] @@ -78,32 +67,27 @@ - - + Returns a copy of the string with special characters escaped using the C language standard. - - + Returns a copy of the string with escaped characters replaced by their meanings. Supported escape sequences are [code]\'[/code], [code]\"[/code], [code]\?[/code], [code]\\[/code], [code]\a[/code], [code]\b[/code], [code]\f[/code], [code]\n[/code], [code]\r[/code], [code]\t[/code], [code]\v[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Unlike the GDScript parser, this method doesn't support the [code]\uXXXX[/code] escape sequence. - - + Changes the case of some letters. Replaces underscores with spaces, adds spaces before in-word uppercase characters, converts all letters to lowercase, then capitalizes the first letter and every letter following a space character. For [code]capitalize camelCase mixed_with_underscores[/code], it will return [code]Capitalize Camel Case Mixed With Underscores[/code]. - - - - + + Performs a case-sensitive comparison to another string. Returns [code]-1[/code] if less than, [code]1[/code] if greater than, or [code]0[/code] if equal. "less than" or "greater than" are determined by the [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters]Unicode code points[/code] of each string, which roughly matches the alphabetical order. [b]Behavior with different string lengths:[/b] Returns [code]1[/code] if the "base" string is longer than the [code]to[/code] string or [code]-1[/code] if the "base" string is shorter than the [code]to[/code] string. Keep in mind this length is determined by the number of Unicode codepoints, [i]not[/i] the actual visible characters. @@ -112,62 +96,46 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the number of occurrences of substring [code]what[/code] between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] positions. If [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] equals 0 the whole string will be used. If only [code]to[/code] equals 0 the remained substring will be used. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the number of occurrences of substring [code]what[/code] (ignoring case) between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] positions. If [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] equals 0 the whole string will be used. If only [code]to[/code] equals 0 the remained substring will be used. - - + Returns a copy of the string with indentation (leading tabs and spaces) removed. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the string ends with the given string. - - - - - - + + + Returns the index of the [b]first[/b] case-sensitive occurrence of the specified string in this instance, or [code]-1[/code]. Optionally, the starting search index can be specified, continuing to the end of the string. [b]Note:[/b] If you just want to know whether a string contains a substring, use the [code]in[/code] operator as follows: @@ -183,65 +151,53 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the index of the [b]first[/b] case-insensitive occurrence of the specified string in this instance, or [code]-1[/code]. Optionally, the starting search index can be specified, continuing to the end of the string. - - - - - - + + + Formats the string by replacing all occurrences of [code]placeholder[/code] with [code]values[/code]. - - + If the string is a valid file path, returns the base directory name. - - + If the string is a valid file path, returns the full file path without the extension. - - + If the string is a valid file path, returns the extension. - - + If the string is a valid file path, returns the filename. - - + Hashes the string and returns a 32-bit integer. - - + Converts a string containing a hexadecimal number into an integer. Hexadecimal strings can either be prefixed with [code]0x[/code] or not, and they can also start with a [code]-[/code] before the optional prefix. [codeblocks] @@ -257,120 +213,98 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the string with the substring [code]what[/code] inserted at the given position. - - + If the string is a path to a file or directory, returns [code]true[/code] if the path is absolute. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the length of the string equals [code]0[/code]. - - + If the string is a path to a file or directory, returns [code]true[/code] if the path is relative. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string is a subsequence of the given string. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string is a subsequence of the given string, without considering case. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string is free from characters that aren't allowed in file names, those being: [code]: / \ ? * " | % < >[/code] - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string contains a valid float. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string contains a valid hexadecimal number. If [code]with_prefix[/code] is [code]true[/code], then a validity of the hexadecimal number is determined by [code]0x[/code] prefix, for instance: [code]0xDEADC0DE[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string contains a valid color in hexadecimal HTML notation. Other HTML notations such as named colors or [code]hsl()[/code] colors aren't considered valid by this method and will return [code]false[/code]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string is a valid identifier. A valid identifier may contain only letters, digits and underscores ([code]_[/code]) and the first character may not be a digit. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string contains a valid integer. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this string contains only a well-formatted IPv4 or IPv6 address. This method considers [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Reserved_IP_addresses]reserved IP addresses[/url] such as [code]0.0.0.0[/code] as valid. - - - - + + Return a [String] which is the concatenation of the [code]parts[/code]. The separator between elements is the string providing this method. Example: @@ -385,17 +319,14 @@ - - + Returns a copy of the string with special characters escaped using the JSON standard. - - - - + + Returns a number of characters from the left of the string. If negative [code]position[/code] is used, the characters are counted downwards from [String]'s length. Examples: @@ -406,70 +337,56 @@ - - + Returns the string's amount of characters. - - - - - - + + + Formats a string to be at least [code]min_length[/code] long by adding [code]character[/code]s to the left of the string. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the string with characters removed from the left. The [code]chars[/code] argument is a string specifying the set of characters to be removed. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]chars[/code] is not a prefix. See [method trim_prefix] method that will remove a single prefix string rather than a set of characters. - - - - + + Does a simple case-sensitive expression match, where [code]"*"[/code] matches zero or more arbitrary characters and [code]"?"[/code] matches any single character except a period ([code]"."[/code]). - - - - + + Does a simple case-insensitive expression match, where [code]"*"[/code] matches zero or more arbitrary characters and [code]"?"[/code] matches any single character except a period ([code]"."[/code]). - - + Returns the MD5 hash of the string as an array of bytes. - - + Returns the MD5 hash of the string as a string. - - - - + + Performs a case-insensitive [i]natural order[/i] comparison to another string. Returns [code]-1[/code] if less than, [code]1[/code] if greater than, or [code]0[/code] if equal. "less than" or "greater than" are determined by the [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters]Unicode code points[/code] of each string, which roughly matches the alphabetical order. Internally, lowercase characters will be converted to uppercase during the comparison. When used for sorting, natural order comparison will order suites of numbers as expected by most people. If you sort the numbers from 1 to 10 using natural order, you will get [code][1, 2, 3, ...][/code] instead of [code][1, 10, 2, 3, ...][/code]. @@ -479,10 +396,8 @@ - - - - + + Performs a case-insensitive comparison to another string. Returns [code]-1[/code] if less than, [code]1[/code] if greater than, or [code]0[/code] if equal. "less than" or "greater than" are determined by the [url=https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters]Unicode code points[/code] of each string, which roughly matches the alphabetical order. Internally, lowercase characters will be converted to uppercase during the comparison. [b]Behavior with different string lengths:[/b] Returns [code]1[/code] if the "base" string is longer than the [code]to[/code] string or [code]-1[/code] if the "base" string is shorter than the [code]to[/code] string. Keep in mind this length is determined by the number of Unicode codepoints, [i]not[/i] the actual visible characters. @@ -491,188 +406,141 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Formats a number to have an exact number of [code]digits[/code] after the decimal point. - - - - + + Formats a number to have an exact number of [code]digits[/code] before the decimal point. - - - - + + If the string is a path, this concatenates [code]file[/code] at the end of the string as a subpath. E.g. [code]"this/is".plus_file("path") == "this/is/path"[/code]. - - - - + + Returns original string repeated a number of times. The number of repetitions is given by the argument. - - - - - - + + + Replaces occurrences of a case-sensitive substring with the given one inside the string. - - - - - - + + + Replaces occurrences of a case-insensitive substring with the given one inside the string. - - - - - - + + + Returns the index of the [b]last[/b] case-sensitive occurrence of the specified string in this instance, or [code]-1[/code]. Optionally, the starting search index can be specified, continuing to the beginning of the string. - - - - - - + + + Returns the index of the [b]last[/b] case-insensitive occurrence of the specified string in this instance, or [code]-1[/code]. Optionally, the starting search index can be specified, continuing to the beginning of the string. - - - - + + Returns a number of characters from the right of the string. If negative [code]position[/code] is used, the characters are counted downwards from [String]'s length. Examples: @@ -683,25 +551,18 @@ - - - - - - + + + Formats a string to be at least [code]min_length[/code] long by adding [code]character[/code]s to the right of the string. - - - - - - - - + + + + Splits the string by a [code]delimiter[/code] string and returns an array of the substrings, starting from right. The splits in the returned array are sorted in the same order as the original string, from left to right. @@ -722,61 +583,49 @@ - - - - + + Returns a copy of the string with characters removed from the right. The [code]chars[/code] argument is a string specifying the set of characters to be removed. [b]Note:[/b] The [code]chars[/code] is not a suffix. See [method trim_suffix] method that will remove a single suffix string rather than a set of characters. - - + Returns the SHA-1 hash of the string as an array of bytes. - - + Returns the SHA-1 hash of the string as a string. - - + Returns the SHA-256 hash of the string as an array of bytes. - - + Returns the SHA-256 hash of the string as a string. - - - - + + Returns the similarity index of the text compared to this string. 1 means totally similar and 0 means totally dissimilar. - - - - - - - - + + + + Splits the string by a [code]delimiter[/code] string and returns an array of the substrings. The [code]delimiter[/code] can be of any length. If [code]maxsplit[/code] is specified, it defines the number of splits to do from the left up to [code]maxsplit[/code]. The default value of [code]0[/code] means that all items are split. @@ -800,132 +649,107 @@ - - - - - - + + + Splits the string in floats by using a delimiter string and returns an array of the substrings. For example, [code]"1,2.5,3"[/code] will return [code][1,2.5,3][/code] if split by [code]","[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the string stripped of any non-printable character (including tabulations, spaces and line breaks) at the beginning and the end. The optional arguments are used to toggle stripping on the left and right edges respectively. - - + Returns a copy of the string stripped of any escape character. These include all non-printable control characters of the first page of the ASCII table (< 32), such as tabulation ([code]\t[/code] in C) and newline ([code]\n[/code] and [code]\r[/code]) characters, but not spaces. - - - - - - + + + Returns part of the string from the position [code]from[/code] with length [code]len[/code]. Argument [code]len[/code] is optional and using [code]-1[/code] will return remaining characters from given position. - - + Converts the String (which is a character array) to ASCII/Latin-1 encoded [PackedByteArray] (which is an array of bytes). The conversion is faster compared to [method to_utf8_buffer], as this method assumes that all the characters in the String are ASCII/Latin-1 characters, unsupported characters are replaced with spaces. - - + Converts a string containing a decimal number into a [code]float[/code]. - - + Converts a string containing an integer number into an [code]int[/code]. - - + Returns the string converted to lowercase. - - + Returns the string converted to uppercase. - - + Converts the String (which is an array of characters) to UTF-16 encoded [PackedByteArray] (which is an array of bytes). - - + Converts the String (which is an array of characters) to UTF-32 encoded [PackedByteArray] (which is an array of bytes). - - + Converts the String (which is an array of characters) to UTF-8 encode [PackedByteArray] (which is an array of bytes). The conversion is a bit slower than [method to_ascii_buffer], but supports all UTF-8 characters. Therefore, you should prefer this function over [method to_ascii_buffer]. - - - - + + Removes a given string from the start if it starts with it or leaves the string unchanged. - - - - + + Removes a given string from the end if it ends with it or leaves the string unchanged. - - - - + + Returns the character code at position [code]at[/code]. - - + Decodes a string in URL encoded format. This is meant to decode parameters in a URL when receiving an HTTP request. [codeblocks] @@ -939,8 +763,7 @@ - - + Encodes a string to URL friendly format. This is meant to encode parameters in a URL when sending an HTTP request. [codeblocks] @@ -954,24 +777,20 @@ - - + Removes any characters from the string that are prohibited in [Node] names ([code].[/code] [code]:[/code] [code]@[/code] [code]/[/code] [code]"[/code]). - - - - + + Returns a copy of the string with special characters escaped using the XML standard. If [code]escape_quotes[/code] is [code]true[/code], the single quote ([code]'[/code]) and double quote ([code]"[/code]) characters are also escaped. - - + Returns a copy of the string with escaped characters replaced by their meanings according to the XML standard. diff --git a/doc/classes/StringName.xml b/doc/classes/StringName.xml index be32f6a2347..4c2619e782b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StringName.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StringName.xml @@ -10,59 +10,46 @@ - - + Constructs an empty [StringName]. - - - - + + Constructs a [StringName] as a copy of the given [StringName]. - - - - + + Creates a new [StringName] from the given [String]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/StyleBox.xml b/doc/classes/StyleBox.xml index a01dfbd4b85..024524251d2 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StyleBox.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StyleBox.xml @@ -11,82 +11,65 @@ - - - - - - + + + Draws this stylebox using a [CanvasItem] with given [RID]. You can get a [RID] value using [method Object.get_instance_id] on a [CanvasItem]-derived node. - - + Returns the size of this [StyleBox] without the margins. - - + Returns the [CanvasItem] that handles its [constant CanvasItem.NOTIFICATION_DRAW] or [method CanvasItem._draw] callback at this moment. - - - - + + Returns the default margin of the specified [enum Side]. - - - - + + Returns the content margin offset for the specified [enum Side]. Positive values reduce size inwards, unlike [Control]'s margin values. - - + Returns the minimum size that this stylebox can be shrunk to. - - + Returns the "offset" of a stylebox. This helper function returns a value equivalent to [code]Vector2(style.get_margin(MARGIN_LEFT), style.get_margin(MARGIN_TOP))[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the default value of the specified [enum Side] to [code]offset[/code] pixels. - - - - - - + + + Test a position in a rectangle, return whether it passes the mask test. diff --git a/doc/classes/StyleBoxFlat.xml b/doc/classes/StyleBoxFlat.xml index 9e02fb57c3e..540b0073413 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StyleBoxFlat.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StyleBoxFlat.xml @@ -25,125 +25,93 @@ - - - - + + Returns the specified [enum Side]'s border width. - - + Returns the smallest border width out of all four borders. - - - - + + Returns the given [code]corner[/code]'s radius. See [enum Corner] for possible values. - - - - + + Returns the size of the specified [enum Side]'s expand margin. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified [enum Side]'s border width to [code]width[/code] pixels. - - - - + + Sets the border width to [code]width[/code] pixels for all sides. - - - - - - + + + Sets the corner radius to [code]radius[/code] pixels for the given [code]corner[/code]. See [enum Corner] for possible values. - - - - + + Sets the corner radius to [code]radius[/code] pixels for all corners. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the corner radius for each corner to [code]radius_top_left[/code], [code]radius_top_right[/code], [code]radius_bottom_right[/code], and [code]radius_bottom_left[/code] pixels. - - - - - - + + + Sets the expand margin to [code]size[/code] pixels for the specified [enum Side]. - - - - + + Sets the expand margin to [code]size[/code] pixels for all margins. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the expand margin for each margin to [code]size_left[/code], [code]size_top[/code], [code]size_right[/code], and [code]size_bottom[/code] pixels. diff --git a/doc/classes/StyleBoxTexture.xml b/doc/classes/StyleBoxTexture.xml index be140481269..92939dfbf58 100644 --- a/doc/classes/StyleBoxTexture.xml +++ b/doc/classes/StyleBoxTexture.xml @@ -10,65 +10,48 @@ - - - - + + Returns the expand margin size of the specified [enum Side]. - - - - + + Returns the margin size of the specified [enum Side]. - - - - + + Sets the expand margin to [code]size[/code] pixels for all margins. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the expand margin for each margin to [code]size_left[/code], [code]size_top[/code], [code]size_right[/code], and [code]size_bottom[/code] pixels. - - - - - - + + + Sets the expand margin to [code]size[/code] pixels for the specified [enum Side]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the margin to [code]size[/code] pixels for the specified [enum Side]. diff --git a/doc/classes/SurfaceTool.xml b/doc/classes/SurfaceTool.xml index a8b836ff0c7..e5b03eb4d40 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SurfaceTool.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SurfaceTool.xml @@ -32,294 +32,225 @@ - - - - + + Adds an index to index array if you are using indexed vertices. Does not need to be called before adding vertices. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Inserts a triangle fan made of array data into [Mesh] being constructed. Requires the primitive type be set to [constant Mesh.PRIMITIVE_TRIANGLES]. - - - - + + Specifies the position of current vertex. Should be called after specifying other vertex properties (e.g. Color, UV). - - - - - - - - + + + + Append vertices from a given [Mesh] surface onto the current vertex array with specified [Transform3D]. - - - - + + Called before adding any vertices. Takes the primitive type as an argument (e.g. [constant Mesh.PRIMITIVE_TRIANGLES]). - - + Clear all information passed into the surface tool so far. - - - - - - + + + Returns a constructed [ArrayMesh] from current information passed in. If an existing [ArrayMesh] is passed in as an argument, will add an extra surface to the existing [ArrayMesh]. [b]FIXME:[/b] Document possible values for [code]flags[/code], it changed in 4.0. Likely some combinations of [enum Mesh.ArrayFormat]. - - + Commits the data to the same format used by [method ArrayMesh.add_surface_from_arrays]. This way you can further process the mesh data using the [ArrayMesh] API. - - - - - - + + + Creates a vertex array from an existing [Mesh]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates a vertex array from the specified blend shape of an existing [Mesh]. This can be used to extract a specific pose from a blend shape. - - + Removes the index array by expanding the vertex array. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Generates normals from vertices so you do not have to do it manually. If [code]flip[/code] is [code]true[/code], the resulting normals will be inverted. [method generate_normals] should be called [i]after[/i] generating geometry and [i]before[/i] committing the mesh using [method commit] or [method commit_to_arrays]. [b]Note:[/b] [method generate_normals] only works if the primitive type to be set to [constant Mesh.PRIMITIVE_TRIANGLES]. - - + Generates a tangent vector for each vertex. Requires that each vertex have UVs and normals set already. - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + Shrinks the vertex array by creating an index array. This can improve performance by avoiding vertex reuse. - - + - - - - + + Specifies an array of bones to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. [code]bones[/code] must contain 4 integers. - - - - + + Specifies a [Color] to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. [b]Note:[/b] The material must have [member BaseMaterial3D.vertex_color_use_as_albedo] enabled for the vertex color to be visible. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Sets [Material] to be used by the [Mesh] you are constructing. - - - - + + Specifies a normal to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. - - - - + + - - - - + + Specifies whether the current vertex (if using only vertex arrays) or current index (if also using index arrays) should use smooth normals for normal calculation. - - - - + + Specifies a tangent to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. - - - - + + Specifies a set of UV coordinates to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. - - - - + + Specifies an optional second set of UV coordinates to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. - - - - + + Specifies weight values to use for the [i]next[/i] vertex. [code]weights[/code] must contain 4 values. If every vertex needs to have this information set and you fail to submit it for the first vertex, this information may not be used at all. diff --git a/doc/classes/SyntaxHighlighter.xml b/doc/classes/SyntaxHighlighter.xml index 642d75fa9b2..ea0d1c27a39 100644 --- a/doc/classes/SyntaxHighlighter.xml +++ b/doc/classes/SyntaxHighlighter.xml @@ -12,42 +12,35 @@ - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to clear any local caches. - - - - + + Virtual method which can be overridden to return syntax highlighting data. See [method get_line_syntax_highlighting] for more details. - - + Virtual method which can be overridden to update any local caches. - - + Clears all cached syntax highlighting data. Then calls overridable method [method _clear_highlighting_cache]. - - - - + + Returns syntax highlighting data for a single line. If the line is not cached, calls [method _get_line_syntax_highlighting] to calculate the data. The return [Dictionary] is column number to [Dictionary]. The column number notes the start of a region, the region will end if another region is found, or at the end of the line. The nested [Dictionary] contains the data for that region, currently only the key "color" is supported. @@ -66,15 +59,13 @@ - - + Returns the associated [TextEdit] node. - - + Clears then updates the [SyntaxHighlighter] caches. Override [method _update_cache] for a callback. [b]Note:[/b] This is called automatically when the associated [TextEdit] node, updates its own cache. diff --git a/doc/classes/TCPServer.xml b/doc/classes/TCPServer.xml index 7160055c6d1..9692693effb 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TCPServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TCPServer.xml @@ -10,33 +10,27 @@ - - + Returns the local port this server is listening to. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if a connection is available for taking. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the server is currently listening for connections. - - - - - - + + + Listen on the [code]port[/code] binding to [code]bind_address[/code]. If [code]bind_address[/code] is set as [code]"*"[/code] (default), the server will listen on all available addresses (both IPv4 and IPv6). @@ -45,15 +39,13 @@ - - + Stops listening. - - + If a connection is available, returns a StreamPeerTCP with the connection. diff --git a/doc/classes/TabContainer.xml b/doc/classes/TabContainer.xml index 3f24509ec7e..2abe4dc90f4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TabContainer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TabContainer.xml @@ -13,124 +13,98 @@ - - + Returns the child [Control] node located at the active tab index. - - + Returns the [Popup] node instance if one has been set already with [method set_popup]. - - + Returns the previously active tab index. - - - - + + Returns the [Control] node from the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. - - + Returns the number of tabs. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code] is disabled. - - - - + + Returns the [Texture2D] for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code] or [code]null[/code] if the tab has no [Texture2D]. - - - - + + Returns the title of the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. Tab titles default to the name of the indexed child node, but this can be overridden with [method set_tab_title]. - - + Returns the [TabContainer] rearrange group id. - - - - + + If set on a [Popup] node instance, a popup menu icon appears in the top-right corner of the [TabContainer]. Clicking it will expand the [Popup] node. - - - - - - + + + If [code]disabled[/code] is [code]false[/code], hides the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Its title text will remain, unless also removed with [method set_tab_title]. - - - - - - + + + Sets an icon for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets a title for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. Tab titles default to the name of the indexed child node, but this can be overridden with [method set_tab_title]. - - - - + + Defines rearrange group id, choose for each [TabContainer] the same value to enable tab drag between [TabContainer]. Enable drag with [code]set_drag_to_rearrange_enabled(true)[/code]. @@ -163,15 +137,13 @@ - - + Emitted when switching to another tab. - - + Emitted when a tab is selected, even if it is the current tab. diff --git a/doc/classes/Tabs.xml b/doc/classes/Tabs.xml index aff104c922c..537bb9c4034 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Tabs.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Tabs.xml @@ -10,244 +10,188 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adds a new tab. - - - - + + Removes all OpenType features from the tab title. - - - - + + Moves the scroll view to make the tab visible. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the offset buttons (the ones that appear when there's not enough space for all tabs) are visible. - - + Returns the previously active tab index. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if select with right mouse button is enabled. - - + Returns the number of tabs. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code] is disabled. - - - - + + Returns the [Texture2D] for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code] or [code]null[/code] if the tab has no [Texture2D]. - - - - + + Returns tab title language code. - - + Returns the number of hidden tabs offsetted to the left. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] of the tab title. - - - - + + Returns tab [Rect2] with local position and size. - - - - + + Returns tab title text base writing direction. - - - - + + Returns the title of the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. Tab titles default to the name of the indexed child node, but this can be overridden with [method set_tab_title]. - - + Returns the [Tabs]' rearrange group ID. - - - - - - + + + Moves a tab from [code]from[/code] to [code]to[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], enables selecting a tab with the right mouse button. - - - - - - + + + If [code]disabled[/code] is [code]false[/code], hides the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] Its title text will remain unless it is also removed with [method set_tab_title]. - - - - - - + + + Sets an [code]icon[/code] for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets language code of tab title used for line-breaking and text shaping algorithms, if left empty current locale is used instead. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] for the tab title. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. - - - - - - + + + Sets tab title base writing direction. - - - - - - + + + Sets a [code]title[/code] for the tab at index [code]tab_idx[/code]. - - - - + + Defines the rearrange group ID. Choose for each [Tabs] the same value to dragging tabs between [Tabs]. Enable drag with [code]set_drag_to_rearrange_enabled(true)[/code]. @@ -275,43 +219,37 @@ - - + Emitted when the active tab is rearranged via mouse drag. See [member drag_to_rearrange_enabled]. - - + Emitted when a tab is right-clicked. - - + Emitted when switching to another tab. - - + Emitted when a tab is clicked, even if it is the current tab. - - + Emitted when a tab is closed. - - + Emitted when a tab is hovered by the mouse. diff --git a/doc/classes/TextEdit.xml b/doc/classes/TextEdit.xml index 8d5f8f951c9..5444721e109 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextEdit.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextEdit.xml @@ -11,92 +11,74 @@ - - + A virtual method that is called whenever backspace is triggered. - - - - + + - - + Causes the [TextEdit] to perform a backspace. - - + Centers the viewport on the line the editing cursor is at. This also resets the [member scroll_horizontal] value to [code]0[/code]. - - + Removes all OpenType features. - - + Clears the undo history. - - + Copy's the current text selection. - - + Returns the column the editing cursor is at. - - + Returns the line the editing cursor is at. - - - - - - + + + Moves the cursor at the specified [code]column[/code] index. If [code]adjust_viewport[/code] is set to [code]true[/code], the viewport will center at the cursor position after the move occurs. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Moves the cursor at the specified [code]line[/code] index. If [code]adjust_viewport[/code] is set to [code]true[/code], the viewport will center at the cursor position after the move occurs. @@ -104,350 +86,276 @@ - - + Cut's the current selection. - - + - - + Deselects the current selection. - - + Gets the caret pixel draw position. - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the indent level of a specific line. - - - - + + Returns the text of a specific line. - - - - + + Returns the current background color of the line. [code]Color(0, 0, 0, 0)[/code] is returned if no color is set. - - + Returns the amount of total lines in the text. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns the [PopupMenu] of this [TextEdit]. By default, this menu is displayed when right-clicking on the [TextEdit]. - - - - + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. - - + - - + Returns the selection begin column. - - + Returns the selection begin line. - - + - - + - - + Returns the text inside the selection. - - + Returns the selection end column. - - + Returns the selection end line. - - + Returns the [TextEdit]'s' tab size. - - + Returns the number of visible lines, including wrapped text. - - + Returns a [String] text with the word under the caret (text cursor) location. - - - - + + Insert the specified text at the cursor position. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the caret is visible on the screen. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - + Returns whether the menu is visible. Use this instead of [code]get_menu().visible[/code] to improve performance (so the creation of the menu is avoided). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the selection is active. - - - - + + Triggers a right-click menu action by the specified index. See [enum MenuItems] for a list of available indexes. - - - - - - + + + - - + Paste the current selection. - - + Perform redo operation. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Perform a search inside the text. Search flags can be specified in the [enum SearchFlags] enum. Returns an empty [code]Dictionary[/code] if no result was found. Otherwise, returns a [code]Dictionary[/code] containing [code]line[/code] and [code]column[/code] entries, e.g: @@ -472,218 +380,154 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Perform selection, from line/column to line/column. If [member selecting_enabled] is [code]false[/code], no selection will occur. - - + Select all the text. If [member selecting_enabled] is [code]false[/code], no selection will occur. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the text for a specific line. - - - - - - + + + Sets the current background color of the line. Set to [code]Color(0, 0, 0, 0)[/code] for no color. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code]. More info: [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/featuretags]OpenType feature tags[/url]. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - + + Sets the tab size for the [TextEdit] to use. - - + Perform undo operation. @@ -795,10 +639,8 @@ - - - - + + @@ -807,26 +649,20 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/TextLine.xml b/doc/classes/TextLine.xml index 318c3be794d..cc66f56d656 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextLine.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextLine.xml @@ -10,175 +10,134 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds inline object to the text buffer, [code]key[/code] must be unique. In the text, object is represented as [code]length[/code] object replacement characters. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - +}" /> + Adds text span and font to draw it. - - + Clears text line (removes text and inline objects). - - - - - - - - + + + + Draw text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draw text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - + Returns the text ascent (number of pixels above the baseline for horizontal layout or to the left of baseline for vertical). - - + Returns the text descent (number of pixels below the baseline for horizontal layout or to the right of baseline for vertical). - - + Returns pixel offset of the underline below the baseline. - - + Returns thickness of the underline. - - + Returns width (for horizontal layout) or height (for vertical) of the text. - - - - + + Returns bounding rectangle of the inline object. - - + Returns array of inline objects. - - + Returns TextServer buffer RID. - - + Returns size of the bounding box of the text. - - - - + + Returns caret character offset at the specified pixel offset at the baseline. This function always returns a valid position. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets new size and alignment of embedded object. - - - - + + Overrides BiDi for the structured text. Override ranges should cover full source text without overlaps. BiDi algorithm will be used on each range separately. - - - - + + Aligns text to the given tab-stops. diff --git a/doc/classes/TextParagraph.xml b/doc/classes/TextParagraph.xml index d67a9bcb85c..9050f9246a1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextParagraph.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextParagraph.xml @@ -10,356 +10,265 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds inline object to the text buffer, [code]key[/code] must be unique. In the text, object is represented as [code]length[/code] object replacement characters. - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - +}" /> + Adds text span and font to draw it. - - + Clears text paragraph (removes text and inline objects). - - + Removes dropcap. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draw all lines of the text and drop cap into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - + + + + Draw drop cap into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draw drop cap outline into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draw single line of text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draw outline of the single line of text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draw outlines of all lines of the text and drop cap into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the top left corner of the bounding box. - - + Returns number of lines used by dropcap. - - + Return drop cap text buffer RID. - - + Returns drop cap bounding box size. - - - - + + Returns the text line ascent (number of pixels above the baseline for horizontal layout or to the left of baseline for vertical). - - + Returns number of lines in the paragraph. - - - - + + Returns the text line descent (number of pixels below the baseline for horizontal layout or to the right of baseline for vertical). - - - - - - + + + Returns bounding rectangle of the inline object. - - - - + + Returns array of inline objects in the line. - - - - + + Returns character range of the line. - - - - + + Returns TextServer line buffer RID. - - - - + + Returns size of the bounding box of the line of text. - - - - + + Returns pixel offset of the underline below the baseline. - - - - + + Returns thickness of the underline. - - - - + + Returns width (for horizontal layout) or height (for vertical) of the line of text. - - + Returns the size of the bounding box of the paragraph, without line breaks. - - + Returns TextServer full string buffer RID. - - + Returns the size of the bounding box of the paragraph. - - + Returns extra spacing at the bottom of the line. See [member Font.extra_spacing_bottom]. - - + Returns extra spacing at the top of the line. See [member Font.extra_spacing_top]. - - - - + + Returns caret character offset at the specified coordinates. This function always returns a valid position. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets new size and alignment of embedded object. - - - - + + Overrides BiDi for the structured text. Override ranges should cover full source text without overlaps. BiDi algorithm will be used on each range separately. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - +}" /> + Sets drop cap, overrides previously set drop cap. Drop cap (dropped capital) is a decorative element at the beginning of a paragraph that is larger than the rest of the text. - - - - + + Aligns paragraph to the given tab-stops. diff --git a/doc/classes/TextServer.xml b/doc/classes/TextServer.xml index 0f9318fda1f..dbf7ae93aa9 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextServer.xml @@ -10,51 +10,37 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates new, empty bitmap font. To free the resulting font, use [method free_rid] method. - - - - - - - - + + + + Creates new font from the data in memory. To free the resulting font, use [method free_rid] method. Note: For non-scalable fonts [code]base_size[/code] is ignored, use [method font_get_base_size] to check actual font size. - - - - - - + + + Creates new font from the file. To free the resulting font, use [method free_rid] method. Note: For non-scalable fonts [code]base_size[/code] is ignored, use [method font_get_base_size] to check actual font size. - - - - - - + + + Creates new font from the system font. To free the resulting font, use [method free_rid] method. Note: This method is supported by servers with the [code]FEATURE_FONT_SYSTEM[/code] feature. @@ -62,12 +48,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Creates new buffer for complex text layout, with the given [code]direction[/code] and [code]orientation[/code]. To free the resulting buffer, use [method free_rid] method. Note: Direction is ignored if server does not support [code]FEATURE_BIDI_LAYOUT[/code] feature. @@ -75,198 +58,138 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draws box displaying character hexadecimal code. Used for replacing missing characters. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Adds a character to the font, where [code]character[/code] is the Unicode value, [code]texture[/code] is the texture index, [code]rect[/code] is the region in the texture (in pixels!), [code]align[/code] is the (optional) alignment for the character and [code]advance[/code] is the (optional) advance. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds a kerning pair to the bitmap font as a difference. Kerning pairs are special cases where a typeface advance is determined by the next character. - - - - - - + + + Adds a texture to the bitmap font. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Draws single glyph into a canvas item at the position, using [code]font[/code] at the size [code]size[/code]. Note: Glyph index is specific to the font, use glyphs indices returned by [method shaped_text_get_glyphs] or [method font_get_glyph_index]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Draws single glyph outline of size [code]outline_size[/code] into a canvas item at the position, using [code]font[/code] at the size [code]size[/code]. Note: Glyph index is specific to the font, use glyphs indices returned by [method shaped_text_get_glyphs] or [method font_get_glyph_index]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font anti-aliasing is supported and enabled. - - - - - - + + + Returns the font ascent (number of pixels above the baseline). - - - - + + Returns the default size of the font. - - - - - - + + + Returns the font descent (number of pixels below the baseline). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if distance field hint is enabled. - - - - + + Returns list of OpenType features supported by font. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if autohinter is supported and enabled. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns advance of the glyph. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns outline contours of the glyph in a Dictionary. [code]points[/code] - [PackedVector3Array], containing outline points. [code]x[/code] and [code]y[/code] are point coordinates. [code]z[/code] is the type of the point, using the [enum ContourPointTag] values. @@ -275,955 +198,701 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the glyph index of a [code]char[/code], optionally modified by the [code]variation_selector[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns a kerning of the pair of glyphs. - - - - - - + + + Returns the total font height (ascent plus descent) in pixels. - - - - + + Returns the font hinting. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if support override is enabled for the [code]language[/code]. - - - - + + Returns list of language support overrides. - - + Returns the font oversampling factor, shared by all fonts in the TextServer. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if support override is enabled for the [code]script[/code]. - - - - + + Returns list of script support overrides. - - - - + + Returns extra spacing for each glyph in pixels. - - - - + + Sets extra spacing for each glyph in pixels. - - - - + + Returns a string containing all the characters available in the font. - - - - - - + + + Returns underline offset (number of pixels below the baseline). - - - - - - + + + Returns underline thickness in pixels. - - - - - - + + + Returns variation coordinate [code]tag[/code]. - - - - + + Returns list of supported [url=https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/dvaraxisreg]variation coordinates[/url], each coordinate is returned as [code]tag: Vector3i(min_value,max_value,default_value)[/code]. Font variations allow for continuous change of glyph characteristics along some given design axis, such as weight, width or slant. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]char[/code] is available in the font. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports glyph outlines. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports given language (ISO 639 code). - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code], if font supports given script (ISO 15924 code). - - - - - - + + + Remove language support override. - - - - - - + + + Removes script support override. - - - - - - + + + Sets font anti-aliasing. - - - - - - + + + Sets font distance field hint. - - - - - - + + + Enables/disables default autohinter. - - - - - - + + + Sets font hinting. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds override for [method font_is_language_supported]. - - - - + + Sets oversampling factor, shared by all font in the TextServer. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds override for [method font_is_script_supported]. - - - - - - + + + Returns extra spacing for the space character in pixels. - - - - - - + + + Sets extra spacing for the space character in pixels. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets variation coordinate [code]name[/code]. Unsupported coordinates will be silently ignored. - - - - - - + + + Converts a number from the Western Arabic (0..9) to the numeral systems used in [code]language[/code]. - - - - + + Frees an object created by this [TextServer]. - - - - - - + + + Returns size of the replacement character (box with character hexadecimal code that is drawn in place of invalid characters). - - + Returns the name of the server interface. - - + Returns list of available system fonts. Note: This method is supported by servers with the [code]FEATURE_FONT_SYSTEM[/code] feature. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]rid[/code] is valid resource owned by this text server. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the server supports a feature. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if locale is right-to-left. - - - - + + Loads optional TextServer database (e.g. ICU break iterators and dictionaries). Note: This function should be called before any other TextServer functions used, otherwise it won't have any effect. - - - - + + Converts readable feature, variation, script or language name to OpenType tag. - - - - - - + + + Converts a number from the numeral systems used in [code]language[/code] to Western Arabic (0..9). - - - - + + Returns percent sign used in the [code]language[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds inline object to the text buffer, [code]key[/code] must be unique. In the text, object is represented as [code]length[/code] object replacement characters. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - +}" /> + Adds text span and font to draw it to the text buffer. - - - - + + Clears text buffer (removes text and inline objects). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Draw shaped text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the leftmost point of the baseline (for horizontal layout) or topmost point of the baseline (for vertical layout). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + Draw the outline of the shaped text into a canvas item at a given position, with [code]color[/code]. [code]pos[/code] specifies the leftmost point of the baseline (for horizontal layout) or topmost point of the baseline (for vertical layout). - - - - - - - - + + + + Adjusts text with to fit to specified width, returns new text width. - - - - + + Returns the text ascent (number of pixels above the baseline for horizontal layout or to the left of baseline for vertical). Note: overall ascent can be higher than font ascent, if some glyphs are displaced from the baseline. - - - - - - + + + Returns shapes of the carets corresponding to the character offset [code]position[/code] in the text. Returned caret shape is 1 pixel wide rectangle. - - - - + + Returns the text descent (number of pixels below the baseline for horizontal layout or to the right of baseline for vertical). Note: overall descent can be higher than font descent, if some glyphs are displaced from the baseline. - - - - + + Returns direction of the text. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns dominant direction of in the range of text. - - - - + + Returns text glyphs. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Breaks text to the lines and returns character ranges for each line. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Breaks text to the lines and columns. Returns character ranges for each segment. - - - - - - + + + Returns bounding rectangle of the inline object. - - - - + + Returns array of inline objects. - - - - + + Returns text orientation. - - - - + + Sets text orientation. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if text buffer is configured to display control characters. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if text buffer is configured to display hexadecimal codes in place of invalid characters. Note: If set to [code]false[/code], nothing is displayed in place of invalid characters. - - - - + + Returns substring buffer character range in the parent buffer. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns selection rectangles for the specified character range. - - - - + + Returns size of the text. - - - - + + Returns pixel offset of the underline below the baseline. - - - - + + Returns thickness of the underline. - - - - + + Returns width (for horizontal layout) or height (for vertical) of the text. - - - - + + Breaks text into words and returns array of character ranges. - - - - - - + + + Returns grapheme index at the specified pixel offset at the baseline, or [code]-1[/code] if none is found. - - - - - - + + + Returns caret character offset at the specified pixel offset at the baseline. This function always returns a valid position. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if buffer is successfully shaped. - - - - - - + + + Returns composite character end position closest to the [code]pos[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Trims text if it exceeds the given width. - - - - - - + + + Returns composite character start position closest to the [code]pos[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets new size and alignment of embedded object. - - - - - - + + + Overrides BiDi for the structured text. Override ranges should cover full source text without overlaps. BiDi algorithm will be used on each range separately. - - - - - - + + + Sets desired text direction. If set to [code]TEXT_DIRECTION_AUTO[/code], direction will be detected based on the buffer contents and current locale. Note: Direction is ignored if server does not support [code]FEATURE_BIDI_LAYOUT[/code] feature. - - - - - - + + + Sets desired text orientation. Note: Orientation is ignored if server does not support [code]FEATURE_VERTICAL_LAYOUT[/code] feature. - - - - - - + + + If set to [code]true[/code] text buffer will display control characters. - - - - - - + + + If set to [code]true[/code] text buffer will display invalid characters as hexadecimal codes, otherwise nothing is displayed. - - - - + + Shapes buffer if it's not shaped. Returns [code]true[/code] if the string is shaped successfully. Note: It is not necessary to call this function manually, buffer will be shaped automatically as soon as any of its output data is requested. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns text buffer for the substring of the text in the [code]shaped[/code] text buffer (including inline objects). - - - - - - + + + Aligns shaped text to the given tab-stops. - - - - + + Converts OpenType tag to readable feature, variation, script or language name. diff --git a/doc/classes/TextServerManager.xml b/doc/classes/TextServerManager.xml index 29586f30b4b..b1dd3145448 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextServerManager.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextServerManager.xml @@ -11,67 +11,54 @@ - - - - + + Finds an interface by its name. - - - - + + Returns the interface registered at a given index. - - + Returns the number of interfaces currently registered. - - - - + + Returns text server supported features (binary OR). - - - - + + Returns the interface name registered at a given index. - - + Returns a list of available interfaces the index and name of each interface. - - + Returns the primary [TextServer] interface. - - - - + + Sets (and initializes it if required) interface registered at a given index as the primary. Invalidates all references to the fonts and text buffers. diff --git a/doc/classes/Texture2D.xml b/doc/classes/Texture2D.xml index 35b719ae487..bf5ddeb4ab7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Texture2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Texture2D.xml @@ -13,87 +13,64 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Draws the texture using a [CanvasItem] with the [RenderingServer] API at the specified [code]position[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Draws the texture using a [CanvasItem] with the [RenderingServer] API. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Draws a part of the texture using a [CanvasItem] with the [RenderingServer] API. - - + Returns the texture height. - - + Returns an [Image] that is a copy of data from this [Texture2D]. [Image]s can be accessed and manipulated directly. - - + Returns the texture size. - - + Returns the texture width. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Texture2D] has an alpha channel. diff --git a/doc/classes/Texture3D.xml b/doc/classes/Texture3D.xml index 85e940716dc..8ba0d7d4b9b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Texture3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Texture3D.xml @@ -8,38 +8,32 @@ - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/TextureLayered.xml b/doc/classes/TextureLayered.xml index d81c3c7c5ab..dd8c709049d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextureLayered.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextureLayered.xml @@ -10,50 +10,42 @@ - - + Returns the current format being used by this texture. See [enum Image.Format] for details. - - + Returns the height of the texture. Height is typically represented by the Y-axis. - - - - + + Returns an [Image] resource with the data from specified [code]layer[/code]. - - + - - + - - + Returns the width of the texture. Width is typically represented by the X-axis. - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/TextureProgressBar.xml b/doc/classes/TextureProgressBar.xml index 59cde536ad3..9da89ebe43f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TextureProgressBar.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TextureProgressBar.xml @@ -10,20 +10,15 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Theme.xml b/doc/classes/Theme.xml index 969d8ab2a42..1124fb80846 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Theme.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Theme.xml @@ -12,625 +12,464 @@ - - + Clears all values on the theme. - - - - - - + + + Clears the [Color] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Clears the constant at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Clears the [Font] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Clears the font size [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Clears the icon at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Clears [StyleBox] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Clears the theme item of [code]data_type[/code] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Unmarks [code]theme_type[/code] as being a variation of any other type. - - + Sets the theme's values to a copy of the default theme values. - - - - + + Sets the theme's values to a copy of a given theme. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Color] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Returns all the [Color]s as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each [Color]'s name, for use in [method get_color], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - + Returns all the [Color] types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_color] and/or [method get_color_list]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the constant at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Returns all the constants as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each constant's name, for use in [method get_constant], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - + Returns all the constant types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_constant] and/or [method get_constant_list]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Font] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Returns all the [Font]s as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each [Font]'s name, for use in [method get_font], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the font size at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Returns all the font sizes as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each font size name, for use in [method get_font_size], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - + Returns all the font size types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_font_size] and/or [method get_font_size_list]. - - + Returns all the [Font] types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_font] and/or [method get_font_list]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the icon [Texture2D] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - + + Returns all the icons as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each [Texture2D]'s name, for use in [method get_icon], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - + Returns all the icon types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_icon] and/or [method get_icon_list]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [StyleBox] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. Valid [code]name[/code]s may be found using [method get_stylebox_list]. Valid [code]theme_type[/code]s may be found using [method get_stylebox_type_list]. - - - - + + Returns all the [StyleBox]s as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each [StyleBox]'s name, for use in [method get_stylebox], if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. Valid [code]theme_type[/code]s may be found using [method get_stylebox_type_list]. - - + Returns all the [StyleBox] types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_stylebox] and/or [method get_stylebox_list]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the theme item of [code]data_type[/code] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. Valid [code]name[/code]s may be found using [method get_theme_item_list] or a data type specific method. Valid [code]theme_type[/code]s may be found using [method get_theme_item_type_list] or a data type specific method. - - - - - - + + + Returns all the theme items of [code]data_type[/code] as a [PackedStringArray] filled with each theme items's name, for use in [method get_theme_item] or a data type specific method, if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. Valid [code]theme_type[/code]s may be found using [method get_theme_item_type_list] or a data type specific method. - - - - + + Returns all the theme items of [code]data_type[/code] types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in [method get_theme_item], [method get_theme_item_list] or data type specific methods. - - + Returns all the theme types as a [PackedStringArray] filled with unique type names, for use in other [code]get_*[/code] functions of this theme. - - - - + + Returns the base theme type if [code]theme_type[/code] is a valid variation type. Returns an empty string otherwise. - - - - + + Returns a list of all variation for the given [code]base_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [Color] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if constant with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [Font] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if font size with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if icon [Texture2D] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [StyleBox] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a theme item of [code]data_type[/code] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]theme_type[/code] is marked as a variation of [code]base_type[/code] in this theme. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames the [Color] at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames the constant at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames the [Font] at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames the font size [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames the icon at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Renames [StyleBox] at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Renames the theme item of [code]data_type[/code] at [code]old_name[/code] to [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. If [code]name[/code] is already taken, this method fails. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the theme's [Color] to [code]color[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the theme's constant to [code]constant[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the theme's [Font] to [code]font[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the theme's font size to [code]font_size[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the theme's icon [Texture2D] to [code]texture[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets theme's [StyleBox] to [code]stylebox[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Creates [code]theme_type[/code] if the theme does not have it. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the theme item of [code]data_type[/code] to [code]value[/code] at [code]name[/code] in [code]theme_type[/code]. Does nothing if the [code]value[/code] type does not match [code]data_type[/code]. @@ -638,12 +477,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Marks [code]theme_type[/code] as being a variation of [code]base_type[/code]. This adds [code]theme_type[/code] as a suggested option for [member Control.theme_type_variation] on a [Control] that is of the [code]base_type[/code] class. diff --git a/doc/classes/Thread.xml b/doc/classes/Thread.xml index 5ac9416b72f..b553aad5189 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Thread.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Thread.xml @@ -14,38 +14,30 @@ - - + Returns the current [Thread]'s ID, uniquely identifying it among all threads. If the [Thread] is not running this returns an empty string. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [Thread] is currently active. An active [Thread] cannot start work on a new method but can be joined with [method wait_to_finish]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Starts a new [Thread] that runs [code]method[/code] on object [code]instance[/code] with [code]userdata[/code] passed as an argument. Even if no userdata is passed, [code]method[/code] must accept one argument and it will be null. The [code]priority[/code] of the [Thread] can be changed by passing a value from the [enum Priority] enum. Returns [constant OK] on success, or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] on failure. - - + Joins the [Thread] and waits for it to finish. Returns what the method called returned. diff --git a/doc/classes/TileData.xml b/doc/classes/TileData.xml index bb793024eb7..b5031cfc632 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TileData.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TileData.xml @@ -8,208 +8,149 @@ - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/TileMap.xml b/doc/classes/TileMap.xml index e6f696d27cc..957619ad817 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TileMap.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TileMap.xml @@ -18,117 +18,89 @@ - - + Clears all cells. - - + Clears cells that do not exist in the tileset. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + Returns a [Vector2] array with the positions of all cells containing a tile from the tileset (i.e. a tile index different from [code]-1[/code]). - - + Returns a rectangle enclosing the used (non-empty) tiles of the map. - - - - + + Returns the local position corresponding to the given tilemap (grid-based) coordinates. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Sets the tile index for the cell given by a Vector2i. - - + Updates the tile map's quadrants, allowing things such as navigation and collision shapes to be immediately used if modified. - - - - + + Returns the tilemap (grid-based) coordinates corresponding to the given local position. diff --git a/doc/classes/TileSet.xml b/doc/classes/TileSet.xml index 8185b09a30f..27e31f25a4d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TileSet.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TileSet.xml @@ -18,410 +18,292 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/TileSetAtlasSource.xml b/doc/classes/TileSetAtlasSource.xml index 8482c356d77..8caa3a7c39b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TileSetAtlasSource.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TileSetAtlasSource.xml @@ -8,186 +8,136 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - - - + + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/TileSetScenesCollectionSource.xml b/doc/classes/TileSetScenesCollectionSource.xml index 1a00eb51c07..a44f519a4ca 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TileSetScenesCollectionSource.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TileSetScenesCollectionSource.xml @@ -8,144 +8,107 @@ - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + diff --git a/doc/classes/Time.xml b/doc/classes/Time.xml index 0c7c090e97e..24ce30154d4 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Time.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Time.xml @@ -13,81 +13,63 @@ - - - - + + Returns the current date as a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]weekday[/code], and [code]dst[/code] (Daylight Savings Time). The returned values are in the system's local time when [code]utc[/code] is false, otherwise they are in UTC. - - - - + + Converts the given Unix timestamp to a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], and [code]weekday[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the current date as an ISO 8601 date string (YYYY-MM-DD). The returned values are in the system's local time when [code]utc[/code] is false, otherwise they are in UTC. - - - - + + Converts the given Unix timestamp to an ISO 8601 date string (YYYY-MM-DD). - - - - - - + + + Converts the given ISO 8601 date and time string (YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS) to a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]weekday[/code], [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. If [code]weekday[/code] is false, then the [code]weekday[/code] entry is excluded (the calculation is relatively expensive). - - - - + + Returns the current date as a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]weekday[/code], [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. - - - - + + Converts the given Unix timestamp to a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], and [code]weekday[/code]. The returned Dictionary's values will be the same as the [method get_datetime_dict_from_system] if the Unix timestamp is the current time, with the exception of Daylight Savings Time as it cannot be determined from the epoch. - - - - - - + + + Converts the given dictionary of keys to an ISO 8601 date and time string (YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS). The given dictionary can be populated with the following keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. Any other entries (including [code]dst[/code]) are ignored. @@ -96,12 +78,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Returns the current date and time as a dictionary of keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]weekday[/code], [code]dst[/code] (Daylight Savings Time), [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. The returned values are in the system's local time when [code]utc[/code] is false, otherwise they are in UTC. @@ -109,81 +88,65 @@ - - - - - - + + + Converts the given Unix timestamp to an ISO 8601 date and time string (YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS). If [code]use_space[/code] is true, use a space instead of the letter T in the middle. - - + Returns the amount of time passed in milliseconds since the engine started. - - + Returns the amount of time passed in microseconds since the engine started. - - - - + + Returns the current time as a dictionary of keys: [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. The returned values are in the system's local time when [code]utc[/code] is false, otherwise they are in UTC. - - - - + + Converts the given time to a dictionary of keys: [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the current time as an ISO 8601 time string (HH:MM:SS). The returned values are in the system's local time when [code]utc[/code] is false, otherwise they are in UTC. - - - - + + Converts the given Unix timestamp to an ISO 8601 time string (HH:MM:SS). - - + Returns the current time zone as a dictionary of keys: [code]bias[/code] and [code]name[/code]. The [code]bias[/code] value is the offset from UTC in minutes, since not all time zones are multiples of an hour from UTC. - - - - + + Converts a dictionary of time values to a Unix timestamp. The given dictionary can be populated with the following keys: [code]year[/code], [code]month[/code], [code]day[/code], [code]hour[/code], [code]minute[/code], and [code]second[/code]. Any other entries (including [code]dst[/code]) are ignored. @@ -192,17 +155,14 @@ - - - - + + Converts the given ISO 8601 date and/or time string to a Unix timestamp. The string can contain a date only, a time only, or both. - - + Returns the current Unix timestamp in seconds based on the system time. diff --git a/doc/classes/Timer.xml b/doc/classes/Timer.xml index 807d8033c15..b91f159160e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Timer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Timer.xml @@ -12,25 +12,21 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the timer is stopped. - - - - + + Starts the timer. Sets [code]wait_time[/code] to [code]time_sec[/code] if [code]time_sec > 0[/code]. This also resets the remaining time to [code]wait_time[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] this method will not resume a paused timer. See [member paused]. - - + Stops the timer. diff --git a/doc/classes/TouchScreenButton.xml b/doc/classes/TouchScreenButton.xml index bb4c17c531e..e75a41a9360 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TouchScreenButton.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TouchScreenButton.xml @@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this button is currently pressed. diff --git a/doc/classes/Transform2D.xml b/doc/classes/Transform2D.xml index 4f9b59c1882..2c3eda1e070 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Transform2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Transform2D.xml @@ -15,243 +15,190 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Transform2D] set to [constant IDENTITY]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Transform2D] as a copy of the given [Transform2D]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs the transform from a given angle (in radians) and position. - - - - - - - - + + + + Constructs the transform from 3 [Vector2] values representing [member x], [member y], and the [member origin] (the three column vectors). - - + Returns the inverse of the transform, under the assumption that the transformation is composed of rotation, scaling and translation. - - - - + + Returns a vector transformed (multiplied) by the basis matrix. This method does not account for translation (the origin vector). - - - - + + Returns a vector transformed (multiplied) by the inverse basis matrix. This method does not account for translation (the origin vector). - - + Returns the transform's origin (translation). - - + Returns the transform's rotation (in radians). - - + Returns the scale. - - - - - - + + + Returns a transform interpolated between this transform and another by a given [code]weight[/code] (on the range of 0.0 to 1.0). - - + Returns the inverse of the transform, under the assumption that the transformation is composed of rotation and translation (no scaling, use [method affine_inverse] for transforms with scaling). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this transform and [code]transform[/code] are approximately equal, by calling [code]is_equal_approx[/code] on each component. - - - - + + Returns a copy of the transform rotated such that it's rotation on the X-axis points towards the [code]target[/code] position. Operations take place in global space. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Transform2D], including the origin vector, which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Transform2D], including the origin vector, which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + Returns the transform with the basis orthogonal (90 degrees), and normalized axis vectors (scale of 1 or -1). - - - - + + Rotates the transform by the given angle (in radians), using matrix multiplication. - - - - + + Scales the transform by the given scale factor, using matrix multiplication. - - - - + + Sets the transform's rotation (in radians). - - - - + + Translates the transform by the given offset, relative to the transform's basis vectors. Unlike [method rotated] and [method scaled], this does not use matrix multiplication. diff --git a/doc/classes/Transform3D.xml b/doc/classes/Transform3D.xml index 5410cbced7b..53cdfd53c90 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Transform3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Transform3D.xml @@ -17,88 +17,67 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Transform3D] set to [constant IDENTITY]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Transform3D] as a copy of the given [Transform3D]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a Transform3D from a [Basis] and [Vector3]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Constructs a Transform3D from four [Vector3] values (matrix columns). Each axis corresponds to local basis vectors (some of which may be scaled). - - + Returns the inverse of the transform, under the assumption that the transformation is composed of rotation, scaling and translation. - - - - - - + + + Interpolates the transform to other Transform3D by weight amount (on the range of 0.0 to 1.0). - - + Returns the inverse of the transform, under the assumption that the transformation is composed of rotation and translation (no scaling, use affine_inverse for transforms with scaling). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this transform and [code]transform[/code] are approximately equal, by calling [code]is_equal_approx[/code] on each component. - - - - - - + + + Returns a copy of the transform rotated such that its -Z axis points towards the [code]target[/code] position. The transform will first be rotated around the given [code]up[/code] vector, and then fully aligned to the target by a further rotation around an axis perpendicular to both the [code]target[/code] and [code]up[/code] vectors. @@ -106,103 +85,79 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Transform3D], including the origin vector, which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + This operator multiplies all components of the [Transform3D], including the origin vector, which scales it uniformly. - - - - + + - - + Returns the transform with the basis orthogonal (90 degrees), and normalized axis vectors. - - - - - - + + + Rotates the transform around the given axis by the given angle (in radians), using matrix multiplication. The axis must be a normalized vector. - - - - + + Scales basis and origin of the transform by the given scale factor, using matrix multiplication. - - - - + + Translates the transform by the given offset, relative to the transform's basis vectors. Unlike [method rotated] and [method scaled], this does not use matrix multiplication. diff --git a/doc/classes/Translation.xml b/doc/classes/Translation.xml index d286c6cf0cd..4b83a2abf5e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Translation.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Translation.xml @@ -12,80 +12,59 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a message if nonexistent, followed by its translation. An additional context could be used to specify the translation context or differentiate polysemic words. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds a message involving plural translation if nonexistent, followed by its translation. An additional context could be used to specify the translation context or differentiate polysemic words. - - - - - - + + + Erases a message. - - - - - - + + + Returns a message's translation. - - + Returns the number of existing messages. - - + Returns all the messages (keys). - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns a message's translation involving plurals. The number [code]n[/code] is the number or quantity of the plural object. It will be used to guide the translation system to fetch the correct plural form for the selected language. diff --git a/doc/classes/TranslationServer.xml b/doc/classes/TranslationServer.xml index 664cb3e2e3d..655c16b0cdc 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TranslationServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TranslationServer.xml @@ -12,94 +12,73 @@ - - - - + + Adds a [Translation] resource. - - + Clears the server from all translations. - - + Returns an Array of all loaded locales of the game. - - + Returns the current locale of the game. - - - - + + Returns a locale's language and its variant (e.g. [code]"en_US"[/code] would return [code]"English (United States)"[/code]). - - - - + + Returns the [Translation] instance based on the [code]locale[/code] passed in. It will return a [code]nullptr[/code] if there is no [Translation] instance that matches the [code]locale[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the given translation from the server. - - - - + + Sets the locale of the game. - - - - - - + + + Returns the current locale's translation for the given message (key) and context. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns the current locale's translation for the given message (key), plural_message and context. The number [code]n[/code] is the number or quantity of the plural object. It will be used to guide the translation system to fetch the correct plural form for the selected language. diff --git a/doc/classes/Tree.xml b/doc/classes/Tree.xml index b498b9bb900..c7c2c04256f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Tree.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Tree.xml @@ -36,35 +36,28 @@ - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the column titles are being shown. - - + Clears the tree. This removes all items. - - - - + + Removes all OpenType features from the item's text. - - - - - - + + + Creates an item in the tree and adds it as a child of [code]parent[/code]. If [code]parent[/code] is [code]null[/code], the root item will be the parent, or the new item will be the root itself if the tree is empty. @@ -72,15 +65,13 @@ - - + Edits the selected tree item as if it was clicked. The item must be set editable with [method TreeItem.set_editable]. Returns [code]true[/code] if the item could be edited. Fails if no item is selected. - - + Makes the currently focused cell visible. This will scroll the tree if necessary. In [constant SELECT_ROW] mode, this will not do horizontal scrolling, as all the cells in the selected row is focused logically. @@ -88,81 +79,63 @@ - - - - + + Returns the column index at [code]position[/code], or -1 if no item is there. - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns the column's title. - - - - + + Returns column title base writing direction. - - - - + + Returns column title language code. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] of the column title. - - - - + + Returns the column's width in pixels. - - + Returns the rectangle for custom popups. Helper to create custom cell controls that display a popup. See [method TreeItem.set_cell_mode]. - - - - + + Returns the drop section at [code]position[/code], or -100 if no item is there. Values -1, 0, or 1 will be returned for the "above item", "on item", and "below item" drop sections, respectively. See [enum DropModeFlags] for a description of each drop section. @@ -170,8 +143,7 @@ - - + Returns the currently edited item. Can be used with [signal item_edited] to get the item that was modified. [codeblocks] @@ -197,66 +169,54 @@ - - + Returns the column for the currently edited item. - - - - - - + + + Returns the rectangle area for the specified item. If [code]column[/code] is specified, only get the position and size of that column, otherwise get the rectangle containing all columns. - - - - + + Returns the tree item at the specified position (relative to the tree origin position). - - - - + + Returns the next selected item after the given one, or [code]null[/code] if the end is reached. If [code]from[/code] is [code]null[/code], this returns the first selected item. - - + Returns the last pressed button's index. - - + Returns the tree's root item, or [code]null[/code] if the tree is empty. - - + Returns the current scrolling position. - - + Returns the currently focused item, or [code]null[/code] if no item is focused. In [constant SELECT_ROW] and [constant SELECT_SINGLE] modes, the focused item is same as the selected item. In [constant SELECT_MULTI] mode, the focused item is the item under the focus cursor, not necessarily selected. @@ -264,8 +224,7 @@ - - + Returns the currently focused column, or -1 if no column is focused. In [constant SELECT_SINGLE] mode, the focused column is the selected column. In [constant SELECT_ROW] mode, the focused column is always 0 if any item is selected. In [constant SELECT_MULTI] mode, the focused column is the column under the focus cursor, and there are not necessarily any column selected. @@ -273,123 +232,90 @@ - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Causes the [Tree] to jump to the specified item. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Overrides the calculated minimum width of a column. It can be set to `0` to restore the default behavior. Columns that have the "Expand" flag will use their "min_width" in a similar fashion to [member Control.size_flags_stretch_ratio]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the column will have the "Expand" flag of [Control]. Columns that have the "Expand" flag will use their "min_width" in a similar fashion to [member Control.size_flags_stretch_ratio]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets the title of a column. - - - - - - + + + Sets column title base writing direction. - - - - - - + + + Sets language code of column title used for line-breaking and text shaping algorithms, if left empty current locale is used instead. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] for the column title. - - - - + + If [code]true[/code], column titles are visible. @@ -429,12 +355,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a button on the tree was pressed (see [method TreeItem.add_button]). @@ -445,29 +368,25 @@ - - + Emitted when a column's title is pressed. - - + Emitted when a cell with the [constant TreeItem.CELL_MODE_CUSTOM] is clicked to be edited. - - + Emitted when the right mouse button is pressed in the empty space of the tree. - - + Emitted when the right mouse button is pressed if right mouse button selection is active and the tree is empty. @@ -478,8 +397,7 @@ - - + Emitted when an item is collapsed by a click on the folding arrow. @@ -505,8 +423,7 @@ - - + Emitted when an item is selected with the right mouse button. @@ -517,12 +434,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Emitted instead of [code]item_selected[/code] if [code]select_mode[/code] is [constant SELECT_MULTI]. diff --git a/doc/classes/TreeItem.xml b/doc/classes/TreeItem.xml index 85c9caa101d..944b9fdc06e 100644 --- a/doc/classes/TreeItem.xml +++ b/doc/classes/TreeItem.xml @@ -11,811 +11,611 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a button with [Texture2D] [code]button[/code] at column [code]column[/code]. The [code]button_idx[/code] index is used to identify the button when calling other methods. If not specified, the next available index is used, which may be retrieved by calling [method get_button_count] immediately after this method. Optionally, the button can be [code]disabled[/code] and have a [code]tooltip[/code]. - - - - + + Calls the [code]method[/code] on the actual TreeItem and its children recursively. Pass parameters as a comma separated list. - - - - + + Resets the background color for the given column to default. - - - - + + Resets the color for the given column to default. - - - - + + Removes all OpenType features. - - - - + + Creates an item and adds it as a child. The new item will be inserted as position [code]idx[/code] (the default value [code]-1[/code] means the last position), or it will be the last child if [code]idx[/code] is higher than the child count. - - - - + + Deselects the given column. - - - - - - + + + Removes the button at index [code]button_idx[/code] in column [code]column[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Texture2D] of the button at index [code]button_idx[/code] in column [code]column[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the number of buttons in column [code]column[/code]. May be used to get the most recently added button's index, if no index was specified. - - - - - - + + + Returns the tooltip string for the button at index [code]button_idx[/code] in column [code]column[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the column's cell mode. - - - - + + Returns a child item by its index (see [method get_child_count]). This method is often used for iterating all children of an item. Negative indices access the children from the last one. - - + Returns the number of child items. - - + Returns an array of references to the item's children. - - - - + + Returns the custom background color of column [code]column[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the custom color of column [code]column[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [code]expand_right[/code] is set. - - + Returns the TreeItem's first child. - - - - + + Returns the given column's icon [Texture2D]. Error if no icon is set. - - - - + + Returns the column's icon's maximum width. - - - - + + Returns the [Color] modulating the column's icon. - - - - + + Returns the icon [Texture2D] region as [Rect2]. - - + Returns the node's order in the tree. For example, if called on the first child item the position is [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Returns item's text language code. - - - - + + Returns the metadata value that was set for the given column using [method set_metadata]. - - + Returns the next TreeItem in the tree or a null object if there is none. - - - - + + Returns the next visible TreeItem in the tree or a null object if there is none. If [code]wrap[/code] is enabled, the method will wrap around to the first visible element in the tree when called on the last visible element, otherwise it returns [code]null[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] of the item's text. - - + Returns the parent TreeItem or a null object if there is none. - - + Returns the previous TreeItem in the tree or a null object if there is none. - - - - + + Returns the previous visible TreeItem in the tree or a null object if there is none. If [code]wrap[/code] is enabled, the method will wrap around to the last visible element in the tree when called on the first visible element, otherwise it returns [code]null[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the value of a [constant CELL_MODE_RANGE] column. - - - - + + Returns a dictionary containing the range parameters for a given column. The keys are "min", "max", "step", and "expr". - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Gets the suffix string shown after the column value. - - - - + + Returns the given column's text. - - - - + + Returns the given column's text alignment. - - - - + + Returns item's text base writing direction. - - - - + + Returns the given column's tooltip. - - + Returns the [Tree] that owns this TreeItem. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the button at index [code]button_idx[/code] for the given column is disabled. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given column is checked. - - - - + + - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if column [code]column[/code] is editable. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if column [code]column[/code] is selectable. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if column [code]column[/code] is selected. - - - - + + Moves this TreeItem right after the given [code]item[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] You can't move to the root or move the root. - - - - + + Moves this TreeItem right before the given [code]item[/code]. [b]Note:[/b] You can't move to the root or move the root. - - - - + + Removes the given child [TreeItem] and all its children from the [Tree]. Note that it doesn't free the item from memory, so it can be reused later. To completely remove a [TreeItem] use [method Object.free]. - - - - + + Selects the column [code]column[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the given column's button [Texture2D] at index [code]button_idx[/code] to [code]button[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + If [code]true[/code], disables the button at index [code]button_idx[/code] in column [code]column[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's cell mode to [code]mode[/code]. See [enum TreeCellMode] constants. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the column [code]column[/code] is checked. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the given column's custom background color and whether to just use it as an outline. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's custom color. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the given column's custom draw callback to [code]callback[/code] method on [code]object[/code]. The [code]callback[/code] should accept two arguments: the [TreeItem] that is drawn and its position and size as a [Rect2]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], column [code]column[/code] is editable. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], column [code]column[/code] is expanded to the right. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's icon [Texture2D]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's icon's maximum width. - - - - - - + + + Modulates the given column's icon with [code]modulate[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's icon's texture region. - - - - - - + + + Sets language code of item's text used for line-breaking and text shaping algorithms, if left empty current locale is used instead. - - - - - - + + + Sets the metadata value for the given column, which can be retrieved later using [method get_metadata]. This can be used, for example, to store a reference to the original data. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets OpenType feature [code]tag[/code] for the item's text. - - - - - - + + + Sets the value of a [constant CELL_MODE_RANGE] column. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Sets the range of accepted values for a column. The column must be in the [constant CELL_MODE_RANGE] mode. If [code]expr[/code] is [code]true[/code], the edit mode slider will use an exponential scale as with [member Range.exp_edit]. - - - - - - + + + If [code]true[/code], the given column is selectable. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets a string to be shown after a column's value (for example, a unit abbreviation). - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's text value. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's text alignment. See [enum TextAlign] for possible values. - - - - - - + + + Sets item's text base writing direction. - - - - - - + + + Sets the given column's tooltip text. - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/Tween.xml b/doc/classes/Tween.xml index 4efb0a3309b..372a6e7ebf7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Tween.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Tween.xml @@ -44,18 +44,15 @@ - - - - + + Binds this [Tween] with the given [code]node[/code]. [Tween]s are processed directly by the [SceneTree], so they run independently of the animated nodes. When you bind a [Node] with the [Tween], the [Tween] will halt the animation when the object is not inside tree and the [Tween] will be automatically killed when the bound object is freed. Also [constant TWEEN_PAUSE_BOUND] will make the pausing behavior dependent on the bound node. For a shorter way to create and bind a [Tween], you can use [method Node.create_tween]. - - + Used to chain two [Tweener]s after [method set_parallel] is called with [code]true[/code]. [codeblock] @@ -67,10 +64,8 @@ - - - - + + Processes the [Tween] by given [code]delta[/code] value, in seconds. Mostly useful when the [Tween] is paused, for controlling it manually. Can also be used to end the [Tween] animation immediately, by using [code]delta[/code] longer than the whole duration. Returns [code]true[/code] if the [Tween] still has [Tweener]s that haven't finished. @@ -78,20 +73,13 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + This method can be used for manual interpolation of a value, when you don't want [Tween] to do animating for you. It's similar to [method @GlobalScope.lerp], but with support for custom transition and easing. [code]elapsed_time[/code] is the time in seconds that passed after the interping started and it's used to control the position of the interpolation. E.g. when it's equal to half of the [code]duration[/code], the interpolated value will be halfway between initial and final values. This value can also be greater than [code]duration[/code] or lower than 0, which will extrapolate the value. @@ -101,29 +89,25 @@ - - + Returns whether the [Tween] is currently running, i.e. it wasn't paused and it's not finished. - - + Returns whether the [Tween] is valid. A valid [Tween] is a [Tween] contained by the scene tree (i.e. the array from [method SceneTree.get_processed_tweens] will contain this [Tween]). [Tween] might become invalid when it has finished tweening or was killed, also when created with [code]Tween.new()[/code]. Invalid [Tween] can't have [Tweener]s appended, because it can't animate them. You can however still use [method interpolate_value]. - - + Aborts all tweening operations and invalidates the [Tween]. - - + Makes the next [Tweener] run parallelly to the previous one. Example: [codeblock] @@ -137,97 +121,78 @@ - - + Pauses the tweening. The animation can be resumed by using [method play]. - - + Resumes a paused or stopped [Tween]. - - - - + + Sets the default ease type for [PropertyTweener]s and [MethodTweener]s animated by this [Tween]. - - - - + + Sets the number of times the tweening sequence will be repeated, i.e. [code]set_loops(2)[/code] will run the animation twice. Calling this method without arguments will make the [Tween] run infinitely, until it is either killed by [method kill] or by freeing bound node, or all the animated objects have been freed (which makes further animation impossible). - - - - + + If [code]parallel[/code] is [code]true[/code], the [Tweener]s appended after this method will by default run simultaneously, as opposed to sequentially. - - - - + + Determines the behavior of the [Tween] when the [SceneTree] is paused. Check [enum TweenPauseMode] for options. Default value is [constant TWEEN_PAUSE_BOUND]. - - - - + + Determines whether the [Tween] should run during idle frame (see [method Node._process]) or physics frame (see [method Node._physics_process]. Default value is [constant TWEEN_PROCESS_IDLE]. - - - - + + Scales the speed of tweening. This affects all [Tweener]s and their delays. - - - - + + Sets the default transition type for [PropertyTweener]s and [MethodTweener]s animated by this [Tween]. - - + Stops the tweening and resets the [Tween] to its initial state. This will not remove any appended [Tweener]s. - - - - + + Creates and appends a [CallbackTweener]. This method can be used to call an arbitrary method in any object. Use [method Callable.bind] to bind additional arguments for the call. Example: object that keeps shooting every 1 second. @@ -244,10 +209,8 @@ - - - - + + Creates and appends an [IntervalTweener]. This method can be used to create delays in the tween animation, as an alternative for using the delay in other [Tweener]s or when there's no animation (in which case the [Tween] acts as a timer). [code]time[/code] is the length of the interval, in seconds. Example: creating an interval in code execution. @@ -271,16 +234,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates and appends a [MethodTweener]. This method is similar to a combination of [method tween_callback] and [method tween_property]. It calls a method over time with a tweened value provided as an argument. The value is tweened between [code]from[/code] and [code]to[/code] over the time specified by [code]duration[/code], in seconds. Use [method Callable.bind] to bind additional arguments for the call. You can use [method MethodTweener.set_ease] and [method MethodTweener.set_trans] to tweak the easing and transition of the value or [method MethodTweener.set_delay] to delay the tweening. Example: making a 3D object look from one point to another point. @@ -300,16 +258,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Creates and appends a [PropertyTweener]. This method tweens a [code]property[/code] of an [code]object[/code] between an initial value and [code]final_val[/code] in a span of time equal to [code]duration[/code], in seconds. The initial value by default is a value at the time the tweening of the [PropertyTweener] start. For example: [codeblock] @@ -336,15 +289,13 @@ - - + Emitted when a full loop is complete (see [method set_loops]), providing the loop index. This signal is not emitted after final loop, use [signal finished] instead for this case. - - + Emitted when one step of the [Tween] is complete, providing the step index. One step is either a single [Tweener] or a group of [Tweener]s running parallelly. diff --git a/doc/classes/UDPServer.xml b/doc/classes/UDPServer.xml index 5e2906450cb..eb6d42fb0ff 100644 --- a/doc/classes/UDPServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/UDPServer.xml @@ -124,54 +124,45 @@ - - + Returns the local port this server is listening to. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if a packet with a new address/port combination was received on the socket. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the socket is open and listening on a port. - - - - - - + + + Starts the server by opening a UDP socket listening on the given port. You can optionally specify a [code]bind_address[/code] to only listen for packets sent to that address. See also [method PacketPeerUDP.bind]. - - + Call this method at regular intervals (e.g. inside [method Node._process]) to process new packets. And packet from known address/port pair will be delivered to the appropriate [PacketPeerUDP], any packet received from an unknown address/port pair will be added as a pending connection (see [method is_connection_available], [method take_connection]). The maximum number of pending connection is defined via [member max_pending_connections]. - - + Stops the server, closing the UDP socket if open. Will close all connected [PacketPeerUDP] accepted via [method take_connection] (remote peers will not be notified). - - + Returns the first pending connection (connected to the appropriate address/port). Will return [code]null[/code] if no new connection is available. See also [method is_connection_available], [method PacketPeerUDP.connect_to_host]. diff --git a/doc/classes/UndoRedo.xml b/doc/classes/UndoRedo.xml index aba6183124b..44174478918 100644 --- a/doc/classes/UndoRedo.xml +++ b/doc/classes/UndoRedo.xml @@ -63,171 +63,135 @@ - - - - - - + + + Register a method that will be called when the action is committed. - - - - - - - - + + + + Register a property value change for "do". - - - - + + Register a reference for "do" that will be erased if the "do" history is lost. This is useful mostly for new nodes created for the "do" call. Do not use for resources. - - - - - - + + + Register a method that will be called when the action is undone. - - - - - - - - + + + + Register a property value change for "undo". - - - - + + Register a reference for "undo" that will be erased if the "undo" history is lost. This is useful mostly for nodes removed with the "do" call (not the "undo" call!). - - - - + + Clear the undo/redo history and associated references. Passing [code]false[/code] to [code]increase_version[/code] will prevent the version number to be increased from this. - - - - + + Commit the action. If [code]execute[/code] is true (default), all "do" methods/properties are called/set when this function is called. - - - - - - + + + Create a new action. After this is called, do all your calls to [method add_do_method], [method add_undo_method], [method add_do_property], and [method add_undo_property], then commit the action with [method commit_action]. The way actions are merged is dictated by the [code]merge_mode[/code] argument. See [enum MergeMode] for details. - - - - + + Gets the action name from its index. - - + Gets the index of the current action. - - + Gets the name of the current action, equivalent to [code]get_action_name(get_current_action())[/code]. - - + Return how many elements are in the history. - - + Gets the version. Every time a new action is committed, the [UndoRedo]'s version number is increased automatically. This is useful mostly to check if something changed from a saved version. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if a "redo" action is available. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if an "undo" action is available. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [UndoRedo] is currently committing the action, i.e. running its "do" method or property change (see [method commit_action]). - - + Redo the last action. - - + Undo the last action. diff --git a/doc/classes/Vector2.xml b/doc/classes/Vector2.xml index 498aefbef09..cb5662419e1 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Vector2.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Vector2.xml @@ -18,51 +18,41 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Vector2] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Vector2] as a copy of the given [Vector2]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [Vector2] from [Vector2i]. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a new [Vector2] from the given [code]x[/code] and [code]y[/code]. - - + Returns a new vector with all components in absolute values (i.e. positive). - - + Returns this vector's angle with respect to the positive X axis, or [code](1, 0)[/code] vector, in radians. For example, [code]Vector2.RIGHT.angle()[/code] will return zero, [code]Vector2.DOWN.angle()[/code] will return [code]PI / 2[/code] (a quarter turn, or 90 degrees), and [code]Vector2(1, -1).angle()[/code] will return [code]-PI / 4[/code] (a negative eighth turn, or -45 degrees). @@ -70,114 +60,88 @@ - - - - + + Returns the angle to the given vector, in radians. - - - - + + Returns the angle between the line connecting the two points and the X axis, in radians. - - + Returns the aspect ratio of this vector, the ratio of [member x] to [member y]. - - - - + + Returns the vector "bounced off" from a plane defined by the given normal. - - + Returns the vector with all components rounded up (towards positive infinity). - - - - - - + + + Returns a new vector with all components clamped between the components of [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code], by running [method @GlobalScope.clamp] on each component. - - - - + + Returns the cross product of this vector and [code]with[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Cubically interpolates between this vector and [code]b[/code] using [code]pre_a[/code] and [code]post_b[/code] as handles, and returns the result at position [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. - - - - + + Returns the normalized vector pointing from this vector to [code]b[/code]. This is equivalent to using [code](b - a).normalized()[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the squared distance between this vector and [code]b[/code]. This method runs faster than [method distance_to], so prefer it if you need to compare vectors or need the squared distance for some formula. - - - - + + Returns the distance between this vector and [code]to[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the dot product of this vector and [code]with[/code]. This can be used to compare the angle between two vectors. For example, this can be used to determine whether an enemy is facing the player. The dot product will be [code]0[/code] for a straight angle (90 degrees), greater than 0 for angles narrower than 90 degrees and lower than 0 for angles wider than 90 degrees. @@ -186,313 +150,244 @@ - - + Returns the vector with all components rounded down (towards negative infinity). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this vector and [code]v[/code] are approximately equal, by running [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the vector is normalized, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Returns the length (magnitude) of this vector. - - + Returns the squared length (squared magnitude) of this vector. This method runs faster than [method length], so prefer it if you need to compare vectors or need the squared distance for some formula. - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of the linear interpolation between this vector and [code]to[/code] by amount [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. - - - - + + Returns the vector with a maximum length by limiting its length to [code]length[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Moves the vector toward [code]to[/code] by the fixed [code]delta[/code] amount. - - + Returns the vector scaled to unit length. Equivalent to [code]v / v.length()[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + Returns a perpendicular vector rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise compared to the original, with the same length. - - - - + + Returns a vector composed of the [method @GlobalScope.fposmod] of this vector's components and [code]mod[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a vector composed of the [method @GlobalScope.fposmod] of this vector's components and [code]modv[/code]'s components. - - - - + + Returns the vector projected onto the vector [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the vector reflected from a plane defined by the given normal. - - - - + + Returns the vector rotated by [code]phi[/code] radians. See also [method @GlobalScope.deg2rad]. - - + Returns the vector with all components rounded to the nearest integer, with halfway cases rounded away from zero. - - + Returns the vector with each component set to one or negative one, depending on the signs of the components, or zero if the component is zero, by calling [method @GlobalScope.sign] on each component. - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of spherical linear interpolation between this vector and [code]to[/code], by amount [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. [b]Note:[/b] Both vectors must be normalized. - - - - + + Returns this vector slid along a plane defined by the given normal. - - - - + + Returns this vector with each component snapped to the nearest multiple of [code]step[/code]. This can also be used to round to an arbitrary number of decimals. diff --git a/doc/classes/Vector2i.xml b/doc/classes/Vector2i.xml index 5f190de8ca4..212b1fd22b7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Vector2i.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Vector2i.xml @@ -15,217 +15,167 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Vector2i] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Vector2i] as a copy of the given [Vector2i]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [Vector2i] from [Vector2]. The floating point coordinates will be truncated. - - - - - - + + + Constructs a new [Vector2i] from the given [code]x[/code] and [code]y[/code]. - - + Returns a new vector with all components in absolute values (i.e. positive). - - + Returns the ratio of [member x] to [member y]. - - - - - - + + + Returns a new vector with all components clamped between the components of [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code], by running [method @GlobalScope.clamp] on each component. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + Returns the vector with each component set to one or negative one, depending on the signs of the components. diff --git a/doc/classes/Vector3.xml b/doc/classes/Vector3.xml index 1361666c18e..78251b03420 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Vector3.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Vector3.xml @@ -18,143 +18,110 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Vector3] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Vector3] as a copy of the given [Vector3]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [Vector3] from [Vector3i]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a [Vector3] with the given components. - - + Returns a new vector with all components in absolute values (i.e. positive). - - - - + + Returns the unsigned minimum angle to the given vector, in radians. - - - - + + Returns the vector "bounced off" from a plane defined by the given normal. - - + Returns a new vector with all components rounded up (towards positive infinity). - - - - - - + + + Returns a new vector with all components clamped between the components of [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code], by running [method @GlobalScope.clamp] on each component. - - - - + + Returns the cross product of this vector and [code]b[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Performs a cubic interpolation between vectors [code]pre_a[/code], [code]a[/code], [code]b[/code], [code]post_b[/code] ([code]a[/code] is current), by the given amount [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. - - - - + + Returns the normalized vector pointing from this vector to [code]b[/code]. This is equivalent to using [code](b - a).normalized()[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the squared distance between this vector and [code]b[/code]. This method runs faster than [method distance_to], so prefer it if you need to compare vectors or need the squared distance for some formula. - - - - + + Returns the distance between this vector and [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the dot product of this vector and [code]b[/code]. This can be used to compare the angle between two vectors. For example, this can be used to determine whether an enemy is facing the player. The dot product will be [code]0[/code] for a straight angle (90 degrees), greater than 0 for angles narrower than 90 degrees and lower than 0 for angles wider than 90 degrees. @@ -163,372 +130,290 @@ - - + Returns a new vector with all components rounded down (towards negative infinity). - - + Returns the inverse of the vector. This is the same as [code]Vector3(1.0 / v.x, 1.0 / v.y, 1.0 / v.z)[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this vector and [code]v[/code] are approximately equal, by running [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] on each component. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the vector is normalized, [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Returns the length (magnitude) of this vector. - - + Returns the squared length (squared magnitude) of this vector. This method runs faster than [method length], so prefer it if you need to compare vectors or need the squared distance for some formula. - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of the linear interpolation between this vector and [code]to[/code] by amount [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. - - - - + + Returns the vector with a maximum length by limiting its length to [code]length[/code]. - - + Returns the axis of the vector's largest value. See [code]AXIS_*[/code] constants. If all components are equal, this method returns [constant AXIS_X]. - - + Returns the axis of the vector's smallest value. See [code]AXIS_*[/code] constants. If all components are equal, this method returns [constant AXIS_Z]. - - - - - - + + + Moves this vector toward [code]to[/code] by the fixed [code]delta[/code] amount. - - + Returns the vector scaled to unit length. Equivalent to [code]v / v.length()[/code]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - - - + + Returns the outer product with [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a vector composed of the [method @GlobalScope.fposmod] of this vector's components and [code]mod[/code]. - - - - + + Returns a vector composed of the [method @GlobalScope.fposmod] of this vector's components and [code]modv[/code]'s components. - - - - + + Returns this vector projected onto another vector [code]b[/code]. - - - - + + Returns this vector reflected from a plane defined by the given normal. - - - - - - + + + Rotates this vector around a given axis by [code]phi[/code] radians. The axis must be a normalized vector. - - + Returns this vector with all components rounded to the nearest integer, with halfway cases rounded away from zero. - - + Returns a vector with each component set to one or negative one, depending on the signs of this vector's components, or zero if the component is zero, by calling [method @GlobalScope.sign] on each component. - - - - - - + + + Returns the signed angle to the given vector, in radians. The sign of the angle is positive in a counter-clockwise direction and negative in a clockwise direction when viewed from the side specified by the [code]axis[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the result of spherical linear interpolation between this vector and [code]to[/code], by amount [code]weight[/code]. [code]weight[/code] is on the range of 0.0 to 1.0, representing the amount of interpolation. [b]Note:[/b] Both vectors must be normalized. - - - - + + Returns this vector slid along a plane defined by the given normal. - - - - + + Returns this vector with each component snapped to the nearest multiple of [code]step[/code]. This can also be used to round to an arbitrary number of decimals. - - + Returns a diagonal matrix with the vector as main diagonal. This is equivalent to a Basis with no rotation or shearing and this vector's components set as the scale. diff --git a/doc/classes/Vector3i.xml b/doc/classes/Vector3i.xml index e08bafa665e..75df182025f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Vector3i.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Vector3i.xml @@ -15,225 +15,173 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [Vector3i] with all components set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [Vector3i] as a copy of the given [Vector3i]. - - - - + + Constructs a new [Vector3i] from [Vector3]. The floating point coordinates will be truncated. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns a [Vector3i] with the given components. - - + - - - - - - + + + Returns a new vector with all components clamped between the components of [code]min[/code] and [code]max[/code], by running [method @GlobalScope.clamp] on each component. - - + Returns the axis of the vector's largest value. See [code]AXIS_*[/code] constants. If all components are equal, this method returns [constant AXIS_X]. - - + Returns the axis of the vector's smallest value. See [code]AXIS_*[/code] constants. If all components are equal, this method returns [constant AXIS_Z]. - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + Returns the vector with each component set to one or negative one, depending on the signs of the components. diff --git a/doc/classes/VehicleWheel3D.xml b/doc/classes/VehicleWheel3D.xml index fb0cb03d1cf..35f1189a062 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VehicleWheel3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VehicleWheel3D.xml @@ -12,22 +12,19 @@ - - + Returns the rotational speed of the wheel in revolutions per minute. - - + Returns a value between 0.0 and 1.0 that indicates whether this wheel is skidding. 0.0 is skidding (the wheel has lost grip, e.g. icy terrain), 1.0 means not skidding (the wheel has full grip, e.g. dry asphalt road). - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this wheel is in contact with a surface. diff --git a/doc/classes/VelocityTracker3D.xml b/doc/classes/VelocityTracker3D.xml index 2d5e3a4d305..7e97cad5bf6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VelocityTracker3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VelocityTracker3D.xml @@ -8,24 +8,19 @@ - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/doc/classes/VideoPlayer.xml b/doc/classes/VideoPlayer.xml index 12558ebbbc8..86b2dd102bd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VideoPlayer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VideoPlayer.xml @@ -13,37 +13,32 @@ - - + Returns the video stream's name, or [code]"<No Stream>"[/code] if no video stream is assigned. - - + Returns the current frame as a [Texture2D]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the video is playing. [b]Note:[/b] The video is still considered playing if paused during playback. - - + Starts the video playback from the beginning. If the video is paused, this will not unpause the video. - - + Stops the video playback and sets the stream position to 0. [b]Note:[/b] Although the stream position will be set to 0, the first frame of the video stream won't become the current frame. diff --git a/doc/classes/Viewport.xml b/doc/classes/Viewport.xml index bf58dc4d8c3..c2edab7e822 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Viewport.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Viewport.xml @@ -23,69 +23,57 @@ - - + Returns the 2D world of the viewport. - - + Returns the 3D world of the viewport, or if none the world of the parent viewport. - - + Returns the currently active 2D camera. Returns null if there are no active cameras. - - + Returns the currently active 3D camera. - - + Returns the total transform of the viewport. - - + Returns the mouse position relative to the viewport. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns the [enum ShadowAtlasQuadrantSubdiv] of the specified quadrant. - - + Returns the viewport's texture. [b]Note:[/b] Due to the way OpenGL works, the resulting [ViewportTexture] is flipped vertically. You can use [method Image.flip_y] on the result of [method Texture2D.get_image] to flip it back, for example: @@ -102,96 +90,76 @@ - - + Returns the viewport's RID from the [RenderingServer]. - - + Returns the visible rectangle in global screen coordinates. - - + Returns the drag data from the GUI, that was previously returned by [method Control._get_drag_data]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the viewport is currently performing a drag operation. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + Stops the input from propagating further down the [SceneTree]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the number of subdivisions to use in the specified quadrant. A higher number of subdivisions allows you to have more shadows in the scene at once, but reduces the quality of the shadows. A good practice is to have quadrants with a varying number of subdivisions and to have as few subdivisions as possible. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Warps the mouse to a position relative to the viewport. @@ -291,8 +259,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a Control node grabs keyboard focus. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier2D.xml b/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier2D.xml index daad200ca8e..995bd9e9d70 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier2D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier2D.xml @@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ - - + If [code]true[/code], the bounding rectangle is on the screen. [b]Note:[/b] It takes one frame for the node's visibility to be assessed once added to the scene tree, so this method will return [code]false[/code] right after it is instantiated, even if it will be on screen in the draw pass. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier3D.xml b/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier3D.xml index 85ff324fbfa..03db449c80d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisibleOnScreenNotifier3D.xml @@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ - - + If [code]true[/code], the bounding box is on the screen. [b]Note:[/b] It takes one frame for the node's visibility to be assessed once added to the scene tree, so this method will return [code]false[/code] right after it is instantiated, even if it will be on screen in the draw pass. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualInstance3D.xml b/doc/classes/VisualInstance3D.xml index 2a12254b714..2d9c266f3cd 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualInstance3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualInstance3D.xml @@ -10,59 +10,48 @@ - - + Returns the [AABB] (also known as the bounding box) for this [VisualInstance3D]. See also [method get_transformed_aabb]. - - + Returns the RID of the resource associated with this [VisualInstance3D]. For example, if the Node is a [MeshInstance3D], this will return the RID of the associated [Mesh]. - - + Returns the RID of this instance. This RID is the same as the RID returned by [method RenderingServer.instance_create]. This RID is needed if you want to call [RenderingServer] functions directly on this [VisualInstance3D]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] when the specified layer is enabled in [member layers] and [code]false[/code] otherwise. - - + Returns the transformed [AABB] (also known as the bounding box) for this [VisualInstance3D]. Transformed in this case means the [AABB] plus the position, rotation, and scale of the [Node3D]'s [Transform3D]. See also [method get_aabb]. - - - - + + Sets the resource that is instantiated by this [VisualInstance3D], which changes how the engine handles the [VisualInstance3D] under the hood. Equivalent to [method RenderingServer.instance_set_base]. - - - - - - + + + Enables a particular layer in [member layers]. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualShader.xml b/doc/classes/VisualShader.xml index 19b4acd8f10..6f65f32ed5f 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualShader.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualShader.xml @@ -11,195 +11,135 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Adds the specified node to the shader. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified nodes and ports can be connected together. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Connects the specified nodes and ports. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Connects the specified nodes and ports, even if they can't be connected. Such connection is invalid and will not function properly. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Connects the specified nodes and ports. - - - - - - + + + Returns the shader node instance with specified [code]type[/code] and [code]id[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the list of connected nodes with the specified type. - - - - + + Returns the list of all nodes in the shader with the specified type. - - - - - - + + + Returns the position of the specified node within the shader graph. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified node and port connection exist. - - - - - - + + + Removes the specified node from the shader. - - - - - - - - + + + + Replaces the specified node with a node of new class type. - - - - + + Sets the mode of this shader. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the position of the specified node. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNode.xml b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNode.xml index 199224b1907..2cff70b4f1c 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNode.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNode.xml @@ -11,53 +11,42 @@ - - + Clears the default input ports value. - - + Returns an [Array] containing default values for all of the input ports of the node in the form [code][index0, value0, index1, value1, ...][/code]. - - - - + + Returns the default value of the input [code]port[/code]. - - - - + + Removes the default value of the input [code]port[/code]. - - - - + + Sets the default input ports values using an [Array] of the form [code][index0, value0, index1, value1, ...][/code]. For example: [code][0, Vector3(0, 0, 0), 1, Vector3(0, 0, 0)][/code]. - - - - - - + + + Sets the default value for the selected input [code]port[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeCustom.xml b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeCustom.xml index 17fc2f8c4d6..f6dbd2ad43a 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeCustom.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeCustom.xml @@ -17,24 +17,18 @@ - - + Override this method to define the path to the associated custom node in the Visual Shader Editor's members dialog. The path may look like [code]"MyGame/MyFunctions/Noise"[/code]. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b]. If not overridden, the node will be filed under the "Addons" category. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Override this method to define the actual shader code of the associated custom node. The shader code should be returned as a string, which can have multiple lines (the [code]"""[/code] multiline string construct can be used for convenience). The [code]input_vars[/code] and [code]output_vars[/code] arrays contain the string names of the various input and output variables, as defined by [code]_get_input_*[/code] and [code]_get_output_*[/code] virtual methods in this class. @@ -44,18 +38,15 @@ - - + Override this method to define the description of the associated custom node in the Visual Shader Editor's members dialog. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b]. - - - - + + Override this method to add shader code on top of the global shader, to define your own standard library of reusable methods, varyings, constants, uniforms, etc. The shader code should be returned as a string, which can have multiple lines (the [code]"""[/code] multiline string construct can be used for convenience). Be careful with this functionality as it can cause name conflicts with other custom nodes, so be sure to give the defined entities unique names. @@ -64,80 +55,67 @@ - - + Override this method to define the amount of input ports of the associated custom node. Defining this method is [b]required[/b]. If not overridden, the node has no input ports. - - - - + + Override this method to define the names of input ports of the associated custom node. The names are used both for the input slots in the editor and as identifiers in the shader code, and are passed in the [code]input_vars[/code] array in [method _get_code]. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b], but recommended. If not overridden, input ports are named as [code]"in" + str(port)[/code]. - - - - + + Override this method to define the returned type of each input port of the associated custom node (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType] for possible types). Defining this method is [b]optional[/b], but recommended. If not overridden, input ports will return the [constant VisualShaderNode.PORT_TYPE_SCALAR] type. - - + Override this method to define the name of the associated custom node in the Visual Shader Editor's members dialog and graph. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b], but recommended. If not overridden, the node will be named as "Unnamed". - - + Override this method to define the amount of output ports of the associated custom node. Defining this method is [b]required[/b]. If not overridden, the node has no output ports. - - - - + + Override this method to define the names of output ports of the associated custom node. The names are used both for the output slots in the editor and as identifiers in the shader code, and are passed in the [code]output_vars[/code] array in [method _get_code]. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b], but recommended. If not overridden, output ports are named as [code]"out" + str(port)[/code]. - - - - + + Override this method to define the returned type of each output port of the associated custom node (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType] for possible types). Defining this method is [b]optional[/b], but recommended. If not overridden, output ports will return the [constant VisualShaderNode.PORT_TYPE_SCALAR] type. - - + Override this method to define the return icon of the associated custom node in the Visual Shader Editor's members dialog. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b]. If not overridden, no return icon is shown. - - + Override this method to enable high-end mark in the Visual Shader Editor's members dialog. Defining this method is [b]optional[/b]. If not overridden, it's false. diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeGroupBase.xml b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeGroupBase.xml index be3f7f173d9..a692d47638b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeGroupBase.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeGroupBase.xml @@ -10,190 +10,148 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an input port with the specified [code]type[/code] (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType]) and [code]name[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an output port with the specified [code]type[/code] (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType]) and [code]name[/code]. - - + Removes all previously specified input ports. - - + Removes all previously specified output ports. - - + Returns a free input port ID which can be used in [method add_input_port]. - - + Returns a free output port ID which can be used in [method add_output_port]. - - + Returns the number of input ports in use. Alternative for [method get_free_input_port_id]. - - + Returns a [String] description of the input ports as a colon-separated list using the format [code]id,type,name;[/code] (see [method add_input_port]). - - + Returns the number of output ports in use. Alternative for [method get_free_output_port_id]. - - + Returns a [String] description of the output ports as a colon-separated list using the format [code]id,type,name;[/code] (see [method add_output_port]). - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified input port exists. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified output port exists. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the specified port name does not override an existed port name and is valid within the shader. - - - - + + Removes the specified input port. - - - - + + Removes the specified output port. - - - - - - + + + Renames the specified input port. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified input port's type (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType]). - - - - + + Defines all input ports using a [String] formatted as a colon-separated list: [code]id,type,name;[/code] (see [method add_input_port]). - - - - - - + + + Renames the specified output port. - - - - - - + + + Sets the specified output port's type (see [enum VisualShaderNode.PortType]). - - - - + + Defines all output ports using a [String] formatted as a colon-separated list: [code]id,type,name;[/code] (see [method add_output_port]). diff --git a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeInput.xml b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeInput.xml index 067f78dffe0..dd62d668eb7 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeInput.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VisualShaderNodeInput.xml @@ -11,8 +11,7 @@ - - + Returns a translated name of the current constant in the Godot Shader Language. E.g. [code]"ALBEDO"[/code] if the [member input_name] equal to [code]"albedo"[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/VoxelGI.xml b/doc/classes/VoxelGI.xml index 5b395becb76..eceb651d5ee 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VoxelGI.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VoxelGI.xml @@ -14,19 +14,15 @@ - - - - - - + + + Bakes the effect from all [GeometryInstance3D]s marked with [constant GeometryInstance3D.GI_MODE_BAKED] and [Light3D]s marked with either [constant Light3D.BAKE_DYNAMIC] or [constant Light3D.BAKE_STATIC]. If [code]create_visual_debug[/code] is [code]true[/code], after baking the light, this will generate a [MultiMesh] that has a cube representing each solid cell with each cube colored to the cell's albedo color. This can be used to visualize the [VoxelGI]'s data and debug any issues that may be occurring. - - + Calls [method bake] with [code]create_visual_debug[/code] enabled. diff --git a/doc/classes/VoxelGIData.xml b/doc/classes/VoxelGIData.xml index f6130022336..5c2c7f9dc65 100644 --- a/doc/classes/VoxelGIData.xml +++ b/doc/classes/VoxelGIData.xml @@ -9,58 +9,44 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/WeakRef.xml b/doc/classes/WeakRef.xml index 6c9a7de67f9..339c1620bf6 100644 --- a/doc/classes/WeakRef.xml +++ b/doc/classes/WeakRef.xml @@ -10,8 +10,7 @@ - - + Returns the [Object] this weakref is referring to. diff --git a/doc/classes/Window.xml b/doc/classes/Window.xml index 7b21d99d105..bc76118a56d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/Window.xml +++ b/doc/classes/Window.xml @@ -8,314 +8,239 @@ - - + - - + - - + Returns the combined minimum size from the child [Control] nodes of the window. - - - - + + - - + Returns layout direction and text writing direction. - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns the [Font] at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns the font size at [code]name[/code] if the theme has [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if [Font] with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + Returns [code]true[/code] if font size with [code]name[/code] is in [code]theme_type[/code]. Returns [code]false[/code] if the theme does not have [code]theme_type[/code]. - - - - - - + + + - - - - - - + + + - - + - - + - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if layout is right-to-left. - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + Sets layout direction and text writing direction. Right-to-left layouts are necessary for certain languages (e.g. Arabic and Hebrew). - - - - + + - - + @@ -377,8 +302,7 @@ - - + @@ -407,8 +331,7 @@ - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/X509Certificate.xml b/doc/classes/X509Certificate.xml index d2b7b20cd69..5900e68339d 100644 --- a/doc/classes/X509Certificate.xml +++ b/doc/classes/X509Certificate.xml @@ -12,19 +12,15 @@ - - - - + + Loads a certificate from [code]path[/code] ("*.crt" file). - - - - + + Saves a certificate to the given [code]path[/code] (should be a "*.crt" file). diff --git a/doc/classes/XMLParser.xml b/doc/classes/XMLParser.xml index ab5c58c51c7..4af3de8dfde 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XMLParser.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XMLParser.xml @@ -10,136 +10,111 @@ - - + Gets the amount of attributes in the current element. - - - - + + Gets the name of the attribute specified by the index in [code]idx[/code] argument. - - - - + + Gets the value of the attribute specified by the index in [code]idx[/code] argument. - - + Gets the current line in the parsed file (currently not implemented). - - - - + + Gets the value of a certain attribute of the current element by name. This will raise an error if the element has no such attribute. - - - - + + Gets the value of a certain attribute of the current element by name. This will return an empty [String] if the attribute is not found. - - + Gets the contents of a text node. This will raise an error in any other type of node. - - + Gets the name of the current element node. This will raise an error if the current node type is neither [constant NODE_ELEMENT] nor [constant NODE_ELEMENT_END]. - - + Gets the byte offset of the current node since the beginning of the file or buffer. - - + Gets the type of the current node. Compare with [enum NodeType] constants. - - - - + + Check whether the current element has a certain attribute. - - + Check whether the current element is empty (this only works for completely empty tags, e.g. [code]<element \>[/code]). - - - - + + Opens an XML file for parsing. This returns an error code. - - - - + + Opens an XML raw buffer for parsing. This returns an error code. - - + Reads the next node of the file. This returns an error code. - - - - + + Moves the buffer cursor to a certain offset (since the beginning) and read the next node there. This returns an error code. - - + Skips the current section. If the node contains other elements, they will be ignored and the cursor will go to the closing of the current element. diff --git a/doc/classes/XRAnchor3D.xml b/doc/classes/XRAnchor3D.xml index a409c79230c..ccbfab12732 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XRAnchor3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XRAnchor3D.xml @@ -12,36 +12,31 @@ - - + Returns the name given to this anchor. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the anchor is being tracked and [code]false[/code] if no anchor with this ID is currently known. - - + If provided by the [XRInterface], this returns a mesh object for the anchor. For an anchor, this can be a shape related to the object being tracked or it can be a mesh that provides topology related to the anchor and can be used to create shadows/reflections on surfaces or for generating collision shapes. - - + Returns a plane aligned with our anchor; handy for intersection testing. - - + Returns the estimated size of the plane that was detected. Say when the anchor relates to a table in the real world, this is the estimated size of the surface of that table. @@ -54,8 +49,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the mesh associated with the anchor changes or when one becomes available. This is especially important for topology that is constantly being [code]mesh_updated[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/XRController3D.xml b/doc/classes/XRController3D.xml index 5d8c23bd6f7..47ddc228239 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XRController3D.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XRController3D.xml @@ -13,54 +13,45 @@ - - + If active, returns the name of the associated controller if provided by the AR/VR SDK used. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the bound controller is active. XR systems attempt to track active controllers. - - - - + + Returns the value of the given axis for things like triggers, touchpads, etc. that are embedded into the controller. - - + Returns the ID of the joystick object bound to this. Every controller tracked by the [XRServer] that has buttons and axis will also be registered as a joystick within Godot. This means that all the normal joystick tracking and input mapping will work for buttons and axis found on the AR/VR controllers. This ID is purely offered as information so you can link up the controller with its joystick entry. - - + If provided by the [XRInterface], this returns a mesh associated with the controller. This can be used to visualize the controller. - - + Returns the hand holding this controller, if known. See [enum XRPositionalTracker.TrackerHand]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the button at index [code]button[/code] is pressed. See [enum JoyButton]. @@ -80,22 +71,19 @@ - - + Emitted when a button on this controller is pressed. - - + Emitted when a button on this controller is released. - - + Emitted when the mesh associated with the controller changes or when one becomes available. Generally speaking this will be a static mesh after becoming available. diff --git a/doc/classes/XRInterface.xml b/doc/classes/XRInterface.xml index fec98007c3c..1fb73e59b43 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XRInterface.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XRInterface.xml @@ -12,50 +12,43 @@ - - + If this is an AR interface that requires displaying a camera feed as the background, this method returns the feed ID in the [CameraServer] for this interface. - - + Returns a combination of [enum Capabilities] flags providing information about the capabilities of this interface. - - + Returns the name of this interface (OpenVR, OpenHMD, ARKit, etc). - - + Returns the resolution at which we should render our intermediate results before things like lens distortion are applied by the VR platform. - - + If supported, returns the status of our tracking. This will allow you to provide feedback to the user whether there are issues with positional tracking. - - + Returns the number of views that need to be rendered for this device. 1 for Monoscopic, 2 for Stereoscopic. - - + Call this to initialize this interface. The first interface that is initialized is identified as the primary interface and it will be used for rendering output. After initializing the interface you want to use you then need to enable the AR/VR mode of a viewport and rendering should commence. @@ -65,8 +58,7 @@ - - + Turns the interface off. diff --git a/doc/classes/XRPositionalTracker.xml b/doc/classes/XRPositionalTracker.xml index cd8cb71cd92..8cc7c872b66 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XRPositionalTracker.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XRPositionalTracker.xml @@ -13,80 +13,68 @@ - - + If this is a controller that is being tracked, the controller will also be represented by a joystick entry with this ID. - - + Returns the mesh related to a controller or anchor point if one is available. - - + Returns the controller's orientation matrix. - - + Returns the world-space controller position. - - + Returns the hand holding this tracker, if known. See [enum TrackerHand] constants. - - + Returns the internal tracker ID. This uniquely identifies the tracker per tracker type and matches the ID you need to specify for nodes such as the [XRController3D] and [XRAnchor3D] nodes. - - + Returns the controller or anchor point's name, if applicable. - - + Returns the tracker's type, which will be one of the values from the [enum XRServer.TrackerType] enum. - - - - + + Returns the transform combining this device's orientation and position. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this device is tracking orientation. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this device is tracking position. diff --git a/doc/classes/XRServer.xml b/doc/classes/XRServer.xml index 149e1777005..5dd9b75ad23 100644 --- a/doc/classes/XRServer.xml +++ b/doc/classes/XRServer.xml @@ -11,30 +11,23 @@ - - - - + + Registers an [XRInterface] object. - - - - + + Registers a new [XRPositionalTracker] that tracks a spatial location in real space. - - - - - - + + + This is an important function to understand correctly. AR and VR platforms all handle positioning slightly differently. For platforms that do not offer spatial tracking, our origin point (0,0,0) is the location of our HMD, but you have little control over the direction the player is facing in the real world. @@ -45,111 +38,91 @@ - - - - + + Clears our current primary interface if it is set to the provided interface. - - - - + + Finds an interface by its name. For instance, if your project uses capabilities of an AR/VR platform, you can find the interface for that platform by name and initialize it. - - + Returns the primary interface's transformation. - - - - + + Returns the interface registered at a given index in our list of interfaces. - - + Returns the number of interfaces currently registered with the AR/VR server. If your project supports multiple AR/VR platforms, you can look through the available interface, and either present the user with a selection or simply try to initialize each interface and use the first one that returns [code]true[/code]. - - + Returns a list of available interfaces the ID and name of each interface. - - + Returns the absolute timestamp (in μs) of the last [XRServer] commit of the AR/VR eyes to [RenderingServer]. The value comes from an internal call to [method Time.get_ticks_usec]. - - + Returns the duration (in μs) of the last frame. This is computed as the difference between [method get_last_commit_usec] and [method get_last_process_usec] when committing. - - + Returns the absolute timestamp (in μs) of the last [XRServer] process callback. The value comes from an internal call to [method Time.get_ticks_usec]. - - + Returns the reference frame transform. Mostly used internally and exposed for GDNative build interfaces. - - - - + + Returns the positional tracker at the given ID. - - + Returns the number of trackers currently registered. - - - - + + Removes this interface. - - - - + + Removes this positional tracker. @@ -165,37 +138,29 @@ - - + Emitted when a new interface has been added. - - + Emitted when an interface is removed. - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a new tracker has been added. If you don't use a fixed number of controllers or if you're using [XRAnchor3D]s for an AR solution, it is important to react to this signal to add the appropriate [XRController3D] or [XRAnchor3D] nodes related to this new tracker. - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a tracker is removed. You should remove any [XRController3D] or [XRAnchor3D] points if applicable. This is not mandatory, the nodes simply become inactive and will be made active again when a new tracker becomes available (i.e. a new controller is switched on that takes the place of the previous one). diff --git a/doc/classes/bool.xml b/doc/classes/bool.xml index 48f336d58c5..f3b16217e55 100644 --- a/doc/classes/bool.xml +++ b/doc/classes/bool.xml @@ -93,71 +93,56 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [bool] set to [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [bool] as a copy of the given [bool]. - - - - + + Cast a [float] value to a boolean value, this method will return [code]false[/code] if [code]0.0[/code] is passed in, and [code]true[/code] for all other floats. - - - - + + Cast an [int] value to a boolean value, this method will return [code]false[/code] if [code]0[/code] is passed in, and [code]true[/code] for all other ints. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if two bools are different, i.e. one is [code]true[/code] and the other is [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if left operand is [code]false[/code] and right operand is [code]true[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if two bools are equal, i.e. both are [code]true[/code] or both are [code]false[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if left operand is [code]true[/code] and right operand is [code]false[/code]. diff --git a/doc/classes/float.xml b/doc/classes/float.xml index 585c847d22b..60878eb0bd0 100644 --- a/doc/classes/float.xml +++ b/doc/classes/float.xml @@ -10,71 +10,56 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [float] set to [code]0.0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs a [float] as a copy of the given [float]. - - - - + + Cast a [bool] value to a floating-point value, [code]float(true)[/code] will be equal to 1.0 and [code]float(false)[/code] will be equal to 0.0. - - - - + + Cast an [int] value to a floating-point value, [code]float(1)[/code] will be equal to [code]1.0[/code]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if two floats are different from each other. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the integer has different value than the float. - - - - + + Multiplies two [float]s. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Vector2] by the given [float]. [codeblock] @@ -83,10 +68,8 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Vector2i] by the given [float]. [codeblock] @@ -95,37 +78,29 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Vector3] by the given [float]. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Vector3i] by the given [float]. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Quaternion] by the given [float]. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the [Color] by the given [float]. [codeblock] @@ -134,168 +109,132 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies a [float] and an [int]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Adds two floats. - - - - + + Adds a [float] and an [int]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Subtracts a float from a float. - - - - + + Subtracts an [int] from a [float]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Divides two floats. - - - - + + Divides a [float] by an [int]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left float is less than the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [float] is less than the given [int]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left integer is less than or equal to the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [float] is less than or equal to the given [int]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if both floats are exactly equal. [b]Note:[/b] Due to floating-point precision errors, consider using [method @GlobalScope.is_equal_approx] or [method @GlobalScope.is_zero_approx] instead, which are more reliable. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the [float] and the given [int] are equal. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left float is greater than the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [float] is greater than the given [int]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left float is greater than or equal to the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [float] is greater than or equal to the given [int]. - - + - - + diff --git a/doc/classes/int.xml b/doc/classes/int.xml index 95918c9007c..84a01aa0d0b 100644 --- a/doc/classes/int.xml +++ b/doc/classes/int.xml @@ -40,62 +40,49 @@ - - + Constructs a default-initialized [int] set to [code]0[/code]. - - - - + + Constructs an [int] as a copy of the given [int]. - - - - + + Cast a [bool] value to an integer value, [code]int(true)[/code] will be equals to 1 and [code]int(false)[/code] will be equals to 0. - - - - + + Cast a float value to an integer value, this method simply removes the number fractions (i.e. rounds [code]from[/code] towards zero), so for example [code]int(2.7)[/code] will be equals to 2, [code]int(0.1)[/code] will be equals to 0 and [code]int(-2.7)[/code] will be equals to -2. This operation is also called truncation. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if operands are different from each other. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if operands are different from each other. - - - - + + Returns the result of the modulo operator for two integers, i.e. the remainder after dividing both numbers. [codeblock] @@ -106,10 +93,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the result of bitwise [code]AND[/code] operation for two integers. [codeblock] @@ -126,28 +111,22 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies two [int]s. - - - - + + Multiplies an [int] and a [float]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the vector by the given integer. [codeblock] @@ -156,46 +135,36 @@ - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the integer vector by the given integer. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the vector by the given integer. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the integer vector by the given integer. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the quaternion by the given integer. - - - - + + Multiplies each component of the color by the given integer. [codeblock] @@ -204,46 +173,36 @@ - - - - + + Adds an [int] to a [float]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Adds two integers. - - - - + + Subtracts a [float] from an [int]. The result is a [float]. - - - - + + Subtracts two integers. - - - - + + Divides an [int] by a [float]. The result is a [float]. [codeblock] @@ -252,10 +211,8 @@ - - - - + + Divides two integers. The decimal part of the result is discarded (truncated). [codeblock] @@ -265,28 +222,22 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [int] is less than the given [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left integer is less than the right one. - - - - + + Performs bitwise shift left operation on the integer. Effectively the same as multiplying by a power of 2. [codeblock] @@ -296,82 +247,64 @@ - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [int] is less than or equal to the given [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left integer is less than or equal to the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the integer is equal to the given [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if both integers are equal. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [int] is greater than the given [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left integer is greater than the right one. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if this [int] is greater than or equal to the given [float]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] the left integer is greater than or equal to the right one. - - - - + + Performs bitwise shift right operation on the integer. Effectively the same as dividing by a power of 2. [codeblock] @@ -381,10 +314,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the result of bitwise [code]XOR[/code] operation for two integers. [codeblock] @@ -394,22 +325,18 @@ - - + - - + - - - - + + Returns the result of bitwise [code]OR[/code] operation for two integers. [codeblock] @@ -426,8 +353,7 @@ - - + Returns the result of bitwise [code]NOT[/code] operation for the integer. It's effectively equal to [code]-int + 1[/code]. [codeblock] diff --git a/editor/doc_tools.cpp b/editor/doc_tools.cpp index cbd4a1b9160..c752d0d4fd6 100644 --- a/editor/doc_tools.cpp +++ b/editor/doc_tools.cpp @@ -1208,8 +1208,7 @@ Error DocTools::save_classes(const String &p_default_path, const Map"); - _write_string(f, 3, ""); + _write_string(f, 3, ""); } for (int j = 0; j < m.arguments.size(); j++) { @@ -1221,12 +1220,10 @@ Error DocTools::save_classes(const String &p_default_path, const Map"); + _write_string(f, 3, ""); } else { - _write_string(f, 3, ""); + _write_string(f, 3, ""); } - - _write_string(f, 3, ""); } _write_string(f, 3, ""); @@ -1274,8 +1271,7 @@ Error DocTools::save_classes(const String &p_default_path, const Map"); for (int j = 0; j < m.arguments.size(); j++) { const DocData::ArgumentDoc &a = m.arguments[j]; - _write_string(f, 3, ""); - _write_string(f, 3, ""); + _write_string(f, 3, ""); } _write_string(f, 3, ""); diff --git a/modules/csg/doc_classes/CSGShape3D.xml b/modules/csg/doc_classes/CSGShape3D.xml index 01ec46e7074..f42ce8c379a 100644 --- a/modules/csg/doc_classes/CSGShape3D.xml +++ b/modules/csg/doc_classes/CSGShape3D.xml @@ -10,55 +10,43 @@ - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the collision mask. - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the collision mask. - - + Returns an [Array] with two elements, the first is the [Transform3D] of this node and the second is the root [Mesh] of this node. Only works when this node is the root shape. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this is a root shape and is thus the object that is rendered. - - - - - - + + + Sets individual bits on the layer mask. Use this if you only need to change one layer's value. - - - - - - + + + Sets individual bits on the collision mask. Use this if you only need to change one layer's value. diff --git a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetConnection.xml b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetConnection.xml index 523f2ad1655..c2a85ffdf87 100644 --- a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetConnection.xml +++ b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetConnection.xml @@ -11,182 +11,136 @@ - - - - - - + + + Adjusts the bandwidth limits of a host. - - - - - - - - + + + + Queues a [code]packet[/code] to be sent to all peers associated with the host over the specified [code]channel[/code]. See [ENetPacketPeer] [code]FLAG_*[/code] constants for available packet flags. - - - - + + Limits the maximum allowed channels of future incoming connections. - - - - + + Sets the compression method used for network packets. These have different tradeoffs of compression speed versus bandwidth, you may need to test which one works best for your use case if you use compression at all. [b]Note:[/b] Most games' network design involve sending many small packets frequently (smaller than 4 KB each). If in doubt, it is recommended to keep the default compression algorithm as it works best on these small packets. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Initiates a connection to a foreign [code]address[/code] using the specified [code]port[/code] and allocting the requested [code]channels[/code]. Optional [code]data[/code] can be passed during connection in the form of a 32 bit integer. Note: You must call either [method create_host] or [method create_host_bound] before calling this method. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Create an ENetHost that will allow up to [code]max_peers[/code] connected peers, each allocating up to [code]max_channels[/code] channels, optionally limiting bandwith to [code]in_bandwidth[/code] and [code]out_bandwidth[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Create an ENetHost like [method create_host] which is also bound to the given [code]bind_address[/code] and [code]bind_port[/code]. - - + Destroys the host and all resources associated with it. - - - - - - - - + + + + Configure this ENetHost to use the custom Godot extension allowing DTLS encryption for ENet clients. Call this before [method connect_to_host] to have ENet connect using DTLS with [code]certificate[/code] and [code]hostname[/code] verification. Verification can be optionally turned off via the [code]verify[/code] parameter. - - - - - - + + + Configure this ENetHost to use the custom Godot extension allowing DTLS encryption for ENet servers. Call this right after [method create_host_bound] to have ENet expect peers to connect using DTLS. - - + Sends any queued packets on the host specified to its designated peers. - - + Returns the local port to which this peer is bound. - - + Returns the maximum number of channels allowed for connected peers. - - + Returns the list of peers associated with this host. Note: This list might include some peers that are not fully connected or are still being disconnected. - - - - + + Returns and resets host statistics. See [enum HostStatistic] for more info. - - - - + + Configures the DTLS server to automatically drop new connections. Note: This method is only relevant after calling [method dtls_server_setup]. - - - - + + Waits for events on the host specified and shuttles packets between the host and its peers. The returned [Array] will have 4 elements. An [enum EventType], the [ENetPacketPeer] which generated the event, the event associated data (if any), the event associated channel (if any). If the generated event is [constant EVENT_RECEIVE], the received packet will be queued to the associated [ENetPacketPeer]. Call this function regularly to handle connections, disconnections, and to receive new packets. diff --git a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetMultiplayerPeer.xml b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetMultiplayerPeer.xml index 574010a4a20..3a37b396a45 100644 --- a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetMultiplayerPeer.xml +++ b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetMultiplayerPeer.xml @@ -13,85 +13,61 @@ - - - - - - + + + Add a new remote peer with the given [code]peer_id[/code] connected to the given [code]host[/code]. Note: The [code]host[/code] must have exactly one peer in the [constant ENetPacketPeer.STATE_CONNECTED] state. - - - - + + Closes the connection. Ignored if no connection is currently established. If this is a server it tries to notify all clients before forcibly disconnecting them. If this is a client it simply closes the connection to the server. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + Create client that connects to a server at [code]address[/code] using specified [code]port[/code]. The given address needs to be either a fully qualified domain name (e.g. [code]"www.example.com"[/code]) or an IP address in IPv4 or IPv6 format (e.g. [code]"192.168.1.1"[/code]). The [code]port[/code] is the port the server is listening on. The [code]channel_count[/code] parameter can be used to specify the number of ENet channels allocated for the connection. The [code]in_bandwidth[/code] and [code]out_bandwidth[/code] parameters can be used to limit the incoming and outgoing bandwidth to the given number of bytes per second. The default of 0 means unlimited bandwidth. Note that ENet will strategically drop packets on specific sides of a connection between peers to ensure the peer's bandwidth is not overwhelmed. The bandwidth parameters also determine the window size of a connection which limits the amount of reliable packets that may be in transit at any given time. Returns [constant OK] if a client was created, [constant ERR_ALREADY_IN_USE] if this ENetMultiplayerPeer instance already has an open connection (in which case you need to call [method close_connection] first) or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] if the client could not be created. If [code]local_port[/code] is specified, the client will also listen to the given port; this is useful for some NAT traversal techniques. - - - - + + Initialize this [MultiplayerPeer] in mesh mode. The provided [code]unique_id[/code] will be used as the local peer network unique ID once assigned as the [member MultiplayerAPI.network_peer]. In the mesh configuration you will need to set up each new peer manually using [ENetConnection] before calling [method add_mesh_peer]. While this technique is more advanced, it allows for better control over the connection process (e.g. when dealing with NAT punch-through) and for better distribution of the network load (which would otherwise be more taxing on the server). - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Create server that listens to connections via [code]port[/code]. The port needs to be an available, unused port between 0 and 65535. Note that ports below 1024 are privileged and may require elevated permissions depending on the platform. To change the interface the server listens on, use [method set_bind_ip]. The default IP is the wildcard [code]"*"[/code], which listens on all available interfaces. [code]max_clients[/code] is the maximum number of clients that are allowed at once, any number up to 4095 may be used, although the achievable number of simultaneous clients may be far lower and depends on the application. For additional details on the bandwidth parameters, see [method create_client]. Returns [constant OK] if a server was created, [constant ERR_ALREADY_IN_USE] if this ENetMultiplayerPeer instance already has an open connection (in which case you need to call [method close_connection] first) or [constant ERR_CANT_CREATE] if the server could not be created. - - - - + + Return the [ENetPacketPeer] associated to the given [code]id[/code]. - - - - + + The IP used when creating a server. This is set to the wildcard [code]"*"[/code] by default, which binds to all available interfaces. The given IP needs to be in IPv4 or IPv6 address format, for example: [code]"192.168.1.1"[/code]. diff --git a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetPacketPeer.xml b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetPacketPeer.xml index 5c9f6929742..8f0693fb016 100644 --- a/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetPacketPeer.xml +++ b/modules/enet/doc_classes/ENetPacketPeer.xml @@ -12,121 +12,94 @@ - - + Returns the number of channels allocated for communication with peer. - - + Returns the current peer state. See [enum PeerState]. - - - - + + Returns the requested [code]statistic[/code] for this peer. See [enum PeerStatistic]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the peer is currently active (i.e. the associated [ENetConnection] is still valid). - - - - + + Request a disconnection from a peer. An [constant ENetConnection.EVENT_DISCONNECT] will be generated during [method ENetConnection.service] once the disconnection is complete. - - - - + + Request a disconnection from a peer, but only after all queued outgoing packets are sent. An [constant ENetConnection.EVENT_DISCONNECT] will be generated during [method ENetConnection.service] once the disconnection is complete. - - - - + + Force an immediate disconnection from a peer. No [constant ENetConnection.EVENT_DISCONNECT] will be generated. The foreign peer is not guaranteed to receive the disconnect notification, and is reset immediately upon return from this function. - - + Sends a ping request to a peer. ENet automatically pings all connected peers at regular intervals, however, this function may be called to ensure more frequent ping requests. - - - - + + Sets the [code]ping_interval[/code] in milliseconds at which pings will be sent to a peer. Pings are used both to monitor the liveness of the connection and also to dynamically adjust the throttle during periods of low traffic so that the throttle has reasonable responsiveness during traffic spikes. - - + Forcefully disconnects a peer. The foreign host represented by the peer is not notified of the disconnection and will timeout on its connection to the local host. - - - - - - - - + + + + Queues a [code]packet[/code] to be sent over the specified [code]channel[/code]. See [code]FLAG_*[/code] constants for available packet flags. - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the timeout parameters for a peer. The timeout parameters control how and when a peer will timeout from a failure to acknowledge reliable traffic. Timeout values are expressed in milliseconds. The [code]timeout_limit[/code] is a factor that, multiplied by a value based on the average round trip time, will determine the timeout limit for a reliable packet. When that limit is reached, the timeout will be doubled, and the peer will be disconnected if that limit has reached [code]timeout_min[/code]. The [code]timeout_max[/code] parameter, on the other hand, defines a fixed timeout for which any packet must be acknowledged or the peer will be dropped. - - - - - - - - + + + + Configures throttle parameter for a peer. Unreliable packets are dropped by ENet in response to the varying conditions of the Internet connection to the peer. The throttle represents a probability that an unreliable packet should not be dropped and thus sent by ENet to the peer. By measuring fluctuations in round trip times of reliable packets over the specified [code]interval[/code], ENet will either increase the probably by the amount specified in the [code]acceleration[/code] parameter, or decrease it by the amount specified in the [code]deceleration[/code] parameter (both are ratios to [constant PACKET_THROTTLE_SCALE]). diff --git a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNative.xml b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNative.xml index 4f1530598c5..e4c5d34a2c2 100644 --- a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNative.xml +++ b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNative.xml @@ -8,26 +8,20 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + - - + - - + diff --git a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNativeLibrary.xml b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNativeLibrary.xml index 05cda05f9fe..f84d4e60f3a 100644 --- a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNativeLibrary.xml +++ b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/GDNativeLibrary.xml @@ -12,15 +12,13 @@ - - + Returns paths to all dependency libraries for the current platform and architecture. - - + Returns the path to the dynamic library file for the current platform and architecture. diff --git a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/NativeScript.xml b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/NativeScript.xml index f2e9cac6dc3..397d12a3a9c 100644 --- a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/NativeScript.xml +++ b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/NativeScript.xml @@ -8,42 +8,34 @@ - - + Returns the documentation string that was previously set with [code]godot_nativescript_set_class_documentation[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the documentation string that was previously set with [code]godot_nativescript_set_method_documentation[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the documentation string that was previously set with [code]godot_nativescript_set_property_documentation[/code]. - - - - + + Returns the documentation string that was previously set with [code]godot_nativescript_set_signal_documentation[/code]. - - + Constructs a new object of the base type with a script of this type already attached. [i]Note[/i]: Any arguments passed to this function will be ignored and not passed to the native constructor function. This will change with in a future API extension. diff --git a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/PluginScript.xml b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/PluginScript.xml index 96161010900..8e281874829 100644 --- a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/PluginScript.xml +++ b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/PluginScript.xml @@ -8,8 +8,7 @@ - - + Returns a new instance of the script. diff --git a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/VideoStreamGDNative.xml b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/VideoStreamGDNative.xml index 153988bad87..8b1a3210df2 100644 --- a/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/VideoStreamGDNative.xml +++ b/modules/gdnative/doc_classes/VideoStreamGDNative.xml @@ -11,17 +11,14 @@ - - + Returns the video file handled by this [VideoStreamGDNative]. - - - - + + Sets the video file that this [VideoStreamGDNative] resource handles. The supported extensions depend on the GDNative plugins used to expose video formats. diff --git a/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/@GDScript.xml b/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/@GDScript.xml index e68deb070d7..51b3452a3a6 100644 --- a/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/@GDScript.xml +++ b/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/@GDScript.xml @@ -11,16 +11,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns a color constructed from integer red, green, blue, and alpha channels. Each channel should have 8 bits of information ranging from 0 to 255. [code]r8[/code] red channel @@ -33,12 +28,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Asserts that the [code]condition[/code] is [code]true[/code]. If the [code]condition[/code] is [code]false[/code], an error is generated. When running from the editor, the running project will also be paused until you resume it. This can be used as a stronger form of [method @GlobalScope.push_error] for reporting errors to project developers or add-on users. [b]Note:[/b] For performance reasons, the code inside [method assert] is only executed in debug builds or when running the project from the editor. Don't include code that has side effects in an [method assert] call. Otherwise, the project will behave differently when exported in release mode. @@ -54,10 +46,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns a character as a String of the given Unicode code point (which is compatible with ASCII code). [codeblock] @@ -68,12 +58,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Converts from a type to another in the best way possible. The [code]type[/code] parameter uses the [enum Variant.Type] values. [codeblock] @@ -87,17 +74,14 @@ - - - - + + Converts a dictionary (previously created with [method inst2dict]) back to an instance. Useful for deserializing. - - + Returns an array of dictionaries representing the current call stack. [codeblock] @@ -117,10 +101,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns the passed instance converted to a dictionary (useful for serializing). [codeblock] @@ -138,10 +120,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns length of Variant [code]var[/code]. Length is the character count of String, element count of Array, size of Dictionary, etc. [b]Note:[/b] Generates a fatal error if Variant can not provide a length. @@ -152,10 +132,8 @@ - - - - + + Loads a resource from the filesystem located at [code]path[/code]. The resource is loaded on the method call (unless it's referenced already elsewhere, e.g. in another script or in the scene), which might cause slight delay, especially when loading scenes. To avoid unnecessary delays when loading something multiple times, either store the resource in a variable or use [method preload]. [b]Note:[/b] Resource paths can be obtained by right-clicking on a resource in the FileSystem dock and choosing "Copy Path" or by dragging the file from the FileSystem dock into the script. @@ -168,10 +146,8 @@ - - - - + + Returns a [Resource] from the filesystem located at [code]path[/code]. The resource is loaded during script parsing, i.e. is loaded with the script and [method preload] effectively acts as a reference to that resource. Note that the method requires a constant path. If you want to load a resource from a dynamic/variable path, use [method load]. [b]Note:[/b] Resource paths can be obtained by right clicking on a resource in the Assets Panel and choosing "Copy Path" or by dragging the file from the FileSystem dock into the script. @@ -182,15 +158,13 @@ - - + Like [method @GlobalScope.print], but prints only when used in debug mode. - - + Prints a stack track at code location, only works when running with debugger turned on. Output in the console would look something like this: @@ -200,8 +174,7 @@ - - + Returns an array with the given range. Range can be 1 argument N (0 to N-1), two arguments (initial, final-1) or three arguments (initial, final-1, increment). [codeblock] @@ -218,8 +191,7 @@ - - + Converts one or more arguments to string in the best way possible. [codeblock] @@ -231,10 +203,8 @@ - - - - + + diff --git a/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/GDScript.xml b/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/GDScript.xml index 631a102130a..72738f027a8 100644 --- a/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/GDScript.xml +++ b/modules/gdscript/doc_classes/GDScript.xml @@ -12,15 +12,13 @@ - - + Returns byte code for the script source code. - - + Returns a new instance of the script. For example: diff --git a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkeleton.xml b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkeleton.xml index 40563c9ac6b..6e83cec2526 100644 --- a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkeleton.xml +++ b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkeleton.xml @@ -8,50 +8,40 @@ - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkin.xml b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkin.xml index e20e127e524..107ca960cd3 100644 --- a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkin.xml +++ b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFSkin.xml @@ -8,44 +8,35 @@ - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFState.xml b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFState.xml index a7b5b7b43ed..ae976fc04c0 100644 --- a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFState.xml +++ b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/GLTFState.xml @@ -8,236 +8,185 @@ - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/PackedSceneGLTF.xml b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/PackedSceneGLTF.xml index a22111e9b76..d0136c64027 100644 --- a/modules/gltf/doc_classes/PackedSceneGLTF.xml +++ b/modules/gltf/doc_classes/PackedSceneGLTF.xml @@ -8,44 +8,29 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + diff --git a/modules/gridmap/doc_classes/GridMap.xml b/modules/gridmap/doc_classes/GridMap.xml index a2c8e8eabf6..8ea7384658c 100644 --- a/modules/gridmap/doc_classes/GridMap.xml +++ b/modules/gridmap/doc_classes/GridMap.xml @@ -17,119 +17,93 @@ - - + Clear all cells. - - + - - - - + + - - + Returns an array of [ArrayMesh]es and [Transform3D] references of all bake meshes that exist within the current GridMap. - - - - + + The [MeshLibrary] item index located at the given grid coordinates. If the cell is empty, [constant INVALID_CELL_ITEM] will be returned. - - - - + + The orientation of the cell at the given grid coordinates. [code]-1[/code] is returned if the cell is empty. - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the [member collision_layer]. - - - - + + Returns an individual bit on the [member collision_mask]. - - + Returns an array of [Transform3D] and [Mesh] references corresponding to the non-empty cells in the grid. The transforms are specified in world space. - - + Returns an array of [Vector3] with the non-empty cell coordinates in the grid map. - - - - - - + + + - - - - + + Returns the position of a grid cell in the GridMap's local coordinate space. - - - - + + - - - - - - - - + + + + Sets the mesh index for the cell referenced by its grid coordinates. A negative item index such as [constant INVALID_CELL_ITEM] will clear the cell. @@ -137,46 +111,33 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + - - - - - - + + + Sets an individual bit on the [member collision_layer]. - - - - - - + + + Sets an individual bit on the [member collision_mask]. - - - - + + Returns the coordinates of the grid cell containing the given point. [code]pos[/code] should be in the GridMap's local coordinate space. @@ -223,8 +184,7 @@ - - + Emitted when [member cell_size] changes. diff --git a/modules/opensimplex/doc_classes/OpenSimplexNoise.xml b/modules/opensimplex/doc_classes/OpenSimplexNoise.xml index 4d45e41cc3c..c470f3e1abf 100644 --- a/modules/opensimplex/doc_classes/OpenSimplexNoise.xml +++ b/modules/opensimplex/doc_classes/OpenSimplexNoise.xml @@ -25,90 +25,66 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Generate a noise image in [constant Image.FORMAT_L8] format with the requested [code]width[/code] and [code]height[/code], based on the current noise parameters. If [code]noise_offset[/code] is specified, then the offset value is used as the coordinates of the top-left corner of the generated noise. - - - - + + Returns the 1D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given x-coordinate. [b]Note:[/b] This method actually returns the 2D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] with fixed y-coordinate value 0.0. - - - - - - + + + Returns the 2D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given position. - - - - + + Returns the 2D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given position. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns the 3D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given position. - - - - + + Returns the 3D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given position. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns the 4D noise value [code][-1,1][/code] at the given position. - - - - + + Generate a tileable noise image in [constant Image.FORMAT_L8] format, based on the current noise parameters. Generated seamless images are always square ([code]size[/code] × [code]size[/code]). [b]Note:[/b] Seamless noise has a lower contrast compared to non-seamless noise. This is due to the way noise uses higher dimensions for generating seamless noise. diff --git a/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegEx.xml b/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegEx.xml index 7f5a0dfecb0..9c84974ff60 100644 --- a/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegEx.xml +++ b/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegEx.xml @@ -50,88 +50,67 @@ - - + This method resets the state of the object, as if it was freshly created. Namely, it unassigns the regular expression of this object. - - - - + + Compiles and assign the search pattern to use. Returns [constant OK] if the compilation is successful. If an error is encountered, details are printed to standard output and an error is returned. - - + Returns the number of capturing groups in compiled pattern. - - + Returns an array of names of named capturing groups in the compiled pattern. They are ordered by appearance. - - + Returns the original search pattern that was compiled. - - + Returns whether this object has a valid search pattern assigned. - - - - - - - - + + + + Searches the text for the compiled pattern. Returns a [RegExMatch] container of the first matching result if found, otherwise [code]null[/code]. The region to search within can be specified without modifying where the start and end anchor would be. - - - - - - - - + + + + Searches the text for the compiled pattern. Returns an array of [RegExMatch] containers for each non-overlapping result. If no results were found, an empty array is returned instead. The region to search within can be specified without modifying where the start and end anchor would be. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Searches the text for the compiled pattern and replaces it with the specified string. Escapes and backreferences such as [code]$1[/code] and [code]$name[/code] are expanded and resolved. By default, only the first instance is replaced, but it can be changed for all instances (global replacement). The region to search within can be specified without modifying where the start and end anchor would be. diff --git a/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegExMatch.xml b/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegExMatch.xml index 492519d3d9d..3cde2836cc0 100644 --- a/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegExMatch.xml +++ b/modules/regex/doc_classes/RegExMatch.xml @@ -10,37 +10,30 @@ - - - - + + Returns the end position of the match within the source string. The end position of capturing groups can be retrieved by providing its group number as an integer or its string name (if it's a named group). The default value of 0 refers to the whole pattern. Returns -1 if the group did not match or doesn't exist. - - + Returns the number of capturing groups. - - - - + + Returns the starting position of the match within the source string. The starting position of capturing groups can be retrieved by providing its group number as an integer or its string name (if it's a named group). The default value of 0 refers to the whole pattern. Returns -1 if the group did not match or doesn't exist. - - - - + + Returns the substring of the match from the source string. Capturing groups can be retrieved by providing its group number as an integer or its string name (if it's a named group). The default value of 0 refers to the whole pattern. Returns an empty string if the group did not match or doesn't exist. diff --git a/modules/theora/doc_classes/VideoStreamTheora.xml b/modules/theora/doc_classes/VideoStreamTheora.xml index cb8852d5ef7..e7bf9b202d8 100644 --- a/modules/theora/doc_classes/VideoStreamTheora.xml +++ b/modules/theora/doc_classes/VideoStreamTheora.xml @@ -11,17 +11,14 @@ - - + Returns the Ogg Theora video file handled by this [VideoStreamTheora]. - - - - + + Sets the Ogg Theora video file that this [VideoStreamTheora] resource handles. The [code]file[/code] name should have the [code].ogv[/code] extension. diff --git a/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNP.xml b/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNP.xml index 09a2c8a88c7..5b1d9dbfd1c 100644 --- a/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNP.xml +++ b/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNP.xml @@ -21,27 +21,19 @@ - - - - + + Adds the given [UPNPDevice] to the list of discovered devices. - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a mapping to forward the external [code]port[/code] (between 1 and 65535) on the default gateway (see [method get_gateway]) to the [code]internal_port[/code] on the local machine for the given protocol [code]proto[/code] (either [code]TCP[/code] or [code]UDP[/code], with UDP being the default). If a port mapping for the given port and protocol combination already exists on that gateway device, this method tries to overwrite it. If that is not desired, you can retrieve the gateway manually with [method get_gateway] and call [method add_port_mapping] on it, if any. If [code]internal_port[/code] is [code]0[/code] (the default), the same port number is used for both the external and the internal port (the [code]port[/code] value). @@ -50,32 +42,24 @@ - - + Clears the list of discovered devices. - - - - - - + + + Deletes the port mapping for the given port and protocol combination on the default gateway (see [method get_gateway]) if one exists. [code]port[/code] must be a valid port between 1 and 65535, [code]proto[/code] can be either [code]TCP[/code] or [code]UDP[/code]. See [enum UPNPResult] for possible return values. - - - - - - - - + + + + Discovers local [UPNPDevice]s. Clears the list of previously discovered devices. Filters for IGD (InternetGatewayDevice) type devices by default, as those manage port forwarding. [code]timeout[/code] is the time to wait for responses in milliseconds. [code]ttl[/code] is the time-to-live; only touch this if you know what you're doing. @@ -83,51 +67,41 @@ - - - - + + Returns the [UPNPDevice] at the given [code]index[/code]. - - + Returns the number of discovered [UPNPDevice]s. - - + Returns the default gateway. That is the first discovered [UPNPDevice] that is also a valid IGD (InternetGatewayDevice). - - + Returns the external [IP] address of the default gateway (see [method get_gateway]) as string. Returns an empty string on error. - - - - + + Removes the device at [code]index[/code] from the list of discovered devices. - - - - - - + + + Sets the device at [code]index[/code] from the list of discovered devices to [code]device[/code]. diff --git a/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNPDevice.xml b/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNPDevice.xml index f7b5386d864..b7c2ff7dd7d 100644 --- a/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNPDevice.xml +++ b/modules/upnp/doc_classes/UPNPDevice.xml @@ -10,43 +10,32 @@ - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + Adds a port mapping to forward the given external port on this [UPNPDevice] for the given protocol to the local machine. See [method UPNP.add_port_mapping]. - - - - - - + + + Deletes the port mapping identified by the given port and protocol combination on this device. See [method UPNP.delete_port_mapping]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this is a valid IGD (InternetGatewayDevice) which potentially supports port forwarding. - - + Returns the external IP address of this [UPNPDevice] or an empty string. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScript.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScript.xml index 9d51bd86a22..2327fc00093 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScript.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScript.xml @@ -13,456 +13,334 @@ - - - - + + Add a custom signal with the specified name to the VisualScript. - - - - - - + + + Add a function with the specified name to the VisualScript, and assign the root [VisualScriptFunction] node's id as [code]func_node_id[/code]. - - - - - - - - + + + + Add a node to the VisualScript. - - - - - - - - + + + + Add a variable to the VisualScript, optionally giving it a default value or marking it as exported. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Add an argument to a custom signal added with [method add_custom_signal]. - - - - + + Get the count of a custom signal's arguments. - - - - - - + + + Get the name of a custom signal's argument. - - - - - - + + + Get the type of a custom signal's argument. - - - - - - + + + Remove a specific custom signal's argument. - - - - - - - - + + + + Rename a custom signal's argument. - - - - - - - - + + + + Change the type of a custom signal's argument. - - - - - - - - + + + + Swap two of the arguments of a custom signal. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connect two data ports. The value of [code]from_node[/code]'s [code]from_port[/code] would be fed into [code]to_node[/code]'s [code]to_port[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Disconnect two data ports previously connected with [method data_connect]. - - - - + + Returns the id of a function's entry point node. - - - - + + Returns a node given its id. - - - - + + Returns a node's position in pixels. - - + Returns the current position of the center of the screen. - - - - + + Returns the default (initial) value of a variable. - - - - + + Returns whether a variable is exported. - - - - + + Returns the information for a given variable as a dictionary. The information includes its name, type, hint and usage. - - - - + + Returns whether a signal exists with the specified name. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Returns whether the specified data ports are connected. - - - - + + Returns whether a function exists with the specified name. - - - - + + Returns whether a node exists with the given id. - - - - - - - - + + + + Returns whether the specified sequence ports are connected. - - - - + + Returns whether a variable exists with the specified name. - - - - + + Remove a custom signal with the given name. - - - - + + Remove a specific function and its nodes from the script. - - - - + + Remove the node with the specified id. - - - - + + Remove a variable with the given name. - - - - - - + + + Change the name of a custom signal. - - - - - - + + + Change the name of a function. - - - - - - + + + Change the name of a variable. - - - - - - - - + + + + Connect two sequence ports. The execution will flow from of [code]from_node[/code]'s [code]from_output[/code] into [code]to_node[/code]. Unlike [method data_connect], there isn't a [code]to_port[/code], since the target node can have only one sequence port. - - - - - - - - + + + + Disconnect two sequence ports previously connected with [method sequence_connect]. - - - - + + Set the base type of the script. - - - - - - + + + Set the node position in the VisualScript graph. - - - - + + Set the screen center to the given position. - - - - - - + + + Change the default (initial) value of a variable. - - - - - - + + + Change whether a variable is exported. - - - - - - + + + Set a variable's info, using the same format as [method get_variable_info]. @@ -470,8 +348,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the ports of a node are changed. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptConstructor.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptConstructor.xml index 2f162e78b6b..4743594ec36 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptConstructor.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptConstructor.xml @@ -10,30 +10,24 @@ - - + - - + - - - - + + - - - - + + diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptCustomNode.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptCustomNode.xml index ba4eba26fd7..8aa34f8caed 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptCustomNode.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptCustomNode.xml @@ -10,153 +10,122 @@ - - + Return the node's title. - - + Return the node's category. - - + Return the count of input value ports. - - - - + + Return the specified input port's hint. See the [enum @GlobalScope.PropertyHint] hints. - - - - + + Return the specified input port's hint string. - - - - + + Return the specified input port's name. - - - - + + Return the specified input port's type. See the [enum Variant.Type] values. - - + Return the amount of output [b]sequence[/b] ports. - - - - + + Return the specified [b]sequence[/b] output's name. - - + Return the amount of output value ports. - - - - + + Return the specified output port's hint. See the [enum @GlobalScope.PropertyHint] hints. - - - - + + Return the specified output port's hint string. - - - - + + Return the specified output port's name. - - - - + + Return the specified output port's type. See the [enum Variant.Type] values. - - + Return the custom node's text, which is shown right next to the input [b]sequence[/b] port (if there is none, on the place that is usually taken by it). - - + Return the size of the custom node's working memory. See [method _step] for more details. - - + Return whether the custom node has an input [b]sequence[/b] port. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Execute the custom node's logic, returning the index of the output sequence port to use or a [String] when there is an error. The [code]inputs[/code] array contains the values of the input ports. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptEditor.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptEditor.xml index 186cd21239f..9ea889c77b2 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptEditor.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptEditor.xml @@ -8,25 +8,18 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Add a custom Visual Script node to the editor. It'll be placed under "Custom Nodes" with the [code]category[/code] as the parameter. - - - - - - + + + Remove a custom Visual Script node from the editor. Custom nodes already placed on scripts won't be removed. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptFunctionState.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptFunctionState.xml index 54a02bf2708..18c3826df89 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptFunctionState.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptFunctionState.xml @@ -10,30 +10,23 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Connects this [VisualScriptFunctionState] to a signal in the given object to automatically resume when it's emitted. - - + Returns whether the function state is valid. - - - - + + Resumes the function to run from the point it was yielded. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptLists.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptLists.xml index 671c427228b..d5bff1341a8 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptLists.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptLists.xml @@ -10,89 +10,65 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an input port to the Visual Script node. - - - - - - - - + + + + Adds an output port to the Visual Script node. - - - - + + Removes an input port from the Visual Script node. - - - - + + Removes an output port from the Visual Script node. - - - - - - + + + Sets the name of an input port. - - - - - - + + + Sets the type of an input port. - - - - - - + + + Sets the name of an output port. - - - - - - + + + Sets the type of an output port. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptNode.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptNode.xml index 82a023f3e42..23574a5ea83 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptNode.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptNode.xml @@ -10,35 +10,28 @@ - - - - + + Returns the default value of a given port. The default value is used when nothing is connected to the port. - - + Returns the [VisualScript] instance the node is bound to. - - + Notify that the node's ports have changed. Usually used in conjunction with [VisualScriptCustomNode] . - - - - - - + + + Change the default value of a given port. diff --git a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptSubCall.xml b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptSubCall.xml index 89a10edde49..374e7d0f35f 100644 --- a/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptSubCall.xml +++ b/modules/visual_script/doc_classes/VisualScriptSubCall.xml @@ -10,10 +10,8 @@ - - - - + + Called by this node. diff --git a/modules/webm/doc_classes/VideoStreamWebm.xml b/modules/webm/doc_classes/VideoStreamWebm.xml index f3e13ba31ae..3b9acfd8733 100644 --- a/modules/webm/doc_classes/VideoStreamWebm.xml +++ b/modules/webm/doc_classes/VideoStreamWebm.xml @@ -12,17 +12,14 @@ - - + Returns the WebM video file handled by this [VideoStreamWebm]. - - - - + + Sets the WebM video file that this [VideoStreamWebm] resource handles. The [code]file[/code] name should have the [code].webm[/code] extension. diff --git a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCDataChannel.xml b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCDataChannel.xml index 3435dda982a..cf5735bab57 100644 --- a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCDataChannel.xml +++ b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCDataChannel.xml @@ -8,88 +8,76 @@ - - + Closes this data channel, notifying the other peer. - - + Returns the number of bytes currently queued to be sent over this channel. - - + Returns the id assigned to this channel during creation (or auto-assigned during negotiation). If the channel is not negotiated out-of-band the id will only be available after the connection is established (will return [code]65535[/code] until then). - - + Returns the label assigned to this channel during creation. - - + Returns the [code]maxPacketLifeTime[/code] value assigned to this channel during creation. Will be [code]65535[/code] if not specified. - - + Returns the [code]maxRetransmits[/code] value assigned to this channel during creation. Will be [code]65535[/code] if not specified. - - + Returns the sub-protocol assigned to this channel during creation. An empty string if not specified. - - + Returns the current state of this channel, see [enum ChannelState]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this channel was created with out-of-band configuration. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this channel was created with ordering enabled (default). - - + Reserved, but not used for now. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the last received packet was transferred as text. See [member write_mode]. diff --git a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCMultiplayerPeer.xml b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCMultiplayerPeer.xml index 26c5bfa6cea..0c4a0d4ea09 100644 --- a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCMultiplayerPeer.xml +++ b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCMultiplayerPeer.xml @@ -12,58 +12,45 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Add a new peer to the mesh with the given [code]peer_id[/code]. The [WebRTCPeerConnection] must be in state [constant WebRTCPeerConnection.STATE_NEW]. Three channels will be created for reliable, unreliable, and ordered transport. The value of [code]unreliable_lifetime[/code] will be passed to the [code]maxPacketLifetime[/code] option when creating unreliable and ordered channels (see [method WebRTCPeerConnection.create_data_channel]). - - + Close all the add peer connections and channels, freeing all resources. - - - - + + Return a dictionary representation of the peer with given [code]peer_id[/code] with three keys. [code]connection[/code] containing the [WebRTCPeerConnection] to this peer, [code]channels[/code] an array of three [WebRTCDataChannel], and [code]connected[/code] a boolean representing if the peer connection is currently connected (all three channels are open). - - + Returns a dictionary which keys are the peer ids and values the peer representation as in [method get_peer]. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if the given [code]peer_id[/code] is in the peers map (it might not be connected though). - - - - - - + + + Initialize the multiplayer peer with the given [code]peer_id[/code] (must be between 1 and 2147483647). If [code]server_compatibilty[/code] is [code]false[/code] (default), the multiplayer peer will be immediately in state [constant MultiplayerPeer.CONNECTION_CONNECTED] and [signal MultiplayerPeer.connection_succeeded] will not be emitted. @@ -71,10 +58,8 @@ - - - - + + Remove the peer with given [code]peer_id[/code] from the mesh. If the peer was connected, and [signal MultiplayerPeer.peer_connected] was emitted for it, then [signal MultiplayerPeer.peer_disconnected] will be emitted. diff --git a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCPeerConnection.xml b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCPeerConnection.xml index 62e524825db..f6f360503f6 100644 --- a/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCPeerConnection.xml +++ b/modules/webrtc/doc_classes/WebRTCPeerConnection.xml @@ -15,33 +15,25 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Add an ice candidate generated by a remote peer (and received over the signaling server). See [signal ice_candidate_created]. - - + Close the peer connection and all data channels associated with it. Note, you cannot reuse this object for a new connection unless you call [method initialize]. - - - - + + - +}" /> Returns a new [WebRTCDataChannel] (or [code]null[/code] on failure) with given [code]label[/code] and optionally configured via the [code]options[/code] dictionary. This method can only be called when the connection is in state [constant STATE_NEW]. There are two ways to create a working data channel: either call [method create_data_channel] on only one of the peer and listen to [signal data_channel_received] on the other, or call [method create_data_channel] on both peers, with the same values, and the [code]negotiated[/code] option set to [code]true[/code]. @@ -63,26 +55,22 @@ - - + Creates a new SDP offer to start a WebRTC connection with a remote peer. At least one [WebRTCDataChannel] must have been created before calling this method. If this functions returns [constant OK], [signal session_description_created] will be called when the session is ready to be sent. - - + Returns the connection state. See [enum ConnectionState]. - - + - +}" /> Re-initialize this peer connection, closing any previously active connection, and going back to state [constant STATE_NEW]. A dictionary of [code]options[/code] can be passed to configure the peer connection. Valid [code]options[/code] are: @@ -103,31 +91,24 @@ - - + Call this method frequently (e.g. in [method Node._process] or [method Node._physics_process]) to properly receive signals. - - - - - - + + + Sets the SDP description of the local peer. This should be called in response to [signal session_description_created]. After calling this function the peer will start emitting [signal ice_candidate_created] (unless an [enum Error] different from [constant OK] is returned). - - - - - - + + + Sets the SDP description of the remote peer. This should be called with the values generated by a remote peer and received over the signaling server. If [code]type[/code] is [code]offer[/code] the peer will emit [signal session_description_created] with the appropriate answer. @@ -137,29 +118,23 @@ - - + Emitted when a new in-band channel is received, i.e. when the channel was created with [code]negotiated: false[/code] (default). The object will be an instance of [WebRTCDataChannel]. You must keep a reference of it or it will be closed automatically. See [method create_data_channel]. - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a new ICE candidate has been created. The three parameters are meant to be passed to the remote peer over the signaling server. - - - - + + Emitted after a successful call to [method create_offer] or [method set_remote_description] (when it generates an answer). The parameters are meant to be passed to [method set_local_description] on this object, and sent to the remote peer over the signaling server. diff --git a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketClient.xml b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketClient.xml index 40c0ad17adb..1549a907b43 100644 --- a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketClient.xml +++ b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketClient.xml @@ -13,16 +13,11 @@ - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Connects to the given URL requesting one of the given [code]protocols[/code] as sub-protocol. If the list empty (default), no sub-protocol will be requested. If [code]true[/code] is passed as [code]gd_mp_api[/code], the client will behave like a network peer for the [MultiplayerAPI], connections to non-Godot servers will not work, and [signal data_received] will not be emitted. @@ -33,26 +28,21 @@ - - - - - - + + + Disconnects this client from the connected host. See [method WebSocketPeer.close] for more information. - - + Return the IP address of the currently connected host. - - + Return the IP port of the currently connected host. @@ -70,8 +60,7 @@ - - + Emitted when the connection to the server is closed. [code]was_clean_close[/code] will be [code]true[/code] if the connection was shutdown cleanly. @@ -82,8 +71,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a connection with the server is established, [code]protocol[/code] will contain the sub-protocol agreed with the server. @@ -95,10 +83,8 @@ - - - - + + Emitted when the server requests a clean close. You should keep polling until you get a [signal connection_closed] signal to achieve the clean close. See [method WebSocketPeer.close] for more details. diff --git a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketMultiplayerPeer.xml b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketMultiplayerPeer.xml index ee1b60f739e..cd41e9a1fb3 100644 --- a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketMultiplayerPeer.xml +++ b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketMultiplayerPeer.xml @@ -10,25 +10,18 @@ - - - - + + Returns the [WebSocketPeer] associated to the given [code]peer_id[/code]. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + Configures the buffer sizes for this WebSocket peer. Default values can be specified in the Project Settings under [code]network/limits[/code]. For server, values are meant per connected peer. The first two parameters define the size and queued packets limits of the input buffer, the last two of the output buffer. @@ -43,8 +36,7 @@ - - + Emitted when a packet is received from a peer. [b]Note:[/b] This signal is only emitted when the client or server is configured to use Godot multiplayer API. diff --git a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketPeer.xml b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketPeer.xml index 51259564166..0e4cc7cfb6d 100644 --- a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketPeer.xml +++ b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketPeer.xml @@ -11,12 +11,9 @@ - - - - - - + + + Closes this WebSocket connection. [code]code[/code] is the status code for the closure (see RFC 6455 section 7.4 for a list of valid status codes). [code]reason[/code] is the human readable reason for closing the connection (can be any UTF-8 string that's smaller than 123 bytes). [b]Note:[/b] To achieve a clean close, you will need to keep polling until either [signal WebSocketClient.connection_closed] or [signal WebSocketServer.client_disconnected] is received. @@ -24,57 +21,48 @@ - - + Returns the IP address of the connected peer. [b]Note:[/b] Not available in the HTML5 export. - - + Returns the remote port of the connected peer. [b]Note:[/b] Not available in the HTML5 export. - - + Gets the current selected write mode. See [enum WriteMode]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if this peer is currently connected. - - - - + + Disable Nagle's algorithm on the underling TCP socket (default). See [method StreamPeerTCP.set_no_delay] for more information. [b]Note:[/b] Not available in the HTML5 export. - - - - + + Sets the socket to use the given [enum WriteMode]. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the last received packet was sent as a text payload. See [enum WriteMode]. diff --git a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketServer.xml b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketServer.xml index 5491f7de152..90182de4c25 100644 --- a/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketServer.xml +++ b/modules/websocket/doc_classes/WebSocketServer.xml @@ -12,61 +12,46 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + Disconnects the peer identified by [code]id[/code] from the server. See [method WebSocketPeer.close] for more information. - - - - + + Returns the IP address of the given peer. - - - - + + Returns the remote port of the given peer. - - - - + + Returns [code]true[/code] if a peer with the given ID is connected. - - + Returns [code]true[/code] if the server is actively listening on a port. - - - - - - - - + + + + Starts listening on the given port. You can specify the desired subprotocols via the "protocols" array. If the list empty (default), no sub-protocol will be requested. @@ -75,8 +60,7 @@ - - + Stops the server and clear its state. @@ -101,40 +85,31 @@ - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a client requests a clean close. You should keep polling until you get a [signal client_disconnected] signal with the same [code]id[/code] to achieve the clean close. See [method WebSocketPeer.close] for more details. - - - - - - + + + Emitted when a new client connects. "protocol" will be the sub-protocol agreed with the client, and "resource_name" will be the resource name of the URI the peer used. "resource_name" is a path (at the very least a single forward slash) and potentially a query string. - - - - + + Emitted when a client disconnects. [code]was_clean_close[/code] will be [code]true[/code] if the connection was shutdown cleanly. - - + Emitted when a new message is received. [b]Note:[/b] This signal is [i]not[/i] emitted when used as high-level multiplayer peer. diff --git a/modules/webxr/doc_classes/WebXRInterface.xml b/modules/webxr/doc_classes/WebXRInterface.xml index 67b2b866f3e..ff7c46bbae1 100644 --- a/modules/webxr/doc_classes/WebXRInterface.xml +++ b/modules/webxr/doc_classes/WebXRInterface.xml @@ -95,10 +95,8 @@ - - - - + + Gets an [XRPositionalTracker] for the given [code]controller_id[/code]. In the context of WebXR, a "controller" can be an advanced VR controller like the Oculus Touch or Index controllers, or even a tap on the screen, a spoken voice command or a button press on the device itself. When a non-traditional controller is used, interpret the position and orientation of the [XRPositionalTracker] as a ray pointing at the object the user wishes to interact with. @@ -112,10 +110,8 @@ - - - - + + Checks if the given [code]session_mode[/code] is supported by the user's browser. Possible values come from [url=https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/XRSessionMode]WebXR's XRSessionMode[/url], including: [code]"immersive-vr"[/code], [code]"immersive-ar"[/code], and [code]"inline"[/code]. @@ -170,24 +166,21 @@ - - + Emitted after one of the "controllers" has finished its "primary action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller. - - + Emitted when one of the "controllers" has finished its "primary action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller. - - + Emitted when one of the "controllers" has started its "primary action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller. @@ -200,8 +193,7 @@ - - + Emitted by [method XRInterface.initialize] if the session fails to start. [code]message[/code] may optionally contain an error message from WebXR, or an empty string if no message is available. @@ -214,33 +206,28 @@ - - - - + + Emitted by [method is_session_supported] to indicate if the given [code]session_mode[/code] is supported or not. - - + Emitted after one of the "controllers" has finished its "primary squeeze action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller. - - + Emitted when one of the "controllers" has finished its "primary squeeze action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller. - - + Emitted when one of the "controllers" has started its "primary squeeze action". Use [method get_controller] to get more information about the controller.